Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Sharp MX 4140-4141-5140-5141 SM
Sharp MX 4140-4141-5140-5141 SM
SERVICE MANUAL
CODE: 00ZMX5141/S4E
MODEL MX-5141N A
CONTENTS
Parts marked with " " are important for maintaining the safety of the set. Be sure to replace these parts with
specified ones for maintaining the safety and performance of the set.
CAUTION
DOUBLE POLE/NEUTRAL FUSING 2) Place of extreme vibrations
(200V series only) It may cause a breakdown.
11-13/16"
(30cm)
11-13/16" 17-23/32"
(30cm) (45cm)
6. Note for handling the drum unit, the Screw kinds and tightening torques
transfer unit, the developing unit Normal screws, set screws (including step screws)
When handling the OPC drum unit, the transfer unit, and the devel- Tightening Tightening Tightening
Screw Material to be
oping unit, strictly observe the following items. diameter fixed
torque torque torque
(N m) (kgf cm) (lbft)
If these items are neglected, a trouble may be generated in the
M2.6 Steel plate 0.8 - 1.0 8 - 10 0.6 - 0.7
copy and print image quality.
M3 Steel plate 1.0 - 1.2 10 - 12 0.7 - 0.9
Drum unit
M4 Steel plate 1.6 - 1.8 16 - 18 1.2 - 1.3
1) Avoid working at a place with strong lights.
2) Do not expose the OPC drum to lights including interior lights Tapping screws (for iron)
for a long time. Tightening Tightening Tightening
Screw Material to be
3) When the OPC drum is removed from the machine, cover it torque torque torque
diameter fixed
with light blocking material. (When using paper, use about 10 (N m) (kgf cm) (lbft)
sheets of paper to cover it.) M3 Steel plate 1.0 - 1.2 10 - 12 0.7 - 0.9
(Plate thickness
4) Be careful not to attach fingerprints, oil, grease, or other for-
0.8mm or above)
eign material on the OPC drum surface.
M4 Steel plate 1.6 - 1.8 16 - 18 1.2 - 1.3
Transfer unit (Plate thickness
1) Be careful not to leave fingerprints, oil, grease, or other foreign 0.8mm or above)
material on the transfer roller, primary transfer belt, and the M3 Steel plate 0.6 - 0.8 6-8 0.4 - 0.6
secondary transfer belt. (Plate thickness
less than 0.8mm)
Developing unit
M4 Steel plate 1.2 - 1.4 12 - 14 0.9 - 1.0
1) Be careful not to leave fingerprints, oil, grease, or other foreign (Plate thickness
material on the developing unit. less than 0.8mm)
1. System diagram
MX-PC12
PLASMACLUSTER ION
GENERATOR
MX-XB16
MOUNTING KIT
MX-4140N MX-4141N
MX-5140N MX-5141N
DIGI TAL FULL COLOR DIGI TAL FULL COLOR
MU LTIFUNCTIONAL SYSTEM MU LTIFUNCTIONAL SYSTEM
MX-TRX2
EXIT TR AY UNIT
MX-FN10 MX-LT10
SADDLE STITCH FINISHER LONG PAPER FEEDING
MX-FN11 MX-RB20 TRAY
FINISHER PAPER PASS UNIT
MX-TU13
EXIT TR AY CABINET
MX-LC11
LARGE CA PACITY TR AY
MX-PNX6A/B/C/D
PUNCH MODULE MX-DE21 MX-DE22 MX-DE23 MX-DS18
MX-FN18 STAND/2000 SHEET S TAND/1x500 SHEET S TAND/2x500 SHEET S TAND
PAPER DR AWER PAPER DR AWER PAPER DR AWER
SADDLE STITCH FINISHER
2. Main Function
MX-4140N MX-5140N MX-4141N MX-5141N
3
MX-4140N A MX-5141N A
Copy STD
Print PCL STD
PS STD
Scan STD
Fax OPT *1
Document Feeder STD RSPF STD DSPF
Exit Tray Cabinet STD/OPT *2
Sharp OSA STD/OPT *2
Key Board OPT STD/OPT *2
Web Browsing OPT STD/OPT *2
Wireless LAN STD *1
Compression PDF OPT STD
Panel (Inch) 10.1
HDD(GB) 320
3. Option list
MX-4140N MX-4141N
Model name Description MX-5140N MX-5141N Remarks
3 MX-4140N A MX-5141N A
― REVERSING SINGLE PASS FEEDER STD ―
Document Feed System
― DUPREX SINGLE PASS FEEDER ― STD
MX-DE22 STAND/500 SHEET PAPER DRAWER OPT OPT
MX-DE23 STAND/2x500 SHEET PAPER DRAWER OPT OPT
MX-DE21 STAND/2000 SHEET PAPER DRAWER OPT OPT
Paper Feed System
MX-DS18 STAND OPT OPT
MX-LC11 LARGE CAPACITY TRAY OPT OPT
MX-LT10 LONG PAPER FEEDING TRAY OPT OPT
MX-TRX2 EXIT TRAY UNIT OPT OPT
MX-TU13 EXIT TRAY CABINET STD/OPT STD/OPT *1
MX-FNX9 FINISHER OPT OPT
MX-PNX1A PUNCH MODULE OPT OPT
MX-PNX1B OPT OPT
For MX-FNX9
MX-PNX1C OPT OPT
MX-PNX1D OPT OPT
MX-FN10 SADDLE STITCH FINISHER (1K) OPT OPT
MX-FN11 FINISHER (4K) OPT OPT
Paper Exit System MX-FN18 SADDLE STITCH FINISHER (4K) OPT OPT
MX-RB20 PAPER PASS UNIT OPT OPT
MX-PNX5A PUNCH MODULE OPT OPT
MX-PNX5B OPT OPT
For MX-FN10
MX-PNX5C OPT OPT
MX-PNX5D OPT OPT
MX-PNX6A PUNCH MODULE OPT OPT
MX-PNX6B OPT OPT For MX-FN11
MX-PNX6C OPT OPT MX-FN18
MX-PNX6D OPT OPT
― PS3 EXPANSION KIT STD STD
Printer Expansion MX-PF10 BARCODE FONT KIT OPT OPT
MX-PUX1 XPS EXPANSION KIT OPT OPT
MX-FX11 FACSIMILE EXPANSION KIT OPT OPT *2
Image Send Expansion AR-SU1 STAMP UNIT OPT OPT
MX-FWX1 INTERNET FAX EXPANSION KIT OPT OPT
MX-EB11 ENHANCED COMPRESSION KIT OPT STD
MX-FR42U DATA SECURITY KIT OPT OPT
MX-FR42 DATA SECURITY KIT OPT OPT
Authentication / Security
MX-EC50 CARD SOLUTION KIT OPT OPT *2
MX-EB12 N MIRRORING KIT OPT OPT
1
1.Basic specifications
A. Engine Specification 41cpm machine 51cpm machine
Paper size Monochr Monochr
Color Color
Photo-conductor OPC (Diameter: Black: 30mm Color (Y/M/C): ome ome
kind 30mm x3 lines) Heavy paper (B4, 8.5" x 9 8 9 8
Copying method Electronic photo (Laser) 14", 8.5" x 13", 8.5" x 13.4",
Developing system Dry, 2-component magnetic brush development 8.5" x 13.5")
Charging system Charged saw-tooth method Heavy paper (A4, 8.5" x 16 15 16 15
Transfer system Intermediate/secondary transfer belt 11", 16K, B5)
Separation system Natural separation method Heavy paper (A4R, 16KR, 12 11 12 11
* Sub separation claw is equipped. 8.5" x 11"R, B5R, 7.25" x
10.5"R)
Cleaning system Counter blade
Heavy paper (A5R, 5.5" x 16 15 16 15
Fusing system Belt method
8.5"R)
Waste toner No toner recycling system / Waste toner bottle
Heavy paper (A3W, 12 x 9 8 9 8
disposal system
18) *1
Toner supply during N/A
Heavy paper (Extra) 9 8 9 8
operation
Heavy paper (Post Card 16 15 16 15
Outer Color Pastel white, natural wave design
HIGH) *2
Heavy paper (Post Card 9 9 9 9
B. Engine speed (ppm) LOW) *2
Tray 1 - 4, LCC
*1: ppm when exiting to the finisher (A3W/12" x 18" cannot exit to
41cpm machine 51cpm machine the center tray)
Paper size Mono- Monochr *2: Switched by the service simulation setting. Postcard is set Low
Color Color
chrome ome
before shipment.
A3, 11" x 17", 8K 19 19 23 23
B4, 8.5" x 14", 8.5" x 13", 22 22 26 26
8.5" x 13.4", 8.5" x 13.5"
C. Printable area
A4, B5, 8.5" x 11", 16K 41 41 51 51
A4R, 16KR, 8.5" x 11"R, 26 26 31 31 A3 Wide * 297 x 420mm 12" x 18" * 279 x 432mm
B5R, 7.25" x10.5"R A3 293 x 413mm 11" x 17" 275 x 425mm
A5R, 5.5" x 8.5"R 29 29 32 32 B4 253 x 357mm 8.5" x 14" 212 x 349mm
Extra 18 18 22 22 A4 206 x 290mm 8.5" x 13.5" 212 x 336mm
Heavy paper (A3, 11" x 17", 10 10 10 10 B5 178 x 250mm 8.5" x 13.4" 212 x 333mm
8K) A5 144 x 203mm 8.5" x 13" 212 x 323mm
Heavy paper (B4, 8.5" x 10 10 10 10 Postcard 96 x 141mm Executive 180 x 260mm
14", 8.5" x 13", 8.5" x 13.4", 8K 266 x 383mm 8.5" x 11" 212 x 272mm
8.5" x 13.5") 16K 191 x 263mm 5.5" x 8.5" 136 x 209mm
Heavy paper (A4, B5, 8.5" x 17 17 17 17 Custom Min: 86mm x 133mm
11", 16K) Max: 297mm x 432mm (Long paper : 1192mm)
Heavy paper (A4R, B5R, 13 13 13 13
8.5" x 11"R, 7.25" x 10.5"R, * The printable area for A3W/12" x 18" must be as large as the
16KR) A3/11" x 17" page dimension (299 x 450mm) by PCL/PS driver.
Heavy paper (A5R, 5.5" x 17 17 17 17
8.5"R) Void area Lead edge: 4mm or less
Image loss Rear edge: 2 mm or more, and 5 mm or less
Heavy paper (Extra) 10 10 10 10
Total of the lead edge and the rear edge: 8mm or less
FR total: 4mm +/- 2mm or less
Manual paper feed
41cpm machine 51cpm machine D. Engine resolution
Paper size Monochr Monochr
Color Color
ome ome
Resolution*1 Copy Writing
A3, 11" x 17", 8K 18 17 21 21 600 x 600dpi 4bit
B4, 8.5" x 14", 8.5" x 13", 21 19 25 23 9,600 (equivalent) x 600dpi
8.5" x 13.4", 8.5" x 13.5" Print Writing
A4, 8.5" x 11", 16K 41 31 51 39 600 x 600dpi
B5 41 34 51 42 9,600 (equivalent) x 600dpi
A4R, 16KR, 8.5" x 11"R 24 21 30 27 1,200 x 1,200dpi
B5R, 7.25" x 10.5"R 24 23 30 28
A5R, 5.5" x 8.5"R 29 29 32 32
A3W, 12" x 18" *1 17 16 21 20
OHP (A4, 8.5" x 11") 16 15 16 15
OHP (A4R, 8.5" x 11"R) 12 11 12 11
Extra 17 16 21 20
Envelope (Monarch, Com- 11 10 11 10
10, DL, C5, Chokei-3,
Chokei-4,Youkei-2,Youkei-
4,
Kakugata-2,Kakugata-3)
Heavy paper (A3, 11 x 17, 9 8 9 8
8K)
MX-5141N SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 1
Gradation *2 Copy Writing Scanner Single: 75-sheet/min. Single: 75-sheet/min.
(256 levels) 600 x 600dpi 4bit (200 x 200dpi, 1bit) (200 x 200dpi, 8bit)
9,600 (equivalent) x 600dpi Double: 75-page/min. Double: 75-page/min.
Print Writing (200 x 200dpi, 1bit) (200 x 200dpi, 8bit)
PCL: Original setup Upward standard (1 to N feeding standard)
600 x 600dpi 1bit direction
600 x 600dpi 4bit Original standard Center standard (Rear one-side standard for
9,600 (equivalent) x 600dpi position random feeding)
1,200 x 1,200dpi 1bit Original transport Sheet-through method
PS: method
600 x 600dpi 1bit Original size Standard size
600 x 600dpi 4bit Inch-1:
9,600 (equivalent) x 600dpi 11" x 17", 8.5" x 14", 8.5" x 11", 8.5" x 11"R,
1,200 x 1,200dpi 1bit 5.5" x 8.5", A3, A4
Inch-2:
*1: Resolution: 600dpi (default)
11" x 17", 8.5" x 13", 8.5" x 11", 8.5" x11"R, 5.5" x
*2: The Dither and Error Diffusion methods using 8 bit input will be 8.5", A3, A4
performed. Inch-3:
11" x 17", 8.5" x 13.4", 8.5" x 11", 8.5" x 11"R, 5.5" x
8.5", A3, A4
E. Scanner section AB-1:
11" x 17", 8.5" x 14", 8.5" x 11", A3, B4, A4, A4R,
(1) Resolution/Gradation B5, B5R, A5
AB-2:
Scanning Monochrome Color 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13", 8.5" x 11", A3, B4, A4, A4R,
Resolution (dpi) Platen 600 x 600dpi 600 x 600dpi B5, B5R, A5
600 x 400dpi (default) AB-3:
DSPF 600 x 600dpi 600 x 600dpi 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13", 8.5" x 11", A3, B4, A4, A4R,
600 x 400dpi (default) A5, 8K, 16K, 16KR
RSPF 600 x 600dpi (default) 600 x 600dpi AB-4:
Exposure lamp White LED 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13.4", 8.5" x 11", A3, B4, A4, A4R,
B5, B5R, A5
Reading gradation 10bit
AB-5:
Output gradation BW: 1bit
11" x 17", 8.5" x 13.5", 8.5" x 11", A3, B4, A4, A4R,
Gray scale: 8bit
B5, B5R, A5
Full Color: each color RGB 8bit
Long paper 1000 mm (Monochrome binary only)
(2) Document table Mix paper feed Enabled
(Same series,
same width paper)
Type Document table fixed system (Flat bed)
Random feeding Enabled
Scanning area 297 x 432mm
(feeding of different Only the following combinations of 2 size types are
Original standard Left top reference types / different allowed:
position widths) A3 and B4; B4 and A4R; A4 and B5; B5 and A5; and
Detection Yes 11-inch and 8.5-inch. AMS available.
Detection size Automatic detection (One type of detection unit to Original copy Single:
be switched for software destination) weight Thin paper: 9 - 13 lb bond (35 - 49 g/m2)
Dehumidifying Supplied as a service parts Plain paper: 13 - 34 lb bond (50 - 128 g/m2)
heater (Scanner * Thin paper mode (monochrome: 71
section) pages/minute / color: 46 pages/minute
(A4, 8.5" x 11") is set up for the thin paper.
F. Document feeder Duplex: 13 - 34 lb bond (50 - 128 g/m2)
Max. loading Max. 150 sheets (21lbs Bond, 80g/m2), or Max.
(1) DSPF capacity of height: 50/64 inch, 19.5mm or less
documents
Type DSPF (Duplex single pass feeder) Un-acceptable OHP, second original paper, tracing paper, carbon
Scan speed Monochrome Color (A4/8.5" x 11") originals for paper, thermal paper, paper with wrinkles, folds, or
(A4/8.5" x 11") feeding. breakage, pasted paper, cutout document,
Copy Single: Single: document printed with ink ribbon, documents with
75-sheet/min. 51-sheet/min. perforation other than 2- or 3-holes (Perforated
(600 x 400dpi, 4bit) (600 x 600dpi, 4bit) document by punch unit is allowed.)
51-sheet/min. Double: Detection Yes
(600 x 600dpi, 4bit) 51-page/min. Paper detection Auto detection (Refer to “Original size“)
Double: (600 x 600dpi, 4bit) size
75-page/min. Paper feeding Right hand feeding
(600 x 400dpi, 4bit) direction
51-page/min. Finish stamp Option
(600 x 600dpi, 4bit)
FAX Single: 75-sheet/min. NA
(200 x 200dpi, 1bit)
Double: 75-page/min.
(200 x 200dpi, 1bit)
Internet FAX Single: 75-sheet/min. NA
(200 x 200dpi, 1bit)
Double: 75-page/min.
(200 x 200dpi, 1bit)
MX-5141N SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 2
(2) RSPF Un-acceptable OHP, second original paper, tracing paper, carbon
originals for paper, thermal paper, paper with wrinkles, folds, or
feeding. breakage, pasted paper, cutout document,
Type RSPF (Reversing single pass feeder) document printed with ink ribbon, documents with
Scan speed Monochrome Color (A4/8.5" x 11") perforation other than 2- or 3-holes (Perforated
(A4/8.5" x 11") document by punch unit is allowed.)
Copy Single: Single: Detection Yes
51-sheet/min. 51-sheet/min. Paper detection Auto detection (Refer to “Original size“)
(600 x 600dpi, 4bit) (600 x 600dpi, 4bit) size
Double: Double: Paper feeding Right hand feeding
20-page/min. 20-page/min. direction
(600 x 600dpi, 4bit) (600 x 600dpi, 4bit)
Finish stamp Option
FAX Single: 51-sheet/min. NA
(200 x 200dpi, 1bit)
Double: 20-page/min.
G. Paper feed section
(200 x 200dpi, 1bit)
(1) Basic specifications
Internet FAX Single: 51-sheet/min. NA
(200 x 200dpi, 1bit)
Double: 20-page/min. Type Standard 2-stage paper feed tray + multi manual paper feed
(200 x 200dpi, 1bit) tray
Scanner Single: 51-sheet/min. Single: 51-sheet/min. Full option 2-stage paper feed tray (Standard) + large capacity
(200 x 200dpi, 1bit) (200 x 200dpi, 8bit) desk + multi manual paper feed tray + large
Double: 20-page/min. Double: 20-page/min. capacity tray
(200 x 200dpi, 1bit) (200 x 200dpi, 8bit) Dehumidifying Service parts (Supported by kit)
Original setup Upward standard (1 to N feeding standard) heater
direction
Original standard Center standard (Rear one-side standard for Manual paper
position random feeding) Tray Tray 1 Tray 2
feed tray
Original transport Sheet-through method Paper capacity 500 sheets 500 sheets 100 sheets
method Plain paper (80g/m2)
Original size Standard size Paper size Refer to “Size of paper which can be fed“.
Inch-1: Paper size detection Yes
11" x 17", 8.5" x 14", 8.5" x 11", 8.5" x 11"R,
Paper type settings Yes
5.5" x 8.5", A3, A4
Changing of paper Auto detection
Inch-2:
size
11" x 17", 8.5" x 13", 8.5" x 11", 8.5" x 11"R,
5.5" x 8.5", A3, A4 Default Paper Size A4 (8.5" x 11") A3 (11” x 17”) -
Inch-3: Setting
11" x 17", 8.5" x 13.4", 8.5" x 11", 8.5" x 11"R, 5.5" x Paper remaining Paper empty and 3 steps Only detection
8.5", A3, A4 quantity detection (100%, 67%, 33%, and paper of paper empty
AB-1: empty)
11" x 17", 8.5" x 14", 8.5" x 11", A3, B4, A4, A4R,
B5, B5R, A5 (2) Extra paper capacity
AB-2:
11" x 17", 8.5" x 13", 8.5" x 11", A3, B4, A4, A4R, Paper type Paper feed tray Manual feed tray
B5, B5R, A5 Postcard NA 20 sheets
AB-3: Envelope NA 20 sheets
11" x 17", 8.5" x 13", 8.5" x 11", A3, B4, A4, A4R, OHP NA 20 sheets
A5, 8K, 16K, 16KR
106-256g/m2:40 sheets
AB-4: Heavy paper 200 sheets
257-300g/m2:20 sheets
11" x 17", 8.5" x 13.4", 8.5" x 11", A3, B4, A4, A4R,
Tab paper NA 20 sheets
B5, B5R, A5
AB-5: Glossy paper NA 1 sheet
11" x 17", 8.5" x 13.5", 8.5" x 11", A3, B4, A4, A4R, Others NA 1 sheet
B5, B5R, A5
Long paper 1000 mm (Monochrome binary only)
Mix paper feed Enabled
(Same series,
same width paper)
Random feeding Enabled
(feeding of different Only the following combinations of 2 size types are
types / different allowed:
widths) A3 and B4; B4 and A4R; A4 and B5; B5 and A5; and
11-inch and 8.5-inch. AMS available. 2-sided
scanning is disabled during random feeding.
Original copy Single:
weight Thin paper: 9 - 13 lb bond (35 - 49 g/m2)
Plain paper: 13 - 32 lb bond (50 - 128 g/m2)
* Thin paper mode (29 pages/minute (A4,
8.5" x 11") is set up for the thin paper.
Duplex: 13 - 28 lb bond (50 - 105 g/m2)
Max. loading Max. 100 sheets (21lbs Bond, 80g/m2), or Max.
capacity of height: 1/2 inch, 13mm or less
documents
MX-5141N SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 3
(3) Size of paper which can be fed
MX-5141N SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 4
*1: Japan only Paper exit section Duple Main unit center Right
*2:JCustom size to be set by software switch. (Default: not effec- x tray exit tray
tive) Exit Offset
Tray
*3: 148mm/5_7/8inch when output to inner finisher.
JP Kaku-2 240x332 Yes
*4: Long Paper (from Manual Bypass): Max.1200mm by simulation
JP Kaku-3 216x277 Yes
setting.
Custom*2 Yes Yes Yes
*5: Tab width : A4 (12-20mm), 8.5x11(6.1-17mm) 182m
140mm/ 140mm/
m/
Min X 5_1/ - 5_1/
H. Paper exit section 7_1/
2inch 2inch
4inch
(1) Exit Capacity 432m
m/ 457mm/ 432mm /
Max X
17inc 18inch 17inch
Exit location Center Right side (option)
Pa Custom h
Exit Capacity 400 sheets (A4/8.5" x 100 sheets (A4/8.5" x 11": per range 132m
11": 80g/m3) 80g/m3) siz 90mm/ 90mm/
m/
e Min Y 3_5/ 3_5/
(2) Size of paper which can be discharged 5_1/
8inch 8inch
4inch
297m
Paper exit section Duple Main unit center Right 297mm/ 297mm/
m/
x tray exit tray Max Y 11_5/ 11_5/
11_5/
Exit Offset 8inch 8inch
8inch
Tray
width:90
12x18 to 297mm
305x457 - Yes - Yes Long
(A3W) length:43 - Yes - -
Ledger(11 Paper*3
297x432 Yes Yes Yes Yes 3 to
x17) 1200mm
Legal(8.5x 13-16 lb.
216x356 Yes Yes Yes Yes
14) Thin Paper bond(55- - Yes Yes Yes
Asian 59g/m2)
Legal 216x343 Yes Yes Yes Yes 16-28 lb.
(8.5x13.5) bond(60- Yes Yes Yes Yes
Mexican 105g/m2)
Legal 216x340 Yes Yes Yes Yes Recycled
(8.5x13.4) Yes Yes Yes Yes
Paper
Foolscap( Color
216x330 Yes Yes Yes Yes Plain Yes Yes Yes Yes
8.5x13) Paper
Letter(8.5x Paper
297x216 Yes Yes Yes Yes Letter
11) Yes Yes Yes Yes
head
Letter- Pre
R(8.5x11R 216x279 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
printed
) Pre
Exective-R Yes Yes Yes Yes
Punched
(7.25x10.5 184x266 - Yes Yes Yes 28 lb.
R) bond - 80
Pa Pa
Incoice-R lb. Yes Yes Yes Yes
per 140x216 Yes Yes Yes Yes per
(5.5x8.5R) cover(106
siz typ
A3 297x420 Yes Yes Yes Yes -220g/m2)
e e
B4 257x364 Yes Yes Yes Yes 80
A4 297x210 Yes Yes Yes Yes lb.cover-
A4R 210x297 Yes Yes Yes Yes 140
Heavy - Yes Yes Yes
B5 257x182 Yes Yes Yes Yes lb.index(2
Paper
B5R 182x257 Yes Yes Yes Yes 21-256g/
m2)
A5R 148x210 Yes Yes Yes Yes
140
8K 270x390 Yes Yes Yes Yes
lb.index -
16K 270x195 Yes Yes Yes Yes
110
16KR 195x270 Yes Yes Yes Yes - Yes Yes -
lb.cover(2
Postcard 57-300g/
100x148 - Yes Yes Yes
*1 m2)
Monarch 98x191 Yes Envelope - Yes - -
COM10 105x241 Yes OHP Transparency - Yes - Yes
DL 110x220 Yes Label - Yes - Yes
C5 229x162 Yes Tab Paper *4 - Yes - -
JP Chokei- Glossy Paper - Yes Yes -
120x235 Yes
3 User setting 1-7 Yes Yes Yes Yes
JP Chokei-
90x205 Yes
4 *1: Japan only
JP Yokei-2 114x162 Yes
*2: Custom size to be set by software switch. (Default: not effective)
JP Yokei-4 105x235 Yes
*3: Long Paper (from Manual Bypass): Max.1200mm by simulation
setting.
*4: Tab width : A4 (12-20mm), 8.5x11(6.1-17mm)
MX-5141N SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 5
1 ‘13/Oct
L. Warm-up time
MX-5141N SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 6
3. Printer function
A. Printer driver supported OS
OS Custom PCL6 Custom PCL5c Custom PS PPD PC-FAX
Windows 98/Me No No No No No
NT 4.0 SP5 or later No No No No No
2000 No No No No No
XP CD-ROM No CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
XP (x 64) CD-ROM No CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Server 2003 CD-ROM No CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Server 2003 (x 64) CD-ROM No CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Vista CD-ROM No CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Vista (x 64) CD-ROM No CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Server 2008 CD-ROM No CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Server 2008 (x 64) CD-ROM No CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Windows 7 CD-ROM No CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Windows 7 (x 64) CD-ROM No CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Windows 8 CD-ROM No CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Windows 8 (x 64) CD-ROM No CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Server 2012 (x 64) CD-ROM No CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Mac 9.0-9.2.2 No No No No No
X 10.2 No No No No No
X 10.3 No No No No No
X 10.4 No No No CD-ROM No
X 10.5 No No No CD-ROM No
X 10.6 No No No CD-ROM No
X 10.7 No No No CD-ROM No
X 10.8 No No No CD-ROM No
B. PDL emulation/Font
MX-5141N SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 7
[4] Image send function 5. Power consumption
A. Mode A. Power consumption
100 V 200 V
Mode Sub mode
Maximum rated power 1.92 kW 1.84 kW
Scanner E-mail Consumption*1
FTP server Network/Fax waiting 1W -
Shared folder (SMB) power consumption Condition:
Desktop - No USB port
Data input (metadata) E-mail - The network protocol is
FTP server TCP/IP only.
Shared folder (SMB) - The Ethernet connection
Desktop partner supports 10M/
100MBASE or 10M/100M/
1000MBASE and auto
2. Support system negotiation setting.
* Exclude the case of use
Fax and Network at once
Mode Corresponding server / Protocol
Moving time to pre-heat 1 minute (default)
SMTP/SMTP-SSL
mode
FTP (TCP/IP)/FTPS
Recovery time from pre- 10 sec.
Scanner SMB heat mode
HTTP/HTTPS (Supported protocol of Moving time to sleep 1 minutes (default)/16 minute (Europe)
Sharp OSA) mode * Printer mode: 10sec.(default)
POP3 server Recovery time from 41cpm machine: 28 sec. or less
Internet Fax/ Direct SMTP SMTP server sleep mode 51cpm machine: 30 sec. or less
ESMTP server
*1: Power switch ON, dehumidity heater OFF
C. Support image
6. Dimensions and Weight
Mode Format / Compression Item
method DSPF model RSPF model
TIFF/XPS Outer dimension W648 x D764 x W648 x D764 x
File format (Mono 2
PDF/PDF/A (Included operation H960mm H954mm
gradation)
Encrypted PDF panel) W972 x D764 x H966 W972 x D764 x
Color TIFF/JPEG (When the right paper H952mm
PDF/PDF/A exit tray is extended.) (When the right paper
File format (Color/ Encrypted PDF exit tray is extended.)
Grayscale) High compression PDF (with Dimension occupied W987 x D761mm W982 x D761mm
ACRE installed) by the machine
(When the bypass
Scanner XPS
tray is extended)
Non-compression
Weight Approx.125kg (41cpm) Approx.119kg
Compression method G3 (1-dimentional)= MH
Main Unit (including Approx.126kg (51cpm)
(Mono 2 gradation) (Modified Huffman)
photoreceptor / not
G4= MMR (Modified MR) including
JPEG (High/Middle/Low) consumables)
Compression method High compression PDF (with
(Color/ Grayscale) ACRE installed)
Black Letter Emphasis
7. Ambient conditions
Internet File format (Monochrome) TIFF-FX(TIFF-F / TIFF-S)
Fax G3 (1-dimentional)= MH (Humidity)
Direct (Modified Huffman)
Compression method 85%
SMTP
(Monochrome)
G4 = MMR (Modified MR)
60%
Compression method
Fax MH/ MR/ MMR/JBIG AREA 1
(Monochrome)
File per page (Setting of the number of pages available)
Item Contents
Total: 2000 keys *It’s available to
10 °C 30 °C 35 °C (T
Max. number of registrations register 2,000 items about the address
scan to FTP / Desktop/ SMB.
Number of addresses can be
Max. 500 addresses
registered in one Group key
Number of addresses can be
6000 addresses (included in the 2000
registered by inputting directly
keys)
in Group keys
Address book registration in
Yes
the sending history screen
MX-5141N SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 8
2 ‘13/Nov
MX-5141N
[3] CONSUMABLE PARTS Service Manual
B. Brazil
Item Content Life Model Name Remarks
Toner Cartridge (Black) Toner Cartridge (Black) with IC Chip x1 40K MX-51BT-BA * Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
(Reference: 33.3K for A4/Letter 6%)
Toner Cartridge (Cyan) Toner Cartridge (Cyan) with IC Chip x1 18K MX-51BT-CA * Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
Toner Cartridge (Magenta) Toner Cartridge (Magenta) with IC Chip x1 18K MX-51BT-MA * Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
Toner Cartridge (Yellow) Toner Cartridge (Yellow) with IC Chip x1 18K MX-51BT-YA * Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
Developer (Black) Developer (Black) x1 840K MX-51NV-BA * Standard Printable number
Developer Developer x1 Rotation MX-51NV-SA BK: 170K
(Cyan/Magenta/Yellow (Cyan/Magenta/Yellow (3 colors / set)) CL: 140K
(3 colors/set))
Drum OPC Drum x1 MX-31NRSA Maximum Printable number
Drum Unit OPC Drum Unit (Process unit + OPC Drum) x1 MX-51NU-SA BK: 200K
Color identification seal (B/C/M/Y) x 1 each x1 CL: 160K
Charger cleaner rubber x1
D. Asia/Hong Kong
Item Content Life Model Name Remarks
Toner Cartridge (Black) Toner Cartridge (Black) with IC Chip x1 40K MX-51AT-BA * Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
(Reference: 33.3K for A4/Letter 6%)
Toner Cartridge (Cyan) Toner Cartridge (Cyan) with IC Chip x1 18K MX-51AT-CA * Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
Toner Cartridge (Magenta) Toner Cartridge (Magenta) with IC Chip x1 18K MX-51AT-MA * Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
Toner Cartridge (Yellow) Toner Cartridge (Yellow) with IC Chip x1 18K MX-51AT-YA * Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
Developer (Black) Developer (Black) x1 840K MX-51AV-BA * Standard Printable number
Developer Developer x1 Rotation MX-51AV-SA BK: 170K
(Cyan/Magenta/Yellow (Cyan/Magenta/Yellow (3 colors / set)) CL: 140K
(3 colors/set))
Drum OPC Drum x1 MX-31ARSA Maximum Printable number
Drum Unit OPC Drum Unit (Process unit + OPC Drum) x1 MX-51AU-SA BK: 200K
Color identification seal (B/C/M/Y) x 1 each x1 CL: 160K
Charger cleaner rubber x1
E. Middle East/Taiwan/Africa/Israel/Philippines
Item Content Life Model Name Remarks
Toner Cartridge (Black) Toner Cartridge (Black) with IC Chip x1 40K MX-51FT-BA * Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
(Reference: 33.3K for A4/Letter 6%)
Toner Cartridge (Cyan) Toner Cartridge (Cyan) with IC Chip x1 18K MX-51FT-CA * Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
Toner Cartridge (Magenta) Toner Cartridge (Magenta) with IC Chip x1 18K MX-51FT-MA * Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
Toner Cartridge (Yellow) Toner Cartridge (Yellow) with IC Chip x1 18K MX-51FT-YA * Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
Developer (Black) Developer (Black) x1 840K MX-51FV-BA * Standard Printable number
Developer Developer x1 Rotation MX-51FV-SA BK: 170K
(Cyan/Magenta/Yellow (Cyan/Magenta/Yellow (3 colors / set)) CL: 140K
(3 colors/set))
Drum OPC Drum x1 MX-31FRSA Maximum Printable number
Drum Unit OPC Drum Unit (Process unit + OPC Drum) x1 MX-51FU-SA BK: 200K
Color identification seal (B/C/M/Y) x 1 each x1 CL: 160K
Charger cleaner rubber x1
Quantity in
Model
Item Content Life collective Remarks
name
package
Staple cartridge MX-SCX1 Staple cartridge x3 5000 times 20 For MX-FNX9/FN10
x3
Finish stamp cartridge AR-SV1 Finish stamp cartridge x2 --- 20
Primary transfer belt unit MX-510U1 Primary transfer belt unit (For servicing rotation) x1 --- 1
Secondary transfer belt unit MX-410U2 Secondary transfer belt unit (For servicing rotation) x1 --- 1
Fusing unit (41/51cpm MX-511FU1 Fusing unit (For servicing rotation) x1 --- 1
machine)
B. Europe/UK/Australia/New Zealand/Korea
Quantity in
Model
Item Content Life collective Remarks
name
package
2 Fusing belt kit MX-361FB Fusing belt x1 300K 10
Meandering suppress collar x2
Pressure roller kit MX-510LH Fusing roller x1 300K 10
Pressure roller x1
Web cleaning kit MX-510WB Web roller x1 300K 10
Web guide shaft x2
Web pressure roller x1
Web pressure roller bearing x2
Primary transfer belt kit MX-510B1 Primary transfer belt x1 300K 10
Primary transfer blade kit MX-510TL Primary transfer blade x1 300K 10
PTC kit MX-510CU PTC unit x1 300K 10
Secondary transfer belt kit MX-310B2 Secondary transfer belt x1 300K 10
Filter kit MX-C31FL Ozone filter x1 300K 10
Toner collection container MX-510HB Toner collection container (with LSU cleaner x 3) x1 50K 5 5% coverage for each
color; 25% color ratio
and 50K life time
Main charger kit MX-510MK Main charger unit x1 Drum 840K 10
Drum cleaning blade x1 rotation
Cleaning gum P2 x1
Staple cartridge AR-SC2 Staple cartridge x3 5000 times 20 For MX-FN11/FN18
x3
Staple cartridge AR-SC3 Staple cartridge x3 2000 times 40 For MX-FN10/FN18
x3
Staple cartridge MX-SCX1 Staple cartridge x3 5000 times 20 For MX-FNX9/FN10
x3
Finish stamp cartridge AR-SV1 Finish stamp cartridge x2 --- 20
Primary transfer belt unit MX-510U1 Primary transfer belt unit (For servicing rotation) x1 --- 1
Secondary transfer belt unit MX-410U2 Secondary transfer belt unit (For servicing rotation) x1 --- 1
Fusing unit (41/51cpm MX-511FU Fusing unit (For servicing rotation) x1 --- 1
machine)
C. Asia/Middle East/Agency
Quantity in
Model
Item Content Life collective Remarks
name
package
2 Fusing belt kit MX-361FB Fusing belt x1 300K 10
Meandering suppress collar x2
Pressure roller kit MX-510LH Fusing roller x1 300K 10
Pressure roller x1
Web cleaning kit MX-510WB Web roller x1 300K 10
Web guide shaft x2
Web pressure roller x1
Web pressure roller bearing x2
Primary transfer belt kit MX-510B1 Primary transfer belt x1 300K 10
Primary transfer blade kit MX-510TL Primary transfer blade x1 300K 10
PTC kit MX-510CU PTC unit x1 300K 10
Secondary transfer belt kit MX-510B2 Secondary transfer belt x1 300K 10
Filter kit MX-C31FL Ozone filter x1 300K 10
Toner collection container MX-510HB Toner collection container (with LSU cleaner x 3) x1 50K 5 5% coverage for each
color; 25% color ratio
and 50K life time
Main charger kit MX-510MK Main charger unit x1 Drum 840K 10
Drum cleaning blade x1 rotation
Cleaning gum P2 x1
Staple cartridge AR-SC2 Staple cartridge x3 5000 times 20 For MX-FN11/FN18
x3
Staple cartridge AR-SC3 Staple cartridge x3 2000 times 40 For MX-FN10/FN18
x3
Staple cartridge MX-SCX1 Staple cartridge x3 5000 times 20 For MX-FNX9/FN10
x3
Finish stamp cartridge AR-SV1 Finish stamp cartridge x2 --- 20
Primary transfer belt unit MX-510U1 Primary transfer belt unit (For servicing rotation) x1 --- 1
Secondary transfer belt unit MX-410U2 Secondary transfer belt unit (For servicing rotation) x1 --- 1
Fusing unit (41/51cpm MX-511FU Fusing unit (For servicing rotation) x1 --- 1
machine)
D. Hong Kong
Quantity in
Model
Item Content Life collective Remarks
name
package
Fusing belt kit MX-361FB Fusing belt x1 300K 10
2
Meandering suppress collar x2
Pressure roller kit MX-510LH Fusing roller x1 300K 10
Pressure roller x1
Web cleaning kit MX-510WB Web roller x1 300K 10
Web guide shaft x2
Web pressure roller x1
Web pressure roller bearing x2
Primary transfer belt kit MX-510B1 Primary transfer belt x1 300K 10
Primary transfer blade kit MX-510TL Primary transfer blade x1 300K 10
PTC kit MX-510CU PTC unit x1 300K 10
Secondary transfer belt kit MX-510B2 Secondary transfer belt x1 300K 10
Filter kit MX-C31FL Ozone filter x1 300K 10
Toner collection container MX-510HB Toner collection container (with LSU cleaner x 3) x1 50K 5 5% coverage for each
color; 25% color ratio
and 50K life time
Main charger kit MX-510MK Main charger unit x1 Drum 840K 10
Drum cleaning blade x1 rotation
Cleaning gum P2 x1
Staple cartridge AR-SC2 Staple cartridge x3 5000 times 20 For MX-FN11/FN18
x3
Staple cartridge AR-SC3 Staple cartridge x3 2000 times 40 For MX-FN10/FN18
x3
Staple cartridge MX-SCX1 Staple cartridge x3 5000 times 20 For MX-FNX9/FN10
x3
Finish stamp cartridge AR-SV1 Finish stamp cartridge x2 --- 20
Primary transfer belt unit MX-510U1 Primary transfer belt unit (For servicing rotation) x1 --- 1
Secondary transfer belt unit MX-410U2 Secondary transfer belt unit (For servicing rotation) x1 --- 1
Fusing unit (41/51cpm MX-511FU Fusing unit (For servicing rotation) x1 --- 1
machine)
㻽㼡㼍㼚㼠㼕㼠㼥
Average
Xa'
Volume(K) at 840K Rotation
㻽㼡㼍㼚㼠㼕㼠㼥
Standard printable quantity
Xa Xb
Volume(K) at 840K Rotation
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
The lot number is of 10 digits. Each digit indicates the content as
follows.
The number is printed on the flange on the front side.
1: Number
: Unit code/Model name
For this model, this digit is 2.
2: Alphabet : Color code (Black: BK /Cyan: CY /Magenta: MA /Yellow: YE)
Indicates the model conformity code. : Destination
3: Number : Skating
Indicates the end digit of the production year.
: Production place
4: Number or X, Y, Z
Indicates the production month. : Production date (YYYYMMDD)
X stands for October, Y November, and Z December. : Serial number
5/6: Number : Version number
Indicates the day of the production date.
X stands for October, Y November, and Z December.
7: Number
Indicates the day of the month of packing. 5. Environmental conditions
X stands for October, Y November, and Z December.
8/9: Number
Indicates the day of the packing date. (UMIDITY 2(
10: Alphabet
Indicates the production factory.
B. Developer
BK
C. M .Y
# # #
4EMPERATURE
1: Alphabet
Indicates the production factory.
2: Number
Indicates the production year.
3/4: Number
Indicates the production month.
5/6: Number
Indicates the production day.
7: Hyphen
8: Number
Indicates the production lot.
Keyboard*1
Automatic
document feeder
Punch module*2
Bypass tray
Front cover
Paper pass unit*2
Tray 5 (when a large capacity
tray is installed)*2
Tray 1
Tray 2
Tray 3 (when a stand/1x500/2x500
sheet paper drawer is installed)*2
Tray 4 (when a stand/2x500 sheet
paper drawer is installed)*2
Tray 4
(when a stand/2000 sheet paper drawer is installed)*2
*1 It is optional
*2 Optional
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(1)
(3) (4) (2)
(5)
(2)Detector
3#/6
30%$
30,3
300$
300$ 302$-$ 345$
30,3
34,$
3073
30/$
300$ 30%$
3/#$ 300$
3,#/6
300$
SPFFAN
SPFM
STRC
SPFC SPUM
STRRC SPOM
SRRC SLUM
3
1
2
DSPF COPY LAMP
LUMP
5 4 14 2 3 1
15 7 6 8 9 10 11 12 13
(2)Detector
SCOV
SPPD2 SPPD1 SPLS2
SPED SPWS SPLS1
SOCD
SPPD3 SPPD4
SPFM
SPM
SRRC
STMPS SRVC
SPRS
OCSW
MHPS
TFD3
TFD2
HPOS
POD3
POD2
POD1
APPD1 PRTPD
HLPCD
TH_US_IN
WEBEND
TH_UM_IN
TH_LM_IN DSW_ADU
1TUD_CL
1TUD_K
DHPD_CL REGS_F
DHPD_Y DHPD_M DHPD_C DHPD_K REGS_R
APPD2
TCS_Y TCS_M TCS_C TCS_K MPED MPLD
PPD2
MTOP1
MPWD MTOP2
PPD1 MPFD
TH_M/HUD_M
CLUD1 CPFD1
CPED1
CSS1
CSS11 DSW_C
CSS12
CSS13 CSPD1
CSS14
CLUD2 CPFD2
CSS2 CPED2
CSS21
CSS22
CSS23 CSPD2
CSS24
PWRSW
DSW-R
MSW
DSW-F
1TNFD
!$5'3
-05#
0#33
-0&3
-0'3
,3533?"
452#?2
452#
#05#
#0,#
#0&#
#05#
#0,#
02-
/3-
!$5-?5
0/-
0'- &5-
7%"-
74.-
-)-
4.-?9
0&- 4.-?-
(0&- 4.-?#
4.-?+
#,5- $-?9
$6-?+
$6-?#,
!$5-?, #0&- $-?# $-?-
#,5- $-?+
"4- 22-
35 34 32 33
36
37
25
24
26
27
39
40
38
11
10
28
29
1
3
2
20
22
21
23 31
30
5 19
17
4 18
6
15
16
8 14
41
7 42
12
13
9
CL
CCFT
2 1
HL_UM/US/UW
HL_LM
0/&-?
0/&-?
0#3&-
0#3&- 2#&-
&5&-
0#3&-
##&-
-&0&-
03&-
03&-
,35&-
-&0&- /:&-
TS US
TS UM
TS LM
10
13
15
11
16
8 6
7
1 12 9
2
3 14
4
5
1. General
Each adjustment item in the adjustment item list is associated with Unnecessary adjustments can be omitted. Even in this case, how-
a specific Job number. Perform the adjustment procedures in the ever, the sequence from the smallest to the greatest Job number
sequence of Job numbers from the smallest to the greatest. must be observed.
However, there is no need to perform all the adjustment items. Per- If the above precaution should be neglected, the adjustment would
form only the necessary adjustments according to the need. not complete normally or trouble may occur.
MM
A
MM
MM
MM
2㨪3mm
MM
5) Measure the distance between the marking position and posi-
MM
tion A of the developing unit frame, and check that it is 37.8 +/-
0.5mm.
If the distance is not within the above range, adjust the devel-
oping roller main pole position in the following procedures.
MM
MM
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$8720$7,&'(9(/23(5$'-8670(17
$7'(9($'-B/B. $7'(9(92B0B.
$7'(9($'-B/B& $7'(9(92B0B&
$7'(9($'-B/B0 $7'(9(92B0B0
$7'(9($'-B/B< $7'(9(92B0B<
$7'(9($'-B0B.
$7'(9($'-B0B&
$7'(9($'-B0B0
$7'(9($'-B0B<
EXECUTE
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$8720$7,&'(9(/23(5$'-8670(17
$7'(9($'-B/B. $7'(9(92B0B.
$7'(9($'-B/B& $7'(9(92B0B&
$7'(9($'-B/B0 $7'(9(92B0B0
$7'(9($'-B/B< $7'(9(92B0B<
$7'(9($'-B0B.
$7'(9($'-B0B&
$7'(9($'-B0B0
$7'(9($'-B0B<
$7'(9(92B/B.
$7'(9(92B/B&
$7'(9(92B/B0
$7'(9(92B/B<
. & 0 < (;(&87(
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$8720$7,&'(9(/23(5$'-8670(17
$7'(9($'-B/B. $7'(9(92B0B.
$7'(9($'-B/B& $7'(9(92B0B&
$7'(9($'-B/B0 $7'(9(92B0B0
$7'(9($'-B/B< $7'(9(92B0B<
$7'(9($'-B0B.
$7'(9($'-B0B&
$7'(9($'-B0B0
$7'(9($'-B0B<
$7'(9(92B/B.
$7'(9(92B/B&
$7'(9(92B/B0
$7'(9(92B/B<
. & 0 < (;(&87(
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$8720$7,&'(9(/23(5$'-8670(17
7&'B.(((/
7&'B&
7&'B0(((/
7&'B<
7&9B.(((/
7&9B&(((/
7&9B0(((/
7&9B<(((/
Error
Error name Detail of error
display
EE-EL EL abnormality Sensor output level: 1.5V or below. If not,
Control voltage: 8.0V or above.
EE-EU EU abnormality Sensor output level: 3.45V or above. If not,
Control voltage: 2.0V or below.
EE-EC EC abnormality Sensor output level: other than 2.5V +/- 0.2V
NOTE:
1) When replacing developer, always replace all the three colors
of Yellow, Magenta, and Cyan.
If only one color is replaced, color balance may be adversely
affected. Black developer can be replaced individually.
2) When not replacing the developer, do not execute SIM25-2.
NOTE: During execution of this adjustment, do not insert the toner
cartridge.
10-key EXECUTE
EXECUTE
or after 30 sec.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
0+9*5,'6(77,1*$1'287387
$˖ ˖0,''/(ǂ63(('ǂ*%B.
$˖ %˖ ˖0,''/(ǂ63(('ǂ*%B&
2) Select an output mode to be adjusted with the mode key and the scroll key.
3) Enter the adjustment value (specified value) of the middle speed mode and press [OK] key.
Remark: When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the voltage entered in the proce-
Normally when the default value is set, the specified voltage is out- dure 3) is outputted for 30 sec and the set value is saved.
putted. When [EXECUTE] key is pressed again, the output is stopped.
The adjustment value of each color mode is specified on the label
attached to the MC/DV high voltage power PWB. Enter that value. Note that the adjustment value may differ depending on the MC/DV
high voltage power PWB.
Since the adjustment value label is attached on the MC/DV high
voltage PWB, the PWB must be removed in order to check the
adjustment value.
This is a troublesome procedure. Therefore, it is advisable to write
down the adjustment value in advance.
Since the high voltage output cannot be checked with a digital multi
meter in this model, a judgment of the output must be made by
GBK:XXX GBC:XXX GBM:XXX GBY:XXX checking the print image quality.
10-key EXECUTE
EXECUTE
㩷 after 30 sec.
or
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
'96(77,1*$1'287387
$˖ ˖0,''/(ǂ63(('ǂ'9%B.
$˖ %˖ ˖0,''/(ǂ63(('ǂ'9%B&
2) Select an output mode to be adjusted with the mode key and the scroll key.
3) Enter the adjustment value (specified value) of the middle speed mode and press [OK] key.
Remark: When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the voltage entered in the proce-
Normally when the default value is set, the specified voltage is out- dure 3) is outputted for 30 sec and the set value is saved.
putted. When [EXECUTE] key is pressed again, the output is stopped.
The adjustment value of each color mode is specified on the label
attached to the MC/DV high voltage power PWB. Enter that value. Note that the adjustment value may differ depending on the MC/DV
high voltage power PWB.
Since the adjustment value label is attached on the MC/DV high
voltage PWB, the PWB must be removed in order to check the
adjustment value.
This is a troublesome procedure. Therefore, it is advisable to write
down the adjustment value in advance.
Since the high voltage output cannot be checked with a digital multi
meter in this model, a judgment of the output must be made by
DVK:XXX DVC:XXX DVM:XXX DVY:XXX checking the print image quality.
(˖ ˖7&/2:63(('&/0
* The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced. )˖ ˖7&0,''/(63(('&/0
*˖ ˖7&/2:63(('&/<
+˖ ˖7&0,''/(63(('&/<
,˖ ˖7&/2:63(('%:.
-˖ ˖7&0,''/(63(('%:.
.˖ ˖7&3/$,1&/63;
/˖ ˖7&3/$,1&/'3;
(;(&87( 2.
10-key EXECUTE
EXECUTE or after 30 sec.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
7+96(77,1*$1'287387
$˖ ˖7&/2:63(('&/.
$˖ %˖ ˖7&0,''/(63(('&/.
(˖ ˖7&/2:63(('&/0
)˖ ˖7&0,''/(63(('&/0
*˖ ˖7&/2:63(('&/<
+˖ ˖7&0,''/(63(('&/<
,˖ ˖7&/2:63(('%:.
-˖ ˖7&0,''/(63(('%:.
.˖ ˖7&3/$,1&/63;
/˖ ˖7&3/$,1&/'3;
(;(&87( 2.
3&6B./('$'- 5(*B5*51'
3&6B&/'$5. 5(*B)%(/70$;
3&6B.'$5. 5(*B)%(/70,1
3&6B.*51' 5(*B)%(/7',)
3&6B.%(/70$; 5(*B5%(/70$;
3&6B.%(/70,1 5(*B5%(/70,1
3&6B.%(/7',) 5(*B5%(/7',)
reference range.)
2) Select [BK-MAG ADJ] with the key.
When an error occurs, check the following sections for any
abnormality. 3) Select the paper feed tray with paper in it with the key.
(Any paper size will do.)
- Color image density sensor (image registration sensor F)
- Black image density sensor (image registration sensor R)
- PCU PWB ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
- Transfer belt (dirt, scratch) 0)7 &6 &6
Display/Item Content
OC ADJ Image loss off-center sub scanning direction image
magnification ratio adjustment (Document table mode)
BK-MAG ADJ Main scanning direction image magnification ratio 6) Press [EXECUTE] key.
adjustment
SPF ADJ Image loss off-center sub scanning direction image
magnification ratio adjustment (DSPF/RSPF mode)
SETUP/ Print lead edge adjustment, image off-center (each paper
PRINT ADJ feed tray, duplex mode) adjustment
RESULT Adjustment result display
DATA Display of data used when an adjustment is executed
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
0)7 &6 &6 $'8
(;(&87(
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( (;(&87(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
%.0$*
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
2&ǂ$'- %.0$*ǂ$'-
63)ǂ$'- 6(78335,17ǂ$'-
5(68/7 '$7$
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
6,08/$7,21&203/(7(
3/($6(386+&$.(<
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
0)7 &6 &6
5(68/7 '$7$
5) Set the adjustment pattern on the document table. (Either
direction will do.)
NOTE: Fit the adjustment pattern correctly with the document
guide.
In this case, put 5 sheets of white paper on the printed
adjustment pattern.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
6,'( 6,'(
$//
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
&/26(
3) Proceed to one of the three screens for selecting the cassette
3/($6(:$,7 used to print RSPF adjustment patterns by selecting the corre-
sponding button:
12:(;(&87,1*
SIDE1: RSPF adjustment for the front side
SIDE2: RSPF adjustment for the back side
ALL: RSPF adjustment for both the front and back sides
4) Select one of the cassettes that can be used to print RSPF
adjustment patterns. (Multiple selection is not allowed.)
5) Press the [EXECUTE] key, and the machine starts self-print of
RSPF adjustment patterns.
5(35,17 (;(&87(
5(68/7 '$7$
3) The display shows the tray select screen for printing the DSPF
adjustment pattern. Select a tray for DSPF adjustment printing.
12:(;8&87,1*
(;(&87(
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( 8) When [ALL] is selected, load the DSPF adjustment pattern on
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
12:(;(&87,1*
the DSPF again, and perform the adjustment of the back sur-
face in the similar procedures.
9) The adjustment result screen is displayed.
The value of this time is displayed, and the value of the last
time is displayed in the parenthesis ( ).
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
63) 6,'( /($' 2))6(7 68%
(;(&87(
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
3/($6(6(77+(35,17(53$77(513$3(5217+(63)
adjustment
(Print engine section) ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67
/68326,7,21$'-8670(17 6(/)35,17
&/26(
$˖ ˖08/7,&2817
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: $˖ %˖ ˖3$3(5&6
A B
7) Install the waste toner box, and close the front cabinet.
Diagonal Diagonal 8) Execute procedures 3) - 4).
line C line D
(Repeat procedures 5) - 8) until a satisfactory result is
About 220mm
obtained.)
9) If the adjustment result reaches the satisfactory level, tighten
the adjustment screw.
(The black image skew adjustment is completed with the
above.)
10) In the above black image skew adjustment, check the color
image skew pattern printed when completion of the adjust-
ment.
About 300mm If the difference between the shift amounts on the F and R
sides is within +/- 1 scale of the fine adjustment check scale,
b) Calculate the difference between the measured lengths C there is no need to perform the adjustment.
and D of the diagonal lines. Measure the skew amount from the print patterns on the front
c) Check to insure that the difference between C and D is in and rear sides of each color.
the following range.
C - D = +/-0.8mm
R side
If the difference between C and D is in the above range, there
is no need to adjust.
(Method 2)
a) Fit the side of A3 or 11" x 17" paper to the long side of the
rectangle print pattern.
b) Measure the shift distance between vertical side of paper
and side of the rectangle print pattern.
If the above distance is 0.5mm or less, there is no need to
adjust.
If not, execute the following procedures.
5) Open the front cabinet, and remove the waste toner box. F side
Check the sub scanning direction position of the center area of & / 1*
&
In this case, use the sub scan direction color image shift check 0
Visually check the color density and make the darkest section
as the center, and use it as the read value of the shift amount.
Check that the difference in the center position of the dark den- 5(*,67 '580326 $// (;(&87(
ence by one scale of the fine adjustment check scale) / Turn $872$'-8670(172)5(*,675$7,21 '580326,7,21
35(66>(&(;87(@7267$57
for about double clicks. (55257211(5(037<
Y M C
(;(&87(
4) Write down the displayed skew level. 5) If "C, M, Y" is NG, go to the procedure 6).
Meaning of the skew level value and the adjustment pro- For the adjustment, remove the front cover and the waste
cedure toner box, and turn the skew adjustment screw.
* If "OK" is displayed for all items of C, M, and Y, there is no 6) Repeat the procedures 2) to 4) again, and check to confirm
need to perform the adjustment. that C, M, and Y (SKEW) are OK.
* When "R" is displayed at the head of the value, turn the LSU If any of them is NG, turn the LSU skew adjustment screw of
skew adjustment screw clockwise. the corresponding color to adjust.
* When "L" is displayed at the head of the value, turn the LSU
skew adjustment screw counterclockwise.
* The turning amount of the adjustment screw corresponds to
each adjustment value. "C, M, and Y" indicate numbers of Y M C
clicks. The display value is rounded at the decimal point.
* "C, M, and Y (SKEW)" shows the number of adjustment click
steps for each adjustment screw of C, M, and Y.
Contents in ( )
MIAN, SUB: Difference from the previous adjustment value of
image registration.
Example:
If 105 for this time and 103 for the previous time,
it is displayed as 105.0 (+2.0).
SKEW: Judgment of the LSU skew adjustment result. OK or NOTE: When an abnormality occurs, "ERROR" is displayed.
NG. In this case, check each drive section and the process sec-
PHASE: OPC drum phase adjustment value of the previous tion.
time
5-C Color registration offset adjustment For the main scan direction image registration, the offset on the F
(No need to adjust normally) side, the R side, and at the center is independently adjusted.
This adjustment is used to set the offset value for the automatic If there is a difference in the sub scanning direction image registra-
color registration adjustment (ADJ 5B). tion between the F and R sides, perform the skew adjustment (ADJ
If there is any difference in color phase at the center and the four 5A).
corners of an actual print image, this adjustment may improve it.
X2 X1
Especially when there is any color shift at the center area, this
adjustment may improve it effectively. Color image shift check C (Image shift fine adjustment
scale (Fine adjustment) reference frame)
This adjustment cannot eliminate color shifts in all the areas, but B-sub
average the overall color shifts.
After the automatic adjustment, use this color registration offset
adjustment to correct color shift partially, performing the adjustment
efficiently.
Y2
NOTE:
Before execution of this adjustment, check to confirm that the fol-
lowing adjustment has been properly made. B-main A-main
* ADJ 5A image skew adjustment (LSU unit)
Y1
Front pattern
4) Adjust the position of the pulley angle on the front frame side
of the scanner unit B so that it is in contact with two stoppers
on the front and the rear frames simultaneously.
5) Fix the pulley angle on the front frame side of the scanner unit
B.
If a satisfactory result is not obtained from the above proce-
dures, perform the following procedures.
Loosen the fixing screw of the scanner unit drive pulley which
is not in contact.
Without moving the scanner unit drive shaft, turn the scanner
unit drive pulley manually and adjust so that the scanner unit B
is in contact with both stoppers on the front frame and the rear
frame simultaneously. (Change the relative position of the
scanner unit drive pulley and the drive shaft.) Fix the scanner
unit drive pulley fixing screw.
2) Turn the scanner drive pulley manually and shift the scanner
unit B to bring it into contact with the stopper.
When the scanner unit B is in contact with the two stoppers on
the front and the rear frames simultaneously, the parallelism is
proper.
L L
L = 10mm 5) Without moving the scanner unit drive shaft, manually turn the
scanner unit drive pulley to change the parallelism of the scan-
L
ner unit A and B. (Change the relative position of the scanner
unit drive pulley and the drive shaft.)
2) Set the test chart prepared in the procedure 1) on the docu- 6) Tighten the scanner unit drive pulley fixing screw.
ment table. (Shift the test chart edge 30mm from the reference
Repeat the procedures 2) - 6) until the condition of the procedure 3)
position as shown below.) With the document cover open,
is satisfied.
make a copy on A3 (11" x 17") paper.
If the distortion in the sub scanning direction cannot be deleted with
the above procedures, perform ADJ 6D Scan image distortion
adjustment (Whole scanner unit).
30mm
L L
L = 10mm
Remove the lower cabinet of the operation panel. Loosen the
L scanner rail fixing screw to change the balance between the
right and the left heights of the scanner rail.
2) Set the test chart prepared in the procedure 1) on the docu- Repeat the procedures 2) - 5) until the difference between the
ment table, and make a copy on A3 (11" x 17") paper. image distortions (distortion balance) is deleted.
3) Check for distortion in the main scanning direction. 6) Without changing the balance of the scanner rail on the front
If the four angles of the rectangle of the copy image are right frame side, change the overall height.
angles, it is judged that there is no distortion. (The work is 7) Set the test chart prepared in the procedure 1) on the docu-
completed.) ment table, and make a copy on A3 (11" x 17") paper. Check
that the distortion in the main scanning direction is within the
specified range.
Repeat the procedures 6) and 7) until the distortion in the main
scanning direction is in the specified range.
If the distortion in the sub scanning direction cannot be deleted with
the above procedures, perform ADJ 6D Scan image distortion
adjustment (whole scanner unit).
Copy A Copy B
Ld Ld
There is no difference There is some difference
between the distortion on between the distortion on
the right and that on the left. the right and that on the left.
Lc Ld Lc Ld
20mm
A4/Letter size
Is No The section
there a resist- A is lowered
ance? too much.
Yes
Adjust hinge D
until there is a
resistance in
section A.
(Counter- b) If it cannot be pulled out, turn the section D clockwise and
clockwise)
adjust in order to lift the RSPF unit.
If it can be pulled out without resistance, turn the section D
counterclockwise and adjust in order to move down the RSPF
unit.
Turn the hinge
D to lift the
RSPF so that
there is a
resistance in
the section A.
(Clockwise)
D
F 4.3 - 5.0mm
No
Is there a
resistance in the
section B?
Yes a
Is
there a re- No
sistance?
Yes
A Paper pass direction If the above requirement is not met for the paper's front side,
then do step 3).
3) Remove the hex nut cover in the RSPF diagonal adjustment
screw section.
A B
a b
(Back side)
Make sure that the output satisfies the condition: |c-d| ± 1 mm
C D
c d
A B
1mm
0mm
R B
(Back side)
Make sure that the output satisfies the condition: |c-d| ± 1 mm
C D
c d
[Check Method 2]
7-D DSPF skew adjustment Check that the squareness of the main scanning direction
(Front surface mode) print line for the longitudinal direction of paper is within
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: 1.0mm.
* The DSPF section has been disassembled.
* When replacing the DSPF unit. 0 - 1.0mm
* The DSPF unit generates skewed scanned images.
1) Make an adjustment chart.
Print the self print pattern (grid pattern) of SIM64-2 in the
duplex print mode. A
SIM64-2 set value
A=1, B=1, C=254, D=255
Make sure that the print grid pattern is almost in parallel with
the paper edges, and apply position marks 'A', 'B', 'C' and 'D' to
the leading and trailing edges of the paper for both front and
back sides of the paper.
A B
a b
(Back side)
[When the main scanning direction print line is shifted to the Make sure that the output satisfies the condition: |c-d| ± 1 mm
left]
If a < b, then turn counterclockwise the DSPF skew
adjusting screw.
C D
[When the main scanning direction print line is shifted to the
right]
If a > b, then turn clockwise the DSPF skew adjusting screw. c d
Repeat steps 2) to 5) until an acceptable result is obtained.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
0$*1,),&$7,21$'-8670(17
$˖ ˖&&' 0$,1
$˖ %˖ ˖&&' 68%
2.
A B
12) Make a copy and check the copy magnification ratio again.
If the copy magnification ratio is not in the range of 100 +/- 1%,
repeat the procedures of 9) - 11) until the condition is satisfied.
NOTE: By changing the CCD unit fixing position with the simula-
tion 48-1 adjustment value at 50, the copy magnification
NOTE: This procedure must be executed also when the CCD unit
ratio is adjusted within the specified range (100 +/- 1.0%)
is replaced.
and the specified resolution is obtained based on the opti-
cal system structure.
(˖ ˖'(1%&6
)˖ ˖'(1%&6
*˖ ˖'(1%&6
+˖ ˖'(1%&6
,˖ ˖'(1%/&&
-˖ ˖'(1%$'8
.˖ ˖'(1%+9
/˖ ˖ 08/7,&2817
(;(&87( 2.
4.0 1.0mm
10-key EXECUTE
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
/($'('*($'-8670(179$/8( 35,17(5
$˖ ˖'(1&
$˖ %˖ ˖'(1%
&˖ ˖)52175($5
˷̚˹
If the above requirement is not met, do the following steps.
'˖ ˖'(1%0)7
(˖ ˖'(1%&6 5) Select the adjustment target of the paper feed mode adjust-
)˖ ˖'(1%&6 ment item DENC with the scroll key.
*˖ ˖'(1%&6
+˖ ˖'(1%&6
6) Change the adjustment value.
,˖ ˖'(1%/&& Enter the adjustment value and press the [OK] key or the
-˖ ˖'(1%$'8
.˖ ˖'(1%+9
[EXECUTE] key.
/˖ ˖08/7,&2817 When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment pattern is
(;(&87( 2.
printed.
When the adjustment value is increased, the distance from the
2) Select the set item L with the scroll key, and enter the value paper lead edge to the image lead edge is increased. When
corresponding to the paper feed tray with A4 (11" x 8.5") paper the adjustment value is decreased, the distance is decreased.
in it.
When the set value is changed by 1, the distance is changed
Setting by about 0.1mm.
Display/Item Content Default
range Repeat the procedures 4) - 6) until the condition of 4) is satisfied.
A DEN-C Printer lead edge image 1 - 99 30
position adjustment
B DEN-B Rear edge void area 1 - 99 30
C FRONT/REAR
adjustment
FRONT/REAR void area 1 - 99 20
ADJ 10 FR density variation correction
adjustment Before executing this adjustment, be sure to check the following
D DENB-MFT Manual feed rear edge void 1 - 99 50 items.
area adjustment correction
* Executed SIM61-3 when replaced Developper, Drum, LSU unit.
value
E DENB-CS1 Tray 1 rear edge void area 1 - 99 50 * There must be no unevenness in charging.
adjustment correction value * There must be a tray with A4 (LT) paper in it.
F DENB-CS2 Tray 2 rear edge void area 1 - 99 50 * When this adjustment (FR density unevenness automatic adjust-
adjustment correction value
ment) is executed after execution of ADJ10-B (FR density
G DENB-CS3 Tray 3 rear edge void area 1 - 99 50
unevenness manual correction), the value of the manual correc-
adjustment correction value
tion will be cleared. In order to keep the value of manual correc-
H DENB-CS4 Tray 4 rear edge void area 1 - 99 50
tion, do not execute this automatic correction.
adjustment correction value
I DENB-LCC LCC rear edge void area 1 - 99 50
adjustment correction value 10-A FR density unevenness automatic
J DENB-ADU ADU rear edge void area 1 - 99 55 correction: all 32-point adjustment
adjustment correction value
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
K DENB-HV Heavy paper correction 1 - 99 50
value * When unevenness occurs in the main scanning direction:
L MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1 1) Enter the SIM 61-11 mode.
M PAPER MFT Tray Manual 1-6 1 2 (CS1) 2) Press the [AUTO CORRECTION] key.
selection paper feed
When [DATA] key is pressed, the current correction value of
CS1 Tray 1 2
"FR density unevenness automatic correction" can be
CS2 Tray 2 3
checked.
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
LCC LCC 6
N DUPLEX YES Duplex print Yes 0-1 0 1 (NO)
NO selection No 1
/$6(532:(5$872&255(&7,21
During execution, [EXECUTE] is highlighted.
$872&255(&7,21 '$7$ .(<
(;,7 .(<
%$&. &/($5
.(<
.(<
.(<
.(<
.(<
.(<
.(<
.(<
.(<
.(< .(<
.(<
.(<
0212 &2/25
352&21$1'35,177(673$7&+
Then, self print of the adjustment result patch is automatically
3/($6(86(63(&,),('7<3($25;6,=(
(;,7 .(<
%$&. &/($5
started.
3$3(5)257+,6&255(&7,21
.(<
.(<
.(<
During execution, [EXECUTE] is highlighted.
7) After completion of self printing, the following screen is dis-
.(<
.(<
.(<
played.
.(<
.(<
.(<
The FR density unevenness can be improved by pressing
.(< .(<
.(<
[RETRY] key and repeating procedures 3) - 7).
.(<
0212 &2/25
/,*+7 0,''/( '$5. (;(&87(
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
4) After completion of self printing, the machine enters the /$6(532:(5$872&255(&7,21 02'(0,''/(
&203/(7('7+,6352&('85( .(<
.(<
.(<
.(<
.(<
.(<
.(<
.(<
.(<
.(<
.(< .(<
.(<
.(<
0212 &2/25
5(75<
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
/$6(532:(50$18$/&255(&7,21 02'(0,''/(
$˖ ˖326,7,21 .(<
$
%˖ ˖326,7,21
˷̚˹ (;,7 .(<
%$&. &/($5
&˖ ˖326,7,21
'˖ ˖326,7,21
2) Press the key of the density to be checked and press [EXE- (˖ ˖326,7,21 .(<
.(<
.(<
CUTE] key. The high density process control is started, and )˖ ˖326,7,21
.(<
.(<
.(<
*˖ ˖326,7,21
self printing of the adjustment patch is started. +˖ ˖326,7,21
.(<
.(<
.(<
During execution, [EXECUTE] is highlighted. ,˖ ˖326,7,21
-˖ ˖326,7,21
.(< .(<
.(<
.˖ ˖326,7,21
ǂǂǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( .(<
0212 &2/25
. & 0 < (;(&87( 2.
/$6(532:(50$18$/&255(&7,21
3/($6(6(/(&7'(16,7<02'( (;(&87(72 .(<
352&21$1'35,177(673$7&+
3/($6(86(63(&,),('7<3($25;6,=(
(;,7 .(<
%$&. &/($5 5) After completion of the adjustment, the adjustment result patch
3$3(5)257+,6&255(&7,21 is automatically outputted and the current correction value is
.(<
.(<
.(<
displayed.
.(<
.(<
.(<
The FR density unevenness can be improved by pressing
.(<
.(<
.(<
[RETRY] key and repeating procedures 3) - 5).
.(< .(<
.(<
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
.(<
0212 &2/25 /$6(532:(50$18$/&255(&7,21 02'(0,''/(
/,*+7 0,''/( '$5. (;(&87( &203/(7('7+,6352&('85( .(<
(;,7 .(<
%$&. &/($5
3/($6(48,77+,602'(
3) Select [4POINT CORRECTION]] key or [31POINT CORREC-
TION] key. .(<
.(<
.(<
.(< .(<
.(<
ǂǂǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
/$6(532:(50$18$/&255(&7,21 02'(0,''/(
32,17&255(&7,21 32,17&255(&7,21 .(< .(<
0212 &2/25
. & 0 < 5(75<
(;(&87(
(;,7 .(<
%$&. &/($5
.(<
0212 &2/25
M PRINTER CALIBRATION
C
1) The max. density section is not blurred.
CMY
blend
3) Patch for each of Y, M, C, BK
The patch density is identical between patches or not reversed. A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q
The patch density is changed gradually.
1) The max. density section is not blurred.
If the color balance of each patch of the process black (CMY mixed 2) Patch C or D of each of Y, M, C, and BK is very slightly copied.
color) is slightly shifted to Magenta, it means that the adjustment is
proper. If the color balance of the adjustment pattern printed in this
mode is slightly shifted to Magenta, it is converted into the natural
3) Patch for each of Y, M, C, BK
gray color balance by the color table in an actual copy mode. The patch density is identical between patches or not reversed.
(When the color balance target is DEF 1.) The patch density is changed gradually.
The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter level
(4) Printer color balance/density check to the darker level. The density changing direction must not be
NOTE: Before checking the copy color balance and the density, be reversed.
sure to execute the following procedures in advance. The density level of each color must be almost at the same level.
* Execute the high density image correction (Process correction) Patch B may not be copied.
forcibly. (SIM 44-6) Patch A must not be copied.
* The half-tone image correction is forcibly executed. (SIM 44-26) If the color balance of each patch of the process black (CMY mixed
Method 1 color) is slightly shifted to Magenta, it means that the adjustment is
Execute SIM 64-5 to print the print test pattern. proper. In an actual print mode, it is converted into the natural gray
color balance by the color table. (When the color balance target is
NOTE: When the PCL or the PS printer function is not provided
DEF 1.)
(GDI model), this method cannot be used for check.
Type Descriptions
A Factory color There are three kinds of the color balance target,
balance (gamma) and each of them is specified according to the
target machine design. Use SIM 63-11 to select one of
them as the factory target. The default setting
If the SIT chart is not available, execute SIM 63-5 to set the (factory setting) is the color balance (DEF1)
CCD gamma to the default. In this case, however, the adjust- which emphasizes color reproduction.
ment accuracy is lower when compared with the adjustment B Service color This target is used when the user requests to
method using the SIT chart. balance (gamma) customize the color balance to user's desired
NOTE: Check to insure that the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or target level. In advance, the user's unique color
balance must be registered as the service color
UKOG-0280FCZ1) is in close contact with the document
balance target. The above registration (setting)
table. is made by the serviceman with SIM 46-21 to
NOTE: UKOG-0280FCZZ is equivalent to UKOG-0280FCZ1. adjust the color balance and with SIM 63-7 to
register it.
2) Enter the SIM 63-3 mode and press [EXECUTE] key.
This color balance target is used when the user
The automatic operation is started. During the adjustment, executes the color balance adjustment. When,
[EXECUTE] is highlighted. After completion of the adjustment, therefore, the service color balance target is
[EXECUTE] returns to the normal display. changed, the color balance target of the user's
color balance adjustment is also changed.
When, however, SIM 63-8 is executed, the color
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( balance is set to the factory color balance target
6&$11(5&2/25%$/$1&($872$'-8670(17 set with SIM 63-11. The default setting (factory
6(77+(&+$5721'63)$1'728&+>(;(&87(@
setting) of the color balance is same as the
factory color balance target. (Emphasized on
color reproduction (DEF1))
If the user does not request for customizing the
color balance, be sure to use SIM 63-8 to set the
color balance to the factory color balance target.
C User color Same color balance as the service color balance
balance (gamma) (gamma) target When the service color balance
target target is changed, this color balance target is
also changed accordingly.
(;(&87(
SIM63-8
Factory color balance target (DEF2) =
Factory color balance target Service color balance target/Color balance
(DEF2) target for the user color balance adjustment
Service color balance target in the copy color balance adjust- Meaning of the service color balance target gamma data and
ment ((Automatic adjustment) SIM 46-74/46-24). the purpose of registration
For the service color balance target, an optional color balance can This procedure must be executed only when the color balance is
be adjusted with SIM 46-21 and registered with SIM 63-7. When, customized with SIM 46-21.
however, SIM 63-8 is executed, the color balance is set to the If the color balance is not customized, this procedure is not
same balance as the factory color balance target set with SIM 63- required.
11.
After completion of the customized color balance adjustment (Man-
Color balance target in the user color balance adjustment ual) with SIM 46-21 according to the user's request, use SIM 63-7
This color balance is same as the service color balance target in to register the service color balance target data by using adjust-
the copy color balance adjustment (Automatic adjustment) (SIM ment pattern that was printed in this mode.
46-74/46-24). When, therefore, the service color balance target is NOTE: In this case, be sure to use A4 or 11" x 8.5" paper for print-
changed, this target is also changed accordingly.
ing the adjustment pattern by SIM 46-21.
By this procedure, the service color balance target is
revised.
a. Setting procedure
(Setting procedure of an optional color balance (gamma) as
the service color balance target)
1) Use SIM 46-21 (Copy color balance adjustment (manual
adjustment) mode) to print two sheets of the color patch image
(;(&87(
(adjustment pattern).
NOTE: In this case, be sure to use A4 or 11" x 8.5" paper for print- The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is read.
ing the adjustment pattern by SIM 46-21. 6) Press [REPEAT] key, set the second color patch image
(adjustment pattern), and execute the procedure 5) again.
If the color balance is shifted from the standard, an adjustment
is required. If not, an adjustment is not required. When an ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
optional color balance is requested by the user, make an 6&$11(57$5*(72)&2/25&$/,%6(7836(59,&(
12:&+$573$7&+5($',1*
adjustment.
2) Enter the SIM 63-7 mode.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
6&$11(57$5*(72)&2/25&$/,%6(7836(59,&(
%&'()
*+,-.
㩺㪣012
(;(&87(
Type Descriptions
A Factory color There are three kinds of the color balance targets, and each of them is specified according to the machine design. Use SIM 67-26 to
balance (gamma) select one of them as the factory target. The default setting (factory setting) is the color balance (DEF1) which emphasizes color
target reproduction.
B Service color This target is used when the user requests to customize the color balance to user's desired level. In advance, the user's unique color
balance (gamma) balance must be registered as the service color balance target. The above registration (setting) is made by the serviceman with SIM
target 67-25 to adjust the color balance and with SIM 67-27 to register it.
This color balance target is used when the user executes the color balance adjustment. When, therefore, the service color balance
target is changed, the color balance target of the user's color balance adjustment is also changed. When, however, SIM 67-28 is
executed, the color balance is set to the factory color balance target set with SIM 67-26. The default setting (factory setting) of the color
balance is same as the factory color balance target. (Emphasized on color reproduction (DEF1))
If the user does not request for customizing the color balance, be sure to use SIM 67-28 to set the color balance to the factory color
balance target.
C User color balance Same color balance as the service color balance (gamma) target When the service color balance target is changed, this color balance
(gamma) target target is also changed accordingly.
Relationship between the factory target and the service target and the color balance target for the user color balance adjustment in
the printer color balance adjustment (Automatic adjustment) (SIM 46-74/76-24)
SIM67-28
Factory color balance target (DEF2) =
Factory color balance target Service color balance target/Color balance
(DEF2) target for the user color balance adjustment
Service color balance target in the printer color balance If a considerable time has passed after completion of the color bal-
adjustment (Automatic adjustment) (SIM 46-74/67-24). ance adjustment (Manual) with SIM 67-25, the color balance of the
For the service color balance target, an optional color balance can adjustment pattern at the time of adjustment differs from the color
be adjusted with SIM 67-25 and registered with SIM 67-27. When, balance of the adjustment pattern printed after a considerable time.
however, SIM 67-28 is executed, the color balance is set to the Never use such a pattern for the adjustment.
same balance as the factory color balance target set with SIM 67- The correctness of the service color balance target data can be
26. judged as follows.
Color balance target in the user color balance adjustment When result of the color valance adjustment (Auto) with selecting
This color balance is same as the service color balance target in the service color balance target in SIM 67-24 is unsatisfactory or
the printer color balance adjustment (Automatic adjustment) (SIM abnormal.
46-74/67-24). When, therefore, the service color balance target is In that case, the registered service target data for the color balance
changed, this target is also changed accordingly. adjustment (Auto) may be improper.
Meaning of the service color balance target gamma data and This may be caused when an improper or abnormal color balance
the purpose of registration adjustment pattern was used to register the service color balance
This procedure must be executed only when the color balance is target data for the color balance adjustment with SIM 67-27.
customized with SIM 67-25. The color balance adjustment pattern used in registration was
If the color balance is not customized, this procedure is not made and printed by the color balance adjustment (Manual) with
required. SIM 67-25. This procedure may have been executed erroneously.
After completion of the customized color balance adjustment (Man-
ual) with SIM 67-25 according to the user's request, use SIM 67-27 a. Setting procedure
to register the service color balance target data by use of the (Setting procedure of an optional color balance (gamma) as
printed adjustment pattern. the service color balance target)
NOTE: In this case, be sure to use A4 or 11" x 8.5" paper for print- 1) Use SIM 67-25 (Printer color balance adjustment (manual
ing the adjustment pattern by SIM 67-25. adjustment) mode) to print two sheets of the color patch image
By this procedure, the service color balance target is revised. (adjustment pattern).
It is recommended to keep the printed adjustment pattern created NOTE: In this case, be sure to use A4 or 11" x 8.5" paper for print-
with SIM 67-25. This adjustment pattern can be used to register the ing the adjustment pattern by SIM 67-25.
same color balance target to another machine.
It is also useful to register the service color balance target data. Do If the color balance is shifted from the standard, an adjustment
not fold it and keep it under the circumstances which protect it from is required. If not, an adjustment is not required. When an
discoloration and dirt. optional color balance is requested by the user, make an
The service color balance target data is basically registered imme- adjustment.
diately after the color balance adjustment (Manual) with SIM 67-25.
*+,-.
SIM46-74 is used to perform the automatic copy color balance and
/012 density adjustment (SIM46-24) and the automatic printer color bal-
ance and density adjustment (SIM67-24) continuously.
Since it is desirable to perform the copy color balance adjustment
(automatic adjustment) before the automatic printer color balance
and density adjustment, it is advisable to perform the adjustment in
this mode.
This mode is also advisable to effectively perform both of the auto-
. & 0 < 5(3($7 2.
matic copy color balance and density adjustment (SIM46-24) and
The color balance (gamma) target set level of each color (K, C, the automatic printer color balance and density adjustment (SIM67-
M and Y) can be checked with K/C/M/Y keys. 24). It saves considerable time when compared with performing
each of the auto copy/printer color balance and the density adjust-
Check that the set level is increased in the sequence of B - Q
ment individually.
(MAX). If there is no variation or variation is reversed, it is
judged as abnormal. The color balance adjustment (automatic adjustment) is used to
adjust the copy density of each of Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, and
In case of an abnormality, repair the problem and try again.
Black automatically.
7) Press [OK] key.
When this adjustment is executed, the color balance adjustments
The color balance (gamma) of the color patch image (adjust- of all the copy/printer modes are revised.
ment pattern) used in the procedure 5) is set as the service tar-
get.
3TART
%XECUTE !$*" #OPY COLOR BALANCE AND DENSITY0RINTER COLOR BALANCE AND DENSITY
ADJUSTMENT AUTOMATIC ADJUSTMENT 3)-
%NTER THE 3)- MODE AND SELECT ! X PAPER !UTOMATIC SELECTION
3ET THE ADJUSTMENT PATTERN ON THE DOCUMENT TABLE 3ELECT THE &!#4/29 TARGET OR THE
3%26)#% TARGET AND PRESS ;%8%#54%= KEY
4HE ADJUSTMENT PATTERN IS SCANNED AND THE ADJUSTMENT IS AUTOMATICALLY PERFORMED TO
PRINT THE CHECK PATTERN
#HECK THE PRINTED CHECK PATTERN FOR ANY STREAKS OR UNCLEAR COPY
3ET THE ADJUSTMENT PATTERN ON THE DOCUMENT TABLE 3ELECT THE &!#4/29 TARGET OR THE
3%26)#% TARGET AND PRESS ;%8%#54%= KEY
4HE ADJUSTMENT PATTERN IS SCANNED AND THE ADJUSTMENT IS AUTOMATICALLY PERFORMED TO
PRINT THE CHECK PATTERN !UTOMATIC ADJUSTMENT COLOR BALANCE TARGET CHANGE
#HECK THE PRINTED CHECK PATTERN FOR ANY STREAKS OR UNCLEAR COPY #HANGE THE COLOR BALANCE AND DENSITY TARGET
3)-
0RESS ;/+= KEY 4HE INITIAL SETTING OF THE HALFTONE IMAGE CORRECTION IS AUTOMATICALLY
PERFORMED ./
5SE 3)- TO PRINT THE COLOR BALANCE CHECK PATTERN AND CHECK THE PATCH COLOR 9%3
BALANCE AND DENSITY IN THE PROCESS GRAY )F THE COLOR BALANCE IS SLIGHTLY SHIFTED TO
-AGENTA IT IS PROPERLY ADJUSTED
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(1*,1($872$'-8670(17 6(59,&(
3/($6(6(/(&77+(02'( )$&725< 25 6(59,&( $1'3/$&(
7+(35,17('7(673$7&+21'2&80(17*/$667+(135(66>(;(&87(@
/,*+7$5($$7/()76,'(21'2&80(17*/$66
(;(&87(
The copy color balance adjustment is automatically executed
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( and prints the color balance check patch image.
(1*,1($872$'-8670(17 6(59,&(
352&21(;(&87,1* If there is any streak or unclear print on the printed check pat-
tern, check the print engine for any problems.
Low High
density density
(;(&87(
Y
(adjustment pattern).
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(1*,1($872$'-8670(17 6(59,&(
&21),507+($'-3$7&+$1'35(66>(;(&87(@72$'-2)5(*,675$7,21(;(
$1'35,177+(7(673$7&+
3/($6(86(63(&,),('7<3(2)$25h6,=(3$3(5
)257+,6$'-8670(17
(;(&87(
PRINTER CALIBRATION
PRINTER CALIBRATION
$M
# $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / 0 1 2 3
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(1*,1($872$'-8670(17 6(59,&(
3/($6(6(/(&77+(02'( )$&725< 25 6(59,&( $1'3/$&(
7+(35,17('7(673$7&+21'2&80(17*/$667+(135(66>(;(&87(@
/,*+7$5($$7/()76,'(21'2&80(17*/$66
2.
5(68/7 5(75<
11-C (1)
Copy color balance and density adjustment
NOTE: The adjustment result becomes valid only when the both
(Automatic adjustment)
adjustments in the copy mode and in the printer mode are
completed. a. General
For example, if the copy color balance adjustment (auto- The color balance adjustment (automatic adjustment) is used to
matic adjustment) is performed and the simulation is can- adjust the copy density of each of Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, and
celed, the adjustment result is invalid. Black automatically.
When this adjustment is executed, the color balance adjustments
of all the copy modes are revised.
11) Check the copy color balance and density.
(Refer to the item of the copy color balance and density
check.) There are following two modes in the auto color balance adjust-
ment.
When satisfactory color balance and density are not obtained
from the automatic adjustment by selecting the factory target in 1) Auto color balance adjustment by the serviceman (SIM 46-24
procedure 4), change the factory color balance target with SIM is used.)
63-11 and repeat the procedures from 1). 2) Auto color balance adjustment by the user (The user program
If a satisfactory result is not obtained with the above proce- mode is used.) (The color balance target is the service target.)
dure, perform the manual color balance adjustment (ADJ 11C The auto color balance adjustment by the user is provided to
(2)). reduce the number of service calls.
Also when the service target is selected in procedure 4) to exe- If the copy color balance is lost for some reason, the user can
cute the automatic adjustment and a satisfactory result is not use this color balance adjustment to recover the balance.
obtained, perform the manual color balance adjustment (ADJ When, however, the machine has a fatal problem or when the
11C (2)). machine condition is greatly changed, this function does not
12) Check the printer color balance and density. work effectively.
(Refer to the item of the printer color balance and density If the machine condition is dramatically changed, a fatal prob-
check.) lem occurs, or the normal color targets cannot be obtained,
When satisfactory color balance and density are not obtained service must recalibrate the machine to specification.
from the automatic adjustment by selecting the factory target in To perform the adjustment, the above difference must be fully
procedure 7), change the factory color balance target with SIM understood.
67-26 and repeat the procedures from 1).
If a satisfactory result on the color balance and the density is
not obtained with the automatic adjustment, execute the man-
ual adjustment (SIM 67-25) (ADJ 11E (2)).
Also when the service target is selected in procedure 7) to exe-
cute the automatic adjustment and a satisfactory result is not
obtained, perform the manual color balance adjustment (ADJ
11E (2)).
If the color balance or density is not in the satisfactory level even
after execution of the automatic and manual adjustments, there
may be another cause.
Troubleshoot the cause, repair or perform necessary works, and
repeat the adjustment from the beginning.
3TART
#HECK THE PRINTED CHECK PATTERN FOR ANY STREAKS OR UNCLEAR COPY
0RESS ;/+= KEY AND THE INITIAL SETTING OF THE HALFTONE IMAGE CORRECTION
IS AUTOMATICALLY PERFORMED !UTOMATIC COLOR BALANCE TARGET CHANGE
%ND
3/($6(86(63(&,),('7<3(2)$25h6,=(3$3(5
)257+,6$'-8670(17
Low High
density density
Y
M
(;(&87(
C
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (A4/11" x 8.5" or A3/11" x 17" paper is
automatically selected.) Bk
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'( 5(*8/$5
&21),507+($'-867('3$7&+$1'35(66>2.@725(*,67(57+,63$7&+'$7$
2.
NOTE:
After pressing [OK] key, the initial setting of the halftone image
correction is started. During the operation, "NOW REGISTER-
ING THE NEW TARGET OF HALFTONE PROCON." is dis-
played. This operation takes several minutes.
4) Select [FACTORY] target, and press [EXECUTE] key.
After completion of the operation, "PLEASE QUIT THIS
When the color balance is customized with the manual color
MODE" is displayed.
balance adjustment (SIM 46-21) according to the user's
request and the color balance is registered as the service tar- Do not cancel the simulation until "PLEASE QUIT THIS
get with SIM 63-7, if the color balance is adjusted to that color MODE" is displayed.
balance, select the service target.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'( 5(*8/$5
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( &203/(7('7+,6352&('85(
(1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'( 5(*8/$5
3/($6(6(/(&77+(02'( )$&725< 25 6(59,&( $1'3/$&(
3/($6(48,77+,602'(
7+(35,17('7(673$7&+21'2&80(17*/$667+(135(66>(;(&87(@
/,*+7$5($$7/()76,'(21'2&80(17*/$66
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
+$/)721('(16,7<&255(&7(;(&87,21 11-C (2)
5(68/7
Copy color balance and density adjustment
&203/(7( (Manual adjustment)
a. General
The color balance adjustment (Manual adjustment) is used to
adjust the copy density of CMYK. This is used at the following situ-
ation. When the result of auto adjustment described above is not
existing within the range of reference. When a fine adjustment is
required. When there is request from the user for changing (cus-
5(68/7 (;(&87(
tomizing) the color balance.
This manual adjustment is executed only for the color patch which
(Abnormal end (Auto transition)) could not adjusted properly in the automatic adjustment.
If the color balance is improper, execute the automatic color bal-
ance adjustment in advance, and execute this adjustment for better
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
+$/)721('(16,7<&255(&7(;(&87,21
efficiency.
(55256(1625$'-8670(17
(;(&87(
3TART
9%3
#ANCEL THE 3)- MODE
#HECK THE COPY COLOR BALANCE AND DENSITY ADJUSTMENT RESULT WITH THE
TEST CHART
5SE THE TEST CHART 5+/' &#::5+/' &#
TO MAKE A COPY IN THE 4EXT0RINTED 0HOTO MODE AND CHECK
THE COLOR BALANCE AND DENSITY
9%3
#HECK TO CONFIRM THAT THE INITIAL SETTING OF THE HALFTONE IMAGE CORRECTION IS
PROPERLY SET
%ND
˷ ̚ ˹ &˖ ˖32,17 If the color balance of each patch of the process black (CMY
'˖ ˖32,17
mixed color) is slightly shifted to Magenta, it means that the
(˖ ˖32,17
)˖ ˖32,17
adjustment is proper. If the color balance of the adjustment
*˖ ˖32,17 pattern printed in this mode is slightly shifted to Magenta, it is
+˖ ˖32,17 converted into the natural gray color balance by the color cor-
,˖ ˖32,17
rection table in an actual copy mode. (When the color balance
-˖ ˖32,17
.˖ ˖32,17
target is DEF 1.)
/˖ ˖32,17
4) Select the color to be adjusted with the color select key, and
. & 0 < (;(&87( 2.
select the adjustment point with the scroll key.
C 5) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
The adjustment value is set in the range of (1 - 999). When
10-key EXECUTE
SIM 46-24 is used to adjust the automatic color balance and
EXECUTE End of print density, all the set values of this simulation are set to 500.
To increase the density, increase the adjustment value. To
decrease the density, decrease the adjustment value.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( Repeat procedures of 2) - 5) until the condition of 3) is satis-
(1*,1(&2/25%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(17>$// &2/25 @
$˖ ˖32,17
fied.
$˖ %˖ ˖32,17
When the overall density is low, or when the density is high
˷ ̚ ˹ &˖ ˖32,17
'˖ ˖32,17
and patch A is copied, use the arrow key to adjust all the
(˖ ˖32,17 adjustment values of A - Q (MAX) to a same level collectively.
)˖ ˖32,17
Then, adjust each patch density individually. This is an efficient
*˖ ˖32,17
+˖ ˖32,17
way of adjustment.
,˖ ˖32,17 Referring to the black/gray patches, adjust so that each pro-
-˖ ˖32,17
cess (CMY) black/gray patch color balance of A - Q (MAX)
.˖ ˖32,17
/˖ ˖32,17
approaches the black/gray patch level as far as possible.
. & 0 < (;(&87( 2. 6) Make a copy of the servicing color test chart (UKOG-
0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11) and a user's document accord-
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (A4/11" x 8.5" or A3/11" x 17" paper is ing to necessity in the normal copy mode, the text/Printed
automatically selected.) Photo mode (Manual) to check the adjustment result.
The color balance adjustment pattern is printed. (Refer to the item of the copy color balance/density check.)
3) Check that the following specification is satisfied or the color 7) Execute SIM 44-21. (Execute the initial setting of the halftone
balance is satisfactory. image correction.)
If not, execute the following procedures.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
+$/)721(352&2167$1'$5'9$/8(5(*,67(5
728&+>(;(&87(@7+(1(;(&87,2167$57
Low High
density density
;
(;(&87(
%
$M
It takes several minutes to complete the operation. After com-
pletion of the operation, "COMPLETE" is displayed.
CMY
blend
# $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / 0 1 2 3
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26(
7(67
+$/)721(352&2167$1'$5'9$/8(5(*,67(5 +$/)721('(16,7<&255(&7(;(&87,21
5(68/7 5(68/7
&203/(7( &203/(7(
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
+$/)721(352&2167$1'$5'9$/8(5(*,67(5 +$/)721('(16,7<&255(&7(;(&87,21
5(68/7 (55256(1625$'-8670(17
(5525.&0<
After completion of the operation, the simulation is canceled. After completion of the operation, the simulation is canceled.
NOTE:
This procedure is to save the copy color balance adjustment 9) Make a copy of the servicing color test chart (UKOG-
data as the reference data for the halftone correction. 0317FCZZ/UKOG-0317FC11) and a user's document accord-
Immediately after execution of ADJ 11C (2) (Color balance ing to necessity in the Text/Printed Photo mode (Manual) and
adjustment, Manual) with SIM 46-21, be sure to execute this check the adjustment result again. (Refer to the item of the
procedure. copy color balance/density check.)
When ADJ 11C (1) (Color balance adjustment, Auto) is exe- If the copy color balance and density are not adjusted to the
cuted with SIM 46-24, this procedure is automatically exe- specified level, there may be another cause.
cuted. Troubleshoot the cause, and repair or perform proper treat-
8) Use SIM 44-26 to execute the halftone image correction. ments, and try all the procedures of the print image adjustment
(Forcible execution) from the beginning.
Enter the SIM 44-26 mode and press [EXECUTE] key. NOTE:
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted and the operation is started. If the color balance is customized, use SIM 63-7 to register the
color balance as the service target.
If the color balance is not customized, this procedure is not
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26(
7(67
+$/)721('(16,7<&255(&7(;(&87,21
required.
728&+>(;(&87(@7+(1(;(&87,2167$57
If the customized color balance is registered as the service tar-
get, the automatic color balance adjustment can be made in
the next color balance adjustment.
(;(&87(
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
When adjusting the copy density on the low density part, select
"LOW" mode and change the adjustment value. When adjust-
ing the copy density on the high density part, select "HIGH"
mode and change the adjustment value.
When the adjustment value is increased, the copy density is
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the copy
density is decreased.
4) Make a copy and check the adjustment result.
Switch the adjustment simulation mode and the normal copy
mode alternately, and adjust and check the adjustment result.
Repeat switching the adjustment simulation mode and the nor-
mal copy mode and changing the adjustment value and check-
ing the copy until a satisfactory result is obtained.
*˖ ˖3+272*5$3+
L LIGHT Light document LOW 1 - 99 50
+˖ ˖0$3 HIGH 1 - 99 50
,˖ ˖7(;7 &23<72&23<
-˖ ˖7(;735,17('3+272 &23<72&23< 3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
.˖ ˖35,17('3+272 &23<72&23<
/˖ ˖/,*+7
When adjusting the copy density on the low density part, select
/2: +,*+ 2.
"LOW" mode and change the adjustment value. When adjust-
ing the copy density on the high density part, select "HIGH"
㪈㪇㪄㫂㪼㫐 mode and change the adjustment value.
When the adjustment value is increased, the copy density is
OK increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the copy
density is decreased.
4) Make a copy and check the adjustment result.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(;32685($'-8670(17 %: >&23<@
Switch the adjustment simulation mode and the normal copy
$˖ ˖$872 mode alternately, and adjust and check the adjustment result.
$˖ %˖ ˖$872
*˖ ˖3+272*5$3+
+˖ ˖0$3
/˖ ˖/,*+7
/2: +,*+ 2.
,˖ ˖32,17
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment pattern is
-˖ ˖32,17 printed out.
.˖ ˖32,17
/˖ ˖32,17 This adjustment pattern can be used to check the color bal-
. & 0 < (;(&87( 2. ance and the density for each density level (point).
C 6) Make a copy and check the adjustment result.
10-key Switch the adjustment simulation mode and the normal copy
mode alternately, and adjust and check the adjustment result.
OK
Repeat switching the adjustment simulation mode and the nor-
mal copy mode and changing the adjustment value and check-
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(1*,1(&2/25%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(17>7(;7@ ing the copy until a satisfactory result is obtained.
$˖ ˖32,17
$˖ %˖ ˖32,17
(˖ ˖32,17
)˖ ˖32,17
*˖ ˖32,17
+˖ ˖32,17
,˖ ˖32,17
-˖ ˖32,17
.˖ ˖32,17
/˖ ˖32,17
[SYSTEM
SETTINGS] key
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
or end of print
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(1*,1(&2/25%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(17>7(;7@
$˖ ˖32,17
$˖ %˖ ˖32,17
(˖ ˖32,17
)˖ ˖32,17
*˖ ˖32,17
+˖ ˖32,17
,˖ ˖32,17
-˖ ˖32,17
.˖ ˖32,17
/˖ ˖32,17
*˖ ˖32,17 Repeat switching the adjustment simulation mode and the normal
+˖ ˖32,17 copy mode and changing the adjustment value and checking the
,˖ ˖32,17
copy until a satisfactory result is obtained.
-˖ ˖32,17
.˖ ˖32,17
/˖ ˖32,17
*˖ ˖32,17
* When a proper density copy is not obtained in the monochrome
+˖ ˖32,17 automatic copy mode.
,˖ ˖32,17
-˖ ˖32,17
* When a document with images near its lead edge is copied.
.˖ ˖32,17 * When a document with colored background is copied.
/˖ ˖32,17
1) Enter the SIM 46-19 mode.
(;(&87( 2.
2) Select the density level (point) to be adjusted with the scroll ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
NOTE:
MODE1: High gamma (Improves the image contrast)
MODE2: Normal gamma
STOP:
Document table mode
Reads the density of 3 - 7 mm area from leading edge of document,
decides the output image density according to the density of that
part. (The output image density is constant at whole area.) 3 to 7mm
REALTIME:
Reads the density of width of the document one by one, decides
the output image density according to the density of each part of 100mm
the document. (The output image density may be not constant at
whole area.)
PRESCAN: AE WIDTH = PART
Once the densities on the document surface are scanned, the out-
put image density is determined according to the average of the
scanned densities. (The output image density is even for all the
surface.)
AE WIDTH FULL:
Document density reading area in monochrome auto mode is 3 - 7
mm (leading edge of document) x Document width. No relationship
to PRESCAN MODE DSPF mode
AE WIDTH PART:
Document density reading area in monochrome auto mode is 3 - 7 3 to 7mm
mm (leading edge of document) x 100 mm (width). No relationship
to PRESCAN MODE
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
㩷/,0,72)$(5($&7,216(77,1* 11-D (7)
$˖ ˖&23<˖2&
$˖ %˖ ˖&23<˖563)
Copy/Scan low density image density
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖6&$1˖2& adjustment (for each mode)
'˖ ˖6&$1˖563)
(˖ ˖)$;˖2&
(No need to adjust normally)
)˖ ˖)$;˖563) This adjustment is used to adjust the image density in the low den-
sity area in the copy/scanner mode.
This adjustment is required in the following cases.
* When there is a desire not to reproduce the background of the
document. When there is a desire to reproduce the low density
2. image of the document.
* When there is request from the user.
10-key 1) Enter the SIM 46-63 mode.
OK
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
%*5(029($'-8670(17
$˖ ˖&2/25&23<7(;735,17('3+272
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( $˖ %˖ ˖&2/25&23<7(;7
/,0,72)$(5($&7,216(77,1*
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖&2/25&23<35,17('3+272
$˖ ˖&23<˖2&
'˖ ˖&2/25&23<3+272*5$3+
$˖ %˖ ˖&23<˖563)
(˖ ˖&2/25&23<7(;73+272
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖6&$1˖2&
)˖ ˖&2/25&23<0$3
'˖ ˖6&$1˖563)
*˖ ˖&2/25&23</,*+7
(˖ ˖)$;˖2&
+˖ ˖&2/25&23<7(;735,17('3+272 &23<72&23<
)˖ ˖)$;˖563)
,˖ ˖&2/25&23<7(;7 &23<72&23<
.˖ ˖&2/25386+7(;735,17('3+272
/˖ ˖&2/25386+7(;7
2.
2. 10-key
OK
2) Select the adjustment mode with the scroll key.
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
When the adjustment value is increased, reproducibility of the ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
background and the low density image is increased. When the %*5(029($'-8670(17
$˖ ˖&2/25&23<7(;735,17('3+272
adjustment value is decreased, reproducibility of the back- $˖ %˖ ˖&2/25&23<7(;7
ground and the low density image is decreased. ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖&2/25&23<35,17('3+272
'˖ ˖&2/25&23<3+272*5$3+
DSPF (˖ ˖&2/25&23<7(;73+272
)˖ ˖&2/25&23<0$3
Setting Default
Item/Display Content *˖ ˖&2/25&23</,*+7
range value +˖ ˖&2/25&23<7(;735,17('3+272 &23<72&23<
A COPY: OC Copy mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196 ,˖ ˖&2/25&23<7(;7 &23<72&23<
.˖ ˖&2/25386+7(;735,17('3+272
(SIDE1) (for DSPF front surface)
/˖ ˖&2/25386+7(;7
C COPY: DSPF Copy mode 1 - 250 196
2.
(SIDE2) (for DSPF back surface)
D SCAN: OC Scanner mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196
E SCAN: DSPF Scanner mode 1 - 250 196
(SIDE1) (for DSPF front surface)
F SCAN: DSPF Scanner mode 1 - 250 196
(SIDE2) (for DSPF back surface)
Set
Display/Item Content Default ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
value 7(67 &/26(
&2()),&,(172)*$00$6(783
A COLOR COPY : Text print (color copy) 1-9 3 $˖ ˖%/$&.7(;7 6/23(
TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO $˖ %˖ ˖%/$&.7(;7 ,17(5&(37
B COLOR COPY : TEXT Text (color copy) 1-9 3 ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖&2/257(;7 6/23(
'˖ ˖&2/257(;7 ,17(5&(37
C COLOR COPY : Printed photo 1-9 5
(˖ ˖('7(;7 6/23(
PRINTED PHOTO (color copy)
)˖ ˖('7(;7 ,17(5&(37
D COLOR COPY : Photograph 1-9 5
PHOTOGRAPH (color copy)
E COLOR COPY : Text/Photograph 1-9 3
TEXT/PHOTO (color copy)
F COLOR COPY : MAP Map (color copy) 1-9 5
G COLOR COPY : LIGHT Light document 1-9 6 2.
(color copy)
H COLOR COPY : Copy document, 1-9 5 10-key
TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO Text print (color copy)
(COPY TO COPY) OK
I COLOR COPY : TEXT Copy document, Text 1-9 5
(COPY TO COPY) (color copy)
J COLOR COPY : Copy document, 1-9 5
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
PRINTED PHOTO Printed photo &2()),&,(172)*$00$6(783
(COPY TO COPY) (color copy) $˖ ˖%/$&.7(;7 6/23(
$˖ %˖ ˖%/$&.7(;7 ,17(5&(37
K COLOR PUSH:TEXT/ Text print 1-9 3
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖&2/257(;7 6/23(
PRINTED PHOTO (color PUSH)
'˖ ˖&2/257(;7 ,17(5&(37
L COLOR PUSH:TEXT Text (color PUSH) 1-9 3 (˖ ˖('7(;7 6/23(
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key. 2) Select the mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.
When the adjustment value is increased, reproducibility of the
background and the low density image is increased. When the Adjust-
Display/Item
adjustment value is decreased, reproducibility of the back- Content ment Default
(Copy mode)
ground and the low density image is decreased. range
A BLACK TEXT Black character edge gamma 1 - 99 50
(SLOPE) skew adjustment
B BLACK TEXT Black character edge density 1 - 99 50
11-D (8) (INTERCEPT) adjustment
Color copy, text, line image reproduction C COLOR TEXT Color character edge gamma 1 - 99 50
adjustment (edge gamma, density (SLOPE) skew adjustment
D COLOR TEXT Color character edge density 1 - 99 50
adjustment) (Text, Map mode) (INTERCEPT) adjustment
(No need to adjust normally) E ED TEXT Text/Map mode gamma 1 - 99 50
Adjustment 1 (SLOPE) adjustment (Text/Map mode)
By changing Text/Printed Photo, Text/Photograph, automatic copy F ED TEXT Text/Map mode density 1 - 99 50
(INTERCEPT) adjustment (Text/Map mode)
mode Text, line image edge section gamma and the density, the
reproducibility of text and line profile can be varied optionally. 3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key.
With this adjustment, the density and the thickness of fine text and When the adjustment values of item A and C are changed, the
lines can be varied. gamma at the line edge section is changed.
Check the result of this adjustment by text/printed photo copy mode When the adjustment value is increased, the image contrast of
(manual). character edge and line edge is increased. When the adjust-
This adjustment is required in the following cases. ment value is decreased, the image contrast of character and
* When the reproducibility of text and line copy image is to be line edge is decreased.
changed. When the adjustment value of the adjustment item B and D are
* When there is request from the user. increased, the image density at the line edge section is
increased, and vice versa.
4) Press [OK] key.
5) Make a copy in monochrome text/printed photo copy mode
(manual), check the copy.
When checking, use a copy of the document with a thin char-
acter and line image.
If a satisfactory result is not obtained, return to the SIM 46-27
mode and change the adjustment value.
Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is
obtained.
˷̚˹
2.
10-key
OK
'()$8/7 $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
10-key
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
&2()),&,(172)*$00$6(783 DEFAULT
$˖ ˖%/$&.7(;7 6/23( OK
$˖ %˖ ˖%/$&.7(;7 ,17(5&(37
˷̚˹
2.
2) Select the mode to be adjusted with the scroll key. '()$8/7 $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
Adjust- EXECUTE NO
Display/Item
Content ment Default
(Copy mode)
range
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26(
A BLACK TEXT Black character edge gamma 1 - 99 50 7(67
% :,0$*(&5($7($'-8670(17
(SLOPE) skew adjustment $˖ ˖5*
$˖ %˖ ˖%*
B BLACK TEXT Black character edge density 1 - 99 50
˷̚˹
(INTERCEPT) adjustment
C COLOR TEXT Color character edge gamma 1 - 99 50
(SLOPE) skew adjustment
D COLOR TEXT Color character edge density 1 - 99 50
(INTERCEPT) adjustment
E ED TEXT Text/Map mode gamma 1 - 99 50
(SLOPE) adjustment (Text/Map mode)
'()$8/7 $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
F ED TEXT Text/Map mode density 1 - 99 50
(INTERCEPT) adjustment (Text/Map mode) YES
˷̚˹
increased, and vice versa.
When the adjustment value of the adjustment item F is
increased, the image density is increased, and vice versa.
4) Press [OK] key.
5) Make a copy in the Text/Map copy mode (manual), and check
the output print.
'()$8/7 $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
If a satisfactory result is not obtained, use SIM46-27 to change the
adjustment value.
Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is obtained.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
%/$&.,0$*(&5($7($'-8670(17
7(;7ǂ357 ˖ ˄˅/87 ˄˅/87 120$/
˄˅/87 ˄˅/87
7(;7 ˖ ˄˅/87 ˄˅/87 120$/
˄˅/87 ˄˅/87
35,17('ǂ3+272 ˖ ˄˅/87 ˄˅/87 120$/
˄˅/87 ˄˅/87
3+272 ˖ ˄˅/87 ˄˅/87 120$/
˄˅/87 ˄˅/87
7(;7ǂ3+272 ˖ ˄˅/87 ˄˅/87 120$/
˄˅/87 ˄˅/87
0$3 ˖ ˄˅/87 ˄˅/87 120$/
˄˅/87 ˄˅/87
)˖ ˖&2/25&23<&0<21
AUTO5 (-) LUT2 Auto mode NORMAL
*˖ ˖&2/25&23<.21
(-) LUT1 judgment 5 +˖ ˖%:&23<21
-˖ ˖%:386+21
(+) LUT1
(+) LUT2
AUTO6 (-) LUT2 Auto mode NORMAL 2.
'˖ ˖&2/25&23<.21
When a dark color image is reproduced in the black:
(˖ ˖6,1*/(&2/25&0<21
Selects - button )˖ ˖&2/25&23<&0<21
5) Make a copy in color copy mode and check the copy. *˖ ˖&2/25&23<.21
+˖ ˖%:&23<21
If a satisfactory result is not obtained, return to the SIM 46-38 mode ,˖ ˖&2/25386+5*%21
and change the adjustment value. -˖ ˖%:386+21
(˖ ˖<(//2:ǂ0$;ǂ7$5*(7
Select HIGH to obtain clear images. Select SOFT to reduce )˖ ˖%/$&.ǂ0$;ǂ7$5*(7
moire.
- Adjustment item C - J:
When setting ON, smoothness in the image shade part
improves by applying soft filter. (asperity decreases)
4) Press [OK] key. 2.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
11-D (12) (1*,1(0$;,080'(16,7<$'-8670(1702'(
$˖ ˖&0<˄(1$%/(ǂ˖',6$%/(˅
Copy high density image density $˖ %˖ ˖.˄(1$%/(ǂ˖',6$%/(˅
correction 6,1*/(&2/2502'(&2/25%$/$1&(6(783
$˖ ˖5('
$˖ %˖ ˖*5((1
* If a tone gap occurs on part of high density, set 0 to item A and B
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖%/8(
The density of high density part decreases. However, the tone '˖ ˖&<$1
(˖ ˖0$*(17$
gap is better.
)˖ ˖<(//2:
* In case of more increase of the density on high density part, set 1
to item A and B.
The tone gap may occur in high density part.
NOTE: Do not change the setting values of item C, D, E and F. If
these values are changed, density of the high density part & 0 < 2.
is changed.
If these values are changed, be sure to execute the copy 10-key
color balance density adjustment. (Auto adjustment)
OK
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
6,1*/(&2/2502'(&2/25%$/$1&(6(783
$˖ ˖5('
$˖ %˖ ˖*5((1
(˖ ˖0$*(17$
)˖ ˖<(//2:
& 0 < 2.
Default
Display/Item Adjustment range
C M Y
A RED 0 - 255 0 255 200
B GREEN 0 - 255 255 0 255
C BLUE 0 - 255 255 200 0
D YELLOW 0 - 255 0 0 255
E MAGENTA 0 - 255 0 255 0
F CYAN 0 - 255 255 0 0
RSPF
2.
Setting
Item/Display Content Default
range
10-key A COPY : LOW RSPF copy mode exposure 1 - 99 48
adjustment (Low density side)
OK
B SCAN : LOW RSPF scanner mode exposure 1 - 99 48
adjustment (Low density side)
C FAX : LOW PSPF FAX mode exposure 1 - 99 48
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
adjustment (Low density side)
(;32685($'-8670(17 63) D COPY : HIGH RSPF copy mode exposure 1 - 99 53
$˖ ˖&23<˖/2:
$˖ adjustment (High density side)
%˖ ˖6&$1˖/2:
b. Setting procedure
Thin line
1) Enter the SIM 26-53 mode.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(1$%/,1*2)$8720$7,&&2/25&$/,%5$7,21
$˖ ˖&23< <(612
$˖ %˖ ˖35,17(5 <(612
˷̚˹
10-key
11-D (16)
OK Copy gamma, color balance adjustment for
each dither (Automatic adjustment)
a. General
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( This simulation is used to improve the image quality in a certain
(1$%/,1*2)$8720$7,&&2/25&$/,%5$7,21 mode. (Refer to the list in procedure 6.)
$˖ ˖&23< <(612
$˖ %˖ ˖35,17(5 <(612 b. Adjustment procedures
˷̚˹ 1) Enter the SIM46-54 mode.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
A4/11" x 8.5" or A3/11" x 17" paper is automatically selected.
The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed.
3) Set the patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in the proce-
dure 2) on the document table so that the thin lines on the
printed patch image (adjustment pattern) are on the left side.
Place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed patch image
2.
(adjustment pattern).
Setting Default
Item/Display Content
range value
A CHROMA Dropout color range adjustment 0-6 3
Reproduced
image
Effect and adverse effect when decreasing the value Effect and adverse effect when increasing the value
[Effect] [Effect]
When black characters are fainted by color shift, etc, the black area Colors (of low chroma) which are difficult to be dropped out can be
is outputted clearly. dropped out.
[Adverse effect] [Adverse effect]
Dropout of color sections becomes difficult. Black characters are fainted or cracked.
Setting Default
Item/Display Content Description NOTE
range value
A WOVEN DEN BK LOW Watermark density level 0 - 255 15 The adjustment value is changed to increase or
(Color: Black / Adjustment for light decrease the density of the watermark of
images) background documents (primary output).
B WOVEN DEN BK MIDDLE Watermark density level 0 - 255 19 To increase the watermark density, increase the
(Color: Black, Density: Standard) adjustment value.
C WOVEN DEN BK HIGH Watermark density level 0 - 255 23 To decrease the watermark density, decrease the
(Color: Black, Density: Dark) adjustment value.
D WOVEN DEN C LOW Watermark density level 0 - 255 19
(Color: Cyan / Adjustment for light NOTE: When the adjustment value is increased,
images) the watermark area which is originally not
E WOVEN DEN C MIDDLE Watermark density level 0 - 255 23 reproduced becomes difficult to disappear.
(Color: Cyan, Density: Standard) When the adjustment value is decreased,
F WOVEN DEN C HIGH Watermark density level 0 - 255 27 the watermark area which is originally
(Color: Cyan, Density: Dark) reproduced becomes easy to disappear.
G WOVEN DEN M LOW Watermark density level 0 - 255 15
(Color: Magenta / Adjustment for
light images)
H WOVEN DEN M MIDDLE Watermark density level 0 - 255 18
(Color: Magenta, Density:
Standard)
I WOVEN DEN M HIGH Watermark density level 0 - 255 21
(Color: Magenta, Density: Dark)
J CONTRAST Contrast adjustment 0 - 255 2 This is used to adjust the variation in the watermark
density when the adjustment value of the watermark
print/contrast adjustment in the system setting is
changed by 1.
When this value is increased, the variation is also
increased. When the value is decreased, the
variation is also decreased.
When the adjustment value is 0, the result of the
contrast adjustment is not reflected.
(* The adjustment value must be set to 1 or greater.)
K HT TYPE (POSI) For half-tone index watermark type 42 - 43 42 To reproduce the containing characters of watermark Normally
positive copy (secondary output) more clearly, set to 43. set to the
In that case, however, the containing characters of default.
the watermark document (primary output) can be
easily reproduced.
L HT TYPE (NEGA) For half-tone index watermark type 42 - 43 42 To reproduce the containing characters of watermark
negative copy (secondary output) more clearly, set to 43.
In that case, however, the containing characters of
the watermark document (primary output) can be
easily reproduced.
3TART
9%3
%XECUTE !$*% 0RINTER COLOR BALANCE AND DENSITY
ADJUSTMENT -ANUAL ADJUSTMENT 3)-
#HECK THE SELF PRINT CHECK PATTERN TO CHECK THE PRINTER COLOR BALANCE AND
DENSITY ADJUSTMENT
7HEN THE COLOR BALANCE AND DENSITY ARE CUSTOMIZED AND
REGISTERED AS THE 3%26)#% TARGET SELECT THE 3%26)#%
5SE 3)- TO PRINT THE SELF PRINT 5SE 3)- TO PRINT THE SELF PRINT TARGET
CHECK PATTERN AND CHECK THE CHECK PATTERN AND CHECK THE
PRINTER COLOR BALANCE AND DENSITY PRINTER COLOR BALANCE AND DENSITY )F THE INITIAL SETTING OF THE HALFTONE IMAGE CORRECTION IS NOT
PROPERLY ADJUSTED SATISFACTORY COLOR BALANCE AND DENSITY
CANNOT BE OBTAINED )N THIS CASE CHECK THE PRINT ENGINE FOR
ANY PROBLEMS
!RE THE COLOR BALANCE AND )F SATISFACTORY COLOR BALANCE AND DENSITY ARE NOT OBTAINED
./
DENSITY AT THE SATISFACTORY WITH !$*% 0RINTER COLOR BALANCE AND DENSITY
LEVEL ADJUSTMENT -ANUAL ADJUSTMENT 3)- CHECK THE
PRINT ENGINE FOR ANY PROBLEMS
)F THERE IS ANY STREAK OR UNCLEAR COPY ON THE PRINTED CHECK
9%3
PATTERN CHECK THE PRINT ENGINE FOR ANY PROBLEMS
%ND
3/($6(86(63(&,),('7<3(2)$25h6,=(3$3(5
(;(&87(
2.
NOTE:
After pressing [OK] key, the initial setting of the halftone image
correction is started. During the operation, "NOW REGISTER-
ING THE NEW TARGET OF HALFTONE" is displayed. This
operation takes several minutes.
After completion of the operation, "PLEASE QUIT THIS
MODE" is displayed.
4) Select [FACTORY] key, and press [EXECUTE] key.
Do not cancel the simulation until "PLEASE QUIT THIS
When the color balance is customized with the manual color
MODE" is displayed.
balance adjustment (SIM 67-25) according to the user's
request and the color balance is registered as the service tar-
get with SIM 67-27, if the color balance is adjusted to that color ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
3/($6(48,77+,602'(
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
35,17(5(1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'( 5(*8/$5
3/($6(6(/(&77+(02'( )$&725< 25 6(59,&( $1'3/$&(
7(6735,17('7(673$7&+21'2&80(17*/$667+(135(66>(;(&87(@
/,*+7$5($$7/()76,'(21'2&80(17*/$66
Also when the service target is selected in procedure 4) to exe- %NTER THE 3)- MODE AND SELECT !
X PAPER !UTOMATIC SELECTION
cute the automatic adjustment and a satisfactory result is not
obtained, perform the manual color balance adjustment (ADJ 0RESS ;%8%#54%= KEY
4HE ADJUSTMENT PATTERN IS PRINTED
11E (2)).
If the color balance or density is not in the satisfactory level even #HECK THE PRINTED ADJUSTMENT CHECK PATTERN
AND SELECT A TARGET ADJUSTMENT COLOR WITH THE
after execution of the automatic and manual adjustments, there COLOR KEYS # - 9 +
may be another cause.
3ELECT A TARGET ADJUSTMENT DENSITY LEVEL WITH THE
Troubleshoot the cause, repair or perform necessary works, and SCROLL KEY
repeat the adjustment from the beginning.
%NTER THE ADJUSTMENT VALUE WITH KEY
9%3
#HECK THE SELF PRINT CHECK PATTERN TO CHECK THE PRINTER COLOR BALANCE AND
DENSITY ADJUSTMENT
5SE 3)- TO PRINT THE SELF PRINT 5SE 3)- TO PRINT THE SELF PRINT
CHECK PATTERN AND CHECK THE CHECK PATTERN AND CHECK THE
PRINTER COLOR BALANCE AND DENSITY PRINTER COLOR BALANCE AND DENSITY
./
!RE THE COLOR BALANCE AND
DENSITY AT THE SATISFACTORY
LEVEL
9%3
%ND
)F SATISFACTORY COLOR BALANCE AND DENSITY ARE NOT
OBTAINED WITH THE ADJUSTMENT CHECK THE PRINT
ENGINE FOR ANY PROBLEMS
(˖ ˖32,17
)˖ ˖32,17
*˖ ˖32,17
Low density High density
+˖ ˖32,17
,˖ ˖32,17
;
-˖ ˖32,17
.˖ ˖32,17 /
/˖ ˖32,17
(;(&87( 2.
. & 0 < %
10-key $M
OK CMY
blend
# $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / 0 1 2 3
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
1) The max. density section is not blurred.
7(67 &/26(
35,17(5(1*,1(&2/25%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(173*
2) Patch C or D of each of Y, M, C, and BK is very slightly copied.
$˖ ˖32,17
$˖ %˖ ˖32,17
+˖ ˖32,17
The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter
,˖ ˖32,17 level to the darker level. The density changing direction must
-˖ ˖32,17 not be reversed.
.˖ ˖32,17
The density level of each color must be almost at the same
/˖ ˖32,17
+˖ ˖32,17 The adjustment value is set in the range of (1 - 999). When
,˖ ˖32,17 SIM 67-24 is used to adjust the automatic color balance and
-˖ ˖32,17 density, all the set values of this simulation are set to 500.
.˖ ˖32,17
/˖ ˖32,17
To increase the density, increase the adjustment value. To
. & 0 < (;(&87( 2.
decrease the density, decrease the adjustment value.
Repeat procedures of 2) - 5) until the condition of 3) is satis-
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (A4/11" x 8.5" or A3/11" x 17" paper is fied.
automatically selected.)
The color balance adjustment pattern is printed. When the overall density is low, or when the density is high
and patch A is copied, use the arrow key to adjust all the
adjustment values of A - Q (MAX) to a same level collectively.
Then, adjust each patch density individually. This is an efficient
way of adjustment.
Referring to the black/gray patches, adjust so that each pro-
cess (CMY) black/gray patch color balance of A - Q (MAX)
approaches the black/gray patch level as far as possible.
This adjustment is used to adjust the image density in the low den-
sity area in the printer mode.
Adjust to reproduction setting of the low density image.
This adjustment is required in the following cases.
* When it is required not to reproduce images in the low density 2.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
35,17(5+,*+/,*+7$'-8670(17
$˖ ˖$3$7&+,1387 (1*,1(0$;,080'(16,7<$'-8670(1702'()2535,17(5
$˖ $˖ ˖&0< (1$%/(',6$%/(
$˖ %˖ ˖. (1$%/(',6$%/(
˷̚˹
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖&<$10$;7$5*(7
'˖ ˖0$*(17$0$;7$5*(7
(˖ ˖<(//2:0$;7$5*(7
)˖ ˖%/$&.0$;7$5*(7
2.
2.
10-key
2) Select the item A, B with the scroll key.
OK
Setting
Display/Item Content Default
range
A CMY 0 CMY engine maximum 0-1 0
(0: ENABLE density correction mode
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( 1:DISABLE) Enable
35,17(5+,*+/,*+7$'-8670(17
1 CMY engine maximum
$˖ ˖$3$7&+,1387
$˖ density correction mode
˷̚˹ Disable
B K 0 K engine maximum 0-1 1
(0:ENABLE density correction mode
1: DISABLE) Enable
1 K engine maximum
density correction mode
Disable
C CYAN MAX Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500
TARGET CYAN maximum density
2.
correction
b. Setting procedure
Thin line
1) Enter the SIM 26-53 mode.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(1$%/,1*2)$8720$7,&&2/25&$/,%5$7,21
$˖ ˖&23< <(612
$˖ %˖ ˖35,17(5 <(612
˷̚˹
10-key
ADJ 12 Manual paper feed tray paper
OK size (width) sensor adjustment
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
* The manual paper feed tray section has been disassembled.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(1$%/,1*2)$8720$7,&&2/25&$/,%5$7,21 * The manual paper feed tray unit has been replaced.
$˖ ˖&23< <(612
$˖
* U2 trouble has occurred.
%˖ ˖35,17(5 <(612
˷̚˹
* The PCU PWB has been replaced.
* The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced.
2.
(;(&87(
EXECUTE
3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted. Then it returns to the normal
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
%<3$6675$<$'-8670(17
display.
0$;326,7,21$'-8670(17
The maximum width position detection level of the manual
(;(&87,1*
paper feed guide is recognized.
4) Set the manual paper feed guide to the A4 size.
5) Press [EXECUTE] key.
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted. Then it returns to the normal
display.
The A4 size width position detection level of the manual paper
feed guide is recognized.
(;(&87( 6) Set the manual paper feed guide to the width for the A4R size.
7) Press [EXECUTE] key.
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted. Then it returns to the normal
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( display.
%<3$6675$<$'-8670(17
3 $ 326,7,21$'-8670(17 Set the manual paper feed guide to the width for the A4R size.
35(66>(;(&87(@7267$57
8) Open the manual paper feed guide to the minimum width posi-
tion.
9) Press [EXECUTE] key.
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted. Then it returns to the normal
display.
The minimum width position detection level of the manual
paper feed guide is recognized.
If the above operation is not completed normally, "ERROR" is
(;(&87(
displayed.
EXECUTE When the operation is completed normally, the above data are
saved to the memory and "COMPLETE" is displayed.
Repeat the above procedure to adjust
the A4R width and the minimum
position width.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
%<3$6675$<$'-8670(17
&203/(7(
(;(&87(
(;(&87(
2) Open the DSPF/RSPF paper feed guide to the maximum width
position. Loosen the original cover switch actuator adjustment screw
and slide the actuator position so that the display OCSW is
returned to the normal display when the height of the arm unit
top from the table glass is 20.2 +/- 0.25mm by slowly tilting the
document detection arm unit in the arrow direction and adjust.
(If the ON timing of the original cover switch is shifted, the doc-
ument detection function may malfunction.)
(;(&87(
EXECUTE
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
'2&80(176,=(3+2726(16256(783
2) Precisely press the cross mark points (4 positions).
6(7$1$6,=( h &23<3$3(5217+(25,*,1$/7$%/(
$1':,7+7+(2&23(1'7851217+((;(&87(.(<
When the cross mark is pressed precisely, a buzzer sounds
and the display is reversed. When all the four points are
pressed and the touch panel adjustment is completed, the dis-
play returns to the simulation sub number entry screen.
In case of an error, the display returns to the entry screen
again.
Check to confirm that there is no shift between the display
(;(&87( frame and the detection position when the touch panel is
pressed.
Adjustment
failed
Adjustment completed EXECUTE * When pressing the touch panel, never use a sharp tip (such
as a needle or a pin).
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
'2&80(176,=(3+2726(16256(783
'2&80(176,=(3+2726(1625/(9(/,6$'-867('
ADJ 16 Fusing paper guide position
adjustment
Normally there is no need to perform this adjustment. In the follow-
ing cases, perform this adjustment.
* When a paper jam occurs in the fusing section.
* When wrinkles are made on paper in the fusing section.
* When an image deflection or an image blur is generated in the
(;(&87(
paper rear edge section.
1) Loosen the fusing paper guide fixing screws on the two posi-
tions in the front/rear frame direction.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
'2&80(176,=(3+2726(16256(783 2) Use the fusing paper guide position scale as the reference to
3+2726(1625(5525326,7,21
3'3'3'3'3'3'3'
shift the paper guide in the arrow direction A or B.
A
(;(&87(
240 0.5mm
17-A Print image magnification ratio adjustment
(main scanning direction) (Print engine)
(Manual adjustment)
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
* When the LSU (writing) unit is replaced.
* U2 trouble has occurred.
* The PCU PWB has been replaced.
* The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced. If the above requirement is not met, do the following steps.
1) Enter the SIM 50-10 mode. 6) Change the set value of set item A.
When the set value is changed by 1, the dimension is changed
by 0.1mm.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
3$3(5&(17(52))6(76(783
When the set value is increased, the BK image magnification
$˖
$˖ ˖%.0$* ratio in the main scanning direction is increased. When the set
%˖ ˖0$,10)7 value is decreased, the BK image magnification ratio in the
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖0$,1&6
main scanning direction is decreased.
'˖ ˖0$,1&6
(˖ ˖0$,1&6 Repeat procedures 2) - 6) until a satisfactory result is obtained.
)˖ ˖0$,1&6
*˖ ˖0$,1/&&
+˖ ˖0$,1$'8
,˖ ˖68%0)7 17-B Print image print area adjustment
-˖ ˖68%&6
.˖ ˖68%&6
(Print engine) (Manual adjustment)
/˖ ˖68%/&&
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
(;(&87( 2.
* When the LSU is replaced or removed.
* When a paper tray is replaced.
EXECUTE EXECUTE
* When the paper tray section is disassembled.
End of print * When the manual feed tray is replaced.
* When the manual feed tray is disassembled.
7(67
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26( * When the duplex mode paper transport section is disassembled.
3$3(5&(17(52))6(76(783
$˖ ˖%.0$*
* When the registration roller section is disassembled.
$˖
%˖ ˖0$,10)7 * U2 trouble has occurred.
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖0$,1&6
'˖ ˖0$,1&6
* The PCU PWB has been replaced.
(˖ ˖0$,1&6 * The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced.
)˖ ˖0$,1&6
*˖ ˖0$,1/&& NOTE: Before execution of this adjustment, be sure to execute the
+˖ ˖0$,1$'8
print image magnification ratio adjustment (ADJ 16A) (main
,˖ ˖68%0)7
-˖ ˖68%&6
scanning direction) (print engine) (manual adjustment).
.˖ ˖68%&6
/˖ ˖68%/&&
(;(&87( 2.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26(
7(67
3$3(5&(17(52))6(76(783 /($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(
$˖ ˖%.0$* $˖ ˖55&$
$˖
%˖ ˖0$,10)7 $˖ %˖ ˖55&%&6
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖0$,1&6 ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖55&%&6
'˖ ˖0$,1&6 '˖ ˖55&%/&&
(˖ ˖0$,1&6 (˖ ˖55&%0)7
)˖ ˖0$,1&6 )˖ ˖55&%$'8
*˖ ˖0$,1/&& *˖ ˖/($'
10-key
EXECUTE EXECUTE
OK
End of print
7(67
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26( ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
3$3(5&(17(52))6(76(783 /($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(
$˖ ˖%.0$* $˖ ˖55&$
$˖ $˖
%˖ ˖0$,10)7 %˖ ˖55&%&6
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖0$,1&6 ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖55&%&6
(;(&87( 2. 2.
2) Set A4 (11" x 8.5") paper to all the paper feed trays. Select an 6) Select an adjustment item (DENA, DENB, FRONT/REAR) with
adjustment item of the target paper feed tray among items B - the scroll key, enter the adjustment value, and press [OK] key.
N and enter the adjustment value. Then select item "O" to
select the paper feed tray which is to be used for executing Setting Default
Item/Display Content
test printing. range value
Void area DENA Lead edge void area 1 - 99 40
3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
adjustment adjustment
The adjustment pattern is printed. DENB Rear edge void area 1 - 99 30
4) Check the adjustment pattern to confirm that the items below adjustment
are in the range of the standard values. FRONT/ FRONT/REAR void 1 - 99 20
REAR area adjustment
Content Standard adjustment value Sub DENB-MFT Manual feed 1 - 99 50
X Lead edge void area 4.0 +/- 1.0mm scanning correction value
Y Rear edge void area 2.0 - 5.0mm direction DENB-CS1 Tray 1 correction value 1 - 99 50
Z1/Z2 FRONT/REAR void area 2.0 +/- 2.0mm print area DENB-CS2 Tray 2 correction value 1 - 99 50
correction DENB-CS3 Tray 3 correction value 1 - 99 50
value
Z1 DENB-CS4 Tray 4 correction value 1 - 99 50
2.0 2.0mm DENB-LCC LCC correction value 1 - 99 50
DENB-ADU ADU correction value 1 - 99 55
DENB-HV Heavy paper 1 - 99 50
correction value
$˖
$˖ ˖%.0$* RV: REAR VOID AREA
%˖ ˖0$,10)7
FV: FRONT VOID AREA
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖0$,1&6
'˖ ˖0$,1&6 RV + FV +/- 4.0mm
(˖ ˖0$,1&6
)˖ ˖0$,1&6
RV = 2.0 +/- 2.0mm
*˖ ˖0$,1/&& FV = 2.0 +/- 2.0mm
+˖ ˖0$,1$'8
,˖ ˖68%0)7
If the above requirement is not met, do the following steps.
-˖ ˖68%&6 6) Change the adjustment value.
.˖ ˖68%&6
/˖ ˖68%/&&
Enter the adjustment value and press the [OK] key or the
(;(&87( 2. [EXECUTE] key.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment pattern is
EXECUTE printed.
EXECUTE
When the adjustment value is increased, the adjustment pat-
End of print tern is shifted to the front frame side. When it is decreased, the
adjustment pattern is shifted to the rear frame side.
7(67
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26( When the set value is changed by 1, the shift distance is
3$3(5&(17(52))6(76(783
changed by about 0.1mm.
$˖ ˖%.0$*
$˖
%˖ ˖0$,10)7 Repeat procedures 3) - 6) until the conditions of procedure 5)
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖0$,1&6 are satisfied.
'˖ ˖0$,1&6
(˖ ˖0$,1&6
In case a satisfactory result cannot be obtained by repeating
)˖ ˖0$,1&6 the above procedures, perform the following procedure.
*˖ ˖0$,1/&&
+˖ ˖0$,1$'8
,˖ ˖68%0)7
-˖ ˖68%&6
.˖ ˖68%&6
/˖ ˖68%/&&
(;(&87( 2.
NOTE:
Normally if the adjustment is executed by ADJ 4 (automatic adjust-
ment), there is no need to execute this adjustment.
Only when the manual adjustment is required, execute this adjust-
ment.
In other words, this manual adjustment is executed when a satis-
factory result is not obtained from the automatic adjustment (ADJ 2) Enter the SIM 48-1 mode.
4).
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
0$*1,),&$7,21$'-8670(17
$˖ ˖&&' 0$,1
$˖ %˖ ˖&&' 68%
NOTE:
Normally if the adjustment is executed by ADJ 4 (automatic adjust-
ment), there is no need to execute this adjustment.
Only when the manual adjustment is required, execute this adjust- 2.
ment.
In other words, this manual adjustment is executed when a satis- 3) Make a normal copy and obtain the copy magnification ratio.
factory result is not obtained from the automatic adjustment (ADJ Press [CLOSE] key to shift from the simulation mode to the
4). copy mode, and make a copy.
4) Check that the copy magnification ratio is within the specified
range (100 +/- 1.0%).
If the copy magnification ratio is within the specified range (100
+/- 1.0%), the adjustment is completed. If the copy magnifica-
tion ratio is not within the specified range, perform the follow-
ing procedure.
5) Change the CCD (MAIN) adjustment value of Simulation 48-1.
When the adjustment value is increased, the copy magnifica-
tion ratio is increased.
When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the copy magnifi-
cation ratio is changed by about 0.02%.
Repeat the procedures 3) - 5) until the copy magnification ratio
is within the specified range (100 +/- 1.0%).
(˖ ˖63)% 0$,1
Paper pass direction
A4 size
)˖ ˖63)% 68%
2.
(Both the front surface
and the back surface)
10mm 10mm
3) Make a normal copy and obtain the copy magnification ratio.
Go to the copy mode, and make a copy.
2) Make a duplex copy at the normal ratio on A4 paper.
Copy magnifi- (Original dimension - Copy dimension) 3) Measure the images on the copy paper and the original
cation ratio 100% images.
Original dimension
(Example 1)
Copy A
original
10 20 90 100 110
(Shorter than
the original)
copy
10 50 100 150 200 250
Scale
(Original) 10 20 90 100 110
10 50 100 150 200 250
(Example 2)
Copy B
10 20 90 100 110
(Longer than
the original)
B CCD(SUB)
adjustment (CCD)
SCAN sub scanning 1 - 99 50
A4 size
magnification ratio
adjustment (CCD)
C SPF(MAIN) DSPF document front surface 1 - 99 50
magnification ratio
adjustment (Main scan)
D SPF(SUB) DSPF document front surface 1 - 99 50
magnification ratio 10mm
adjustment (Sub scan)
E SPFB(MAIN) DSPF document back 1 - 99 50 2) Make a duplex copy at the normal ratio on A4 paper.
surface magnification ratio 3) Measure the images on the copy paper and the original
adjustment (Main scan) images.
RSPF
10
Setting Default
Item Display Content
range value
50
adjustment (CCD)
B CCD(SUB) SCAN sub scanning 1 - 99 50
original
150
50
magnification ratio
adjustment (CCD)
200
100
copy
150
magnification ratio
adjustment (Sub scan)
E SPFB(MAIN) RSPF document back 1 - 99 50 4) Obtain the image magnification ratio according to the following
surface magnification ratio formula:
adjustment (Main scan)
F SPFB(SUB) RSPF document back 1 - 99 50
Image magnification ratio = Original size / Original size x 100
surface magnification ratio (%)
adjustment (Sub scan) Image magnification ratio = 99 / 100 x 100 = 99 (%)
If the image magnification ratio is within the specified range
6) Select an adjustment item of SPF (MAIN)/SPFB (MAIN) with
(100 +/- 0.8%), there is no need to perform the adjustment.
the scroll key.
If it is not within the specified range, perform the following pro-
SPF (MAIN) Main scanning direction image magnification ratio cedures.
(Front surface)
SPFB (MAIN) Main scanning direction image magnification ratio
(Back surface)
ADJ 19 Scan image off-center If the above condition is not satisfied, perform the following
procedures.
adjustment 3) Enter the SIM 50-12 mode.
(Manual adjustment)
NOTE: ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
25,*,1$/&(17(52))6(76(783
Normally if the adjustment is executed by ADJ 4 (automatic adjust- $˖ ˖2&
ment), there is no need to execute this adjustment. $˖ %˖ ˖63) 6,'(
ment.
In other words, this manual adjustment is executed when a satis-
factory result is not obtained from the automatic adjustment (ADJ
4).
$˖ ˖6,'(
$˖
Paper transport direction %˖ ˖6,'(
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖/($'B('*( 6,'(
,˖ ˖2))6(7B63)
-˖ ˖2))6(7B63)
.˖ ˖6&$1B63(('B63)
2.
SIM50-12
Setting Default
Item Display Content
range value
Draw a line at the center of the
front surface and the back surface A OC Document table image off- 1 - 99 50
of paper in parallel with the paper center adjustment
transport direction. B SPF(SIDE1) SPF front surface image off- 1 - 99 50
center adjustment
C SPF(SIDE2) SPF back surface image off- 1 - 99 50
2) Set the adjustment chart to the RSPF.
center adjustment
3) Make a duplex copy in the normal magnification ratio from the
manual paper feed tray, and check the image position on the A - C: When the adjustment value is increased, the image
front surface and the back surface of the copy paper. position is shifted to the rear frame side.
1step = 0.1mm
original copy SIM50-6
DSPF
a
Setting Default
Item/Display Content
range value
A SIDE1 Front surface 1 - 99 50
document scan
position adjustment
b (CCD)
B SIDE2 Back surface 1 - 99 50
document scan
position adjustment
(CCD)
If the difference is within the range of 0 +/- 2.7mmm there is no C Image loss LEAD_ Front surface lead 0 - 99 20
need to perform the adjustment. amount EDGE edge image loss
If the adjustment is required, perform the following procedures. setting (SIDE1) amount setting
D SIDE1 FRONT_ Front surface side 0 - 99 20
4) Enter the SIM 50-12 or 50-6 mode.
REAR image loss amount
(SIM50-12) (SIDE1) setting
E TRAIL_ Front surface rear 0 - 99 40
EDGE edge image loss
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
25,*,1$/&(17(52))6(76(783
(SIDE1) amount setting
$˖ ˖2& F Image loss LEAD_ Back surface lead 0 - 99 40
$˖ %˖ ˖63) 6,'( amount EDGE edge image loss
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖63) 6,'(
setting (SIDE2) amount setting
G SIDE2 FRONT_ Back surface side 0 - 99 20
REAR image loss amount
(SIDE2) setting
H TRAIL_ Back surface rear edge 0 - 99 20
EDGE image loss amount
(SIDE2) setting
I OFFSET_SPF1 DSPF front surface 1 - 99 50
2. document off-center
adjustment
J OFFSET_SPF2 DSPF back surface 1 - 99 50
document off-center
adjustment
K SCAN_SPEED_SPF1 DSPF document front 1 - 99 50
surface magnification
ratio (Sub scan)
/˖ ˖2))6(7B2&
200% in the document table mode.
2. When the adjustment value of RRCA is proper, the lead edge
image from 4.0mm is not copied in either of 100% and 200%
10-key copy scale.
OK If not, change and adjust the RRCA value.
(Adjust so that the lead edge image from 4.0mm is not copied
in either of different copy magnification ratios.)
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is
/($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(
$˖ ˖55&$
obtained.
$˖ %˖ ˖55&%&6
+˖ ˖6,'(
,˖ ˖'(1$
-˖ ˖'(1%
.˖ ˖)52175($5
100%
5mm
/˖ ˖2))6(7B2&
2.
Image area
L T
R Back surface
BACK
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
63)6&$11,1*326,7,21$'-8670(17
$872 0$18$/
L T
Draw arrows.
3) Enter an adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] key. 2) Enter the SIM 50-6 mode.
When the set value is increased, the distance from the home
position to the RSPF scanning position is increased. When the ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$˖ ˖6,'(
0.1mm. $˖
%˖ ˖6,'(
Perform the procedures of 1) - 3) until a satisfactory result is ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖/($'B('*( 6,'(
NOTE: After execution of this adjustment, be sure to execute ADJ )˖ ˖/($'B('*( 6,'(
-˖ ˖2))6(7B63)
.˖ ˖6&$1B63(('B63)
2.
Copy image
ADJ 21 Finisher and punch unit
adjustments (alignment, punch
hole position, staple position)
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
Image loss 2.0 - 5.0mm
* When the finisher is disassembled.
If the above condition is not satisfied, perform the following * When the finisher control PWB is replaced.
procedure. * When the punch unit is disassembled.
2) Enter the adjustment value of TRAIL EDGE (SIDE1/SIDE2) * When the punch control PWB is replaced.
with 10-key, and press [OK] key.
* When the alignment is improper.
TRAIL EDGE (SIDE 1):
* When the punch hole position is shifted.
Rear edge image loss adjustment value (Front surface)
* When the staple position is shifted.
TRAIL EDGE (SIDE 2):
Rear edge image loss adjustment value (Back surface) 1) Enter the SIM 3-10 mode.
(When the adjustment value is increased, the rear edge image
loss is increased.) ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
'˖ ˖67$3/()5217
(˖ ˖67$3/(%27+
*˖ ˖381&+&(17(5
1) Make a duplex copy in 100% in the DSPF/RSPF mode. Check +˖ ˖381&++2/(
to confirm that the image losses on the front frame side and
the rear frame side are 2.0 +/- 2.0mm on the front surface and
the back surface.
Copy image
Change
when the
Setting Default Purpose (Case where the Change when the adjustment value is
Item/Display Content adjustment
range value adjustment is required) increased or decreased
value is
changed by 1
A FRONT Alignment position 2 - 18 10 This adjustment is used to F side paper When the adjustment value is 0.3665mm
ADJUST adjustment (front) adjust the paper alignment alignment increased, the alignment plate stop
width when the paper stop position position is shifted to the R side.
alignment is improper. (F/R When the adjustment value is
Alignment is determined by direction) decreased, the alignment plate stop
the combination of the both position is shifted to the F side.
adjustment values of FRONT
ADJUST and REAR ADJUST.
B REAR Alignment position 2 - 18 10 When changing the R side paper When the adjustment value is 0.3665mm
ADJUST adjustment (Rear) adjustment values of FRONT alignment increased, the alignment plate stop
ADJUST and REAR ADJUST stop position position is shifted to the F side.
from the default values, be (F/R When the adjustment value is
sure to change them by the direction) decreased, the alignment plate stop
same variation. position is shifted to the R side.
C STAPLE Stapling position 68 - 132 100 When the staple position on Staple When the adjustment value is 0.155mm
REAR adjustment (one the R side is shifted, perform position increased, the staple position is
position at the the adjustment. (Stapler stop shifted to the rear side.
rear) position) When the adjustment value is
(F/R decreased, the staple position is
direction) shifted to the front side.
D STAPLE Stapling position 68 - 132 100 When the staple position on Staple When the adjustment value is 0.155mm
FRONT adjustment (one the F side is shifted, perform position increased, the staple position is
position in front) the adjustment. (Stapler stop shifted to the rear side.
position) When the adjustment value is
(F/R decreased, the staple position is
direction) shifted to the front side.
E STAPLE Stapling position 68 - 132 100 When the staple off-center is Staple When the adjustment value is 0.155mm
BOTH adjustment (Two shifted, perform the position increased, the staple position is
positions, center) adjustment. (Stapler stop shifted to the rear side.
position) When the adjustment value is
(F/R decreased, the staple position is
direction) shifted to the front side.
F STAPLE Stapling position 68 - 132 100 When it is required to change Staple When the adjustment value is 0.155mm
PITCH adjustment (Two the staple interval, perform position increased, the staple interval is
positions, pitch) the adjustment. (Stapler stop increased.
position) When the adjustment value is
(F/R decreased, the staple interval is
direction) decreased.
G PUNCH Punch center 37 - 63 50 When the punch off-center is Punch When the adjustment value is 0.1441mm
CENTER adjustment shifted, perform the position decreased, the punch position is
adjustment. (F/R shifted to the front side.
direction) When the adjustment value is
increased, the punch position is
shifted to the rear side.
H PUNCH Punch hole 42 - 58 50 When the punch hole position Punch When the adjustment value is 0.2584mm
HOLE position is shifted in the transport position increased, the punch position is
adjustment direction, perform the (Paper shifted to the paper lead edge side.
adjustment. transport When the adjustment value is
direction) decreased, the punch position is
shifted to the paper rear edge side.
4K finisher (MX-FN11)
MX-5141N
[6] SIMULATION Service Manual
[BACK] key
NOTE: Do not turn OFF the power when the machine is in the sim-
ulation mode.
If the power switch should be turned OFF in the simulation
mode, a malfunction may be resulted. In this case, turn
OFF/ON the main power source.
MX-5141N SIMULATION 6 – 1
START (Copy mode)
NO Do you YES
Operation is made according want to end the Press the EXIT key.
to the selected mode and item. simulation ?
NO
The display is made according to
the selected some and the item.
NO
The selected mode and
the item are cleared.
MX-5141N SIMULATION 6 – 2
3. List of simulation codes
Main Sub Functions Section
1 1 Used to check the operation of the scanner (reading) unit and the control circuit. Scanner (reading)
2 Used to check the sensors in the scanner (reading) section and the related circuits. Scanner (reading)
5 Used to check the operation of the scanner (reading) unit and the control circuit. Scanner (reading)
2 1 Used to check the operations of the automatic document feeder and the control circuit. DSPF/RSPF
2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in the automatic document feeder section DSPF/RSPF
and the control circuits.
3 Used to check the operations of the loads in the automatic document feeder and the control circuit. DSPF/RSPF
3 2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in the finisher and the control circuit. Finisher
3 Used to check the operation of the load in the finisher and the control circuit. Finisher
10 Used to adjust the finisher. Finisher
4 2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in the desk/large capacity tray (LCC), and the Desk/Large capacity tray (LCC)
control circuit of those.
3 Used to check the operations of the loads in the desk/large capacity tray (LCC), and the control circuit of Desk/Large capacity tray (LCC)
those.
5 Used to check the operations of the paper feed desk paper transport clutch (DTRC) and the LCC paper Desk/Large capacity tray (LCC)
transport clutch (LTRC).
5 1 Used to check the operation of the display, LCD in the operation panel, and control circuit. Operation panel
2 Used to check the operation of the heater lamp and the control circuit. Fusing
3 Used to check the operation of the scanner lamp and the control circuit. Scanner (reading)
4 Used to check the operation of the discharge lamp and the control circuit. Process
6 1 Used to check the operations of the load in the paper transport system (clutches and solenoids) and the Paper transport/Paper exit section
control circuits.
2 Used to check the operations of each fan motor and its control circuit. Others
3 Used to check the operations of the transport unit and the control circuit. Process (Transport)
6 Used to perform fusing pressure release and applying, and to check the operations of the control circuits. Fusing
90 Used to reset the machine to the factory setting. (The scanner is set to the lock enable position) Scanner
7 1 Used to set the operating conditions of aging. Others
6 Used to set the operating intermittent aging cycle.
8 Used to display the warm-up time.
9 Color setting in the color copy test mode (Used to check the copy operation and the image quality for
each color).
12 The document reading number of sheets setting (for aging operation) DSPF/RSPF
8 1 Used to check and adjust the operations of the developing voltage in each print mode and the control Process (Developing)
circuit. * When the middle speed is adjusted, the low speed are also adjusted simultaneously.
2 Used to check and adjust the operation of the main charger grid voltage in each printer mode and the Process (Charging)
control circuit. * When the middle speed is adjusted, the low speed are also adjusted simultaneously.
6 Used to check and adjust the operation of the transport voltage and the control circuit. Process (Transport)
9 2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in the paper reverse section (duplex section) Duplex
and its control circuit.
3 Used to check the operations of the load in the paper reverse section (duplex section) and its control Duplex
circuit.
10 1 Used to check the operations of the toner supply mechanism (toner motor) and the related circuit. Process (Developing)
13 - Used to cancel the self-diag "U1" trouble.
14 - Used to cancel the self-diag H3, H4, H5 troubles.
15 - Used to cancel the self-diag "U6" trouble. LCC
16 - Used to cancel the self-diag "U2" trouble. MFP PWB / PCU PWB / SCU PWB
17 - Used to cancel the self-diag "PF" trouble.
21 1 Used to set the maintenance cycle.
22 1 Used to check the print count value in each section and each operation mode. (Used to check the
maintenance timing.)
2 Used to check the total number of misfeed and troubles. (When the number of total jam is considerably
great, it is judged as necessary for repair.)
3 Used to check misfeed positions and the misfeed count of each position.
* Presumption of the faulty point by this data is possible.
4 Used to check the trouble (self diag) history.
5 Used to check the ROM version of each unit (section). Firmware
6 Used to output the setting/adjustment data (simulation, FAX soft switch, counter), the firmware version,
and the counter list.
8 Used to check the number of operations (counter value) of the finisher, the DSPF/RSPF, and the scan
(reading) unit.
9 Used to check the number of use (print quantity) of each paper feed section. Paper feed, ADU, LCC
10 Used to check the system configuration (option, internal hardware).
11 Used to check the use frequency (send/receive) of FAX. (Only when FAX is installed) FAX
12 Used to check the DSPF/RSPF misfeed positions and the number of misfeed at each position. (When the DSPF/RSPF
number of misfeed is considerably great, it can be judged as necessary for repair.)
13 Used to check the operating time of the process section (OPC drum, DV unit, toner cartridge) and the Process
fusing unit
14 Used to display the use status of the toner cartridge. Process
18 Used to display the user data delete history.
19 Used to check the values of the counters related to the scan - image send.
MX-5141N SIMULATION 6 – 3
Main Sub Functions Section
22 40 Used to display the error code list and the contents.
42 Used to check the JAM/trouble data.
43 JAM data details display
90 Used to output the various set data lists.
23 2 Used to output the trouble history list of paper jam and misfeed. (If the number of troubles of misfeed is
considerably great, the judgment is made that repair is required.)
80 Used to check the operation of paper feed and paper transport in the paper feed section and the paper Paper feed, Paper transport
transport section. Used to output the list of the operation status of the sensor and the detectors in the
paper feed section and the paper transport section.
24 1 Used to clear the jam counter, and the trouble counter. (After completion of maintenance, clear the
counters.)
2 Used to clear the number of use (the number of prints) of each paper feed section.
3 Used to clear the finisher, DSPF/RSPF, and the scan (reading) unit counter.
4 Used to clear the maintenance counter, the printer counters of the transport unit and the fusing unit.
(After completion of maintenance, clear the counters.)
5 Used to clear the developer counter. (After replacement of developer, clear the counter.)
6 Used to clear the copy counter.
9 Used clear the printer mode print counter and the self print mode print counter.
10 Used to clear the FAX counter. (Only when FAX is installed)
12 Used to clear the document filing counter.
15 Used to clear the counters related to the scan mode and the image send.
35 Used to clear the toner cartridge use status data.
25 1 Used to check the operations of the developing section. Process (Developing section)
2 Used to make the initial setting of toner density when replacing developer. (Automatic adjustment) Image process (Photoconductor/
Developing/Transfer/Cleaning)
4 Used to display the operation data of the toner supply quantity. (Not used in the market.) Process
5 Used to display the toner density correction data. (Not used in the market.) Process
26 1 Used to set Yes/No of installation of the right paper exit tray. Paper exit
2 Used to set the paper size of the large capacity tray (LCC). (When the paper size is changed, this Paper feed
simulation must be executed to change the paper size in software.)
3 Used to set the specifications of the auditor. Auditor
(Setting must be made according to the auditor use conditions.)
5 Used to set the count mode of the total counter and the maintenance counter. (A3/11x17 size)
6 Used to set the specifications (paper, fixed magnification ratio, etc.) of the destination.
7 Used to set the machine ID.
8 Counter mode setting (Long scale).
10 Used to set the trial mode of the network scanner.
18 Used to set Disable/Enable of the toner save mode operation. (For the Japan and the UK versions.)
30 Used to set the operation mode corresponding to the CE mark (Europe safety standards). (For slow start
to drive the fusing heater lamp)
32 Used to set the specifications of the fusing cleaning operation. Fusing
35 Used to set the display mode of SIM 22-4 trouble history when a same trouble occurred repeatedly. There
are two display modes: display as one trouble and display as several series of troubles.
38 Used to set Continue/Stop of print when the maintenance life is reached.
41 Used to set Enable/Disable of the magnification ratio automatic select function (AMS) in the center
binding mode.
49 Used to set the print speed of postcards mode.
50 Used to set functions.
51 Used to set the specifications of the serial port operation. (For PCI)
52 Used to set whether non-printed paper (insertion paper, cover paper) is counted up or not.
53 User auto color calibration (color balance adjustment) Inhibit/Allow setting.
65 Used to set the finisher alarm mode.
69 Used to set the operating conditions for toner near end.
71 Used to set the trial mode of the web browsing function.
73 Enlargement continuous shoot, A3 wide copy mode image loss (shade delete quantity) adjustment
74 Used to set the OSA trial mode.
78 Used to set the password of the remote operation panel.
79 Used to set YES/NO of the pop-up display of user data delete result.
MX-5141N SIMULATION 6 – 4
Main Sub Functions Section
27 1 Used to set non-detection of communication error (U7-00) with RIC. (FSS function)
2 Used to set the sender's registration number and the HOST server telephone number. (FSS function)
4 Used to set the initial call and toner order auto send. (FSS function)
5 Used to set the machine tag No. (This function allows the host computer to check the machine tag No.) Communication (RIC/MODEM)
(FSS function)
6 Used to set of the manual service call. (FSS function)
7 Used to set of the enable, alert call out. (FSS function)
9 Used to set the paper transport time recording YES/NO threshold value and shading gain adjustment
retry number. (FSS function)
10 Used to clear the trouble prediction history information. (FSS function)
11 Used to check the serial communication retry number and the scanner gain adjustment retry number
history. (FSS function)
12 Used to check the high density, halftone process control and the automatic registration adjustment error
history. (FSS Function)
13 Used to check the history of paper transport time between sensors. (FSS function)
14 Used to set the FSS function connection test mode.
15 Used to display the FSS connection status.
16 Used to set the FSS alert send.
17 Used to set the FSS paper order alert.
18 Used to clear the FSS paper feed retry counter.
30 1 Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in other than the paper feed section and
the control circuits.
2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in the paper feed section and the control
circuits.
40 2 Manual paper feed tray paper width sensor adjustment. Paper feed
7 Used to set the adjustment value of the manual paper feed tray paper width sensor. Paper feed
41 1 Used to check the operations of the document size sensor and the control circuit.
2 Used to adjust the document size sensor detection level.
3 Used to check the operations of the document size sensor and the control circuit.
43 1 Used to set the fusing temperature in each mode.
2 Used to set the fusing operation and preheating.
20 Used to set the environmental correction under low temperature and low humidity (L/L) for the fusing
temperature setting (SIM 43-1) in each paper mode.
21 Used to set the environment correction under high temperature and high humidity (H/H) for the fusing
temperature setting (SIM 43-1) in each paper mode.
24 Operation setting 2
31 Used to check the operation of the fusing web cleaning. Fusing
32 Used to set various items related to the forcible operation of web cleaning when job end. Fusing
35 Fusing nip operation check. Fusing
44 1 Used to set each correction operation function in the image forming (process) section. Image process (Photoconductor/
Developing/Transfer/Cleaning)
2 Used to adjust the sensitivity of the image density sensor (registration sensor). Process
4 Used to set the conditions of the high density process control operation. Process
6 Used to execute the high density process control forcibly. Process
9 Used to display the result data of the high density process control operation. Image process (Photoconductor/
Developing/Transfer/Cleaning)
12 Used to display the operation data of the high density process control and the image density sensor Image process (Photoconductor/
(registration sensor). Developing)
14 Used to display the output level of the temperature and humidity sensor. Process (OPC drum, development)/
Fusing/LSU
15 Used to set the OPC drum idle rotation. Process
17 Process refresh execution. Process
21 Used to set the halftone process control target. Process
22 Used to display the toner patch density level in the halftone process control operation. Process
24 Used to display the correction target and the correction level in the halftone process control operation. Process
25 Used to set the calculating conditions of the correction value for the halftone process control. Process
26 Used to execute the halftone process control compulsory. Process
27 Used to clear the correction data of the halftone process control. Process
28 Used to set the process control execution conditions. Process
29 Used to set the operating conditions of the process control during a job. Process
31 Used to adjust the OPC drum phase. (Manual adjustment) Process
37 Used to set the development bias correction level in the continuous printing operation.
43 Used to display the identification information of the developing unit. Developing system
61 Used to adjust the color image density sensor. (The adjustment is made according to the input of SIM44-
13 to set the target value of the color sensor gain adjustment.)
62 Used to set the process control execution conditions. Process
MX-5141N SIMULATION 6 – 5
Main Sub Functions Section
46 1 Used to adjust the copy density in the copy mode.
2 Used to adjust the copy density in the copy mode.
4 Used to adjust the density in the image send mode.
5 Used to adjust the density in the image send mode.
8 Used to adjust the image send mode color balance RGB.
9 Used to adjust the scan image density.
10 Used to adjust the copy color balance and the gamma (for each color copy mode).
16 Used to adjust the monochrome copy density and the gamma (for each monochrome copy mode).
19 Used to set the operating conditions for the density scanning (exposure) of monochrome auto copy mode
documents.
21 Copy color balance adjustment (Manual adjustment)
23 Used to set the density correction of copy high density section (High density tone gap supported).
24 Copy color balance adjustment (Auto adjustment)
25 Used to adjust the copy color balance. (Single color copy mode)
26 Used to reset the single color mode color balance set value to the default.
27 Used to adjust the gamma/density of copy images, texts, and line image edges.
30 Used to adjust the resolution in the sub scanning direction in the copy mode.
32 Used to adjust the document background density reproducibility in the monochrome auto copy mode.
36 Used to adjust the colors in the 2-color copy mode.
37 Used to adjust the reproduction capability of monochrome mode color.
38 Used to adjust the black component amount in the color copy mode.
39 Used to adjust the sharpness of FAX send images.
40 Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Collective adjustment of all the modes)
41 Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Normal)
42 Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Fine)
43 Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Super Fine)
44 Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Ultra fine)
45 Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (600dpi).
46 Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (RGB RIP)
47 Used to set the compression rate of copy and scan images (JPEG).
51 Used to adjust the gamma for the copy mode heavy paper mode and the image process mode.
52 Used to set the gamma default for the copy mode heavy paper and the image process mode.
(After execution of either SIM46-54 or SIM46-51, the adjustment value is reset to the initial value.)
54 Used to perform the engine halftone automatic density adjustment (dither).
55 Used to adjust the drop out color in the image send mode (monochrome manual text mode).
58 Used to set the copy mode pseudo resolution. (Smoothing process)
59 Used to perform the copy mode pseudo resolution image process adjustment.
60 Used to adjust the sharpness in the color auto copy mode.
61 Used to adjust the area separation recognition level.
62 Used to set the operating conditions of the ACS, the area separation, the background image process, and
the auto exposure mode.
63 Used to adjust the density in the copy low density section.
65 Used to set the color correction table.
66 Used to adjust the reproduction capability of watermarks in the copy/printer mode.
74 Copy color balance adjustment (Auto adjustment)/Printer color balance adjustment (Auto adjustment)
90 Used to set the process operation of high-compression PDF images.
91 Used to adjust the reproduction capability of black text.
48 1 Used to adjust the scan image magnification ratio (in the main scanning direction and the sub scanning
direction).
5 Used to correction the scan image magnification ratio (in the sub scanning direction). Scanner section
6 Used to adjust the rotation speed of each motor.
49 1 Used to perform the firmware update.
3 Used to update the operation manual in the HDD.
5 Used to perform the watermark update.
10 ACU Firmware upgrade.
50 1 Copy image position, image loss adjustment
5 Used to adjust the print lead edge image position. (PRINTER MODE)
6 Used to adjust the copy image position and the image loss. (DSPF/RSPF mode) DSPF/RSPF
10 Used to adjust the black print image magnification ratio and the off-center position.
(The adjustment is made separately for each paper feed section.)
12 Used to perform the scan image off-center position adjustment.
(The adjustment is made separately for each scan mode.)
20 Image registration adjustment (Main scanning direction)
22 Used to adjust the image registration. (Main scan direction, sub scan direction) (Auto adjustment)/OPC
drum phase adjustment (Auto adjustment)
24 Used to display the detail data of SIM 44-2, 50-20, 21 and 22.
27 Used to perform the image loss adjustment of scanned images in the FAX or image send mode.
28 Used to automatically adjust the image loss, void area, image off-center, and image magnification ratio.
51 1 Used to adjust the ON/OFF timing of the secondary transport voltage.
2 Used to adjust the contact pressure (deflection amount) on paper by the main unit and the DSPF/RSPF
registration roller. (This adjustment is performed when there is a considerable variation in the print image
position on the paper or when paper jams frequently occur.)
MX-5141N SIMULATION 6 – 6
Main Sub Functions Section
53 6 Used to adjust the detection level of the DSPF/RSPF document width.
7 Used to adjust the DSPF/RSPF document size width sensor.
8 Used to adjust the document lead edge reference and the DSPF/RSPF mode document scan position.
9 SPF dirt detection setting.
10 SPF dirt detection execution.
55 1 Used to set the specifications of the engine control operations. (SOFT SW)
2 Used to set the specifications of the scanner control operation. (SOFT SW)
3 Used to set the specifications of the controller operation. (SOFT SW)
10 Used to set the special stamp text. (Taiwan only)
56 1 Used to transport data between HDD - MFP PWB SRAM/EEPROM. (Used to repair the PWB.)
2 Used to backup the data in the EEPROM. SD Card, and HDD (including user authentication data and
address data) to the USB memory. (Corresponding to the device cloning and the storage backup.)
3 Used to backup the document filing data to the USB memory.
4 Used to backup the JOB log data to the USB memory.
5 Used to import the SIM22-6 data to a USB memory in the TEXT format.
6 Used to output the JAM/trouble data.
7 System log backup.
60 1 Used to check the memory operations (read/write) of the MFP PWB.
61 1 Used to check the LSU polygon motor rotation and laser detection. LSU
3 Used to set the laser power
4 Used to print the print image skew adjustment pattern. (LSU unit)
11 Used to correct the laser power automatically.
12 Laser power manual correction LSU. LSU
13 Used to clear the laser power correction value.
62 1 Used to format the hard disk/SD Card. (HDD: Excluding the Operation manual and the watermark data)
(SD Card: User data)
2 Used to check read/write of the hard disk (partial).
3 Used to check read/write of the hard disk (all areas).
6 Used to perform the self diagnostics of the hard disk.
7 Used to print the hard disk self diagnostics error log.
8 Used to format the hard disk/SD Card. (HDD: Excluding the Operation Manual, the watermark data, and
the system area) (SD Card: User data)
10 Used to clear the job completion list data.
11 Used to delete the document filing data.
12 Used to set Enable/Disable of auto format in a hard disk trouble.
13 Used to format the hard disk. (Operation Manual, watermark data only)
14 Used to delete the document filing management data. HDD
20 Used to check the operation of the mirroring hard disk. Mirroring hard disk
63 1 Used to display the shading correction result. Scanner
2 Used to perform shading.
3 Used to perform scanner (CCD) color balance and gamma auto adjustment. Scanner
4 Used to display the SIT chart patch density.
5 Used to perform the scanner (CCD) color balance and gamma default setting.
6 Used to display the scan level and the density level of the copy color balance adjustment patch.
7 Used to register the service target of the copy mode auto color balance adjustment.
8 Used to set the default of the service target of the copy mode auto color balance adjustment.
11 Used to set the target color balance of the copy mode auto color balance adjustment.
64 1 Test print. (Self print) (Color mode)
2 Test print. (Self print) (Monochrome mode)
4 Printer test print. (Self print)
5 Printer test print. (Self print) (PCL)
6 Printer test print. (Self print) (PS)
7 Used to print the adjustment pattern of the test print. (Self print). (The adjustment pattern of SIM46-21 is
printed.)
65 1 Used to adjust the touch panel (LCD display section) detection coordinates. Operation panel section
2 Used to display the touch panel (LCD display section) detection coordinates.
5 Used to check the operation panel key input.
MX-5141N SIMULATION 6 – 7
Main Sub Functions Section
66 1 Used to display the FAX-related soft SW (2 - 150) on the LCD to allow changing the soft SW while FAX
checking with the LCD.
2 Used to enter a country code and set the default value for the country code. FAX
3 Used to check read/write of the EEPROM and the SDRAM on the MODEM controller and display the FAX
result.
4 Used to send the selected signals to the line and the main unit speaker. (Send level: max.) FAX
5 Used to send the selected signal to the line and the main unit speaker. (Send level: Soft SW setting) FAX
(For the kinds of send signals, refer to SIM66-04.)
6 Used to print the confidential registration check table (BOX NO., BOX name, passcode. (If there is no FAX
confidential registration, no print is made.)
7 Used to output all image data saved in the image memory. (Confidential data are also outputted.) FAX
8 Used to send the selected sound messages to the line and the speaker. (Send level: Max.) FAX
9 Used to send the selected sound message to the line and the speaker. (Send level: Soft SW setting) FAX
* For details of sound messages, refer to the sound message table of SIM66-08.
10 Used to clear the FAX and image send image data. (The confidential data are also cleared.) FAX
11 Used to send the selected signal at 300bps to the line and the speaker. (Send level: Max.) FAX
12 Used to send the selected signal at 300bps to the line and the speaker. (Send level: Soft SW setting) FAX
* For the kings of send signals at 300bps, refer to SIM66-11, 300bps send signal table.
13 Used to register dial numbers for SIM66-14/15/16, Dial test. (Up to 20 digits can be registered.) FAX
14 Used to execute the dial pulse (10PPS) send test and to adjust the make time. FAX
15 Used to execute the dial pulse (20PPS) send test and to adjust the make time. FAX
16 Used to execute the DTFM signal send test and to adjust the send level. FAX
17 Used to send the DTMF signal to the line and the speaker. (Send level: Max.) FAX
18 Used to send the DTMF signal to the line and the speaker. (Send level: Soft SW setting) FAX
21 Used to print the selected items (system error, protocol monitor). FAX
22 Used to set the handset sound volume. (This simulation can be executed even though the handset setting FAX
is set to NO. When, however, the handset is not installed, the sound volume cannot be checked.)
(Japan model only)
24 Used to clear the FAST save data. FAX
29 Used to initialize the telephone book data (the one-touch registration table, the FTP/Desktop expansion FAX
table, the group expansion table, the program registration table, the interface memory box table, the meta
data, InboundRouting, and the DocumentAdmin table).
30 Used to display the TEL/LIU status change, The display is highlighted by status change. FAX
31 Used to set ON/OFF the port for output to TEL/LIU. FAX
32 Used to check the fixed data received from the line and to display the result. FAX
33 Used to execute detection of various signals with the line connected and to display the detection result. FAX
When a signal is detected, the display is highlighted.
34 Used to execute the send test and display the time required for sending image data in the test. Used to FAX
execute send test and display. (Unit: ms)
36 Used to check send and receive data from the MODEM controller to the MFP controller or the data line or FAX
the command line individually.
39 Used to check and change the destination setting saved in EEPROM of the FAX BOX. FAX
42 Used to rewrite the program to power control installed in the FAX BOX. FAX
43 Used to write the adjustment value into the power control installed in the FAX BOX. FAX
61 Used to display the FAX-related soft SW (151 - 250) on the LCD to allow changing the soft SW while FAX
checking with the LCD.
62 Used to import the FAX receive data into a USB memory in PDF file type. FAX
67 17 Printer reset Printer
24 Printer color balance adjustment (Auto adjustment) Printer
25 Printer color balance adjustment (Manual adjustment) Printer
26 Used to set the target color balance of the printer mode auto color balance adjustment. Printer
27 Used to set the service target of the printer mode auto color balance adjustment. Printer
28 Used to set the default of the service target of the printer mode auto color balance adjustment. Printer
31 Used to clear the printer calibration value. Printer
33 Used to change the gamma of the printer screen. Printer
34 Used to set the density correction in the printer high density section. Printer
(Support for the high density section tone gap)
36 Used to adjust the density in the low density section. Printer
41 Used to set the two color printing. Printer
42 Used to adjust the color density in the two color printing. Printer
43 Used to adjust the color balance in the two color printing. Printer
45 Used to adjust the printer image filter and trapping.
52 Used to set the default of the gamma of the printer screen. Printer
54 Printer color balance adjustment (Automatic adjustment for each dither) Printer
MX-5141N SIMULATION 6 – 8
4. Details of simulation
2
1
2-1
Purpose Operation test/check Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the auto-
matic document feeder and the control cir-
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the scanner cuit.
(reading) unit and the control circuit.
Section DSPF/RSPF
Section Scanner (reading)
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the operation mode and the speed with the touch panel
1) Select the operation speed with the touch panel key. key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Scanning is once performed at the speed corresponding to the The DSPF/RSPF repeats paper feed, transport, and paper exit
scan resolution (operation speed). operations at the speed corresponding to the scan resolution
(operation speed).
Item/Display Operation mode Default value
OC SCAN 300DPI 300DPI 300DPI When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
(372.0mm/s) (372.0mm/s) [DSPF]
400DPI 400DPI
(372.0mm/s) Item/Display Operation mode Default value
600DPI 600DPI (SINGLE) 300DPI 300DPI 300DPI
(248.0mm/s) (372.0mm/s) (372.0mm/s)
1200DPI 1200DPI 400DPI 400DPI
(124.0mm/s) (372.0mm/s)
600DPI 600DPI
(248.0mm/s)
(DOUBLE) 300DPI 300DPI 300DPI
1-2 (372.0mm/s) (372.0mm/s)
400DPI 400DPI
Purpose Operation test/check
(372.0mm/s)
Function (Purpose) Used to check the sensors in the scanner 600DPI 600DPI
(reading) section and the related circuits. (248.0mm/s)
Section Scanner (reading)
[RSPF]
Operation/Procedure
Item/Display Operation mode Default value
The operating status of the sensor is displayed.
(SINGLE) 300DPI 300DPI 300DPI
When "MHPS" is highlighted, the scanner unit is in the home posi- (248.0mm/s) (248.0mm/s)
tion. 400DPI 400DPI
(248.0mm/s)
600DPI 600DPI
(248.0mm/s)
1-5
(DOUBLE) 300DPI 300DPI 300DPI
Purpose Operation test/check (248.0mm/s) (248.0mm/s)
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the scanner 400DPI 400DPI
(reading) unit and the control circuit. (248.0mm/s)
600DPI 600DPI
Section Scanner (reading)
(248.0mm/s)
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the operation speed with the touch panel key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
2-2
Scanning is repeated at the speed corresponding to the scan
resolution (operation speed). Purpose Operation test/check
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated. Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen-
sors and the detectors in the automatic
Item/Display Operation mode Default value document feeder section and the control
OC SCAN 300DPI 300DPI 300DPI circuits.
(372.0mm/s) (372.0mm/s)
Section DSPF/RSPF
400DPI 400DPI
(372.0mm/s) Operation/Procedure
600DPI 600DPI The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis-
(248.0mm/s) played.
1200DPI 1200DPI
The code names of the sensors and the detectors which are active
(124.0mm/s)
are highlighted.
MX-5141N SIMULATION 6 – 9
[DSPF]
[RSPF]
Display Content
Display Content
SSET DSPF installation detector
SPUM_F RSPF paper feed motor (normal rotation)
SOCD DSPF open/close sensor
SPUM_R RSPF paper feed motor (reverse rotation)
SCOV DSPF upper door open/close sensor
SPFM_F RSPF transport motor (normal rotation)
SLCOV DSPF lower door open/close sensor
SPFM_R RSPF transport motor (reverse rotation)
SPED1 DSPF document upper limit sensor
SRRC RSPF registration roller clutch
SPED2 DSPF document empty sensor
SRVC RSPF reverse clutch
SPPD1 DSPF document pass sensor 1
SPRS RSPF pressure release solenoid
SPPD2 DSPF document pass sensor 2
STMPS Stamp solenoid
SPPD3 DSPF document pass sensor 3
SPPD4 DSPF document pass sensor 4
SPPD5 DSPF document pass sensor 5
SPOD DSPF document exit sensor
SPRDMD DSPF document random sensor
SPLS1 DSPF document length detection short sensor
3
SPLS2 DSPF document length detection long sensor
STLD DSPF document feed tray lower limit sensor 3-2
STUD DSPF document feed tray upper limit sensor
Purpose Operation test/check
STMPU DSPF stamp unit installation detection
SWD_LEN DSPF guide plate position (Unit: 0.1mm) Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen-
SWD_AD DSPF document detection volume output AD value sors and the detectors in the finisher and
the control circuit.
NOTE: SWD_LEN and SWD_AD are not ON/OFF display. Section Finisher
[RSPF] Operation/Procedure
Display Content The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis-
SSET RSPF installation detector played.
SOCD RSPF open/close sensor The code names of the sensors and the detectors which are active
SCOV RSPF upper cover open/close sensor are highlighted.
SPED RSPF document sensor NOTE: When the punch module is installed, the code names are
SPPD1 RSPF document pass sensor 1 displayed at the back of the sensor display.
SPPD2 RSPF document pass sensor 2
SPPD3 RSPF document pass sensor 3 Inner finisher (MX-FNX9)
SPPD4 RSPF document pass sensor 4 Display Content
SPLS1 RSPF document length detection short sensor FED Entry port paper detector
SPLS2 RSPF document length detection long sensor FBED Tray paper detector
STMPU RSPF stamp unit installation detection FULD Tray upper limit detector
SWD_LEN RSPF guide plate position (Unit: 0.1mm) FMLLD Tray intermediate lower limit detector
SWD_AD RSPF document detection volume output AD value FLLD Tray lower limit detector
FSLD1 Paper surface detector 1
NOTE: SWD_LEN and SWD_AD are not ON/OFF display.
FSLD2 Paper surface detector 2
FRLD Roller up/down detector
FBRD Belt separation detector
2-3 FFJHPD Alignment plate home position detector front
Purpose Operation test/check FRJHPD Alignment plate home position detector rear
FJPD Alignment guide position detector
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the loads
FSTPD Staple tray paper detector
in the automatic document feeder and the
FSHPD Staple drive home position detector
control circuit.
FSTHPD Staple shift home position detector
Section DSPF/RSPF FSD Staple empty detector
Operation/Procedure FSTD Staple lead edge position detector
1) Select a target item of the operation check with the touch panel FDSW Door open detector
key. FFANLK Fan motor lock detector
MX-5141N SIMULATION 6 – 10
Display Content
1K saddle stitch finisher (MX-FN10) FBED2 Tray 2 paper detector
FCCD Tray approach detector
Display Content FSLD1 Tray 1 paper surface detector
PDPPD1 Paper pass paper transport detector 1 FPDD1 Discharged paper detector
PDPPD2 Paper pass paper transport detector 2 FSLD2 Tray 2 paper surface detector
PDOS Paper pass cover open/close sensor FASHPD Rear edge assist home position detector
FPPD1 Paper delivery detector 1 FSWHPD Oscillation guide home position detector
FPAPHS_F Paper alignment plate home position sensor F FSWOPD Oscillation guide open detector
FPAPHS_R Paper alignment plate home position sensor R FSTPD Staple tray paper detector
FATPD Paper alignment tray paper detector FSHPD Staple drive home position detector
FGHPS Gripper home position sensor FSTHPD Staple shift home position detector
FDTPD Delivery tray paper detector FSD Staple empty detector
FPLD Paper surface detector FSTD Staple lead edge position detector
FPPD2 Paper transport detector 2 FFANLK Fan motor lock detector
FSPHS Saddle plate home position sensor FSJOGD Stapler alignment interference detector
FSTPD Saddle exit tray paper detector FSAD Staple safety SW
FSMRS Saddle motor rotation sensor FSHTD Shutter open detector
FTULD Tray upper limit detector FCD Finisher connection detector
FTLLD Tray lower limit detector FFDD Front cover open detector
FTLMRS Tray lift motor rotation sensor F24V 24V output interruption detector
FSHS Staple home position sensor FPSW1 PUSHSW1 detector
FSSHPS Stapler shift home position sensor FPSW2 PUSHSW2 detector
FSED Staple empty detector FPSW3 PUSHSW3 detector
FSLS Staple lead edge sensor FAED21 Tray 2 area detector 1
FTPS Tray position sensor FAED22 Tray 2 area detector 2
FCD1 Cover detector 1 FAED23 Tray 2 area detector 3
FCD2 Cover detector 2
FSSW1 Safety switch 1 4K saddle stitch finisher (MX-FN18)
FCD Finisher connection detector
Display Content
FSSSW1 Staple safety switch
FSSUC Saddle staple unit detection
FFL Fan lock signal
FSPIND Saddle entry port paper detection
FDRHS Delivery roller home position sensor
FSPDD Saddle paper exit detection
FPPD3 Paper transport detector 3
FSDTPD Saddle tray paper detection
FSATPD Saddle paper alignment tray paper detector
FS1PD Saddle paper detection 1
FSSSW2 Stapler safety switch 2
FS2PD Saddle paper detection 2
FPHHS Paper hold home position sensor
FS3PD Saddle paper detection 3
FSAPHS Saddle alignment plate home position sensor
FSLGE Paper pushing plate motor lock detection
FSPGHS Saddle paper guide home position sensor
FSLGHPD Paper pushing plate home position detection
FSRHS Saddle roller home position sensor
FSLGTD Paper pushing plate lead edge position detection
FPDD Delivery detector
FSFOE Paper folding motor lock detection
FSSHS Saddle staple home position sensor
FSFOHPD Paper folding home position detection
FSSES Saddle staple sensor
FSPPHPD Paper positioning plate home position detection
FSSCS Saddle staple cover sensor
FSPPPD Paper positioning plate paper detection
FSSSHS Finisher saddle stapler shift home position sensor
FSAHPD Alignment plate home position detection
FSSIND Stitcher storage detection
1K saddle stitch finisher punch module (MX-PNX5A/B/C/D)
FSVPPD Vertical path paper detection
Display Content FSCRPD Semi-circular roller phase detection
FPMRS Punch motor rotation sensor FSGHPD Guide home position detection
FPD Punch unit detection FSSHP1 Stitch operation home position detection 1
FPCHPS Punch home position sensor FSSHP2 Stitch operation home position detection 2
FPDFS Punch dust sensor FSSD1 Saddle needle presence detection 1
FPHPS Punch unit home position sensor FSSD2 Saddle needle presence detection 2
FPTS Punch timing sensor FSAHPC Alignment home position sensor connector connection
FPES1 Punch paper edge sensor 1 detection
FPES2 Punch paper edge sensor 2 FSFOHPC Paper folding home position sensor connector
FPES3 Punch paper edge sensor 3 connection detection
FPES4 Punch paper edge sensor 4 FSEJDC Paper exit door sensor connector connection detection
FPMS Punch mode sensor FSFDC Front door open/close sensor connector connection
detection
4K finisher (MX-FN11) FSPPHPC Paper positioning plate home position sensor connector
connection detection
Display Content
FSLGTC Paper pushing plate lead edge position sensor
PDPPD1 Paper pass paper transport detector 1 connector connection detection
PDPPD2 Paper pass paper transport detector 2 FSINDD Inlet port cover open detection
PDOS Paper pass cover open/close sensor FSEJDD Paper exit cover open detection
FED Entry port paper detector FSINDSW Saddle inlet port door detection
FAED1 Tray 1 area detector 1 FSFDSW Front door open detection SW
FAED2 Tray 1 area detector 2 FSEJDSW Paper exit door open detection SW
FAED3 Tray 1 area detector 3 FSPSW1 S-PUSHSW detection
FFJHPD Alignment home position detector front FSBHPC Paper pushing plate home position sensor connector
FRJHPD Alignment home position detector rear connection detection
FBED1 Tray 1 paper detector
MX-5141N SIMULATION 6 – 11
4K finisher punch module (MX-PNX6A/B/C/D) 1K saddle stitch finisher punch module (MX-PNX5A/B/C/D)
Display Content Display Content
FPE Punch motor lock detection FPM Punch motor
FPUC Punch unit connection detection FPSM Punch shift motor
FPHPD Punch home position detection
FPSHPD Punch side registration home position detection 4K finisher (MX-FN11)
FPFDD Punch front door open detection Display Content
FPDD Punch dust detection PDPGS Paper pass paper gate solenoid
FPUDSW Punch upper cover open detection SW PDPTM Paper pass paper transport motor
PDCF Paper pass cooling fan
FFM Entry port transport motor
FAM Bundle paper exit motor
3-3 FFJM Alignment motor front
Purpose Operation test/check FRJM Alignment motor rear
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the load in FSM Staple shift motor
the finisher and the control circuit. FTLM1 Tray 1 lift motor
FTLM2 Tray 2 lift motor
Section Finisher
FFSM Staple motor
Operation/Procedure FSWM Oscillation motor
1) Select the item to be operation checked with the touch panel FASM Rear edge assist motor
key. FINRRS Inlet port roller separation solenoid
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. FBRRS Buffer roller separation solenoid
The selected load performs the operation. FFDRRS Delivery roller separation solenoid
FBES Buffer rear edge holding solenoid
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
FSHC Shutter open/close clutch
Inner finisher (MX-FNX9) FAORC Bundle exit lower roller clutch
Display Content
4K saddle stitch finisher (MX-FN18)
FINRPS Entry port reverse pass solenoid
FSLS Paper surface detection solenoid Display Content
FPDS Paddle solenoid FPPM Saddle paper positioning motor
FBRS Belt separation solenoid FSIFM Saddle entry port transport motor
FRM Registration motor FSFM Saddle transport motor
FSWM Oscillation motor FSFOM Paper folding motor
FAM Bundle paper exit motor FSGM Guide motor
FFJM Alignment motor front FSJM Saddle alignment motor
FRJM Alignment motor rear FSFSTM Stitch motor front
FSM Staple shift motor FSRSTM Stitch motor rear
FFSM Staple motor FSLGM Paper holding motor
FTLM Tray lift motor FSFS Saddle flapper solenoid
FFANM Fan motor FS1DFS Paper deflection plate 1 solenoid
FS2DFS Paper deflection plate 2 solenoid
Inner finisher punch module (MX-PNX1A/B/C/D) FSFCS Transport plate contact solenoid
Display Content
4K finisher punch module (MX-PNX6A/B/C/D)
FPNM Punch motor
FPSM Punch side registration motor Display Content
FPNM Punch motor
1K saddle stitch finisher (MX-FN10) FPSM Punch side registration motor
Display Content
FPTM1 Paper transport motor 1
FPAM_F Paper alignment motor F
FSSM Stapler shift motor
FTLM Tray lift motor
FSM Staple motor
FPAM_R Paper alignment motor R
PDPGS Paper pass paper gate solenoid
PDPTM Paper pass paper transport motor
PDCF Paper pass cooling fan
FPTM2 Paper transport motor 2
FDRLM Delivery roller lift motor
FSDM Saddle motor
FGM Gripper motor
FSPTM Saddle paper transport motor
FSPAM Saddle paper alignment motor
FSPM Saddle positioning motor
FSDSM Saddle staple motor
FPHS1 Paper holding solenoid 1
FPHS2 Paper holding solenoid 2
MX-5141N SIMULATION 6 – 12
3-10
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the finisher.
Section Finisher
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch
panel.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
Inner finisher (MX-FNX9)
Change
when the
Setting Default Purpose (Case where the Change when the adjustment value is
Item/Display Content adjustment
range value adjustment is required) increased or decreased
value is
changed by 1
A FRONT Alignment position 2 - 18 10 This adjustment is used to F side paper When the adjustment value is 0.3665mm
ADJUST adjustment (front) adjust the paper alignment alignment increased, the alignment plate stop
width when the paper stop position position is shifted to the R side.
alignment is improper. (F/R When the adjustment value is
Alignment is determined by direction) decreased, the alignment plate stop
the combination of the both position is shifted to the F side.
adjustment values of FRONT
ADJUST and REAR ADJUST.
B REAR Alignment position 2 - 18 10 When changing the R side paper When the adjustment value is 0.3665mm
ADJUST adjustment (Rear) adjustment values of FRONT alignment increased, the alignment plate stop
ADJUST and REAR ADJUST stop position position is shifted to the F side.
from the default values, be (F/R When the adjustment value is
sure to change them by the direction) decreased, the alignment plate stop
same variation. position is shifted to the R side.
C STAPLE Stapling position 68 - 132 100 When the staple position on Staple When the adjustment value is 0.155mm
REAR adjustment (one the R side is shifted, perform position increased, the staple position is
position at the the adjustment. (Stapler stop shifted to the rear side.
rear) position) When the adjustment value is
(F/R decreased, the staple position is
direction) shifted to the front side.
D STAPLE Stapling position 68 - 132 100 When the staple position on Staple When the adjustment value is 0.155mm
FRONT adjustment (one the F side is shifted, perform position increased, the staple position is
position in front) the adjustment. (Stapler stop shifted to the rear side.
position) When the adjustment value is
(F/R decreased, the staple position is
direction) shifted to the front side.
E STAPLE Stapling position 68 - 132 100 When the staple off-center is Staple When the adjustment value is 0.155mm
BOTH adjustment (Two shifted, perform the position increased, the staple position is
positions, center) adjustment. (Stapler stop shifted to the rear side.
position) When the adjustment value is
(F/R decreased, the staple position is
direction) shifted to the front side.
F STAPLE Stapling position 68 - 132 100 When it is required to change Staple When the adjustment value is 0.155mm
PITCH adjustment (Two the staple interval, perform position increased, the staple interval is
positions, pitch) the adjustment. (Stapler stop increased.
position) When the adjustment value is
(F/R decreased, the staple interval is
direction) decreased.
G PUNCH Punch center 37 - 63 50 When the punch off-center is Punch When the adjustment value is 0.1441mm
CENTER adjustment shifted, perform the position decreased, the punch position is
adjustment. (F/R shifted to the front side.
direction) When the adjustment value is
increased, the punch position is
shifted to the rear side.
H PUNCH Punch hole 42 - 58 50 When the punch hole position Punch When the adjustment value is 0.2584mm
HOLE position is shifted in the transport position increased, the punch position is
adjustment direction, perform the (Paper shifted to the paper lead edge side.
adjustment. transport When the adjustment value is
direction) decreased, the punch position is
shifted to the paper rear edge side.
MX-5141N SIMULATION 6 – 13
1K saddle stitch finisher (MX-FN10)
MX-5141N SIMULATION 6 – 14
Purpose Change when
Setting Default (Case where the Change when the adjustment value is increased the adjustment
Item/Display Content
range value adjustment is or decreased value is
required) changed by 1
I STAPLE BOTH Stapling position 45 - 55 50 When the staple off- Stapling position When the adjustment value is 0.2mm
adjustment (Two center is shifted, the (stapler stop increased, the stapling
positions, center) adjustment is position) position is shifted to the front.
executed. (F/R direction) When the adjustment value is
decreased, the stapling
position is shifted to the rear.
J STAPLE Stapling position 35 - 62 50 When the stapling Stapling position When the adjustment value is 0.2mm
PITCH adjustment (Two interval is to be (stapler stop increased, the pitch of two
positions, pitch) changed, the position) points is widened.
adjustment is (F/R direction) When the adjustment value is
executed. decreased, the pitch of two
points is narrowed.
K PUNCH Punch center 35 - 65 50 When the punch off- Punching position When the adjustment value is 0.2mm
CENTER adjustment center is shifted, the (F/R direction) increased, the hole position is
adjustment is shifted to the front.
executed. When the adjustment value is
decreased, the hole position
is shifted to the rear.
L PUNCH HOLE Punch hole 30 - 60 50 When the punch Punch position When the adjustment value is 0.2mm
position hole position is (paper transport increased, the punch hole
adjustment shifted in the direction) position is shifted to the rear
transport direction, edge of paper.
the adjustment is When the adjustment value is
executed. decreased, the punch hole
position is shifted to the lead
edge of paper.
M SADDLE_ Saddle alignment 35 - 65 50 When the paper Saddle paper When the adjustment value is 0.2mm
ADJUST_POS position alignment capability alignment plate stop increased, the alignment plate
adjustment in the saddle position position is shifted to the
section is improper, (F/R direction) center.
the paper alignment When the adjustment value is
width is adjusted. decreased, the alignment
plate position is shifted to the
outside.
N GRIPPER_ Gripper exit 35 - 65 50 When the gripper Gripper discharge When the adjustment value is 0.2mm
POS position discharge position is position (Gripper increased, the gripper
adjustment shifted, the stop position) discharge position is shifted to
adjustment is (F/R direction) the front.
executed. (When a When the adjustment value is
JAM or trouble decreased, the gripper
occurs, the discharge position is shifted to
adjustment is the rear.
executed.)
4K finisher (MX-FN11)
MX-5141N SIMULATION 6 – 15
Purpose Change when
Setting Default (Case where the Change when the adjustment value is increased the adjustment
Item/Display Content
range value adjustment is or decreased value is
required) changed by 1
C STAPLE Stapling position 94 - 100 When the stapling Stapling position When the adjustment value is 0.2mm
FRONT adjustment (one 106 position on the F (stapler stop decreased, the distance
position in front) side is shifted, the position) between the stapling position
adjustment is (F/R direction) and the paper edge becomes
executed. shorter.
When the adjustment value is
increased, the distance
between the stapling position
and the paper edge becomes
longer.
D PUNCH Punch center 30 - 70 50 When the punch off- Punching position When the adjustment value is 0.2mm
CENTER adjustment center is shifted, the (F/R direction) increased, the hole position is
adjustment is shifted to the front.
executed. When the adjustment value is
decreased, the hole position
is shifted to the rear.
E PUNCH HOLE Punch hole 46 - 52 50 When the punch Punch position When the adjustment value is 0.2mm
position hole position is (paper transport increased, the punch hole
adjustment shifted in the direction) position is shifted to the rear
transport direction, edge of paper.
the adjustment is When the adjustment value is
executed. decreased, the punch hole
position is shifted to the lead
edge of paper.
MX-5141N SIMULATION 6 – 16
Purpose Change when
Setting Default (Case where the Change when the adjustment value is increased the adjustment
Item/Display Content
range value adjustment is or decreased value is
required) changed by 1
F PUNCH Punch center 30 - 70 50 When the punch off- Punching position When the adjustment value is 0.2mm
CENTER adjustment center is shifted, the (F/R direction) increased, the hole position is
adjustment is shifted to the front.
executed. When the adjustment value is
decreased, the hole position
is shifted to the rear.
G PUNCH HOLE Punch hole 46 - 52 50 When the punch Punch position When the adjustment value is 0.2mm
position hole position is (paper transport increased, the punch hole
adjustment shifted in the direction) position is shifted to the rear
transport direction, edge of paper.
the adjustment is When the adjustment value is
executed. decreased, the punch hole
position is shifted to the lead
edge of paper.
LCC
Display Content
LPFD LCC transport detector
4 LUD LCC tray upper limit detector
LDD LCC tray lower limit detector
LPED LCC tray paper empty detector
4-2
LCLD LCC tray open/close detector
Purpose Operation test/check LDSW LCC upper open/close detection switch
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen- LRE LCC lift motor encoder detector
sors and detectors in the desk/large capac- L24VM LCC24V power monitor
ity tray (LCC), and the control circuit of LLSW LCC upper limit switch
those. LCCD LCC main unit connection detector
Section Desk/Large capacity tray (LCC)
Operation/Procedure
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis- 4-3
played.
Purpose Operation test/check
The code names of the sensors and the detectors which are active
are highlighted. Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the loads
in the desk/large capacity tray (LCC), and
Desk the control circuit of those.
Display Content Section Desk/Large capacity tray (LCC)
D1MDC Desk 1 installation detection connector Operation/Procedure
D1PPD Desk 1 paper transport detector
1) Select the load item that is required to operation check with the
D1ULD Desk 1 upper limit detector
touch panel key.
D1PED Desk 1 paper empty detector
D1PQD Desk 1 remaining paper quantity detector
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
D1PRED1 Desk 1 paper rear edge detector 1 The selected load performs the operation.
D1PRED2 Desk 1 paper rear edge detector 2 When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
D1PRED3 Desk 1 paper rear edge detector 3
Desk
D1PRED4 Desk 1 paper rear edge detector 4
D2MDC Desk 2 installation detection connector Display Content
D2PPD Desk 2 paper transport detector D1LM Tray 1 lift-up motor
D2ULD Desk 2 upper limit detector D1PFC Tray 1 paper feed clutch
D2PED Desk 2 paper empty detector D2LM Tray 2 lift-up motor
D2PQD Desk 2 remaining paper quantity detector D2PFC Tray 2 paper feed clutch
D2PRED1 Desk 2 paper rear edge detector 1 DPFM Desk transport motor
D2PRED2 Desk 2 paper rear edge detector 2 DPTRC Desk paper transport clutch
D2PRED3 Desk 2 paper rear edge detector 3
D2PRED4 Desk 2 paper rear edge detector 4 Tandem Desk
Display Content
Tandem Desk D1LUD Tray1 upper limit detector
Display Content D1PED Tray1 paper empty detector
D1LUD Tray1 upper limit detector D1PPD1 Tray1 paper transport detector1
D1PED Tray1 paper empty detector D1PPD2 Tray1 paper transport detector2
D1PPD1 Tray1 paper transport detector1 D1PQD Tray1 remaining paper quantity detector
D1PPD2 Tray1 paper transport detector2 D2LUD Tray2 upper limit detector
D1PQD Tray1 remaining paper quantity detector D2PED Tray2 paper empty detector
D2LUD Tray2 upper limit detector D2PQD Tray2 remaining paper quantity detector
D2PED Tray2 paper empty detector DCDT Tandem tray insertion detector
D2PQD Tray2 remaining paper quantity detector DPFD1 Tray1 paper transport detector
DCDT Tandem tray insertion detector DSW_TD Tandem LCC transport cover open/close detector
DPFD1 Tray1 paper transport detector
DSW_TD Tandem LCC transport cover open/close detector
MX-5141N SIMULATION 6 – 17
LCC Heater lamp operation check method:
Remove the front cabinet upper and the paper exit tray, and the
Display Content
lighting status of each heater lamp can be checked through the
LPFM LCC transport motor
clearance between the fusing pressure release drive gear and the
LLM LCC lift motor
frame fusing section.
LPFC LCC paper feed clutch
LPFS LCC paper feed solenoid
Display Content
LTRC LCC transport clutch
HL_UM Heater lamp main (Front surface of paper heat roller)
HL_US Heater lamp sub (Front surface of paper heat roller)
HL_LM Heater lamp main (Back surface of paper heat roller)
HL_UW Upper assist heater lamp (Warm-up)
4-5
Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the paper
feed desk paper transport clutch (DTRC) 5-3
and the LCC paper transport clutch (LTRC). Purpose Operation test/check
Section Desk/Large capacity tray (LCC) Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the scanner
Operation/Procedure lamp and the control circuit.
Check the ON operation Section Scanner (reading)
Press the button of the code name for checking the ON operation. Operation/Procedure
Checking is started. When the operation is normal, the button on 1) Select the item to be operation checked with the touch panel
the display is highlighted. When it is abnormal, the button is not key.
highlighted. 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Check the OFF operation The scanner lamp lights up for 10 sec.
Press the highlighted button which is ON. When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
When the operation is normal, the highlighted button on the display
returns to the normal display. When it is abnormal, the highlighted
display is maintained. 5-4
Button Content Purpose Operation test/check
DTRC Desk transport clutch Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the dis-
LTRC LCC transport clutch charge lamp and the control circuit.
Section Process
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target of the operation check with the touch panel key.
5 When [ALL] key is pressed, all the items are selected.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
5-1 The selected discharge lamp is lighted for 30 sec.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the display, DL_K Discharge lamp K
LCD in the operation panel, and control cir- DL_C Discharge lamp C
cuit. DL_M Discharge lamp M
Section Operation panel DL_Y Discharge lamp Y
Operation/Procedure
The LCD is changed as shown below.
The contrast changes every 2sec from the current level to MAX ->
MIN -> the current level. During this period, each LED is lighted. 6
The LCD display contrast change and the LED lighting status are
checked.
6-1
Purpose Operation test/check
5-2 Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the load in
the paper transport system (clutches and
Purpose Operation test/check
solenoids) and the control circuits.
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the heater Section Paper transport/Paper exit section
lamp and the control circuit.
Operation/Procedure
Section Fusing
1) Select the item to be operation checked with the touch panel
Operation/Procedure key.
1) Select the item to be operation checked with the touch panel 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
key.
The selected load performs the operation.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
The selected heater lamp operates ON/OFF.
Load operation check method:
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated. The load operation is checked by the operation sound. However,
there are some loads which cannot be checked with the operation
sound.
MX-5141N SIMULATION 6 – 18
Section Item/Display Content 6-3
Transport/ PFM Transport motor Purpose Operation test/check
process RRM Registration motor
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the trans-
POMF (*1) Paper exit motor (normal rotation)
port unit and the control circuit.
POMR (*1) Paper exit motor (reverse rotation)
FUM Fusing motor Section Process (Transport)
CPFM Paper feed motor Operation/Procedure
OSM Shifter motor 1) Select the operation mode with the mode select button.
CPFC Tray vertical transport clutch
1TURC Primary transfer separation clutch Mode select button Content
PCSS Process control shutter solenoid TC1 Primary transfer (normal rotation)
WTNM Waste toner drive motor TC1_R Primary transfer (reverse rotation)
PTCHT PTC heater TC2 Secondary transfer
HPFM Horizontal transport motor
Paper CLUM1 Paper tray lift-up motor (Paper feed tray 1) 2) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation of the mode
feed CPUC1 Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 1) selected in 1) is performed.
CLUM2 Paper tray lift-up motor (Paper feed tray 2)
Mode
CPUC2 Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 2) Mode
select Content NOTE
MPUC Manual paper feed clutch display
button
MPFS Paper pickup solenoid (Manual paper feed)
TC1 BLACK Monochrome Black mode position -> Color
MPGS Manual paper feed gate solenoid mode position mode position -> Black mode
LSU LSUSS LSU shutter solenoid COLOR Color mode position -> Drum separation
position position -> (Black mode
*1: If "Normal rotation" and "Reverse rotation" of a same load are position)
FREE Non-transport
displayed as different items, when the both are selected at the (Repeated in this sequence.)
position
same time, "Normal rotation" is performed. In addition, a
TC1_R BLACK Monochrome Black mode position -> Drum
change in the rotating direction is accepted only when the mode position separation position -> Color
operation is stopped. FREE Non-transport mode position -> (Black mode
position position) (Repeated in this
COLOR Color mode sequence.)
6-2 position
TC2 PRINT Print position Print position - Transfer
Purpose Operation test/check position - Non-transfer
FREE Non-transport
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of each fan position position (Repeated in this
motor and its control circuit. sequence)
Section Others
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the item to be operation checked with the touch panel 6-6
key. Purpose Operation test/check
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. Function (Purpose) Used to perform fusing pressure release
The selected load performs the operation. and applying, and to check the operations
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated. of the control circuits.
Press [ALL] key to select all the fans collectively. Section Fusing
Load operation check method: Operation/Procedure
The load operation is checked by the operation sound. However, 1) Press [FUSER] key to highlight it.
there are some loads which cannot be checked with the operation
2) Press [EXECUTE] key, and fusing pressure applying and fus-
sound.
ing pressure release are repeated.
Display Content During this period, the status of the fusing roller pressure is dis-
POFM Paper exit cooling fan motor played.
(Drives POFM1 and POFM2 at the same time.)
OZFM Ozone fan motor PRINT Fusing pressure Fusing pressure applying -> Fusing
PSFM Power cooling fan motor applying pressure release -> (Fusing pressure
FREE Fusing pressure applying) The operation is repeated.
LSUFM LSU cooling fan motor
release
CCFM Process cooling fan motor
RCFM Rear section cooling fan motor
FUFM Fusing fan motor
PCSFM Toner cooling fan motor
6-90
(Drives PCFM1 and PCFM2 at the same time.)
MFPFAN Controller fan motor Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to reset the machine to the factory
setting. (The scanner is set to the lock
enable position)
Section Scanner
Operation/Procedure
1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The scanner is shifted to the lock enable position and stopped.
MX-5141N SIMULATION 6 – 19
7-9
7
Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Color setting in the color copy test mode
7-1
(Used to check the copy operation and the
Purpose Setting image quality for each color).
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions of Section
aging.
Operation/Procedure
Section Others 1) Select the copy color with the touch panel key.
Operation/Procedure (Two or more colors can be selected.)
1) Select an item to be set with the touch panel key. The key of the selected color is highlighted.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The machine is rebooted in the aging mode. Copying is performed with the selected color.
The aging operation condition set by this mode is maintained here- When [CLOSE] key is pressed, the display goes into the copy oper-
after unless the power is turned off or the setting is changed. ation menu in the simulation mode.
7-8
Purpose Operation display
Function (Purpose) Used to display the warm-up time.
Section
Operation/Procedure
Press [EXECUTE] key.
Counting of the warm-up time is started and the time required for
warm-up is displayed
* Interruption of counting by pressing [EXECUTE] key is inhibited.
MX-5141N SIMULATION 6 – 20
8
8-1
Purpose Operation test/check/adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to check and adjust the operations of
the developing voltage in each print mode
and the control circuit.
* When the middle speed is adjusted, the
low speed are also adjusted simultane-
ously.
Section Process (Developing)
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a speed with [MIDDLE] and [LOW] keys on the touch
panel.
2) Select a target item to be adjusted with scroll keys.
3) Enter the setting value with 10-key. (The value specified on the
label of the high voltage PWB must be entered.)
* When the key is pressed, the setting value of each
item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.
4) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The set value is saved and the voltage entered with step 3) is
output for 30 sec.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the output is terminated.
Adjustment Actual
Item/Display (Mode) Content
range voltage
MIDDLE A MIDDLE Developing K 0 - 600 -450V
SPEED bias voltage
DVB_K (Middle
speed mode)
B MIDDLE Developing C 0 - 600 -450V
SPEED bias voltage
DVB_C (Middle
speed mode)
C MIDDLE Developing M 0 - 600 -450V
SPEED bias voltage
DVB_M (Middle
speed mode)
D MIDDLE Developing Y 0 - 600 -450V
SPEED bias voltage
DVB_Y (Middle
speed mode)
LOW A LOW Developing K 0 - 600 -450V
SPEED bias voltage
DVB_K (Low speed
mode)
B LOW Developing C 0 - 600 -430V
SPEED bias voltage
DVB_C (Low speed
mode)
C LOW Developing M 0 - 600 -430V
SPEED bias voltage
DVB_M (Low speed
mode)
D LOW Developing Y 0 - 600 -430V
SPEED bias voltage
DVB_Y (Low speed
mode)
MX-5141N SIMULATION 6 – 21
8-2
Purpose Operation test/check/adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to check and adjust the operation of
the main charger grid voltage in each
printer mode and the control circuit.
* When the middle speed is adjusted, the
low speed are also adjusted simultane-
ously.
Section Process (Charging)
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a speed with [MIDDLE] and [LOW] keys on the touch
panel.
2) Select a target item to be adjusted with scroll keys.
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key. (The value specified
on the label of the high voltage PWB must be entered.)
* When the key is pressed, the setting value of each
item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.
4) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The set value is saved and the voltage entered with step 3) is
output for 30 sec.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the output is terminated.
8-6
Purpose Operation test/check/adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to check and adjust the operation of
the transport voltage and the control circuit.
Section Process (Transport)
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target item to be adjusted with scroll keys.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Enter the default value specified on the following list.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The set value is saved and the voltage corresponding to the
set value is output for 30 sec.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the output is terminated.
MX-5141N SIMULATION 6 – 22
41cpm machine 51cpm machine
Setting Actual Actual
Item/Display Content Default Default
range output output
value value
value value
K TC2 PLAIN CL SPX Secondary transfer Color Standard Front surface 51 - 255 103 40A 117 50A
bias reference paper
value
L TC2 PLAIN CL DPX Back surface 51 - 255 96 35A 103 40A
M TC2 PLAIN BW SPX Black/White Front surface 51 - 255 90 30A 103 40A
N TC2 PLAIN BW DPX Back surface 51 - 255 83 25A 90 30A
O TC2 HEAVY CL SPX Color Heavy Front surface 51 - 255 76 20A 76 20A
P TC2 HEAVY CL DPX paper Back surface 51 - 255 69 15A 69 15A
Q TC2 HEAVY BW SPX Black/White Front surface 51 - 255 69 15A 69 15A
R TC2 HEAVY BW DPX Back surface 51 - 255 62 10A 62 10A
S TC2 HEAVY2 CL Color Heavy paper 2 51 - 255 76 20A 76 20A
T TC2 HEAVY2 BW Black/White 51 - 255 69 15A 69 15A
U TC2 HEAVY3 CL Color Heavy paper 3 51 - 255 76 20A 76 20A
V TC2 HEAVY3 BW Black/White 51 - 255 69 15A 69 15A
W TC2 GLOSSY CL Gloss paper Color 51 - 255 76 20A 76 20A
X TC2 GLOSSY BW Black/White 51 - 255 69 15A 69 15A
Y TC2 OHP CL OHP Color 51 - 255 76 20A 76 20A
Z TC2 OHP BW Black/White 51 - 255 69 15A 69 15A
AA TC2 ENVELOPE CL Envelope Color 51 - 255 69 15A 69 15A
AB TC2 ENVELOPE BW Black/White 51 - 255 69 15A 69 15A
AC TC2 THIN CL Thin paper Color 51 - 255 103 40A 117 50A
AD TC2 THIN BW Black/White 51 - 255 90 30A 103 40A
AE TC2 CLEANING Cleaning process 51 - 255 59 8A 59 8A
AF TC2 CLEAN LOW SPD Secondary transfer In low speed print 0 - 255 0 0V 0 0V
AG TC2 CLEAN MIDDLE SPD cleaning In middle speed print 0 - 255 0 0V 0 0V
AH TC2 CLEAN CLEANING Cleaning 0 - 255 85 - 500V 85 - 500V
AI VPTC LOW SPEED CL PTC applied voltage Color Low speed 0 - 255 60 2.07KV 60 2.07KV
AJ VPTC MIDDLE SPEED CL control (AC Middle speed 0 - 255 60 2.07KV 60 2.07KV
AK VPTC LOW SPEED BK constant voltage Black/White Low speed 0 - 255 60 2.07KV 60 2.07KV
AL VPTC MIDDLE SPEED BK setting value) Middle speed 0 - 255 60 2.07KV 60 2.07KV
AM FPTC LOW SPEED CL PTC applied voltage Color Low speed 46 - 192 192 0.5KHz 192 0.5KHz
AN FPTC MIDDLE SPEED CL control Middle speed 46 - 192 192 0.5KHz 192 0.5KHz
AO FPTC LOW SPEED BK (frequency setting Black/White Low speed 46 - 192 192 0.5KHz 192 0.5KHz
AP FPTC MIDDLE SPEED BK value) Middle speed 46 - 192 136 0.7KHz 136 0.7KHz
AQ DCPTC LOW SPEED CL PTC applied voltage Color Low speed 0 - 255 123 1.22KV 123 1.22KV
AR DCPTC MIDDLE SPEED CL control (DC Middle speed 0 - 255 179 1.62KV 179 1.62KV
AS DCPTC LOW SPEED BK constant voltage Black/White Low speed 0 - 255 179 1.62KV 179 1.62KV
AT DCPTC MIDDLE SPEED BK setting value) Middle speed 0 - 255 179 1.62KV 179 1.62KV
AU PTC_HT PTC heater 0: OFF 0-6 3 3
operating 1-6: Environment conditions
environment setting (TC environment table 6 steps)
AV HT_DUTY Setting of the 0: OFF 0 - 10 5 5
supply power in 10: Lighting-up fully
PTC heater (10 steps)
constant operation
(Duty ratio setting)
MX-5141N SIMULATION 6 – 23
TNM_K Toner motor K
9 TNM_C Toner motor C
TNM_M Toner motor M
9-2 TNM_Y Toner motor Y
Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen-
sors and detectors in the paper reverse
section (duplex section) and its control cir-
cuit.
13
Section Duplex
13--
Operation/Procedure
Purpose Cancel (Trouble etc.)
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis-
played. Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag "U1" trouble.
The code names of the sensors and the detectors which are active Section
are highlighted. Operation/Procedure
1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
APPD1 ADU paper transport detector 1
APPD2 ADU paper transport detector 2 2) Press [YES] key to execute cancellation of the trouble.
DSW_ADU ADU paper guide open/close detector
9-3
14
Purpose Operation test/check
14--
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the load in
Purpose Cancel (Trouble etc.)
the paper reverse section (duplex section)
and its control circuit. Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag H3, H4, H5
troubles.
Section Duplex
Operation/Procedure Section
1) Select the item to be operation checked with the touch panel Operation/Procedure
key. 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. 2) Press [YES] key to execute cancellation of the trouble.
The selected load performs the operation.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
Display Content 15
ADUM1 ADU motor 1
ADUM2 ADU motor 2
ADUGS ADU gate solenoid
15--
Purpose Clear/Cancel (Trouble etc.)
Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag "U6" trouble.
Section LCC
10 Operation/Procedure
1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
10-1 2) Press [YES] key to execute cancellation of the trouble.
MX-5141N SIMULATION 6 – 24
2 ‘13/Nov
17 22
17-- 22-1
Purpose Clear/Cancel (Trouble etc.) Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data output/
Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag "PF" trouble. Check
Section Function (Purpose) Used to check the print count value in each
section and each operation mode.
Operation/Procedure
(Used to check the maintenance timing.)
1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Section
2) Press [YES] key to execute cancellation of the trouble.
Operation/Procedure
Change the display page with scroll key on the touch panel.
MX-5141N SIMULATION 6 – 25
22-2 PUNCH Punch module
NIC NIC
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check POWER-CON Power controller
Function (Purpose) Used to check the total number of misfeed E-MANUAL Operation manual (HDD storage)
and troubles. (When the number of total WATER MARK Watermark (HDD storage)
jam is considerably great, it is judged as ESCP ESCP font ROM
necessary for repair.) ACRE (MAIN) Enhanced compression kit (Main section)
Section ACRE (DATA) Enhanced compression kit (Data section)
PCI PCI
Operation/Procedure
The paper jam, trouble counter value is displayed.
MX-5141N SIMULATION 6 – 26
22-9 SECURITY MX-FR42U Data security kit
(commercial version)
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check MX-FR42 Data security kit
Function (Purpose) Used to check the number of use (print (Authentication version)
quantity) of each paper feed section. AIM MX-AMX1 Application integration module
SDRAM(SYS) *****MB SDRAM capacity
Section Paper feed, ADU, LCC
SDRAM(ICU) *****MB SDRAM capacity
Operation/Procedure HDD *****MB Hard disk capacity
The counter values related to paper feed are displayed. SD *****MB SD Card capacity
NIC STANDARD NIC
TRAY1 Paper feed counter (Paper feed tray 1) BARCODE MX-PF10 Barcode font kit
TRAY2 Paper feed counter (Paper feed tray 2) INTERNET-FAX MX-FWX1 Internet Fax expansion kit
TRAY3 Paper feed counter (Paper feed tray 3) ACM (*) MX-AMX2 Application communication module
TRAY4 Paper feed counter (Paper feed tray 4) EAM (*) MX-AMX3 External account module
MFT TOTAL Manual paper feed counter (Total) WEB BROWSING MX-AM10/ Web browsing expansion kit
MFT HEAVY Manual paper feed counter (Heavy paper) STANDARD
MFT OHP Manual paper feed counter (OHP) ACRE MX-EB11/ Enhanced compression kit (ACRE)
MFT ENV Manual paper feed counter (Envelope) STANDARD
LCC Side LCC paper feed counter (LCC) MIRRORING MX-EB12 N Mirroring kit
ADU ADU paper transport counter (Paper reverse section) PCI CONNECT PCI generating unit
CF *****MB Compact Flash Card capacity
MX-5141N SIMULATION 6 – 27
22-13
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operating time of the
process section (OPC drum, DV unit, toner
cartridge) and the fusing unit
Section Process
Operation/Procedure
The number of prints and the number of rotations in the process
section are displayed.
Number of Number of
Item/Display Content Print counter RPM Life meter
use days remaining days
MAINTENANCE ALL Maintenance counter (Total) Max. 8 Not displayed 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
MAINTENANCE COL Maintenance counter (Color) Max. 8 Not displayed 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
FUSING BELT Fusing belt Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
FUSING ROLLER Fusing roller Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
PRESSURE ROLLER Fusing pressure roller Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
SEPARATE PAWL Fusing separation pawl Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
SEPARATE PLATE Fusing separation plate Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
FUSING WEB UNIT * Fusing web unit Max. 8 Not displayed 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
FUSING WEB SEND Fusing web cleaning send counter 0 - 65535 Not displayed Not displayed Not displayed Not displayed
TC1 BELT Primary transfer belt Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
TRANSFER BLADE Transfer cleaning blade Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
PTC PTC counter Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
TC2 BELT Secondary transfer belt Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
PS PAPER Paper dust cleaner Max. 8 Not displayed 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
OZONE FILTER Ozone filter Max. 8 Not displayed 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
DEVE CTRG (K) DV unit (K) Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
DEVE CTRG (C) DV unit (C) Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
DEVE CTRG (M) DV unit (M) Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
DEVE CTRG (Y) DV unit (Y) Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
DRUM CTRG (K) OPC drum unit (K) Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
DRUM CTRG (C) OPC drum unit (C) Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
DRUM CTRG (M) OPC drum unit (M) Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
DRUM CTRG (Y) OPC drum unit (Y) Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
MAIN CHARGER (K) Main charger (K) Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
MAIN CHARGER (C) Main charger (C) Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
MAIN CHARGER (M) Main charger (M) Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
MAIN CHARGER (Y) Main charger (Y) Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
DRUM BLADE (K) OPC drum cleaning blade K Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
DRUM BLADE (C) OPC drum cleaning blade C Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
DRUM BLADE (M) OPC drum cleaning blade M Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
DRUM BLADE (Y) OPC drum cleaning blade Y Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
TONER CTRG (K) Toner cartridge (K) Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) Not displayed
TONER CTRG (C) Toner cartridge (C) Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) Not displayed
TONER CTRG (M) Toner cartridge (M) Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) Not displayed
TONER CTRG (Y) Toner cartridge (Y) Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) Not displayed
*: If the feed amount of SIM43-24-M is changed, the life meter does not show precise values.
22-14
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
Function (Purpose) Used to display the use status of the toner
cartridge.
Section Process
Operation/Procedure
The status of the toner cartridge is displayed.
MX-5141N SIMULATION 6 – 28
22-18 22-40
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check Purpose Error contents display
Function (Purpose) Used to display the user data delete history. Function (Purpose) Used to display the error code list and the
Section contents.
Operation/Procedure Section
The date and time of the user data delete are displayed. Operation/Procedure
1) Select the main error code.
Display item
Content The sub error code and the contents are displayed.
Item name Date
START Year/month/day/hour/min. Delete history (Date and time
of operation start)
END Year/month/day/hour/min. Delete history (Date and time 22-42
of operation end) Purpose Display the data
Function (Purpose) JAM data details display
Section
22-19 Operation/Procedure
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check 1) Change the displayed contents by [PAPER JAM], [SPF JAM]
Function (Purpose) Used to check the values of the counters or [TROUBLE] key.
related to the scan - image send.
Section 22-43
Operation/Procedure Purpose Display the data
Used to display the counter value related to the network scanner Function (Purpose) JAM data details display
Change the display with scroll key. Section
Operation/Procedure
Item/Display Content
1) Change the displayed contents by [PAPER JAM], [SPF JAM]
Network NET SCN Network scanner document read quantity
scanner ORG_B/W counter (B/W scan job)
or [TROUBLE] key.
NET SCN Network scanner document read quantity Display each key contents
ORG_CL counter (Color scan job)
NET SCN Network scanner document read quantity Key Contents
ORG_2CL counter (2-Color scan job) Number of JAM ,Paper feed counter, Paper feed retry
COUNTER
NET SCN Network scanner document read quantity counter
ORG_SGL counter (Single-color scan job) HISTORY1 JAM history
Internet INTERNET FAX Number of internet FAX output HISTORY2 Temperature and humidity data
FAX OUTPUT
INTERNET FAX Number of internet FAX sending page
Display data and contents (COUNTER)
SEND OUTPUT Item Content
INTERNET FAX Number of internet FAX receive PAPER JAM COUNT Number of machine JAM troubles
RECEIVE PAPER FEED COUNTER Paper feed counter (Similar with
INTERNET FAX Number of internet FAX send SIM22-09 display content)
SEND PAPER FEED RETRY COUNTER Paper feed retry counter (Similar
E-Mail MAIL Number of times of E-MAIL send with SIM27-18 display content)
COUNTER
FTP FTP COUNTER Number of FTP send Display data and contents (HISTORY1)
Other SMB SEND Number of SMB send
Item Description
USB CNT Number of times of USB storage
NO History number
TRIAL Trial mode counter
MODE_B&C (B/W & COLOR scan job) JAM CODE Jam code main
SCAN TO SCAN TO HDD record quantity (B/W) DATE/TIME Occurrence date
HDD_B/W TOTAL_BW Total counter (B/W)
SCAN TO SCAN TO HDD record quantity TOTAL_CL Total counter (color)
HDD_CL (COLOR) P_S * Paper size
SCAN TO SCAN TO HDD record quantity P_T * Paper type
HDD_2CL (2-COLOR) JOB * Job mode
SCAN TO SCAN TO HDD record quantity JN First after JOB start or not
HDD_SGL (SINGLE color) OF Paper exit: Offset
EP Paper exit: Exit position
PC Paper exit: Punch
SP Paper exit: Staple
MX-5141N SIMULATION 6 – 29
Display data and contents (HISTORY2)
Display Content
Item Content 054 A0x2
NO History number 055 A0x2 R
DATE/TIME Occurrence date A0 A0
Fusing upper main thermistor (differential) A0R A0R
TH_UM
temperature/AD value B0 B0
Fusing upper main thermistor (compensation) B0R B0R
TH_UM_AD1
temperature/AD value
B1 B1
Fusing upper main thermistor (detection)
TH_UM_AD2 B1R B1R
temperature/AD value
B2 B2
TH_LM Fusing lower main thermistor temperature/AD value
B2R B2R
TH_US Fusing lower sub thermistor temperature/AD value
K8 K8
TEMPRATURE Temperature thermistor
K8R K8R
HUMIDITY Humidity thermistor
K16 K16
TH1_LSU LSU thermistor temperature/AD value
16R K16R
K32 K32
Detail display content of HISTORY1(P_S)
32R K32R
Display Content 066 SRA3
NON No paper size 067 SRA3R
WLG Double Legal 068 SRA4
WLR Double Legal-R 069 SRA4R
LD Ledger 06A 318 x 469 mm
LDR Ledger-R(Double Letter) 06B 469 x 318 mm
LG Legal 06C 234 x 318 mm
LGR Legal-R 06D 318 x 234 mm
FC Foolscap 06E 312 x 440 mm
FCR Foolscap-R 06F 440 x 312 mm
LT Letter 070 220 x 312 mm
LTR Letter-R 071 312 x 220 mm
IV Invoice(Mini) 082 DBL Postcard
IVR Invoice-R(Mini) 083 DBL Postcard-R
EC Executive 084 Postcard
ECR Executive-R 085 Postcard-R
A3W A3W(12x18 in) 087 119 x 277 mm
AWR A3W(12x18 in)-R 089 120 x 235 mm
012 22x17 08B 90 x 205 mm
013 22x17R 08D 90 x 185 mm
014 22x34 08F 240 x 332 mm
015 22x34R 091 216 x 277 mm
016 34x44 093 197 x 267 mm
017 34x44R 095 190 x 240 mm
018 44x68 097 162 x 229 mm
019 44x68R 099 142 x 205 mm
01A 9x12 09B 119 x 197 mm
01B 9x12R 09D 120 x 176 mm
01C 13x19 09F 114 x 162 mm
01D 13x19R 0A1 98 x 148 mm
MLG Mexican-Legal 0A3 105 x 235 mm
MLR Mexican-Legal-R 0A5 95 x 217 mm
ALG Asiain-Legal 0A7 98 x 190 mm
ALR Asiain -Legal-R 0A9 92 x 165 mm
EXT Extra (Special) 0AA AB series E-version
A1 A1 0AB AB series L-version
A1R A1R 0AC AB series panorama size
A2 A2 0AD AB series name card size
A2R A2R 0AE AB series identification photo
A3 A3 0AF AB series name card small
A3R A3R 0B0 A3 width
A4 A4 0B1 B4 width
A4R A4R 0B2 A4 width
A5 A5 0B3 A3 width (Long size)
A5R A5R 0B4 B4 width (Long size)
A6 A6 0B5 A4 width (Long size)
A6R A6R 0BC Custom (Large size)
B3 B3 0BD Custom (Small size)
B3R B3R 0BF Custom
B4 B4 0C2 Monarch
B4R B4R 0C3 Monarch-R
B5 B5 0C4 DL
B5R B5R 0C5 DL-R
B6 B6 0C6 C4
B6R B6R 0C7 C4-R
MX-5141N SIMULATION 6 – 30
Display Content Display Content
0C8 C5 RMT Remote maintenance
0C9 C5-R 00E SIM 52-01
0CA C6 00F Tandem (Cordless handset)
0CB C6-R CFP Confidential print
0CC C65 NET Network scanner
0CD C65-R PRF Proof print
0CE ISOB5
0CF ISOB5-R
0D0 Size6-1/2
0D1 Size6-1/2-R 22-90
0D2 Size9 Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
0D3 Size9-R Function (Purpose) Used to output the various set data lists.
0D8 Com-10
0D9 Com-10-R
Section
0DA Inch series E-version Operation/Procedure
0DB Inch series L-version 1) Change the display with scroll key.
0DC Inch series panorama size 2) Select the print target with the keys on the touch panel.
0DD Inch series name card large
3) Press [EXECUTE] key to start self print of the list.
0DE Inch series identification photo
0DF Inch series name card small All setting list (*) ALL CUSTOM SETTING LIST
0EC Extra (Special large size) Printer test page PCL SYMBOL SET LIST
0ED Extra (Special small size) PCL INTERNAL FONT LIST
0EF Extra (Special/Not fixed) PCL EXTENDED FONT LIST
0F0 Long size PS FONT LIST
JAM (Used for canceling temporary charging in a coin PS KANJI FONT LIST (Japan)
0FF
vendor.)
PS EXTENDED FONT LIST
Display content detail: Paper type (P_T) NIC PAGE
Address registration INDIVIDUAL LIST
Display Content list (*) GROUP LIST
UST User type PROGRAM LIST (Output Disable)
LHP Letter head paper MEMORY BOX LIST
PNP Perforated sheet ALL SENDING ADDRESS LIST
RCL Recycled paper Document filing list (*) DOCUMENT FILING FOLDER LIST
COL Color paper System setting list ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (COPY)
PLN Standard paper ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (PRINT)
PRP Pre printed ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (IMAGE SEND)
OHP OHP Transparency ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (DOC FILING)
HV Heavy paper ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (SECURITY)
LBL Label sheet ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (COMMON)
ENV Envelope ALL ADMINISTRATOR SETTINGS LIST
HG Postcard Receive rejection ANTI JUNK FAX NUMBER LIST
TAB Tab sheet number table
THN Thin paper Receive rejection/ ANTI JUNK MAIL/DOMAIN NAME LIST
US1 User type 1 allow address
US2 User type 2 domain table
US3 User type 3 To E-mail INBOUND ROUTING LIST
US4 User type 4 Transfer table list
US5 User type 5 To administrator DOCUMENT ADMIN LIST
US6 User type 6 Transfer list
US7 User type 7 Web setting list WEB SETTING LIST
HV2 Heavy paper 2 Meta data set list METADATA SET LIST
PL2 Plain paper 2 (not used)
*: When the data list print of system setting is inhibition in DSK
HV3 Heavy paper 3
model, this setting is invalid.
HV4 Heavy paper 4
GLS Glossy paper
MX-5141N SIMULATION 6 – 31
MACHINE Machine JAM counter
23 SPF DSPF/RSPF JAM counter
TROUBLE Trouble counter
23-2
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
Function (Purpose) Used to output the trouble history list of 24-2
paper jam and misfeed. (If the number of
Purpose Data clear
troubles of misfeed is considerably great,
the judgment is made that repair is Function (Purpose) Used to clear the number of use (the num-
required.) ber of prints) of each paper feed section.
Section Section
Operation/Procedure Operation/Procedure
Press [EXECUTE] key to execute print. 1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key.
The trouble history of paper jams and misfeed is printed. 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
3) Press [YES] key.
The target counter is cleared.
23-80
TRAY1 Tray 1 paper feed counter
Purpose Operation test/check
TRAY2 Tray 2 paper feed counter
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of paper feed TRAY3 Tray 3 paper feed counter
and paper transport in the paper feed sec- TRAY4 Tray 4 paper feed counter
tion and the paper transport section. Used MFT TOTAL Manual paper feed counter (Total)
to output the list of the operation status of MFT HEAVY Manual paper feed counter (Heavy paper)
the sensor and the detectors in the paper MFT OHP Manual paper feed counter (OHP)
feed section and the paper transport sec- MFT ENV Manual paper feed counter (Envelope)
tion. LCC LCC paper feed counter (LCC)
Section Paper feed, Paper transport ADU ADU paper feed counter
Operation/Procedure
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the timing list of paper feed and
paper transport is outputted. 24-3
Used to print the operations timing list of the sensors and detectors Purpose Data clear
in the paper feed and transport section.
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the finisher, DSPF/RSPF, and
The timing list of paper feed and paper transport operations of the
the scan (reading) unit counter.
latest job (copy or print) on the final paper is printed.
Section
Since the paper feed and paper transport routes differ depending
on the used paper feed tray and the print operation mode, the sen- Operation/Procedure
sor and the detectors and the operation timing also differ. 1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Item Content
3) Press [YES] key.
JAM CODE JAM code
DATA/TIME JAM occurrence date/time The target counter is cleared.
MODE Printing mode when JAM occurs
SPF DSPF/RSPF document feed counter
SIZE Paper size
(No. of discharged sheets)
TYPE Paper type
SCAN Scan counter
PIC TRAY Paper feed tray
STAPLER Staple counter
OUT TRAY Paper exit tray
PUNCHER Puncher counter
SECTION Measurement section of paper feed time
STAMP Stamp counter
STANDARD Theoretical paper feed time
SADDLE STAPLER Saddle staple counter
JAM-1 Measurement time of the first paper before JAM occurs
SADDLE V FOLD Saddle finisher V fold counter
JAM Measurement time of JAM paper
COVER Document cover open/close counter
POS/
MIOP (sensor / load) data when JAM occurs HP_ON Number of scanner HP detection
STATUS
OC LAMP TIME Total lighting time of the scanner lamp
DSPF LAMP TIME *1 DSPF section lamp total lighting time
24-1
Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the jam counter, and the trou-
ble counter. (After completion of mainte-
nance, clear the counters.)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
3) Press [YES] key.
The target counter is cleared.
MX-5141N SIMULATION 6 – 32
24-4 Item/Display Content
Drum DRUM CTRG K Drum cartridge (K) (Counter)
Purpose Data clear Drum cartridge (K) (Number of use
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the maintenance counter, the days)
printer counters of the transport unit and Drum cartridge (K)
the fusing unit. (After completion of mainte- (Accumulated number of rotations)
nance, clear the counters.) DRUM CTRG C Drum cartridge (C) (Counter)
Drum cartridge (C)
Section
(Number of use days)
Operation/Procedure Drum cartridge (C)
1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key. (Accumulated number of rotations)
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. DRUM CTRG M Drum cartridge (M) (Counter)
Drum cartridge (M)
3) Press [YES] key.
(Number of use days)
The target counter is cleared. Drum cartridge (M)
(Accumulated number of rotations)
Item/Display Content DRUM CTRG Y Drum cartridge (Y) (Counter)
Maintenance MAINTENANCE Maintenance counter (Total) (Counter) Drum cartridge (Y)
ALL Maintenance counter (Total) (Number of use days)
(Number of use days) Drum cartridge (Y)
MAINTENANCE Maintenance counter (Color) (Counter) (Accumulated number of rotations)
COL Maintenance counter (Color) Main MAIN Main charger (K) (Counter)
(Number of use days) charger CHARGER K Main charger (K) (Number of use days)
Fusing FUSING BELT Fusing belt (Counter) Main charger (K)
Fusing belt (Number of use days) (Accumulated number of rotations)
Fusing belt MAIN Main charger (C) (Counter)
(Accumulated number of rotations) CHARGER C Main charger (C) (Number of use days)
FUSING Fusing roller (Counter) Main charger (C)
ROLLER Fusing roller (Number of use days) (Accumulated number of rotations)
Fusing roller MAIN Main charger (M) (Counter)
(Accumulated number of rotations) CHARGER M Main charger (M) (Number of use days)
PRESS Pressure roller (Counter) Main charger (M)
ROLLER Pressure roller (Number of use days) (Accumulated number of rotations)
Pressure roller MAIN Main charger (Y) (Counter)
(Accumulated number of rotations) CHARGER Y Main charger (Y) (Number of use days)
Separation SEPARATE Separation pawl (Counter) Main charger (Y)
PAWL Separation pawl (Number of use days) (Accumulated number of rotations)
Separation pawl Drum blade DRUM BLADE Drum blade K (Counter)
(Accumulated number of rotations) K Drum blade K (Number of use days)
SEPARATE Separation plate (Counter) Drum blade K
PLATE Separation plate (Number of use days) (Accumulated number of rotations)
Separation plate DRUM BLADE Drum blade C (Counter)
(Accumulated number of rotations) C Drum blade C (Number of use days)
FUSING WEB Fusing web unit print counter Drum blade C
Use day of fusing web unit (Accumulated number of rotations)
Fusing web cleaning send counter DRUM BLADE Drum blade M (Counter)
Transfer TC1 BELT Primary transfer belt (Counter) M Drum blade M (Number of use days)
Primary transfer belt Drum blade M
(Number of use days) (Accumulated number of rotations)
Primary transfer belt DRUM BLADE Drum blade Y (Counter)
(Accumulated number of rotations) Y Drum blade Y (Number of use days)
TRANS BLADE Transfer blade (Counter) Drum blade Y
Transfer blade (Number of use days) (Accumulated number of rotations)
Transfer blade Other PS PAPER PS paper dust cleaner (Counter)
(Accumulated number of rotations) PS paper dust cleaner
TC2 BELT Secondary transfer belt (Counter) (Number of use days)
Secondary transfer belt OZONE FILTER Ozone filter (Counter)
(Number of use days) Ozone filter (Number of use days)
Secondary transfer belt
(Accumulated number of rotations) * The winding counter for the fusing web cleaning is cleared by
PTC PTC counter (Counter) being synchronized with the fusing web cleaning feed counter.
PTC counter (Number of use days)
PTC counter
(Accumulated number of rotations)
MX-5141N SIMULATION 6 – 33
24-5 24-10
Purpose Data clear Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the developer counter. (After Function (Purpose) Used to clear the FAX counter.
replacement of developer, clear the coun- (Only when FAX is installed)
ter.) Section
Section Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure 1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key.
1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key. 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. 3) Press [YES] key.
3) Press [YES] key. The target counter is cleared.
The target counter is cleared.
FAX OUTPUT FAX Print quantity counter
NOTE: When SIM25-2 is executed, this counter is also cleared
FAX SEND FAX send counter
automatically.
FAX RECEIVED FAX receive counter
SEND IMAGES FAX send quantity counter
Developer cartridge print counter (K)
SEND TIME FAX send time
K Accumulated number of rotations of the developer cartridge (cm) (K)
RECEIVED TIME FAX receive time
Number of day that used developer (Day) K
Developer cartridge print counter (C)
C Accumulated number of rotations of the developer cartridge (cm) (C)
Number of day that used developer (Day) C
24-12
Developer cartridge print counter (M)
M Accumulated number of rotations of the developer cartridge (cm) (M) Purpose Data clear
Number of day that used developer (Day) M Function (Purpose) Used to clear the document filing counter.
Developer cartridge print counter (Y) Section
Y Accumulated number of rotations of the developer cartridge (cm) (Y)
Operation/Procedure
Number of day that used developer (Day) Y
1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
3) Press [YES] key.
24-6
The target counter is cleared.
Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the copy counter. Display Content
DOC FIL (BW) Black and white document filing print counter
Section
DOC FIL (COL) Color document filing print counter
Operation/Procedure DOC FIL (2COL) 2-color document filing print counter
1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key. DOC FIL (SGL_COL) Single-color document filing print counter
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
3) Press [YES] key.
The target counter is cleared. 24-15
COPY BW Copy counter (B/W) Purpose Data clear
COPY COL Copy counter (COLOR) Function (Purpose) Used to clear the counters related to the
SINGLE COLOR Single color scan mode and the image send.
2COLOR 2-color Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key.
24-9 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Purpose Data clear 3) Press [YES] key.
Function (Purpose) Used clear the printer mode print counter The target counter is cleared.
and the self print mode print counter.
Division Item/Display Content
Section
Network NET SCN ORG_B/W Network scanner document read
Operation/Procedure scanner quantity counter (B/W scan job)
1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key. NET SCN ORG_CL Network scanner document read
quantity counter (COLOR scan job)
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
NET SCN ORG_2CL Network scanner document read
3) Press [YES] key. quantity counter (2-color scan job)
The target counter is cleared. NET SCN ORG_SGL Network scanner document read
quantity counter (single color scan
PRINT BW Print counter (B/W) job)
PRINT COL Print counter (COLOR) Internet INTERNET FAX Number of internet FAX output
PRINT (2COL) Print counter (2-colors) Fax OUTPUT
PRINT (3COL) Print counter (3-colors) INTERNET FAX Number of internet FAX sending page
PRINT (SGL_COL) Print counter (Single color) SEND OUTPUT
OTHER BW Other counter (B/W) INTERNET FAX Number of internet FAX receive
OTHER COL Other counter (COLOR) RECEIVE
INTERNET FAX Number of internet FAX send
SEND
E-mail MAIL COUNTER Number of times of E-MAIL send
MX-5141N SIMULATION 6 – 34
Division Item/Display Content 25-2
FTP FTP COUNTER Number of FTP send
Other SMB SEND Number of SMB send
Purpose Setting
USB CNT Number of times of USB storage Function (Purpose) Used to make the initial setting of toner
TRIAL MODE_B&C Trial mode counter (B/W & COLOR density when replacing developer. (Auto-
scan job) matic adjustment)
SCAN TO HDD_B/W SCAN TO HDD record quantity (B/W) Section Image process (Photoconductor/Develop-
SCAN TO HDD_CL SCAN TO HDD record quantity ing/Transfer/Cleaning)
(COLOR)
SCAN TO HDD_2CL SCAN TO HDD record quantity
Operation/Procedure
(2-COLOR) 1) Select a color to be adjusted with the touch panel.
SCAN TO HDD_SGL SCAN TO HDD record quantity 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
(SINGLE color)
The developing motor rotates for 1 min 30 sec, and the toner den-
sity sensor makes sampling of the toner density. The detected level
is displayed.
24-35 After stopping the developing motor, the average value of the toner
density sampling results is set as the reference toner density con-
Purpose Data clear
trol level.
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the toner cartridge use status
data. NOTE: When the above operation is interrupted on the way, the
reference toner concentration level is not set. Also when
Section
error code of EE-EC, EE-EL or EE-EU is displayed, the ref-
Operation/Procedure erence toner density level is not set normally.
1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
NOTE: Do not execute this simulation except when new developer
2) Press [YES] key. is supplied. If it is executed in other cases, undertoner or
The toner cartridge use status data (SIM22-14) are cleared. overtone may occur, causing a trouble.
Display Default
Division Item/Display
range value
Toner density control AT DEVE ADJ_L_K 1 - 255 128
25 adjustment value in AT DEVE ADJ_L_C 1 - 255 128
the low speed process AT DEVE ADJ_L_M 1 - 255 128
mode AT DEVE ADJ_L_Y 1 - 255 128
25-1
Toner density control AT DEVE ADJ_M_K 1 - 255 128
Purpose Operation test/check adjustment value in AT DEVE ADJ_M_C 1 - 255 128
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the devel- the medium speed AT DEVE ADJ_M_M 1 - 255 128
oping section. process mode AT DEVE ADJ_M_Y 1 - 255 128
Section Process (Developing section) Toner density sensor AT DEVE VO_L_K 1 - 255 128
control voltage level in AT DEVE VO_L_C 1 - 255 128
Operation/Procedure
the low speed process AT DEVE VO_L_M 1 - 255 128
1) Select the process speed with [MIDDLE], [LOW] keys. mode AT DEVE VO_L_Y 1 - 255 128
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. Toner density sensor AT DEVE VO_M_K 1 - 255 128
The developing motor and the OPC drum motor rotate for 3 control voltage level in AT DEVE VO_M_C 1 - 255 128
minutes and the output level of the toner density sensor is dis- the medium speed AT DEVE VO_M_M 1 - 255 128
played. process mode AT DEVE VO_M_Y 1 - 255 128
TCS_K Toner sensor output value (K) Display during execution of the simulation
TCS_C Toner sensor output value (C) Item/Display Content
TCS_M Toner sensor output value (M) TCS_K Toner sensor output value (K)
TCS_Y Toner sensor output value (Y) TCS_C Toner sensor output value (C)
TSG_K Toner density sensor control voltage level (K) TCS_M Toner sensor output value (M)
TSG_C Toner density sensor control voltage level (C) TCS_Y Toner sensor output value (Y)
TSG_M Toner density sensor control voltage level (M) TSG_K Toner density sensor control voltage level (K)
TSG_Y Toner density sensor control voltage level (Y) TSG_C Toner density sensor control voltage level (C)
TSG_M Toner density sensor control voltage level (M)
LOW Process speed: Low speed TSG_Y Toner density sensor control voltage level (Y)
MIDDLE Process speed: Medium speed
Error content
NOTE: The toner cartridge must be removed before executing this
Display Error name Error content
simulation.
EE-EL EL abnormality The sensor output level is less than 77, or
If this simulation is executed with the toner cartridge the control voltage exceeds 207.
installed, toner will be forcibly supplied to the developing EE-EU EU abnormality The sensor output level exceeds 177, or the
unit, resulting in over toner and a trouble. control voltage is less than 52.
EE-EC EC abnormality The sensor output level is outside of 128 ±
10.
MX-5141N SIMULATION 6 – 35
25-4
26
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
Function (Purpose) Used to display the operation data of the
26-1
toner supply quantity. (Not used in the mar-
ket.) Purpose Setting
Section Process Function (Purpose) Used to set Yes/No of installation of the
right paper exit tray.
Operation/Procedure
The operation data of the toner supply quantity are displayed. Section Paper exit
Operation/Procedure
Display 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Item/Display Content
range
2) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
YLD_CNT_FB Toner supply FB rate by the yield count 50 - 200
DELTA_DVB Delta DVB -500 - 500 This setting is required to use the right paper exit tray unit.
(Process control DVB - Target DVB)
Item/Display Content
IDL_DVB Target DVB 100 - 600
A 0 YES Paper exit tray: YES
PROCON_DVB Process control DVB 100 - 600
1 NO Paper exit tray: NO
DV_LIFE Developer life area 1 - 32
COVERAGE_ Average print rate area 1 - 29
AREA
ENV_AREA Environment area 1 - 16
26-2
MULTI_TIME Toner supply drive time area 1-8
(Specified by the DV motor rotation time) Purpose Setting
PRO_FB_CNT No. of remaining times of toner supply for 0 - 65535 Function (Purpose) Used to set the paper size of the large
the process control result
capacity tray (Tandem) and the large
PRO_FB_INT Interval of toner supply for the process 0 - 65535
capacity desk (LCC). (When the paper size
control result
is changed, this simulation must be exe-
PRO_FB_RATIO Correction rate of one-time toner supply -10 - 10
cuted to change the paper size in software.)
for the process control result
RECV_MODE_ No. of times of recovery mode (+) 0 - 65535 Section Paper feed
CNT(+) (No. of times of compulsory toner supply) Operation/Procedure
RECV_MODE_ No. of times of recovery mode (-) 0 - 65535
Select a paper size and a weight system to be changed.
CNT(-) (No. of times of compulsory printing of
one-color background image)
Item Setting value Content
Tray 3(Tandem) 0 8.5 x 11
1 A4
2 B5
25-5
LCC 0 8.5 x 11
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check 1 A4
Function (Purpose) Used to display the toner density correction 2 B5
data. (Not used in the market.) G/LBS SET 0 GRAM
Section Process 1 LBS
Operation/Procedure
Setting value
The toner density correction data are displayed. Destination
Tandem LCC G/LBS SET
Display U.S.A 8.5 x 11 8.5 x 11 LBS
Display Content CANADA 8.5 x 11 8.5 x 11 LBS
range
TCS_B_AVE. Average value of the toner sensor output 0 - 255 INCH 8.5 x 11 8.5 x 11 LBS
block JAPAN B5 A4 GRAM
TSG_HUM Current TSG environment correction value -127 - 127 AB_B A4 A4 GRAM
(Medium speed) EUROPE A4 A4 GRAM
TSG_COV Current TSG print ratio correction value -127 - 127 U.K. A4 A4 GRAM
(Medium speed) AUS. A4 A4 GRAM
TSG_LIFE Current TSG developer life correction value -127 - 127 AB_A A4 A4 GRAM
(Medium speed) CHINA A4 A4 GRAM
TSG_ENV Current TSG accumulated drive area -127 - 127
correction value (Medium speed)
DELTA_TSG Control voltage correction value -255 - 255
TSG_REF Control voltage reference value (Medium 0 - 255
speed)
TSG_TOTAL Current applying TSG (Medium speed) 0 - 255
TCS_AVE. Toner sensor output average value 0 - 255
TN_EMP_W Number of times of detecting the toner empty 0 - 255
threshold value w or above
TN_EMP_X Number of times of detecting the toner empty 0 - 255
threshold value x or above
TN_EMP_Y Number of times of detecting the toner empty 0 - 255
threshold value y or above
MX-5141N SIMULATION 6 – 36
26-3 Default
Item/Display Content
value
Purpose Setting COUNTUP FUSER_IN Mode in which the detection EXIT_
Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the auditor. TIMING timing of the paper lead OUT
(Setting must be made according to the edge by the sensor after the
auditor use conditions.) paper passes the fusing
section is used as the
Section Auditor money charging timing.
Operation/Procedure FUSER_OUT Mode in which the detection
timing of the paper rear
Select an item to be set with the touch panel.
edge by the sensor after the
paper passes the fusing
Default
Item/Display Content section is used as the
value
money charging timing.
BUILT-IN P10 Built-in auditor mode P10
EXIT_OUT Mode in which the detection
AUDITOR (standard mode) operation.
timing of the paper rear
OUTSIDE NONE No external connection NONE
edge by the paper exit
AUDITOR vendor is used.
sensor of the right paper
P VENDOR1 Coin vendor mode exit tray or of the after
(Only the copy mode can process unit is used as the
be controlled.) money charging timing.
P VENDOR3 Vendor mode in which
signals for the intercard (*1) Displayed only when EQUITRAC.
connected to the PCU are (*2) Details of the vendor mode
used for communication in
parallel I/F. Details of the vendor mode
P OTHER Mode for an external Completion Insufficient money during Completion
auditor connected to the of the copy job of the
SCU. specified specified
VENDOR-EX Vendor I/F for EQUITRAC BW/Color Color
quantity. quantity.
(*1) (no money (Money
(Money (No money
VENDOR-EX VENDOR-EX + Multi job remaining) remaining)
remaining) remaining)
(MULTI) (*1) cueing Enable mode Condition 1 Condition 2 Condition 3 Condition 4
S_VENDOR Serial vendor mode MODE1 Operation 1 Operation 2 Operation 2 Operation 1
DOC ADJ ON Support for the auditor in OFF MODE2 Operation 1 Operation 1 Operation 2 Operation 1
document filing print MODE3 Operation 1 Operation 3 Operation 2 Operation 3
OFF No support for the auditor in
document filing print Operation 1:
PF ADJ ON Continuous printing is OFF Standby during setting time of auto clear. Default is 60 seconds,
performed in the duplex which can be changed in the system setting.
print mode.
If the remaining money Operation 2:
expires during continuous Auto clear is not made.
printing, the sheets in the Operation 3:
machine are discharged The display is shifted to the initial screen.
without being printed on the
back surfaces.
OFF Continuous printing is not
performed in the duplex 26-5
print mode. (The remaining Purpose Setting
amount is checked for
printing every surface in all Function (Purpose) Used to set the count mode of the total
the printing process.) counter and the maintenance counter. (A3/
If the remaining money 11x17 size)
expires during printing, the
Section
sheet is discharged without
printing on the back Operation/Procedure
surface. 1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys.
VENDOR MODE1 Vendor mode 1 MODE 2) Enter the setting value with 10-key
MODE (*2) MODE2 Vendor mode 2 3
1 = Count up by 1, 2 = Count up by 2
MODE3 Vendor mode 3
3) Press [OK] key.
The set value in step 2) is saved.
MX-5141N SIMULATION 6 – 37
26-6 26-8
Purpose Setting Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications (paper, fixed Function (Purpose) Counter mode setting (Long scale)
magnification ratio, etc.) of the destination. Section
Section Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure 1) Select a setting item with the scroll key.
1) Select an item to be set with the touch panel. 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. 1 = 1 count up, 2 = 2 count up
The selected set content is saved. 3) Press [OK] key.
MX-5141N SIMULATION 6 – 38
26-18 26-30
Purpose Setting Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set Disable/Enable of the toner Function (Purpose) Used to set the operation mode corre-
save mode operation. sponding to the CE mark (Europe safety
(For the Japan and the UK versions.) standards). (For slow start to drive the fus-
Section ing heater lamp)
Operation/Procedure Section
1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys. Operation/Procedure
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [OK] key.
0 Control allowed
The set value in step 2) is saved. 1 Control inhibited
MX-5141N SIMULATION 6 – 39
26-38 26-50
Purpose Setting Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set Continue/Stop of print when the Function (Purpose) Used to set functions.
maintenance life is reached. Section
Section Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure 1) Select a target item of setting with scroll key on the touch
1) Enter the set value with 10-key. panel.
2) Press [OK] key. 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
The set value in step 1) is saved. 3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
Default Default
Item/Display Content Item/Display Content
value value
A MAINTENANCE 0 Setting of Print Continue/ 0 A BW REVERSE 0 BW reverse copy Disable Refer to
LIFE OVER Stop when the maintenance 1 BW reverse copy Enable *1
(0: CONTINUE life is over (Print Continue) B COLOR MODE 2-color/Single color copy mode Refer to
1: STOP) 1 Setting of Print Continue/ Enable/Disable setting *1/*2
Stop when the maintenance C FINISHER 0 Finisher special paper 0
life is over (Print Stop) FUNCTION The number of paper exit is Refer to
B FUSER WEB END 0 Continue/Stop setting of print 1 limited. *3
(0: CONTINUE when the fusing web is end 1 Finisher special paper
1: STOP) (Print Continue) The number of paper exit is
1 Continue/Stop setting of print not limited.
when the fusing web is end D COLOR MODE 0 All colors and monochrome Refer to
(Print Stop) (PRINTER) counters are displayed. *1
1 All are displayed except for
the 3-color print counter.
2 Monochrome and full color
26-41 print counters are displayed.
Purpose Setting E FEED TRAY 0 Paper feed tray color display 0
COLOR ON during paper feed
Function (Purpose) Used to set Enable/Disable of the magnifi-
1 Paper feed tray color display
cation ratio automatic select function (AMS) OFF during paper feed
in the center binding mode. F LONG SIZE PRINT 0 Enable 0
Section 1 Disable
Operation/Procedure G WIRELESS SET 0 Disables wireless LAN 0
setting.
1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
1 Enables wireless LAN
setting.
0 AMS Disable
1 AMS Enable (*1) Default values for each destination of item A/B/D
2) Press [OK] key.
Destination Item A Item B Item D
The set value in step 1) is saved. U.S.A 1 0 2
<Default value of each destination> CANADA 1 0 2
INCH 1 0 2
U.S.A 0 (Disable) EUROPE 1 (Enable)
JAPAN 1 7 2
CANADA 0 (Disable) U.K. 1 (Enable)
AB_B 1 0 2
INCH 0 (Disable) AUS. 0 (Disable)
EUROPE 1 0 2
JAPAN 0 (Disable) AB_A 0 (Disable)
U.K. 0 0 2
AB_B 0 (Disable) CHINA 0 (Disable)
AUS. 1 0 2
AB_A 1 0 2
CHINA 1 0 2
26-49 (*2) Item B: COLOR MODE set value (OFF: Displayed/ON: Not dis-
Purpose Setting played)
Function (Purpose) Used to set the print speed of postcards Mode 2-Color/Single
mode. Set value
Single 2-color Counter
Section 0 OFF OFF OFF
Operation/Procedure 1 OFF ON OFF
Select the copy speed mode with the touch panel. (Default: LOW) 2 ON OFF OFF
3 ON ON OFF
Item/Setting value Content Default value 4 OFF OFF ON
LOW Postcard copy speed LOW LOW 5 OFF ON ON
HIGH Postcard copy speed HIGH 6 ON OFF ON
7 ON ON ON
MX-5141N SIMULATION 6 – 40
(*3)
26-52
Target Target paper setting Purpose Setting
paper 0 1
Function (Purpose) Used to set whether non-printed paper
Inner Postcard, The operation is stopped when If it is set to "1," (insertion paper, cover paper) is counted up
finisher envelope 10 sheets of a same kind are the operation is
or not.
discharged continuously. When, stopped when
however, different kinds of the paper exit Section
sheets are mixed and tray is full or Operation/Procedure
discharged and 10 or less when 250
sheets of a kind are sheets
1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
continuously discharged, the (35.5mm thick)
operation is stopped by the are discharged. 0 Count up
paper exit tray full detection. 1 No count up
Label The operation is stopped when
2) Press [OK] key.
sheet, 100 sheets of a same kind are
tab sheet, discharged continuously. When, The set value in step 1) is saved.
OHP however, different kinds of
sheets are mixed and Destination Default
discharged and 100 or less U.S.A 0 (Counted)
sheets of a kind are CANADA 0 (Counted)
continuously discharged, the INCH 0 (Counted)
operation is stopped by the JAPAN 1 (Not counted)
paper exit tray full detection.
AB_B 0 (Counted)
Saddle Postcard, The operation is stopped when If it is set to "1,"
EUROPE 0 (Counted)
stitch envelope 30 sheets of a same kind are the operation is
U.K. 0 (Counted)
finisher discharged continuously. When, stopped when
however, different kinds of the paper exit AUS. 1 (Not counted)
sheets are mixed and tray is full or AB_A 0 (Counted)
discharged and 30 or less when 500 CHINA 0 (Counted)
sheets of a kind are sheets (67mm
continuously discharged, the thick) are
operation is stopped by the discharged.
paper exit tray full detection. 26-53
Label The operation is stopped when
Purpose Setting
sheet, 100 sheets of a same kind are
tab sheet, discharged continuously. When, Function (Purpose) User auto color calibration (color balance
OHP however, different kinds of adjustment) Inhibit/Allow setting.
sheets are mixed and
Section
discharged and 100 or less
sheets of a kind are Operation/Procedure
continuously discharged, the 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
operation is stopped by the
paper exit tray full detection. Setting Default
Item/Display Content
range value
A COPY Copy Allow 1 1
(1:YES 0:NO) mode Inhibit 0
26-51 B PRINTER Printer Allow 1 1
Purpose Setting (1:YES 0:NO) mode Inhibit 0
Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the serial 2) Press [OK] key.
port operation. (For PCI)
The set value in step 1) is saved.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
When the PCI is installed, setting is made to 1 or 2.
2) Press [OK] key.
Setting Default
Item/Display Content
range value
A PCI Serial port PCI mode OFF 0 0
SETTING (-> For connecting the serial (Serial port
port vendor) PCI mode
Serial port PCI mode ON 1 OFF)
(JOB status LED: MODE1)
Serial port PCI mode ON 2
(JOB status LED: MODE2)
MX-5141N SIMULATION 6 – 41
26-65 Setting Default
Item/Display Content
range value
Purpose Setting B REMAINING 5% 0 Toner 0-9 4
Function (Purpose) Used to set the finisher alarm mode. TONER preparation at
LEVEL remaining toner
Section level of 5%
Operation/Procedure 10% 1 Toner
Use the touch key to set. preparation at
remaining toner
Set Setting Default level of 10%
Item Content NOTE
value range value 15% 2 Toner
LIMIT 30 Number of 30 or 50 50 A4, A4R, B5, preparation at
SHEETS sheets of 8.5" x 11", remaining toner
stapling: 8.5" x 11"R, level of 15%
Max. 30 16K, 16KR 20% 3 Toner
50 Number of For saddle preparation at
sheets of stitch finisher remaining toner
stapling: level of 20%
Max. 50 25% 4 Toner
LIMIT ON Number of ON or ON preparation at
COPIES sets of OFF remaining toner
stapling: level of 25%
Limited 30% 5 Toner
OFF Number of preparation at
sets of remaining toner
stapling: level of 30%
Not Limited 35% 6 Toner
LIMIT 25 Number of 25 or 30 25 A3, B4, preparation at
SHEETS sheets of 11" x 17", remaining toner
(L) stapling: 8.5" x 14", level of 35%
Max. 25 8.5" x 13.5", 40% 7 Toner
30 Number of 8.5" x 13.4", preparation at
sheets of 8.5" x 13", 8K remaining toner
stapling: For saddle level of 40%
Max. 30 stitch finisher 45% 8 Toner
SADDLE ON Number of ON or ON For saddle preparation at
COPIES sets loaded in OFF stitch finisher remaining toner
the saddle level of 45%
staple: Limited 50% 9 Toner
OFF Number of preparation at
sets loaded in remaining toner
the saddle level of 50%
staple: C TONER NEAR 0 The toner near 0-1 List of
Not Limited END (0:YES 1:NO) end message is Default
displayed. values and
* The limit for loading when folding paper is linked with SADDLE 1 The toner near set values
COPIES. end message is for each
not displayed. destination
D TONER END 1 Operation 1-3
Enable in
26-69 TONER END
Purpose Setting 2 Operation
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions for STOP in
TONER END
toner near end.
3 Operation
Section STOP in
Operation/Procedure TONER END
1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys. E TONER END Setting of the 1-3 1
COUNT number of copy/print/
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. FAX outputs Enable
3) Press [OK] key. after TONER NEAR
The set value in step 2 is saved. END.
F TONER E-MAIL 0 Low status send 0-1 1
Setting Default ALERT of E-mail alert
Item/Display Content (When the toner
range value
preparation
A TONER 0 The toner 0-1 List of
message is
PREPARATION preparation Default
displayed) (in
(0:YES 1:NO) message is values and
near near toner
displayed. set values
end)
1 The toner for each
destination 1 Low status send
preparation
of E-mail alert
message is not
(near toner end)
displayed.
MX-5141N SIMULATION 6 – 42
Item E (TONER END COUNT) setting value and printable quan- B: The toner remaining quantity at which the toner preparation
tity message is displayed.
Setting value Printable quantity at A4/5% equivalent conversion C: Enable/Disable setting of the toner preparation message display
1 0 when the toner near end status is reached.
2 25 D: Enable/Disable setting of the machine operation when the toner
3 50 end status is reached.
E: Number of allowable copy/print/FAX when the toner near end
<List of Default values and set values for each destination> message is displayed. (Range: 0 - 50 sheets)
Setting value The number of output print allowed in item D is based on the
Enable/ assumption that the sheets are of A4 size with print ratio of 5%.
Toner Toner Toner near Disable of (The number of outputs allowed differs depending on the paper
Destination
preparation preparation end print job size and the print ratio.)
message time message continuation
at toner end NOTE: When item A is set to "0" and item E is properly set, printing
U.S.A 0 4 (Displayed 0 2 can be made after toner near end. However, improper phe-
(Displayed) when the (Displayed) (Print nomena such as insufficient density, thin spots, or improper
toner operation color balance may result depending on the using condi-
remaining stopped) tions. When item E is set to "1" printing is disabled after
quantity is toner near end. In this case, toner end display is made in
25%.)
the toner near end status, and copy/print/FAX outputs are
CANADA 0 4 (Displayed 0
disabled.
(Displayed) when the (Displayed)
toner
remaining
quantity is 26-71
25%.)
Purpose Setting
INCH 0 4 (Displayed 0
(Displayed) when the (Displayed) Function (Purpose) Used to set the trial mode of the web
toner browsing function.
remaining
Section
quantity is
25%.) Operation/Procedure
JAPAN 0 4 (Displayed 1 (Not 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
(Displayed) when the Displayed) 2) Press [OK] key.
toner
remaining
Setting Default
quantity is Item/Display Content
range value
25%.)
A WEB 0 Web browsing trial 0-1 1
AB_B 0 4 (Displayed 0
BROWSING mode setting
(Displayed) when the (Displayed)
TRIAL MODE 1 Web browsing trial
toner
(0: YES 1: NO) mode canceling
remaining
quantity is
25%.)
EUROPE 0 4 (Displayed 0
(Displayed) when the (Displayed) 26-73
toner Purpose Setting
remaining
quantity is
Function (Purpose) Enlargement continuous shoot, A3 wide
25%.) copy mode image loss (shade delete quan-
U.K. 0 4 (Displayed 0 tity) adjustment
(Displayed) when the (Displayed) Section
toner
Operation/Procedure
remaining
quantity is 1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys.
25%.) 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
AUS. 0 4 (Displayed 0 2 3) Press [OK] key.
(Displayed) when the (Displayed) (Print
toner operation When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss
remaining stopped) (shade delete quantity) is increased.
quantity is
25%.) Setting
Item/Display Content Default value
AB_A 0 4 (Displayed 0 range
(Displayed) when the (Displayed) A DELETING Rear frame side 0 - 50 0
toner SHADOW ADJ image loss quantity (Adjustment
remaining (M) (shade delete amount:
quantity is quantity) adjustment 0.1mm/step)
25%.) B DELETING Lead edge image 0 - 50 0
CHINA 0 4 (Displayed 0 1 SHADOW ADJ loss quantity (shade (Adjustment
(Displayed) when the (Displayed) (Print (S) delete quantity) amount:
toner operation adjustment 0.1mm/step)
remaining continued)
quantity is
25%.)
MX-5141N SIMULATION 6 – 43
26-74 27-2
Purpose Setting Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the OSA trial mode. Function (Purpose) Used to set the sender's registration num-
Section ber and the HOST server telephone num-
ber. (FSS function)
Operation/Procedure
1) Enter the set value with 10-key. Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Enter a password with 10-key. (5 - 8 digits)
The entered password is displayed on the column of "NEW". 27-4
In order to correct the entered password, press the [clear] key Purpose Setting
to delete the entered value one digit by one digit.
Function (Purpose) Used to set the initial call and toner order
2) Press [SET] key. auto send. (FSS function)
Section
Operation/Procedure
26-79
1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys.
Purpose Setting
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Function (Purpose) Used to set YES/NO of the pop-up display 3) Press [OK] key.
of user data delete result.
The set value in step 2) is saved.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
The value for the display operation specification after comple-
tion of user data delete is set.
2) Press [OK] key.
Default
Item/Display Content Setting range
value
A DISP SET User data delete result YES 1 0 (NO)
pop-up display ON
User data delete result NO 0
pop-up display OFF
27
27-1
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set non-detection of communica-
tion error (U7-00) with RIC. (FSS function)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
0 Not detection
1 Detection
MX-5141N SIMULATION 6 – 44
Default
Item/Display Content Setting range Remarks
value
A FSS MODE NEB1 Set the FSS MODE Exclusive for send in NE-B mode 0-3 0 1
NEB2 Send/Receive in NE-B mode 1
NFB1 Exclusive for send in NE-F mode 2 For convenience
stores
NFB2 Send/Receive in NE-F mode 3 For convenience
stores
B RETRY_BUSY Resend number setting when busy 0 - 15 2 0: No retry
C TIMER(MINUTE)_BUSY Resend timer setting (minute) when busy 1 - 15 3
D RETRY_ERROR Resend number setting when error 0 - 15 1 0: No retry
E TIMER(MINUTE)_ERROR Resend timer setting (minute) when error 1 - 15 1
F FAX RETRY Resend number setting when FAX initial connection 0 - 15 2 Unit: Number of times
G TONER ORDER EMPTY Toner order auto Empty 0 - 11 0 11
TIMING(K) NEAR_END send timing setting Near end 1
5% (K) 5% 2
10% 10% 3
15% 15% 4
20% 20% 5
25% 25% 6
30% 30% 7
35% 35% 8
40% 40% 9
45% 45% 10
50% 50% 11
H TONER ORDER EMPTY Toner order auto Empty 0 - 11 0 11
TIMING(C) NEAR_END send timing setting Near end 1
5% (C) 5% 2
10% 10% 3
15% 15% 4
20% 20% 5
25% 25% 6
30% 30% 7
35% 35% 8
40% 40% 9
45% 45% 10
50% 50% 11
I TONER ORDER EMPTY Toner order auto Empty 0 - 11 0 11
TIMING(M) NEAR_END send timing setting Near end 1
5% (M) 5% 2
10% 10% 3
15% 15% 4
20% 20% 5
25% 25% 6
30% 30% 7
35% 35% 8
40% 40% 9
45% 45% 10
50% 50% 11
J TONER ORDER EMPTY Toner order auto Empty 0 - 11 0 11
TIMING(Y) NEAR_END send timing setting Near end 1
5% (Y) 5% 2
10% 10% 3
15% 15% 4
20% 20% 5
25% 25% 6
30% 30% 7
35% 35% 8
40% 40% 9
45% 45% 10
50% 50% 11
K TEMP HISTORY CYCLE Frequency of acquiring the temperature and humidity history 1 - 1440 60 Unit: min.
L LOG OUTPUT CAPACITY(PCU) Log output capacity 0 - 50 30 Unit: [KB]
M TONER ORDER TIMING CONTROL Toner order timing Toner order alert send at the fixed 0-1 0 0
control toner remaining quantity
Toner under alert send when 1
presuming the toner consumption
N TONER ORDER DELIVERY Toner order delivery setting 0-1 0(OFF) 0
SETTING 1(ON)
O TONER ORDER DELIVERY Toner order delivery setting delivery threshold setting 1 - 15 3 Unit: DATE
INTERVAL
MX-5141N SIMULATION 6 – 45
27-5 27-9
Purpose Setting Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the machine tag No. (This func- Function (Purpose) Used to set the paper transport time record-
tion allows the host computer to check the ing YES/NO threshold value and shading
machine tag No.) (FSS function) gain adjustment retry number.
Section Communication (RIC/MODEM) (FSS function)
Operation/Procedure Section
1) Enter the password (max. 8 digits) with 10-key. Operation/Procedure
The entered password is displayed on the column of "NEW”. 1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys.
In order to correct the entered password, press the [clear] key 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
to delete the entered value one digit by one digit. 3) Press [OK] key.
2) Press [SET] key. The set value in step 2) is saved.
Setting Default
Item/Display Content
range value
27-6 A FEED TIME1 Threshold value of paper 0 - 100 50(%)
Purpose Setting transport time between
sensors (Machine)
Function (Purpose) Used to set of the manual service call.
B FEED TIME2 Threshold value of paper 0 - 100 50(%)
(FSS function)
transport time between
Section sensors (SPF)
Operation/Procedure C GAIN Threshold value of the 0 - 20 11
ADJUSTMENT gain adjustment retry (TIMES)
1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
RETRY number
D JAM ALERT Continuous JAM alert 1 - 100 10
0 Allow (Default)
judgment threshold value (TIMES)
1 Inhibit
(Alert judgment threshold
2) Press [OK] key. value for continuous
JAM's) (Setting of the
The set value in step 1) is saved. number of JAM's
continuously made at
which it is judged as an
alert.)
27-7
E JAM ALERT Continuous JAM alert 0 - 99 30
Purpose Setting PERIOD period setting (DAYS)
Function (Purpose) Used to set of the enable, alert callout.
* Items A, B: 0%, standard passing time between sheets of paper;
(FSS function)
100%, time for judgment as a jam between sheets of paper.
Section
* Item C: Because of a trouble in shading operation, the number of
Operation/Procedure retry is actually not registered.
1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [OK] key. 27-10
The set value in step 2) is saved. Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the trouble prediction history
Setting Default
Item/Display Content information. (FSS function)
range value
A FUNCTION FSS function enable 0 1 (NO) Section
(0:YES 1:NO) FSS function disable 1 Operation/Procedure
B ALERT Alert call enable 0 0 (YES)
1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
(0:YES 1:NO) Alert call disable 1
2) Press [YES] key.
C CONNECTION FAX connection enable 0 0 (FAX)
(0: FAX Not used. 1 The history information of trouble prediction is cleared.
1: No Use HTTP connection enable 2
2: HTTP) Target history Serial communication retry history
High density process control error history
Halftone process control error history
No alert cause Initial state / Trouble / Continuous JAM alert
Automatic registration adjustment error history
Maintenance When the maintenance timing is reached.
Scanner gain adjustment retry history
Service call When pressing Service call.
DSPF gain adjustment retry history (DSPF model only)
Toner send request When the toner order automatic send setting is
reached. Paper transport time between sensors
Toner collection request Revision of the toner installation date (only for
a new product)
Alert resend
MX-5141N SIMULATION 6 – 46
Except DSPF
27-11
Display Item
Purpose Others Occurrence date Retry Content
Item name
Function (Purpose) Used to check the serial communication (Display) number
retry number and the scanner gain adjust- LSU1 99/99/99 8 digits Serial
ment retry number history. (FSS function) 99:99:99 communication
LSU2 99/99/99 8 digits retry number history
Section 99:99:99 display
Operation/Procedure DESK1 99/99/99 8 digits
The serial communication retry number history and the scanner 99:99:99
gain adjustment retry number history are displayed. DESK2 99/99/99 8 digits
99:99:99
DSPF FINISHER1 99/99/99 8 digits
Display Item 99:99:99
Occurrence date Retry Content FINISHER2 99/99/99 8 digits
Item name 99:99:99
(Display) number
LSU1 99/99/99 8 digits Serial SCAN GAIN ADJ1 99/99/99 8 digits Scanner gain
99:99:99 communication 99:99:99 adjustment retry
retry number history SCAN GAIN ADJ2 99/99/99 8 digits history
LSU2 99/99/99 8 digits
99:99:99 display 99:99:99
DESK1 99/99/99 8 digits SCAN GAIN ADJ3 99/99/99 8 digits
99:99:99 99:99:99
DESK2 99/99/99 8 digits SCAN GAIN ADJ4 99/99/99 8 digits
99:99:99 99:99:99
FINISHER1 99/99/99 8 digits SCAN GAIN ADJ5 99/99/99 8 digits
99:99:99 99:99:99
FINISHER2 99/99/99 8 digits
99:99:99
DSPF1 99/99/99 8 digits
99:99:99 27-12
DSPF2 99/99/99 8 digits Purpose Others
99:99:99
Function (Purpose) Used to check the high density, halftone
SCAN GAIN ADJ1 99/99/99 8 digits Scanner gain
99:99:99 adjustment retry process control and the automatic registra-
SCAN GAIN ADJ2 99/99/99 8 digits history tion adjustment error history. (FSS Func-
99:99:99 tion)
SCAN GAIN ADJ3 99/99/99 8 digits Section
99:99:99
Operation/Procedure
SCAN GAIN ADJ4 99/99/99 8 digits
99:99:99 The high density, halftone process control and the automatic regis-
SCAN GAIN ADJ5 99/99/99 8 digits tration adjustment error history is displayed.
99:99:99
HV_ERR1 High density process control error history 1
DSPF GAIN ADJ1 99/99/99 8 digits DSPF gain
99:99:99 adjustment retry HV_ERR2 High density process control error history 2
DSPF GAIN ADJ2 99/99/99 8 digits history HV_ERR3 High density process control error history 3
99:99:99 HV_ERR4 High density process control error history 4
DSPF GAIN ADJ3 99/99/99 8 digits HV_ERR5 High density process control error history 5
99:99:99 H_TONE ERR1 Halftone process control error history 1
DSPF GAIN ADJ4 99/99/99 8 digits H_TONE ERR2 Halftone process control error history 2
99:99:99 H_TONE ERR3 Halftone process control error history 3
DSPF GAIN ADJ5 99/99/99 8 digits H_TONE ERR4 Halftone process control error history 4
99:99:99 H_TONE ERR5 Halftone process control error history 5
AUTO REG ADJ1 Automatic registration adjustment error history 1
AUTO REG ADJ2 Automatic registration adjustment error history 2
AUTO REG ADJ3 Automatic registration adjustment error history 3
AUTO REG ADJ4 Automatic registration adjustment error history 4
AUTO REG ADJ5 Automatic registration adjustment error history 5
MX-5141N SIMULATION 6 – 47
27-13
Purpose Others
Function (Purpose) Used to check the history of paper transport
time between sensors. (FSS function)
Section
Operation/Procedure
Change the display with scroll key.
27-14 27-15
Purpose Setting Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Used to set the FSS function connection Function (Purpose) Used to display the FSS connection status.
test mode. Section
Section Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure The FSS operating status is displayed.
1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Default
Item/Display Content Setting range
0 Disable (Default) value
1 Enable FSS CONNECTION Used to display the 0 Not 0
FSS connection operated
2) Press [OK] key. status. 1 Operated
The set value in step 1) is saved.
MX-5141N SIMULATION 6 – 48
27-16 Item/ Setting Default
Content NOTE
Display range value
Purpose Setting A3: Paper order alert 500 - 1000 Unit: No. of alert
Function (Purpose) Used to set the FSS alert send. FIRST number setting (A3) 10000 sheets for the
(Number of used first time
Section sheets)
Operation/Procedure A4: Paper order alert 500 - 1000 Unit: No. of alert
1) Enter the set value with 10-key. FIRST number setting (A4) 10000 sheets for the
(Number of used first time
The value for the FSS alert operation specification is set.
sheets)
2) Press [OK] key. B4: Paper order alert 500 - 1000 Unit: No. of alert
FIRST number setting (B4) 10000 sheets for the
Setting Default (Number of used first time
Item/Display Content
range value sheets)
A MAINTENANCE Maintenance Alert send 0 0 B5: Paper order alert 500 - 1000 Unit: No. of alert
ALERT alert send Enable FIRST number setting (B5) 10000 sheets for the
(0:YES 1:NO) Enable setting Alert send 1 (Number of used first time
Disable sheets)
B TONER Toner order Alert send 0 0
ORDER ALERT alert send Enable
(0:YES 1:NO) Enable setting Alert send 1
Disable 27-18
C TONER CTRG Toner Alert send 0 0
Purpose Data clear
ALERT cartridge Enable
(0:YES 1:NO) replacement Alert send 1 Function (Purpose) Used to clear the FSS paper feed retry
alert send Disable counter.
Enable setting
Section
D JAM ALERT Continuous Alert send 0 0
(0:YES 1:NO) JAM alert Enable Operation/Procedure
send Enable Alert send 1 1) Select an item to be cleared.
setting Disable 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
E TROUBLE Trouble alert Alert send 0 0
3) Press [YES] key.
ALERT send Enable Enable
(0:YES 1:NO) setting Alert send 1 The target counter is cleared.
Disable
Item/Display Content
F PAPER ORDER Paper order Alert send 0 0
ALERT alert send Enable TRAY1 Tray 1 paper feed retry counter
(0:YES 1:NO) Enable setting Alert send 1 TRAY2 Tray 2 paper feed retry counter
Disable TRAY3 Tray 3 paper feed retry counter
TRAY4 Tray 4 paper feed retry counter
MFT Manual paper feed retry counter
LCC LCC paper feed retry counter
27-17
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the FSS paper order alert.
Section 30
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set. 30-1
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. Purpose Operation test/check
The value for the FSS paper order alert operation specification Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen-
is set. sors and the detectors in other than the
3) Press [SET] key. paper feed section and the control circuits.
MX-5141N SIMULATION 6 – 49
DHPD_M M phase detection 7) Open the manual paper feed guide to the min. width (MIN).
DHPD_Y Y phase detection 8) Press [EXECUTE] key.
1TNFD Waste toner full detection The min. width (MIN) detection level is recognized.
HLPCD Fusing roller pressure release detection
When the above operation is not performed normally, "ERROR" is
WEBEND Web end detection
displayed. When completed normally, "COMPLETE" is displayed.
PRTPD Right paper exit tray paper empty detection
1TUD_CL Primary transfer belt separation CL detection MAX POSITION Manual feed max. width
1TUD_K Primary transfer belt separation BK detection P1(A4)POSITION Manual feed P1 position width (A4)
----- Not used. P2(A4R)POSITION Manual feed P2 position width (A4R)
MIN POSITION Manual feed min. width
30-2
Purpose Operation test/check 40-7
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen- Purpose Adjustment/Setup
sors and the detectors in the paper feed Function (Purpose) Used to set the adjustment value of the
section and the control circuits. manual paper feed tray paper width sensor.
Section Section Paper feed
Operation/Procedure Operation/Procedure
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis- 1) Select a target item to be adjusted with scroll keys.
played.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
The sensors and the detectors which are turned ON are high-
3) Press [OK] key.
lighted.
The set value in step 2) is saved.
CPFD1 Tray 1 transport detection
CLUD1 Tray 1 upper limit detection Default
Item/Display Content
value
CPED1 Tray 1 paper empty detection
A MAX POSITION Manual feed max. width 241
CSPD1 Tray 1 paper remaining quantity detection
B P1 POSITION Manual feed P1 position width (A4) 231
CSS11 Tray 1 rear edge detection 1
C P2 POSITION Manual feed P2 position width (A4R) 140
CSS12 Tray 1 rear edge detection 2
D MIN POSITION Manual feed min. width 19
CSS13 Tray 1 rear edge detection 3
CSS14 Tray 1 rear edge detection 4
CPFD2 Tray 2 transport detection
CLUD2 Tray 2 upper limit detection
CPED2 Tray 2 paper empty detection
CSPD2 Tray 2 paper remaining detection
41
CSS21 Tray 2 rear edge detection 1
CSS22 Tray 2 rear edge detection 2 41-1
CSS23 Tray 2 rear edge detection 3
Purpose Operation test/check
CSS24 Tray 2 rear edge detection 4
MPFD Manual feed paper entry detection Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the docu-
MPLD Manual feed paper length detection ment size sensor and the control circuit.
MTOP1 Manual feed tray retraction detection Section
MTOP2 Manual feed tray extension detection Operation/Procedure
MPED Manual feed paper empty detection
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis-
played.
The sensors and the detectors which are turned ON are high-
lighted.
40 OCSW Document cover status Open: Normal display
Close: Highlighted
40-2 PD1 - 7 Document detection No document: Normal display
sensor status Document present: Highlighted
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Manual paper feed tray paper width sensor
adjustment.
Section Paper feed 41-2
Operation/Procedure Purpose Adjustment
1) Open the manual paper feed guide to the max. width (MAX). Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the document size sensor
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. detection level.
The max. width (MAX) detection level is recognized. Section
3) Open the manual paper feed guide to P1 width (A4). Operation/Procedure
4) Press [EXECUTE] key. 1) Open the document cover, and press [EXECUTE] key without
place a document on the document table.
The P1 width (A4) detection level is recognized.
The sensor level without document is recognized.
5) Open the manual paper feed guide to P2 width (A4R).
2) Set A3 (11” x 17") paper on the document table, and press
6) Press [EXECUTE] key.
[EXECUTE] key.
The P2 width (A4R) detection level is recognized.
The sensor level when detecting the document is displayed.
When the above operation is normally completed, it is displayed.
MX-5141N SIMULATION 6 – 50
41-3 Item/Display Content Detection level range
Purpose Operation test/check OCSW Original cover SW 0-1 ("1" to Close)
PD1 Document detection 1 0 - 255
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the docu-
PD2 Document detection 2 0 - 255
ment size sensor and the control circuit.
PD3 Document detection 3 0 - 255
Section PD4 Document detection 4 0 - 255
Operation/Procedure PD5 Document detection 5 0 - 255
The detection output level (A/D value) of OCSW and the document PD6 Document detection 6 0 - 255
sensor (PD1 - PD7) is displayed in real time. PD7 Document detection 7 0 - 255
43
43-1
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the fusing temperature in each
mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the setting value to be set with scroll keys.
SW-A Setting value when plain paper is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing control setting.
SW-B Set value when heavy paper is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing control setting.
The set value displayed in this simulation differs depending on plain paper or heavy paper which is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing
control setting.
(Example) When plain paper is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing control setting, the value of SW-A is displayed.
MX-5141N SIMULATION 6 – 51
43-2
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Operation setting.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the setting value to be set with scroll keys.
Code descriptions
TH_UM Fusing thermistor main (Front surface of paper) HL_UM Heater lamp main (Heat roller for front surface of paper)
TH_LM Fusing thermistor main (Back surface of paper) HL_LM Heater lamp main (Heat roller for front surface of paper)
TH_US Fusing thermistor sub (Front surface of paper) HL_US Heater lamp sub (Heat roller for front surface of paper)
MX-5141N SIMULATION 6 – 52
43-20
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to set the environmental correction
under low temperature and low humidity (L/
L) for the fusing temperature setting (SIM
43-1) in each paper mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
Correction value: -49 - +49, Input value: Actually inputted value (1 -
1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys.
99)
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [OK] key. Correction value -49 -25 -5 0 5 25 49
The set value in step 2) is saved. Input value 1 25 45 50 55 75 99
43-21
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to set the environment correction
under high temperature and high humidity
(H/H) for the fusing temperature setting
(SIM 43-1) in each paper mode.
Section
Correction value: -49 - +49, Input value: Actually inputted value (1 -
Operation/Procedure 99)
1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. Correction value -49 -25 -5 0 5 25 49
Input value 1 25 45 50 55 75 99
3) Press [OK] key.
The set value in step 2 is saved.
MX-5141N SIMULATION 6 – 53
Item/Display Content Setting range Default value
41cpm/51cpm
Code descriptions
TH_UM Fusing thermistor main (Front surface of paper) HL_UM Heater lamp main (Heat roller for front surface of paper)
TH_LM Fusing thermistor main (Back surface of paper) HL_LM Heater lamp main (Heat roller for back surface of paper)
TH_US Fusing thermistor sub (Front surface of paper) HL_US Heater lamp sub (Heat roller for front surface of paper)
43-24
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Operation setting.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. Correction value: -49 - +49, Input value: Actually inputted value (1 -
3) Press [OK] key. 99)
The set value in step 2 is saved.
Correction value -49 -25 -5 0 +5 +25 +49
Input value 1 25 45 50 55 75 99
MX-5141N SIMULATION 6 – 54
43-35
'LOSS CHANGE
SECTION
.IP WIDTH
MX-5141N SIMULATION 6 – 55
2 ‘13/Nov
44
44-1
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set each correction operation func-
tion in the image forming (process) section.
Section Image process (Photoconductor/Develop-
ing/Transfer/Cleaning)
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set with the touch panel.
(The selected item is highlighted.)
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (The set value is saved.)
NOTE: Set the items to the default values unless a change is spe-
cially required.
Setting Default
Item/Display Content NOTE
range value
HV Normal operation high density process control Enable/Disable Normal Enable
setting (Disable:
HT Normal operation halftone process control Enable/Disable 0: NO) Enable
setting Reverse
TC Transfer output correction Enable/Disable setting (Enable: Enable A variation of the transfer efficiency is corrected with
1: YES) temperature and humidity (absolute moisture). Enable/
Disable setting. Correction of the output voltage of the
high transfer voltage.
MD VG Membrane decrease grid voltage correction Enable/Disable Enable
setting
MD LD Membrane laser power voltage correction Enable/Disable Disable
setting
MD EV Membrane decrease environment grid voltage correction Enable
Enable/Disable setting
MD DL Membrane decrease discharge light quantity correction Enable
Enable/Disable setting
MD DV_VG Enable/Disable setting of the grid correction by the developer Enable
2 bias absolute value
MD DL EV Membrane decrease environment discharge light quantity Disable
correction Enable/Disable setting
TN_PIX_SUP Setting of Enable/Disable of toner supply control for the yield Enable In the case of Disable, the FB ratio of all the colors is
count fixed to 100%.
TN_FB Enable/Disable setting of feedback toner density correction Enable In the case of Disable, toner is not supplied by means
of process control feedback.
TN_INT Enable/Disable setting of interval toner supply control Enable In the case of Disable, toner supply is not made
according to the developer traveling distance.
TN_RECV Enable/Disable setting of developer recovery Enable In the case of Disable, the developer recovery mode
cannot be used in the HV process control.
TN_ADJ Enable/Disable setting of the sensor output adjustment Enable In the case of Disable, the control voltage adjustment
cannot be used in the process control.
TN_EMP Setting of Enable/Disable of the toner falling distance Enable In the case of Disable, detection of the fall amount is
detection control not made. (No detection for ENP_INT and ENP_NEW)
TN_EMP_INT Setting of Enable/Disable of the toner falling distance Enable In the case of Disable, Near End when detecting EMP
detection control of job interruption during a job.
TN_EMP_NEW Setting of Enable/Disable of the new toner cartridge falling Enable
distance detection control
TN_PIX_TBL Setting of Enable/Disable of execution of revision of the yield Enable
count conversion table for the toner supply control in the
halftone process control
AR_AUTO Auto registration adjustment Enable/Disable setting Enable
AR_ERROR Auto registration adjustment execution error check Enable/ Enable
Disable setting
DM_PHASE Drum phase fitting Enable/Disable setting Enable
AR_PHASE Enable/Disable setting of the drum phase alignment in the Enable
automatic registration adjustment
PRT_HT Halftone process control printer correction feedback Enable/ Enable
Disable setting
PTC_ENV PTC environment correction Enable/Disable setting Enable Enable: Correction ON
PTC_LIFE PTC life correction Enable/Disable setting Enable Enable: Correction ON
MX-5141N SIMULATION 6 – 56
44-2 Classifica Item/Display Content Setting Default
tion range value
Purpose Adjustment/Setup REGIST Belt surface when
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the sensitivity of the image REG_R the item R
T 0 - 255 0
density sensor (registration sensor). GRND adjustment is
completed
Section Process REG_F
Belt substrate input
Operation/Procedure U BELT 0 - 255 0
max. value (F side)
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment is executed auto- MAX
matically. REG_F
Belt substrate input
V BELT 0 - 255 0
After completion of the adjustment, the adjustment result is dis- min. value (F side)
MIN
played. REG_F Belt substrate input
If the adjustment is not executed normally, "ERROR" is displayed. W BELT difference (Item U - 0 - 255 0
DIF Item V)
Classifica Item/Display Content Setting Default REG_R
tion range value Belt substrate input
X BELT 0 - 255 0
max. value (R side)
F side color sensor MAX
PCS_F_ 100 -
A normalization co 100 REG_R
CL_KA 999 Belt substrate input
efficiency Y BELT 0 - 255 0
min. value (R side)
F side sensor light MIN
PCS_F
B emitting quantity 1 - 255 32 REG_R Belt substrate input
LED ADJ
adjustment value Z BELT difference (Item X - 0 - 255 0
R side sensor light DIF Item Y)
PCS_R
C emitting quantity 1 - 255 40 REG_F
LED ADJ Patch light reception
adjustment value AA PATCH( 0 - 255 0
potential F (K)
PCS_F_ K)
F side color dark
D CL_DAR 0 - 255 0 REG_F
voltage Patch light reception
K AB PATCH( 0 - 255 0
potential F (C)
PCS_F F side sensor dark C)
E 0 - 255 0
DARK voltage REG_F
Patch light reception
PCS_R R side sensor dark AC PATCH( 0 - 255 0
F 0 - 255 0 potential F (M)
DARK voltage M)
Belt surface when REG_F
Patch light reception
PCS_F the item B AD PATCH( 0 - 255 0
G 0 - 255 0 potential F (Y)
GRND adjustment is Y)
completed REG_R
Patch light reception
PCS_F AE PATCH( 0 - 255 0
PROCON Belt substrate input potential R (K)
H BELT 0 - 255 0 K)
max. value
MAX REG_R
Patch light reception
PCS_F AF PATCH( 0 - 255 0
Belt substrate input potential R (C)
I BELT 0 - 255 0 C)
min. value
MIN REG_R
Patch light reception
PCS_F Belt substrate input AG PATCH( 0 - 255 0
potential R (M)
J BELT difference (Item H - 0 - 255 0 M)
DIF Item I) REG_R
Patch light reception
Belt surface when AH PATCH( 0 - 255 0
potential R (Y)
PCS_R the item C Y)
K 0 - 255 0
GRND adjustment is
completed
Error name Error content
PCS_R
Belt substrate input Process control F sensor -> PCS_F LED ADJ error The target is
L BELT 0 - 255 0
max. value adjustment abnormality not reached by 3 times of retries.
MAX
Process control R sensor -> PCS_R LED ADJ error The target is
PCS_R
Belt substrate input adjustment abnormality not reached by 3 times of retries.
M BELT 0 - 255 0
min. value F color sensor adjustment
MIN -> PCS_F_CL_KA calculation error
abnormality
PCS_R Belt substrate input
-> PCS_F GRND error
N BELT difference (Item L - 0 - 255 0 F sensor element scan
Effective difference of the upper and the
DIF Item M) abnormality
lower values of the belt element surface
F side registration
-> PCS_R GRND error
REG_F sensor light emitting R sensor element scan
O 1 - 255 32 Effective difference of the upper and the
LED ADJ quantity adjustment abnormality
lower values of the belt element surface
value
Registration sensor F -> REG_F LED ADJ error The target is
REG_F F side registration
P 0 - 255 0 adjustment abnormality not reached by 3 times of retries.
DARK sensor dark voltage
Registration sensor R -> REG_R LED ADJ error The target is
Belt surface when
adjustment abnormality not reached by 3 times of retries.
REG_F the item O
REGIST Q 0 - 255 0 -> REG_F GRND error
GRND adjustment is Registration element F scan
completed Effective difference of the upper and the
abnormality
lower values of the belt element surface
R side registration
REG_R sensor light emitting -> REG_R GRND error
R 1 - 255 40 Registration element R scan
LED ADJ quantity adjustment Effective difference of the upper and the
abnormality
value lower values of the belt element surface
REG_R R side registration
S 0 - 255 0
DARK sensor dark voltage
MX-5141N SIMULATION 6 – 57
44-4 44-6
Purpose Setting Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to set the conditions of the high den- Function (Purpose) Used to execute the high density process
sity process control operation. control forcibly.
Section Process Section Process
Operation/Procedure Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys. Press [EXECUTE] key.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. In case of a normal completion, the result is saved.
3) Press [OK] key. In case of an abnormal completion, "ERROR" is displayed.
NOTE: Set the items to the default values unless a change is spe- (Refer to the table below.)
cially required. In case of an ERROR, the previous correction data are saved.
MX-5141N SIMULATION 6 – 58
2 ‘13/Nov
44-9
Purpose Operation data display
Function (Purpose) Used to display the result data of the high
density process control operation.
Section Image process (Photoconductor/Develop-
ing/Transfer/Cleaning)
Operation/Procedure
Select a target display mode with [CPY/PRN], [OTHER] keys.
Default
Mode Item/Display (*: Correction value) Content Display range
value
CPY/PRN P (PROCON) BLACK : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** High density process control mode GB: 150 - 850 GB: 630
CYAN : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** GB/DV data (KCMY) DV: 0 - 600 DV: 430
MAGENTA : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** (Output voltage level/base voltage level)
YELLOW : GB ***/*** DV ***/***
N(M) BLACK : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** Medium speed print mode GB: 150 - 850 GB: 630
(NORMAL CYAN : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** GB/DV data (KCMY) DV: 0 - 600 DV: 430
(MIDDLE)) MAGENTA : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** (Actual output voltage level/base voltage level)
YELLOW : GB ***/*** DV ***/***
N(L) BLACK : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** Low speed print mode GB: 150 - 850 GB: 600
(NORMAL CYAN : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** GB/DV data (KCMY) DV: 0 - 600 DV: 400
(LOW)) MAGENTA : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** (Actual output voltage level/base voltage level)
YELLOW : GB ***/*** DV ***/***
OTHER TN/TC TN HUD AREA Toner density correction humidity area 1-8 4
TN HUD DATA Toner density correction humidity AD value 0 - 1023 0
TC TMP AREA Transfer correction temperature area 1-9 4
TC TMP DATA Transfer correction temperature AD value 0 - 1023 0
TC HUD AREA Transfer correction humidity area 1-9 4
TC HUD DATA Transfer correction humidity AD value 0 - 1023 0
MD HUD AREA Membrane decrease correction humidity area 1-9 4
MD HUD DATA Membrane decrease correction humidity AD value 0 - 1023 0
DRUM MD K STEP Drum membrane decrease correction STEP level 0-4 0
MD C STEP (KCMY)
MD M STEP
MD Y STEP
MD K DRUM COUNTER Membrane decrease drum traveling distance area 0 - 20 0
MD C DRUM COUNTER (KCMY)
MD M DRUM COUNTER
MD Y DRUM COUNTER
LIFE MD K REVISE(LIFE) : L *** M *** MC grid correction voltage level (for the drum 0 - 255 0
MD C REVISE(LIFE) : L *** M *** membrane decrease) (KCMY)
MD M REVISE(LIFE) : L *** M ***
MD Y REVISE(LIFE) : L *** M ***
EV MD K REVISE(EV) : L *** M *** MC grid voltage correction level (for the 0 - 255 0
MD C REVISE(EV) : L *** M *** environment) (KCMY)
MD M REVISE(EV) : L *** M ***
MD Y REVISE(EV) : L *** M ***
VG_HV MD K REVISE(VG_HV) : L1 *** L2 *** M Electric field grid voltage correction 0 - 255 0 2
*** display (KCMY)
MD C REVISE(VG_HV) : L1 *** L2 *** M
***
MD M REVISE(VG_HV) : L1 *** L2 *** M
***
MD Y REVISE(VG_HV) : L1 *** L2 *** M
***
ALL MD K REVISE(ALL) : L *** M *** MC grid voltage correction level (for the drum 0 - 255 0
MD C REVISE(ALL) : L *** M *** membrane decrease) (KCMY)
MD M REVISE(ALL) : L *** M ***
MD Y REVISE(ALL) : L *** M ***
LD MD K REVISE(LD) : L *** M *** Laser power correction level (for the drum 0 - 255 0
MD C REVISE(LD) : L *** M *** membrane decrease) (KCMY)
MD M REVISE(LD) : L *** M ***
MD Y REVISE(LD) : L *** M ***
DL MD K REVISE COL (DL): L *** M *** Discharge lamp correction level (%) (for the drum 0 - 100 70
MD C REVISE COL (DL): L *** M *** membrane decrease)
MD M REVISE COL (DL): L *** M ***
MD Y REVISE COL (DL): L *** M ***
DL EV MD K REVISE COL (DL EV): L *** M *** Discharge lamp correction level (%) (for the -100 - 100 0
MD C REVISE COL (DL EV): L *** M *** environment)
MD M REVISE COL (DL EV): L *** M ***
MD Y REVISE COL (DL EV): L *** M ***
MX-5141N SIMULATION 6 – 59
Default
Mode Item/Display (*: Correction value) Content Display range
value
OTHER CRUM DESTINATION CRUM destination (Main unit data) - -
MODEL TYPE Machine model type 0-1 0
CRUM DEST_K CRUM destination (CRUM data) - -
CRUM DEST_C
CRUM DEST_M
CRUM DEST_Y
CNT PROCON COUNT HV High density process control number of executions 0 - 99999999 0
PROCON COUNT HT Halftone process control number of executions 0 - 99999999 0
MX-5141N SIMULATION 6 – 60
Item/Display Content Display range 44-21
TH1_LSU LSU thermistor detection Temperature:
level (A/D value) (Degree C) 5.0-60.0 degree C (+/- Purpose Adjustment/Setup
0.1 degree C) Function (Purpose) Used to set the halftone process control tar-
AD value: 0-255 get.
Section Process
Operation/Procedure
44-15 Press [EXECUTE] key.
Purpose Setting The halftone process control target is set and the operation data
Function (Purpose) Used to set the OPC drum idle rotation. are displayed.
Section Process Display Content
Operation/Procedure COMPLETE Normal complete
1) Select an item to be set with the scroll key. ERROR COLOR SENSOR Color image density sensor sensitivity
ADJUSTMENT adjustment error
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
ERROR BLACK SENSOR Black image density sensor sensitivity
3) Press [OK] key. ADJUSTMENT adjustment error
The initial value must be set unless any special change is required. [YMCK] High density process control error [YMCK]
OTHER Other errors
Item/ Setting Default
Content
Display range value
A TIME Idle rotation interval (time interval 0 - 255 6
between the previous OPC drum idle 44-22
rotation and the next one) setting (h)
B AREA1 Environmental area difference 0-5 2 Purpose Operation data display
judgment threshold value setting Function (Purpose) Used to display the toner patch density
(difference between the previous OPC level in the halftone process control opera-
drum idle rotation and the current one) tion.
C AREA2 Environmental area conditions (AND 1 - 15 1
condition of the previous OPC drum Section Process
idle rotation and the current one) Operation/Procedure
D CYCLE Previous rotation time setting (sec) in 0 - 255 0 1) Select the display mode with [1ST STEP], [2ND STEP] key.
the process control when recovered
from power ON, preheating/sleep
The toner patch density level made in the halftone process
mode. control operation is displayed.
The execution YES/NO of the OPC drum idle rotation is determined Item/Display Content
by the AND condition of TIME, AREA1, and AREA 2. ID_n Patch data display
(PTK: n = 1 - 24, PTC/PTM/PTY: n = 1 - 16)
To execute the OPC drum idle rotation, set item B (AREA 1) to "0,"
BASE1 Belt substrate data (START)
and item C (AREA2) to "15."
BASE5 Belt substrate data (LAST)
However, idle rotation is performed in a certain interval while in shut
off. This must be fully explained to the user.
44-24
44-17 Purpose Operation data display
Purpose Setting Function (Purpose) Used to display the correction target and
Function (Purpose) Process refresh execution the correction level in the halftone process
control operation.
Section Process
Operation/Procedure Section Process
1) Select a refresh item with the touch panel key. Operation/Procedure
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. 1) Select the display category with [NEXT] key.
3) The refresh operation is executed. 2) Select a target adjustment color with [K] [C] [M] [Y] key.
NOTE: Do not execute this simulation unless specially required. Category Item/Display Content
Coefficient [EX-LOW] Coefficient of the approximation
Display items and descriptions of contents
formula of the minimum density
Display Content [LOW] Coefficient of the approximation
BLADE REFRESH Blade development refresh formula of the low density
DRUM REFRESH Drum refresh [CONNECT] Coefficient of the approximation
DEVE REFRESH Development refresh formula of when connecting the low
* DEVE REFLESH execution consume density and the medium density
W-Letter A3 100% worth of toner. [MID] Coefficient of the approximation
formula of the medium density
Display of results and descriptions of items [HIGH] Coefficient of the approximation
formula of the high density
Display Content
[CONNECT POINT] Each density section connection
COMPLETE Normal completion
output ratio
ERROR Abnormal end
Reference [SENSOR_TARGET] Halftone process control reference
INTERRUPTION Forcible interruption value value
Correction [S_VALUE] Halftone process control correction
value value
MX-5141N SIMULATION 6 – 61
Category Item/Display Content 44-26
For printer [PRINTER_S_VALUE] Printer halftone process control
correction value Purpose Adjustment/Setup
[PRINTER_BASE_ Printer halftone process control Function (Purpose) Used to execute the halftone process con-
DITHER_VALUE] reference dither value trol compulsory.
[PRINTER_AUTO_ Printer auto density adjustment
Section Process
HT_VALUE] correction value
Previous [BEFORE S_VALUE] Previous halftone process control Operation/Procedure
correction value Press [EXECUTE] key.
value The halftone process control is performed and the operation data
are displayed.
MX-5141N SIMULATION 6 – 62
44-28
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to set the process control execution
conditions.
Section Process
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target item of setting with scroll key on the touch
panel.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
NOTE: Set the items to the default values unless a change is spe-
cially required.
Default
Mode Item/Display Content Setting range
value
Process control A INITIAL YES When warm-up after clearing the counter Enable 0-1 0 0
Enable/Disable NO of the OPC drum and the developer unit Disable 1
setting B SW ON When supplying the power (when Color process control 0-3 0 3
canceling power shut-off) Enable
Process control Disable 1
BK process control Enable 2
Pixel count judgment 3
C TIME After passing the specified time from Color process control 0-3 0 3
leaving READY continuously (Time can be Enable
changed by INTERVAL TIME) Process control Disable 1
BK process control Enable 2
Pixel count judgment 3
D HUM_LIMIT HUM judgment is made when turning ON Color process control 0-2 0 0
the power and after passing INTERVAL Enable
TIME. Process control Disable 1
BK process control Enable 2
E HUM The temperature and humidity inside the Color process control 0-2 0 0
machine are monitored only during a job at Enable
the interval set by the item of HUM HOUR. Process control Disable 1
When the changes in the temperature and BK process control Enable 2
the humidity are greater than the specified
level (the set value of item HUM DIF) in
comparison with the previous process
control.
F REV1 YES When the accumulated traveling distance Enable 0-1 0 0
NO of K or M OPC drum unit reaches the Inhibit 1
specified level after turning ON the power.
G REV2_BK YES When the accumulated traveling distance Enable 0-1 0 0
NO of K OPC drum unit reaches the specified Inhibit 1
level from execution of the previous
density correction.
H REV2_CL YES When the accumulated traveling distance Enable 0-1 0 0
NO of M OPC drum unit reaches the specified Inhibit 1
level from execution of the previous
density correction.
I REFRESH YES Select of YES/NO of the manual process Key operation display 0-1 0 1
MODE NO control key with key operation Key operation NO display 1
MX-5141N SIMULATION 6 – 63
Default
Mode Item/Display Content Setting range
value
Setting of the J DAY When there is no color job from when the 0: Disable of the specified 0 - 999 0 1
execution previous color process control was days judgment
conditions of performed to when the number of days set 1 - 999: 1 - 999 days 999
the process by this item setting, perform the process passing
control control when executing the next warming
up.
K HI-COV Setting of the execution conditions of the The process control is 0-2 0 0
process control for the print ratio performed by considering
the average print ratio of
every 10 pages as the
judgment criteria.
Print ratio judgment inhibit 1
(The process control for
the target of print ratio is
not performed.)
The process control is 2
performed by considering
the average print ratio of
30 pages as the judgment
criteria in a continuous
print job of 30 or more
pages.
Setting of the L LO-COV Setting of the execution judgment of the Enable 0-1 0 0
execution process control in continuous printing of Inhibit 1
conditions of low print ratio images
the process M TonerCA-END Setting of the process control interval Enable 0-1 0 0
control reduction when the toner cartridge Inhibit 1
remaining quantity is 25% or less (If this is
set to Enable, item M RATIO is changed.)
N AVERAGE-PAGE Setting of the number of pages of item HI- 1: 10 pages - 5: 50 pages 1-5 1 3
COV set value 2 1 step corresponds to 10 5
pages.
O LIMIT PAGE Setting of the number of connected jobs of 1: 10 pages - 10: 100 1 -10 1 10
the process control and of the limit number pages
of the process control 1 step corresponds to 10
A number of reservation jobs are pages. 10
connected. When the number of jobs
exceeds the specified number of pages
(the set value of this setting), the process
control is performed. / The process control
is performed by AND conditions of item
REV condition and the specified number of
pages (the set value of this setting).
P PIX_RATIO_BK Magnification ratio setting (%) of the BK toner count specified value 1 - 999 10
The set value of 100 corresponds to K print of A4 at the print ratio of 5%.
Q PIX_RATIO_CL Magnification ratio setting (%) of the color (CMY) toner count specified 1 - 999 10
value
The set value of 100 corresponds to K print of A4 at the print ratio of 5%.
R INTERVAL TIME Setting of non-use time after turning ON the power. (h: hour) 1 - 255 3
S HUM HOUR Interval setting of the temperature and humidity monitoring time of 1 - 24 2
"HUM" (unit: 10 minutes)
T HUM_DIF The specified value of the area difference in humidity between the level 1-9 2
at execution of the previous control and the current humidity (Applied to
item HUM)
U BK_RATIO Magnification ratio setting (%) of the specified value of the BK OPC 1 - 999 (Entry of 20 15
drum traveling distance of "REV2_BK" corresponds to
100,000mm.)
V M_RATIO Magnification ratio setting (%) of the M OPC drum traveling distance of 1 - 999 (Entry of 20 15
"REV2_CL" corresponds to
100,000mm.)
W COLOR BORDER Judgment criteria whether the BK high 0: The BK process control 0 - 999 20
density process control is individually is executed regardless of
performed or not (Setting of the ratio of thethe M OPC drum traveling
M OPC drum rotation distance for the K distance.
OPC drum rotation distance (%)) 1 - 999: 1 - 999(%)
X BK ONLY Setting of the frequency of execution of the Frequency of once for 5 0-6 0 5
4-color high density process control when times
only monochrome output is continued (The Frequency of once for 1 - 5 1-5
result of this setting is applied only when times
the M OPC drum rotation distance is The 4-color high density 6
smaller than the set value of COLOR process control is always
BORDER.) performed.
Y HT_DIF HT process control execution judgment developing bias variation value 1 - 255 40
MX-5141N SIMULATION 6 – 64
Default
Mode Item/Display Content Setting range
value
Setting of the Z RG_ON_ CL Setting of execution of the registration adjustment when executing the When the color 0 0
execution SYNC process control when turning ON the power process control is
condition of the executed.
registration ALL Executed 1
adjustment regardless of the
process control.
CL/BK When the color 2
process control
and the K process
control are
executed.
AA RG_TEMP_TIMER Time interval from registration adjustment after turning ON the power to 0 - 240 0
the next execution. (MINUTE)
AB RG_PERM_TIMER Setting of inhibit time of execution of the registration adjustment 0 - 15 1
(HOUR)
AC RG_HOUR_TIMER Setting of the interval time of execution of the registration adjustment 0 - 15 5
(Above)+(HOUR)
AD RG_BW_SYNC Setting of Enable/Disable of the Enable 0-1 0 1
registration adjustment after a Inhibit 1
monochrome job
Setting of the AE 2TRAN_CLEAN_ Secondary transfer cleaning process time judgment threshold value 1 5 - 999 200
secondary TIME1 (The total number of sheets for cleaning execution conditions) (Cleaning
transfer time: Short)
cleaning AF 2TRAN_CLEAN_ Secondary transfer cleaning process time judgment threshold value 2 5 - 999 300
conditions TIME2 (The total number of sheets for cleaning execution conditions) (Cleaning
time: Medium)
AG 2TRAN_CLEAN_ Secondary transfer cleaning process time judgment threshold value 3 5 - 999 500
TIME3 (The total number of sheets for cleaning execution conditions) (Cleaning
time: Long)
Drum reverse AH DRUM_REVERSE Drum reverse rotation control setting Enable 0-1 0 1
rotation control Disable 1
When REFRESH MODE setting is enabled (0), the menu of the user process control execution button is displayed on the user system setting
menu.
When the color balance or the density change is not within the allowable range, the user can perform the process control manually and forcibly.
However, toner is consumed grater than as usual. This point must be explained to the user clearly.
44-29
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions of the
process control during a job.
Section Process
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target item of setting with scroll key on the touch
panel.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [OK] key.
MX-5141N SIMULATION 6 – 65
44-31
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the OPC drum phase. (Man-
ual adjustment)
Section Process
Operation/Procedure
NOTE: For the OPC drum phase adjustment, do not use this simu-
lation, but use SIM50-22 (auto adjustment).
MX-5141N SIMULATION 6 – 66
44-37
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to set the development bias correc-
tion level in the continuous printing opera-
tion.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a set target color with the touch panel.
2) Select a target item with scroll keys.
3) Enter the set value with 10-key.
4) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
NOTE: When the print density is varied in the continuous printing
operation, this simulation is used.
MX-5141N SIMULATION 6 – 67
Button Item Display Content Setting Default
range value
A DV_ADJ_CL_M_L_DATA_1 DV bias correction data 1 in color printing (low speed) 0-5 0
B DV_ADJ_CL_M_L_DATA_2 DV bias correction data 2 in color printing (low speed) 0-5 0
C DV_ADJ_CL_M_L_DATA_3 DV bias correction data 3 in color printing (low speed) 0-5 0
D DV_ADJ_CL_M_M_DATA_1 DV bias correction data 1 in color printing (middle speed) 0-5 0
E DV_ADJ_CL_M_M_DATA_2 DV bias correction data 2 in color printing (middle speed) 0-5 0
F DV_ADJ_CL_M_M_DATA_3 DV bias correction data 3 in color printing (middle speed) 0-5 0
DV bias correction starting position data 1 in color printing (low
G DV_ADJ_START_CL_M_L_1 1 - 12 4
speed)
DV bias correction starting position data 2 in color printing (low
H DV_ADJ_START_CL_M_L_2 1 - 12 3
speed)
M DV bias correction starting position data 3 in color printing (low
I DV_ADJ_START_CL_M_L_3 1 - 12 1
speed)
DV bias correction starting position data 4 in color printing (low
J DV_ADJ_START_CL_M_L_4 1 - 12 1
speed)
DV bias correction starting position data 1 in color printing (middle
K DV_ADJ_START_CL_M_M_1 1 - 12 4
speed)
DV bias correction starting position data 2 in color printing (middle
L DV_ADJ_START_CL_M_M_2 1 - 12 3
speed)
DV bias correction starting position data 3 in color printing (middle
M DV_ADJ_START_CL_M_M_3 1 - 12 1
speed)
DV bias correction starting position data 4 in color printing (middle
N DV_ADJ_START_CL_M_M_4 1 - 12 1
speed)
A DV_ADJ_CL_Y_L_DATA_1 DV bias correction data 1 in color printing (low speed) 0-5 0
B DV_ADJ_CL_Y_L_DATA_2 DV bias correction data 2 in color printing (low speed) 0-5 0
C DV_ADJ_CL_Y_L_DATA_3 DV bias correction data 3 in color printing (low speed) 0-5 0
D DV_ADJ_CL_Y_M_DATA_1 DV bias correction data 1 in color printing (middle speed) 0-5 0
E DV_ADJ_CL_Y_M_DATA_2 DV bias correction data 2 in color printing (middle speed) 0-5 0
F DV_ADJ_CL_Y_M_DATA_3 DV bias correction data 3 in color printing (middle speed) 0-5 0
DV bias correction starting position data 1 in color printing (low
G DV_ADJ_START_CL_Y_L_1 1 - 12 4
speed)
DV bias correction starting position data 2 in color printing (low
H DV_ADJ_START_CL_Y_L_2 1 - 12 3
speed)
Y DV bias correction starting position data 3 in color printing (low
I DV_ADJ_START_CL_Y_L_3 1 - 12 1
speed)
DV bias correction starting position data 4 in color printing (low
J DV_ADJ_START_CL_Y_L_4 1 - 12 1
speed)
DV bias correction starting position data 1 in color printing (middle
K DV_ADJ_START_CL_Y_M_1 1 - 12 4
speed)
DV bias correction starting position data 2 in color printing (middle
L DV_ADJ_START_CL_Y_M_2 1 - 12 3
speed)
DV bias correction starting position data 3 in color printing (middle
M DV_ADJ_START_CL_Y_M_3 1 - 12 1
speed)
DV bias correction starting position data 4 in color printing (middle
N DV_ADJ_START_CL_Y_M_4 1 - 12 1
speed)
44-43
Purpose Data display
Function (Purpose) Used to display the identification informa-
tion of the developing unit.
Section Developing system
Operation/Procedure
The identification number and the identification signal level of the
developing unit are displayed.
* The developing unit is identified by the combination of items E, F, G, H and items I, J, K, and L.
MX-5141N SIMULATION 6 – 68
44-61 Display/Item Content
PROCON HIGH QUALITY1 The execution frequency of the process
Purpose Adjustment MODE control is high. (It is set when the color
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the color image density sen- image quality is given priority.)
sor. (The adjustment is made according to HIGH QUALITY2 The execution frequency of the process
the input of SIM44-13 to set the target value control is highest. (It is set when the color
of the color sensor gain adjustment.) image quality is given priority.)
PRINT The execution frequency of the process
Section PERFORMANCE control is low. (It is set when the job
Operation/Procedure speed is given priority.)
1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key. BW MODE The process control is executed in the
normal frequency. (It is set when there
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. are little color jobs and many
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) monochrome jobs.)
NORMAL The process control is executed in the
Setting Default normal frequency.
Item/Display Content
range value
A PCS_CL CARB OUT Calibration plate sensor 1 - 255 108 When PROCON TARGET is selected.
value 1) Select the density level.
B PCS_CL LED ADJ Color sensor light 1 - 255 21 When PROCON MODE is selected.
emitting quantity
adjustment value 1) Select the execution frequency of the process control.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
3) Press [YES] key.
NOTE:
44-62
This simulation may not function with some firmware versions.
Purpose Setup/Adjustment
In such a case, the firmware must be upgraded to the latest ver-
Function (Purpose) Used to set the process control execution sion.
conditions.
Section Process
Operation/Procedure
This simulation allows collective change in the set contents of 46
SIM44-4 and SIM44-28.
A suitable one is selected among a number of options depending 46-1
on the condition.
Purpose Adjustment (Color copy mode)
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy density in the copy
Select an item to be set.
mode.
- To change the image density in the high density area, select
Section
PROCON TARGET.
Operation/Procedure
- To change the frequency of the process control operations,
1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch
select PROCON MODE.
panel.
Display/Item Content 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
PROCON CL ID DOWN The densities of C, M, and Y decrease. * When the key is pressed, the setting value of each
TARGET (The C/M/Y high density process control item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.
target values decrease.)
CL ID UP The densities of C, M, and Y increase.
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
(The C/M/Y high density process control To adjust the copy density in the low density area, select the "LOW"
target values increase.) mode and change the adjustment value. To adjust the copy density
BK ID DOWN The density of K decreases. (The high in the high density area, select the "HIGH" mode and change the
density process control target value adjustment value.
decreases.)
When the adjustment value is increased, the copy density is
BK ID UP The density of K increases. (The high
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the copy den-
density process control target value
increases.)
sity is decreased.
ALL ID DOWN The densities of C, M, Y and K decrease.
Setting Default
(The C/M/Y/K high density process Item/Display Content
range value
control target values decrease.)
A AUTO Auto LOW 1 - 99 50
ALL ID UP The densities of C, M, Y and K increase.
(The C/M/Y/K high density process HIGH 1 - 99 50
control target values increase.) B TEXT Text LOW 1 - 99 50
NORMAL The standard density of C, M, Y and K. HIGH 1 - 99 50
(The C/M/Y/K high density process C TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed LOW 1 - 99 50
control target values are the standard PHOTO Photo HIGH 1 - 99 50
values.) D TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50
E PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50
F PHOTOGRAPH Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50
MX-5141N SIMULATION 6 – 69
Setting Default
Item/Display Content Setting Default
range value Item/Display Content
range value
G MAP Map LOW 1 - 99 50
A AUTO1 Auto 1 LOW 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50
H LIGHT Light document LOW 1 - 99 50
B AUTO2 Auto 2 LOW 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50
I TEXT(COPY TO Text (Copy LOW 1 - 99 50
C TEXT Text LOW 1 - 99 50
COPY) document) HIGH 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50
J TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed LOW 1 - 99 50
D TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed LOW 1 - 99 50
PHOTO (COPY TO Photo (Copy HIGH 1 - 99 50 PHOTO Photo HIGH 1 - 99 50
COPY) document)
E TEXT/PHOTO Text/ LOW 1 - 99 50
K PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50
Photograph HIGH 1 - 99 50
(COPY TO COPY) (Copy HIGH 1 - 99 50
document) F PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50
L TEXT (COLOR Text (Color tone LOW 1 - 99 50 HIGH 1 - 99 50
TONE enhancement) HIGH 1 - 99 50 G PHOTOGRAPH Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50
ENHANCEMENT) HIGH 1 - 99 50
M TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed LOW 1 - 99 50 H MAP Map LOW 1 - 99 50
PHOTO (COLOR Photo HIGH 1 - 99 50 HIGH 1 - 99 50
TONE (Color tone I TEXT (COPY TO Text (Copy LOW 1 - 99 50
ENHANCEMENT) enhancement) COPY) document) HIGH 1 - 99 50
N TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50 J TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed LOW 1 - 99 50
(COLOR TONE (Color tone HIGH 1 - 99 50 PHOTO (COPY TO Photo (Copy HIGH 1 - 99 50
ENHANCEMENT) enhancement) COPY) document)
O PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50 K PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50
(COLOR TONE (Color tone HIGH 1 - 99 50 (COPY TO COPY) (Copy HIGH 1 - 99 50
ENHANCEMENT) enhancement) document)
P PHOTOGRAPH Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50 L LIGHT Light document LOW 1 - 99 50
(COLOR TONE (Color tone HIGH 1 - 99 50 HIGH 1 - 99 50
ENHANCEMENT) enhancement)
Q MAP (COLOR Map LOW 1 - 99 50
TONE (Color tone HIGH 1 - 99 50
ENHANCEMENT) enhancement)
46-4
R LIGHT (COLOR Light document LOW 1 - 99 50
TONE (Color tone HIGH 1 - 99 50 Purpose Adjustment (Color scanner mode)
ENHANCEMENT) enhancement) Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the density in the image
S SINGLE COLOR Single color LOW 1 - 99 50 send mode.
HIGH 1 - 99 50
T SINGLE COLOR Single color LOW 1 - 99 50
Section
(COPY TO COPY) (Copy HIGH 1 - 99 50 Operation/Procedure
document) 1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch
U TWO COLOR 2-color (red/ LOW 1 - 99 50 panel.
black) copy HIGH 1 - 99 50
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
V TWO COLOR 2-color (red/ LOW 1 - 99 50
(COPY TO COPY) black) copy HIGH 1 - 99 50
* When the key is pressed, the setting value of each
(copy document) item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is
increased, and vice versa.
46-2
Purpose Adjustment (Monochrome copy mode) Setting Default
Mode Item/Display Content
range value
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy density in the copy
LOW A AUTO Auto 1 - 99 50
mode.
B TEXT Text 1 - 99 50
Section C TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed Photo 1 - 99 50
Operation/Procedure PHOTO
1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch D TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph 1 - 99 50
panel. E PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo 1 - 99 50
F PHOTOGRAPH Photograph 1 - 99 50
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
G MAP Map 1 - 99 50
* When the key is pressed, the setting value of each
H RIP - 1 - 99 50
item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.
HIGH A AUTO Auto 1 - 99 50
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) B TEXT Text 1 - 99 50
To adjust the copy density in the low density area, select the "LOW" C TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed Photo 1 - 99 50
mode and change the adjustment value. To adjust the copy density PHOTO
in the high density area, select the "HIGH" mode and change the D TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph 1 - 99 50
adjustment value. E PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo 1 - 99 50
When the adjustment value is increased, the copy density is F PHOTOGRAPH Photograph 1 - 99 50
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the copy den- G MAP Map 1 - 99 50
sity is decreased. H RIP - 1 - 99 50
MX-5141N SIMULATION 6 – 70
46-5 46-9
Purpose Adjustment (Monochrome scanner mode) Purpose Adjustment (DSPF/RSPF mode)
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the density in the image Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the scan image density.
send mode. Section
Section Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure 1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch
1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch panel.
panel. 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. * When the key is pressed, the setting value of each
* When the key is pressed, the setting value of each item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.
item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively. 3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) This adjustment result affects the image send mode, the copy
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is mode, and the fax mode.
increased, and vice versa. When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is
increased, and vice versa.
Setting Default
Mode Item/Display Content
range value [DSPF]
LOW A AUTO TEXT Auto/Text 1 - 99 50
Setting Default
B TEXT Text 1 - 99 50 Item Button Display Content
range value
C TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed Photo 1 - 99 50 A OC COPY DSPF copy mode 1 - 99 47
PHOTO SIDEA: exposure adjustment
D TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph 1 - 99 50 LOW (Low density side)
E PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo 1 - 99 50 B SCAN DSPF scanner mode 1 - 99 47
F PHOTOGRAPH Photograph 1 - 99 50 SIDEA: exposure adjustment
G MAP Map 1 - 99 50 LOW (Low density side)
H RIP - 1 - 99 50 C FAX SIDEA: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 99 47
HIGH A AUTO TEXT Auto/Text 1 - 99 50 LOW exposure adjustment
B TEXT Text 1 - 99 50 (Low density side)
C TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed Photo 1 - 99 50 D COPY DSPF copy mode 1 - 99 52
PHOTO SIDEA: exposure adjustment
D TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph 1 - 99 50 HIGH (High density side)
E PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo 1 - 99 50 E SCAN DSPF scanner mode 1 - 99 52
SIDEA: exposure adjustment
F PHOTOGRAPH Photograph 1 - 99 50
HIGH (High density side)
G MAP Map 1 - 99 50
F FAX SIDEA: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 99 52
H RIP - 1 - 99 50
HIGH exposure adjustment
(High density)
A DSPF COPY DSPF copy mode 1 - 99 47
SIDEB: exposure adjustment
46-8 LOW (Low density side)
Purpose Adjustment (Color scanner mode) B SCAN DSPF scanner mode 1 - 99 47
SIDEB: exposure adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the image send mode color
LOW (Low density side)
balance RGB.
C FAX SIDEB: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 99 47
Section LOW exposure adjustment
Operation/Procedure (Low density side)
D COPY DSPF copy mode 1 - 99 50
1) Select an adjustment target with [R] [G] [B] keys on the touch
SIDEB: exposure adjustment
panel. HIGH (High density side)
2) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch E SCAN DSPF scanner mode 1 - 99 50
panel. SIDEB: exposure adjustment
3) Enter the set value with 10-key. HIGH (High density side)
F FAX SIDEB: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 99 50
4) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
HIGH exposure adjustment
The color balance can be adjusted separately for the low density (High density)
area and the high density area. G BALANCE DSPF color balance 1 - 99 50
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density of the SIDEB: R R
target color is increased, and vice versa. H BALANCE DSPF color balance 1 - 99 50
SIDEB: G G
Setting Default I BALANCE DSPF color balance 1 - 99 50
Item/Display Content
range value SIDEB: B B
A LOW DENSITY POINT Low density 1 - 99 50
correction amount
B HIGH DENSITY POINT High density 50
correction amount
MX-5141N SIMULATION 6 – 71
[RSPF]
46-16
Setting Default
Item/Display Content
range value Purpose Adjustment
A COPY : LOW RSPF copy mode exposure 1 - 99 48 Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the monochrome copy den-
adjustment (Low density side) sity and the gamma (for each monochrome
B SCAN : LOW RSPF scanner mode exposure 1 - 99 48 copy mode).
adjustment (Low density side)
C FAX : LOW RSPF FAX mode exposure 1 - 99 48 Section
adjustment (Low density side) Operation/Procedure
D COPY : HIGH RSPF copy mode exposure 1 - 99 53 1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch
adjustment (High density side) panel.
E SCAN : HIGH RSPF scanner mode exposure 1 - 99 53
adjustment (Low density side)
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
F FAX : HIGH RSPF FAX mode exposure 1 - 99 53 * When the key is pressed, the setting value of each
adjustment (high density) item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is
increased, and vice versa.
46-10
Purpose Adjustment Item/Display
Density level
Setting range Default value
(Point)
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy color balance and
A POINT1 Point 1 1 - 999 500
the gamma (for each color copy mode).
B POINT2 Point 2 1 - 999 500
Section C POINT3 Point 3 1 - 999 500
Operation/Procedure D POINT4 Point 4 1 - 999 500
1) Select an adjustment target mode with the touch panel key. E POINT5 Point 5 1 - 999 500
F POINT6 Point 6 1 - 999 500
2) Select an adjustment target color with [K][C][M][Y] keys on the
G POINT7 Point 7 1 - 999 500
touch panel.
H POINT8 Point 8 1 - 999 500
3) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch
I POINT9 Point 9 1 - 999 500
panel.
J POINT10 Point 10 1 - 999 500
4) Enter the set value with 10-key. K POINT11 Point 11 1 - 999 500
* When the key is pressed, the setting value of each L POINT12 Point 12 1 - 999 500
item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively. M POINT13 Point 13 1 - 999 500
5) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) N POINT14 Point 14 1 - 999 500
O POINT15 Point 15 1 - 999 500
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is
P POINT16 Point 16 1 - 999 500
increased, and vice versa.
Q POINT17 Point 17 1 - 999 500
TEXT Text
TEXT/PRT PHOTO Text/Printed Photo
PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo
PHOTO + TEXT/PHOTO Photograph + Text/Printed Photo
46-19
MAP Map Purpose Setting
LIGHT Light document Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions for the
COPY ORG Copy document density scanning (exposure) of mono-
chrome auto copy mode documents.
Density level Section
Item/Display Setting range Default value
(Point)
Operation/Procedure
A POINT1 Point 1 1 - 999 500
B POINT2 Point 2 1 - 999 500 Select an item to be set with touch panel.
C POINT3 Point 3 1 - 999 500 When an item is selected, it is highlighted and the setting change is
D POINT4 Point 4 1 - 999 500 saved.
E POINT5 Point 5 1 - 999 500
F POINT6 Point 6 1 - 999 500 Default
Item/Display Content Set value
G POINT7 Point 7 1 - 999 500 value
H POINT8 Point 8 1 - 999 500 AE_MODE Auto exposure mode MODE1, MODE2 MODE1
I POINT9 Point 9 1 - 999 500 AE_STOP_COPY Auto B/W exposure REALTIME/ STOP
Stop (for copy) STOP/
J POINT10 Point 10 1 - 999 500
PRESCAN
K POINT11 Point 11 1 - 999 500
AE_STOP_FAX Auto B/W exposure ON/OFF ON
L POINT12 Point 12 1 - 999 500
Stop (for FAX)
M POINT13 Point 13 1 - 999 500
AE_STOP_SCAN Auto B/W exposure REALTIME/ STOP
N POINT14 Point 14 1 - 999 500 Stop (for scanner) STOP/
O POINT15 Point 15 1 - 999 500 PRESCAN
P POINT16 Point 16 1 - 999 500 AE_FILTER Auto exposure filter SOFT NORMAL
Q POINT17 Point 17 1 - 999 500 setting NORMAL
SHARP
AE_WIDTH AE exposure width FULL/PART FULL
MX-5141N SIMULATION 6 – 72
NOTE:
46-23
MODE 1 High gamma (high contrast images) Purpose Adjustment/Setup
MODE 2 Normal gamma
Function (Purpose) Used to set the density correction of copy
STOP The image density in 3 - 7mm area at the lead edge is high density section (High density tone gap
scanned, and the output image density is determined
supported).
according to the scanned density. (The output image
density is even for all the surface.) Section
REALTIME The densities of the document width are scanned Operation/Procedure
sequentially, and the output image density is determined
1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
according to the density in each area of document. (The
output image density may not be even for all the
0 Enable
surface.)
1 Inhibit
PRESCAN The densities of the all surface of document are scanned
sequentially, and the output image density is determined 2) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
according to the average of the scanned densities. (The
output image density is even for all the surface.)
Setting Default
AE WIDTH The document density scan area in the monochrome Item/Display Content
range value
FULL auto mode is 3 - 7mm at the document lead edge x the
A CMY 0 CMY engine highest 0-1 0
document width. This is not related to the PRESCAN
(0: ENABLE density correction mode:
mode.
1: DISABLE) Enable
AE WIDTH The document density scan area in the monochrome
1 CMY engine highest
PART auto mode is 3 - 7mm at the document lead edge x
density correction mode:
100mm width. This is not related to the PRESCAN mode.
Disable
B K 0 K engine highest density 0-1 1
(0: ENABLE correction mode: Enable
1: DISABLE) 1 K engine highest density
46-21 correction mode: Disable
Purpose Adjustment C CYAN MAX Scanner target value for CYAN 0 - 999 500
TARGET maximum density correction
Function (Purpose) Copy color balance adjustment (Manual
D MAGENTA Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500
adjustment)
MAX TARGET MAGENTA maximum density
Section correction
Operation/Procedure E YELLOW MAX Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500
TARGET YELLOW maximum density
1) Select an adjustment target color with [K][C][M][Y] keys on the
correction
touch panel.
F BLACK MAX Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500
2) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch TARGET BLACK maximum density
panel. correction
3) Enter the set value with 10-key.
* When tone gap is generated in the high density area, set items A
* When the key is pressed, the setting value of each
and B to "0".
item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.
The density of high density part decreases. However, the tone
4) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
gap is better.
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is
* To increase the density in the high density area further, set items
increased, and vice versa.
A and B to "1".
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the check pattern in printed in
The tone gap may occur in high density part.
the color balance and density corresponding to the adjustment
value. NOTE: Do not change the values of items C, D, E, and F. If these
values are changed, the density in the high density area is
Density level Default changed.
Item/Display Setting range
(Point) value
A POINT1 Point 1 1 - 999 500
B POINT2 Point 2 1 - 999 500
C POINT3 Point 3 1 - 999 500
D POINT4 Point 4 1 - 999 500
E POINT5 Point 5 1 - 999 500
F POINT6 Point 6 1 - 999 500
G POINT7 Point 7 1 - 999 500
H POINT8 Point 8 1 - 999 500
I POINT9 Point 9 1 - 999 500
J POINT10 Point 10 1 - 999 500
K POINT11 Point 11 1 - 999 500
L POINT12 Point 12 1 - 999 500
M POINT13 Point 13 1 - 999 500
N POINT14 Point 14 1 - 999 500
O POINT15 Point 15 1 - 999 500
P POINT16 Point 16 1 - 999 500
Q POINT17 Point 17 1 - 999 500
MX-5141N SIMULATION 6 – 73
46-24 Default value
Item/Display Setting range
C M Y
Purpose Adjustment G ORANGE 0 - 255 0 150 255
Function (Purpose) Copy color balance adjustment H NAVY 0 - 255 255 200 0
(Auto adjustment) I LIGHT GREEN 0 - 255 150 0 150
Section J LIGHT BLUE 0 - 255 150 20 0
K AQUA MARINE 0 - 255 170 0 50
Operation/Procedure
L PURPLE 0 - 255 128 255 0
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. M PINK 0 - 255 0 150 20
The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out. N YELLOW GREEN 0 - 255 128 0 255
2) Plate the printed adjustment pattern on the document table, O BEIGE 0 - 255 0 50 170
select [FACTORY] or [SERVICE] mode.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The copy color balance automatic adjustment is performed, 46-26
then the adjustment result pattern is printed.
Purpose Adjustment
4) Press [OK] key.
Function (Purpose) Used to reset the single color mode color
The halftone correction target registration is processed.
balance set value to the default.
Section
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'( 5(*8/$5
Operation/Procedure
35(66>(;(&87(@72352&21(;(&87,21$1'35,177+(7(673$7&+
46-27
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
(;(&87(
MX-5141N SIMULATION 6 – 74
[RSPF]
46-30
Setting Default
Item/Display Content
Purpose Adjustment/Setup range value
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the resolution in the sub A COPY : OC Copy mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196
scanning direction in the copy mode. B COPY : RSPF Copy mode (for RSPF) 1 - 250 196
C SCAN : OC Scanner mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196
Section
D SCAN : RSPF Scanner mode (for RSPF) 1 - 250 196
Operation/Procedure E FAX : OC FAX mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196
1) Refer to the following table, and enter the set value corre- F FAX : RSPF FAX mode (for RSPF) 1 - 250 196
sponding to the resolution mode with 10-key.
2) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
Setting Default
Item/Display Content
range value
A SCAN Scan resolution Mode 1 0-1 0 0
RESOLUTION selection Mode 2 1
SW (COPY: COLOR)
46-32
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the document background
density reproducibility in the monochrome
auto copy mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target item of setting with scroll key on the touch
panel.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
When the adjustment value is increased, reproducibility of the
background and the low density image is increased. When the
adjustment value is decreased, reproducibility of the background
and the low density image is decreased.
[DSPF]
Setting Default
Item/Display Content
range value
A COPY: OC Copy mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196
B COPY: DSPF Copy mode (for DSPF front 1 - 250 196
(SIDE1) surface)
C COPY: DSPF Copy mode (for DSPF back 1 - 250 196
(SIDE2) surface)
D SCAN: OC Scanner mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196
E SCAN: DSPF Scanner mode (for DSPF 1 - 250 196
(SIDE1) front surface)
F SCAN: DSPF Scanner mode (for DSPF 1 - 250 196
(SIDE2) back surface)
G FAX: OC FAX mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196
H FAX: DSPF FAX mode (for DSPF front 1 - 250 196
(SIDE1) surface)
I FAX: DSPF FAX mode (for DSPF back 1 - 250 196
(SIDE2) surface)
MX-5141N SIMULATION 6 – 75
46-36
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the colors in the 2-color
copy mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target adjustment item with scroll key on the touch
panel.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
By changing the density level of each color, the color adjustment in
the 2-color copy mode can be performed.
MX-5141N SIMULATION 6 – 76
46-37 Item/Display Select Default
Content
(Copy mode) button value
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
MANUAL TEXT PRT (-) LUT2 Text print NORMAL
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the reproduction capability (-) LUT1 (Manual)
of monochrome mode color. NOMAL
Section (+) LUT1
Operation/Procedure (+) LUT2
1) Select a target item with scroll keys on the touch panel. TEXT (-) LUT2 Text (Manual) NORMAL
(-) LUT1
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
NOMAL
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. (+) LUT1
4) Press [YES] key. (+) LUT2
This is to adjust the reproduction capability of red and yellow PRINTED (-) LUT2 Printed photo NORMAL
images when copying color documents with red and yellow images PHOTO (-) LUT1 (Manual)
in the monochrome mode. NOMAL
(+) LUT1
(+) LUT2
An individual adjustment is available in each of the copy mode and
PHOTO (-) LUT2 Photograph/Text NORMAL
the printer mode. photograph
(-) LUT1
NOMAL (Manual)
Setting Default
Item/Display Content (+) LUT1
range value
A R-Ratio Gray making setting (R) 0 - 1000 145 (+) LUT2
B G-Ratio Gray making setting (G) 0 - 1000 805 TEXT (-) LUT2 Text/Photograph NORMAL
PHOTO (-) LUT1 (Manual)
C R-Ratio RIP Print gray making setting (R) 0 - 1000 299
D G-Ratio RIP Print gray making setting (G) 0 - 1000 587 NOMAL
(+) LUT1
(+) LUT2
B-Ratio Gray making setting (B)
MAP (-) LUT2 Map (Manual) NORMAL
(1000-R-Ratio - G-Ratio)
(-) LUT1
B-Ratio RIP Print gray making setting (B)
NOMAL
(1000-R-Ratio RIP - G-Ratio RIP)
(+) LUT1
* B-Ratio: The value of gray making setting (B) is obtained from (+) LUT2
the formula below. CPY TO CPY/ (-) LUT2 Copy document/ NORMAL
1000-R-Ratio - G-Ratio TXT PRT (-) LUT1 Text printed
NOMAL (Manual)
When [DEFAULT] key is pressed, the values are set to the initial
(+) LUT1
values (Default).
(+) LUT2
When the adjustment value of the adjustment item A is increased, CPY TO CPY/ (-) LUT2 Copy document/ NORMAL
the copy density of red images is decreased. When the adjustment TEXT (-) LUT1 Text (Manual)
value is decreased, the density is increased. NOMAL
When the adjustment value of the adjustment item B is increased, (+) LUT1
the copy density of yellow images is increased. When the adjust- (+) LUT2
ment value is decreased, the density in also decreased. CPY TO CPY/ (-) LUT2 Copy document/ NORMAL
PHOTO (-) LUT1 Printed photo
NOMAL (Manual)
MX-5141N SIMULATION 6 – 77
Item/Display Select Default 46-40
Content
(Copy mode) button value
AUTO AUTO3 (-) LUT2 Auto mode NORMAL Purpose Adjustment/Setup
(-) LUT1 judgment 3 Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density.
NOMAL (Collective adjustment of all the modes)
(+) LUT1 Section
(+) LUT2
Operation/Procedure
AUTO4 (-) LUT2 Auto mode NORMAL
(-) LUT1 judgment 4 1) Set the document on the document table.
NOMAL 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
(+) LUT1 3) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key
(+) LUT2 When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set
AUTO5 (-) LUT2 Auto mode NORMAL and the scanned document image is outputted.
(-) LUT1 judgment 5
NOMAL Setting Default
Item/Display Content
(+) LUT1 range value
(+) LUT2 A EXPOSURE Used to adjust the FAX send 1 - 99 50
AUTO6 (-) LUT2 Auto mode NORMAL LEVEL(ALL) image density. (Collective
(-) LUT1 judgment 6 adjustment of all the modes)
NOMAL
(+) LUT1
(+) LUT2
46-41
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density.
46-39
(Normal)
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Section
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the sharpness of FAX send
Operation/Procedure
images.
1) Set the document on the document table.
Section
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Operation/Procedure
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key
1) Select a target item with scroll keys on the touch panel.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. and the scanned document image is outputted.
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
Input small numeric value to obtain crispy image. Input large Setting Default
Item/Display Content
numeric value to decrease moire. range value
A AUTO Auto 1 - 99 50
Setting Default B EXPOSURE1 Exposure 1 1 - 99 50
Item/Display Content
range value C EXPOSURE2 Exposure 2 1 - 99 50
A 200 x 100 [DPI] OFF 200 x 100 [DPI] 0-2 1 D EXPOSURE3 Exposure 3 1 - 99 50
halftone OFF E EXPOSURE4 Exposure 4 1 - 99 50
B 200 x 200 [DPI] OFF 200 x 200 [DPI] 0-2 1 F EXPOSURE5 Exposure 5 1 - 99 50
halftone OFF G EXECUTE AUTO Print Auto 1-6 1 1
C 200 x 200 [DPI] ON 200 x 200 [DPI] 0-2 1 MODE EXP1 mode Exposure 1 2 (AUTO)
halftone ON EXP2 Exposure 2 3
D 200 x 400 [DPI] OFF 200 x 400 [DPI] 0-2 1 EXP3 Exposure 3 4
halftone OFF
EXP4 Exposure 4 5
E 200 x 400 [DPI] ON 200 x 400 [DPI] 0-2 1
EXP5 Exposure 5 6
halftone ON
F 400 x 400 [DPI] OFF 400 x 400[DPI] 0-2 1 To check the adjustment density level of items A - F, set the docu-
halftone OFF ment and set the setting value of item G according to items A - F,
G 400 x 400 [DPI] ON 400 x 400[DPI] 0-2 1 and press [EXECUTE] key.
halftone ON
H 600 x 600 [DPI] OFF 600 x 600[DPI] 0-2 1
halftone OFF
I 600 x 600 [DPI] ON 600 x 600[DPI] 0-2 1
halftone ON
MX-5141N SIMULATION 6 – 78
46-42 46-43
Purpose Adjustment/Setup Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density. Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density.
(Fine) (Super Fine)
Section Section
Operation/Procedure Operation/Procedure
1) Set the document on the document table. 1) Set the document on the document table.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key 3) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set
and the scanned document image is outputted. and the scanned document image is outputted.
MX-5141N SIMULATION 6 – 79
46-44 46-45
Purpose Adjustment/Setup Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density. Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density.
(Ultra fine) (600dpi).
Section Section
Operation/Procedure Operation/Procedure
1) Set the document on the document table. 1) Set the document on the document table.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key 3) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set
and the scanned document image is outputted. and the scanned document image is outputted.
To check the adjustment density level of items A - L, set the docu- To check the adjustment density level of items A - L, set the docu-
ment and set the setting value of item M according to items A - L, ment and set the setting value of item M according to items A - L,
and press [EXECUTE] key. and press [EXECUTE] key.
MX-5141N SIMULATION 6 – 80
46-46 Operation Setting Default
Item/Display Content
mode range value
Purpose Adjustment/Setup FILLING B FILLING LOW Low 0 0 (LOW)
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (GRAY) (G) compres-
(RGB RIP) Filing sion
(Mono- (Halftone)
Section chrome MIDDLE Medium 1
Operation/Procedure halftone compres-
1) Select a target mode for adjustment. mode) sion
(Mono-
2) Set the document on the document table. chrome
3) Enter the set value with 10-key. halftone
4) Press [OK] key. mode)
HIGH High 2
When the set value is increased, the density becomes higher.
compres-
When the set value is decreased, the density becomes lower. sion
(Mono-
Setting Default chrome
Item/Display Content
range value halftone
A STANDARD RIP For Normal/ 1 - 99 50 mode)
Halftone OFF PRINT C PRINT LOW Low 0 0 (LOW)
mode HOLD (C) compres-
B FINE RIP For Fine/Halftone 1 - 99 50 (COLOR) sion
OFF mode Print hold (Color)
C FINE RIP H_TONE For Fine/Halftone 1 - 99 50 (Color MIDDLE Medium 1
ON mode mode) compres-
D SUPER FINE RIP For Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50 sion
Halftone OFF (Color)
mode HIGH High 2
E SUPER FINE RIP H_TONE For Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50 compres-
Halftone ON sion
mode (Color)
F ULTRA FINE RIP For Ultra fine/ 1 - 99 50 PRINT D PRINT LOW Low 0 0 (LOW)
Halftone OFF HOLD (G) compres-
mode (GRAY) sion
G ULTRA FINE RIP H_TONE For Ultra fine/ 1 - 99 50 Print hold (Halftone)
Halftone ON (Mono- MIDDLE Medium 1
mode chrome compres-
H 600DPI RIP For 600dpi/ 1 - 99 50 halftone sion
Halftone OFF mode) (Mono-
mode chrome
I 600DPI RIP H_TONE For 600dpi/ 1 - 99 50 halftone
Halftone ON mode)
mode HIGH High 2
compres-
sion
(Mono-
46-47 chrome
halftone
Purpose Adjustment/Setup mode)
Function (Purpose) Used to set the compression rate of copy PUSH E SCAN MIDDLE Medium 0 1
and scan images (JPEG). SCAN (C) *1 1 compres- (MIDDLE
(COLOR) sion mode 2)
Section (Scanner 1
Operation/Procedure color) Low
1) Select a target item with scroll keys on the touch panel. compres-
sion
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
MIDDLE Medium 1
3) Press [OK] key. 2 compres-
The set value is saved. sion mode
2
Operation Setting Default Medium
Item/Display Content compres-
mode range value
FILLING A FILLING LOW Low 0 0 (LOW) sion
(COLOR) (C) compres- MIDDLE Medium 2
Filing sion 3 compres-
(Color (Color) sion mode
mode) MIDDLE Medium 1 3
compres- High
sion compres-
(Color) sion
HIGH High 2
compres-
sion
(Color)
MX-5141N SIMULATION 6 – 81
Operation Setting Default
Item/Display Content Density level Default
mode range value Item/Display Setting range
(Point) value
PUSH F SCAN MIDDLE Medium 0 1
A POINT1 Point 1 1 - 999 500
SCAN (G) *1 1 compres- (MIDDLE
B POINT2 Point 2 1 - 999 500
(GRAY) sion mode 2)
(Scanner 1 C POINT3 Point 3 1 - 999 500
mono- Low D POINT4 Point 4 1 - 999 500
chrome compres- E POINT5 Point 5 1 - 999 500
halftone sion F POINT6 Point 6 1 - 999 500
mode) MIDDLE Medium 1 G POINT7 Point 7 1 - 999 500
2 compres- H POINT8 Point 8 1 - 999 500
sion mode I POINT9 Point 9 1 - 999 500
2 J POINT10 Point 10 1 - 999 500
Medium
K POINT11 Point 11 1 - 999 500
compres-
L POINT12 Point 12 1 - 999 500
sion
M POINT13 Point 13 1 - 999 500
MIDDLE Medium 2
3 compres- N POINT14 Point 14 1 - 999 500
sion mode O POINT15 Point 15 1 - 999 500
3 P POINT16 Point 16 1 - 999 500
High Q POINT17 Point 17 1 - 999 500
compres-
sion
MX-5141N SIMULATION 6 – 82
5) Press [EXECUTE] key. Content (copy Setting Default
Mode Item/Display
The 48 patch self print is printed. mode) range value
6) Place the 48 patch self print on the document table, and press COLOR H LIGHT Light document OFF 0 0 (OFF)
[EXECUTE] key. ON 1
I CPY TO CPY/ Text (copy OFF 0 1 (ON)
Scanning the 48 patch self print is started.
TEXT document) ON 1
After scanning the patch, the screen automatically shifts to the J CPY TO CPY/ Text print OFF 0 0 (OFF)
dither selection menu. TXT PRT (copy document) ON 1
7) After completion of the adjustment of all the density adjustment K CPY TO CPY/ Printed Photo OFF 0 0 (OFF)
items (dither), press [OK] key. PHOTO (copy document) ON 1
MONO A AUTO Auto OFF 0 0 (OFF)
ON 1
46-55 B TEXT Text OFF 0 1 (ON)
ON 1
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
C TEXT PRT Text print OFF 0 0 (OFF)
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the drop out color in the ON 1
image send mode (monochrome manual D PRINTED Printed Photo OFF 0 0 (OFF)
text mode). PHOTO ON 1
Section E TEXT PHOTO Text photograph OFF 0 0 (OFF)
Operation/Procedure ON 1
F PHOTO Photograph OFF 0 0 (OFF)
In the image send mode (monochrome manual text mode), the
ON 1
range where color images are reproduced as monochrome images
G MAP Map OFF 0 1 (ON)
is adjusted.
ON 1
1) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key. H LIGHT Light document OFF 0 0 (OFF)
When the adjustment value is increased, colors dropout ON 1
becomes easy to narrow the reproduction range. When the I CPY TO CPY/ Text (copy OFF 0 1 (ON)
adjustment value is decreased, color dropout becomes difficult TEXT document) ON 1
to widen the reproduction range. J CPY TO CPY/ Text print OFF 0 0 (OFF)
TXT PRT (copy document) ON 1
Setting Default K CPY TO CPY/ Printed Photo OFF 0 0 (OFF)
Item/Display Content
range value PHOTO (copy document) ON 1
A CHROMA Dropout color range adjustment 0-6 3
MX-5141N SIMULATION 6 – 83
Item
Item Scanning Adjustment Default
Scanning Adjustment Default (copy Content NOTE
(copy Content NOTE direction button value
direction button value mode)
mode)
SUB COLOR (-)2 Color copy 0 Sub
MAIN COLOR (-)2 Color copy 0 Main
COPY (-)1 For BLACK scanning
COPY (-)1 For BLACK scanning
K 0 direction
K 0 direction
(+)1 smoothing
(+)1 smoothing
fine
fine (+)2
(+)2 adjustment
adjustment COLOR (-)2 Color copy 0
COLOR (-)2 Color copy 0 Negative
Negative COPY (-)1 For CYAN
COPY (-)1 For CYAN (-)
(-) C 0
C 0 direction:
direction:
(+)1 The
(+)1 The
(+)2 smoothing
(+)2 smoothing
COLOR (-)2 Color copy 0 section
COLOR (-)2 Color copy 0 section
COPY (-)1 For becomes
COPY (-)1 For becomes
M 0 MAGENTA thinner.
M 0 MAGENTA thinner.
Positive
Positive (+)1
(+)1 (+)
(+) (+)2
(+)2 direction:
direction: COLOR (-)2 Color copy 0
COLOR (-)2 Color copy 0 The
The COPY (-)1 For
COPY (-)1 For smoothing
smoothing Y YELLOW
Y YELLOW 0 section
0 section
(+)1 becomes
(+)1 becomes
(+)2 thicker.
(+)2 thicker.
MONO (-)2 Mono- 0
MONO (-)2 Mono- 0
COPY (-)1 chrome
COPY (-)1 chrome
K 0 copy For
K 0 copy For
(+)1 BLACK
(+)1 BLACK
(+)2
(+)2
COLOR (-)2 Color print 0
COLOR (-)2 Color print 0
PRINT (-)1 For BLACK
PRINT (-)1 For BLACK
K 0
K 0
(+)1
(+)1
(+)2
(+)2
COLOR (-)2 Color print 0
COLOR (-)2 Color print 0
PRINT (-)1 For CYAN
PRINT (-)1 For CYAN
C 0
C 0
(+)1
(+)1
(+)2
(+)2
COLOR (-)2 Color print 0
COLOR (-)2 Color print 0
PRINT (-)1 For
PRINT (-)1 For
M 0 MAGENTA
M 0 MAGENTA
(+)1
(+)1
(+)2
(+)2
COLOR (-)2 Color print 0
COLOR (-)2 Color print 0
PRINT (-)1 For
PRINT (-)1 For
Y 0 YELLOW
Y 0 YELLOW
(+)1
(+)1
(+)2
(+)2
MONO (-)2 Mono- 0
MONO (-)2 Mono- 0
PRINT (-)1 chrome
PRINT (-)1 chrome
K 0 print For
K 0 print For
(+)1 BLACK
(+)1 BLACK
(+)2
(+)2
MX-5141N SIMULATION 6 – 84
46-60
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the sharpness in the color
auto copy mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target item with scroll keys on the touch panel.
2) Input numeric value corresponding to sharpness level (filter
process mode).
3) Press [OK] key.
This is used to adjust the sharpness in the color auto copy mode
and the smoothness (roughness) in the dark area.
MX-5141N SIMULATION 6 – 85
46-61 Setting Default
Item/Display Content
range value
Purpose Adjustment/Setup Q SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 49 25
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the area separation recogni- [SCR 1 MIDDLE] adjustment: Medium
tion level. density dots
R SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 49 25
Section [SCR 1 LOW] adjustment: Low
Operation/Procedure density dots
1) Select an adjustment mode. S SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 15 8
[SCR 2] adjustment: Dot 2
2) Select a target adjustment item with scroll key on the touch
T SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 15 8
panel.
[SCR 3] adjustment: Dot 3
3) Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key. U SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 49 25
4) Press [OK] key. [LINE HALFTONE] adjustment: line
screen
NOTE: This must be set to the default unless any change is spe-
cially required.
When the adjustment value is set to a value greatly differ-
ent from the default value, image quality trouble may occur 46-62
for some documents. Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Item/Display Content Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions of the
COLOR AUTO [Color/Gray] Auto ACS, the area separation, the background
TPP [Color/Gray] Manual (Text print) image process, and the auto exposure
COPY(TPP) [Color/Gray] Copy document (Text print) mode.
MONO AUTO [Monochrome] Auto Section
TPP [Monochrome] Manual (Text print) Operation/Procedure
COPY(TPP) [Monochrome] Copy document (Text print)
1) Select a target adjustment item with scroll key on the touch
panel.
Setting Default
Item/Display Content 2) Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key.
range value
A SEGMENT: SWITCH Detection ON/OFF: 0-1 0 3) Press [OK] key.
[TXT ON SCR] Text on dot NOTE: This must be set to the default unless any change is spe-
B SEGMENT: SWITCH Detection ON/OFF: 0-1 0 cially required.
[LINE SCR] line screen
When the adjustment value is set to a value greatly differ-
C SEGMENT: SWITCH Detection ON/OFF: 0-1 0
ent from the default value, image quality trouble may occur
[SMALL SCR] Dot in a small area
for some documents.
D SEGMENT: SWITCH Detection ON/OFF: 0-1 0
[HIGH LPI] High line number
Setting Default
judgment select Item/Display Content
range value
E SEGMENT: SWITCH Detection ON/OFF: 0-1 0
A SW_ACS ACS judgment 0-1 1
[TXT ON SCR IMAGE Text on image send
reference area select
SEND] dots
B TEXT_IMAGE Text/Image judgment 0-6 3
F SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 99 50
priority level adjustment
[BK TXT 1] adjustment: Black text
1 C TEXT_BLANK Text/Blank judgment 0-6 4
priority level adjustment
G SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 99 50
[CL TXT 1] adjustment: Color text D HT_LV Dot area judgment 0-6 1
1 threshold value
adjustment
H SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 49 25
[BK TXT 2, CL TXT 2] adjustment: Black text E AE_AREA_LV Color AE judgment 0-6 3
2, Color text 2 target area adjustment
I SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 99 50 F AE_LV_CC AE background 0-8 4
[TXT ON SCR 1] adjustment: Text 1 on detection division result
dots adjustment:
For color copy
J SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 99 50
[TXT ON SCR 2] adjustment: Text 2 on G AE_LV_MC AE background 0-8 4
dots detection division result
adjustment:
K SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 15 8
For monochrome copy
[TXT ON SCR AREA] adjustment: Detection
area of text on dots H AE_LV_CS AE background 0-8 4
detection division result
L SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 49 25
adjustment:
[HIGH LPI] adjustment: High line
For color scan
number judgment
I AE_LV_MS AE background 0-8 4
M SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 99 50
detection division result
[BK] adjustment: No
adjustment:
chrome judgment
For monochrome scan
N SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 99 50
J AE_JUDGE Color AE background 0-4 0
[CL] adjustment: Chrome
_LV_L_U density threshold value
judgment
adjustment (lower limit)
O SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 99 50
K AE_JUDGE Color AE background 0 - 10 0
[TXT ON BG] adjustment: Text on
LV_L_O density threshold value
background
adjustment (upper limit)
P SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 49 25
L AE_JUDGE_ Color AE background 0 - 10 5
[SCR 1 HIGH] adjustment: High
LV_C detection level
density dots
adjustment (chroma)
MX-5141N SIMULATION 6 – 86
Setting Default Setting Default
Item/Display Content Item/Display Content
range value range value
M AE ON AE mode ON/ ON 0-1 0 0 (ON) H COLOR COPY : Copy document, 1-9 5
_ONOFF OFF OFF switch : OFF 1 TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO Character print
_CC For color copy (COPY TO COPY) (color copy)
N AE ON AE mode ON/ ON 0-1 0 0 (ON) I COLOR COPY : TEXT Copy document, 1-9 5
_ONOFF OFF OFF switch : OFF 1 (COPY TO COPY) Character
_MC For mono- (color copy)
chrome copy J COLOR COPY : Copy document, 1-9 5
O AE ON AE mode ON/ ON 0-1 0 0 (ON) PRINTED PHOTO (COPY Printed photo
_ONOFF OFF OFF switch : OFF 1 TO COPY) (color copy)
_CS For color scan K COLOR PUSH : Text print 1-9 3
P AE ON AE mode ON/ ON 0-1 0 0 (ON) TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO (color PUSH)
_ONOFF OFF OFF switch : OFF 1 L COLOR PUSH : TEXT Text (color PUSH) 1-9 3
_MS For mono- M COLOR PUSH : Printed photo 1-9 5
chrome copy PRINTED PHOTO (color PUSH)
Q BLANK_JUDGE_ Blank judgment level 0 - 10 0 N COLOR PUSH : Photograph 1-9 5
LV_L adjustment (value) PHOTOGRAPH (color PUSH)
R BLANK_JUDGE_ Blank judgment level 0 - 10 0 O COLOR PUSH : Text/Photograph 1-9 3
LV_C adjustment (chroma) TEXT/PHOTO (color PUSH)
S MODE0_UNDER Mode 0 developing 0-6 0 P COLOR PUSH : MAP Map (color PUSH) 1-9 5
paper mode select
T MODE1_UNDER Mode 1 developing 0-6 0
paper mode select
U MODE5_UNDER Mode 5 developing 0-6 0 46-65
paper mode select
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
V MODE6_UNDER Mode 6 developing 0-6 0
paper mode select Function (Purpose) Used to set the color correction table.
W SW_CHANGE_ Mode 0: Mode judgment 0-6 0 Section
MODE0 select
Operation/Procedure
X SW_CHANGE_ Mode 1: Mode judgment 0-6 1
MODE1 select 1) Select an adjustment mode.
Y SW_CHANGE_ Mode 2: Mode judgment 0-6 2 2) Select an item (mode) to be set with the scroll key.
MODE2 select 3) Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key.
Z SW_CHANGE_ Mode 3: Mode judgment 0-6 3
MODE3 select
4) Press [OK] key.
AA SW_CHANGE_ Mode 4: Mode judgment 0-6 4 When the setting is changed, the color tone is changed. This func-
MODE4 select tion is used to make copies of different color tone for each copy
AB SW_CHANGE_ Mode 5: Mode judgment 0-6 5 mode.
MODE5 select The initial value must be set unless any special change is required.
AC SW_CHANGE_ Mode 6: Mode judgment 0-6 6
MODE6 select Setting Default
Mode Item/Display Content
range value
COPY A [MANUAL] TEXT Text print 0-8 0
PRT
46-63 B [MANUAL] TEXT Text 0-8 0
Purpose Adjustment/Setup C [MANUAL] Printed 0-8 0
PRINTED PHOTO Photo
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the density in the copy low
D [MANUAL] Photograph 0-8 1
density section.
PHOTO
Section E [MANUAL] TEXT Text 0-8 1
Operation/Procedure PHOTO photograph
F [MANUAL] MAP Map 0-8 0
1) Select a target adjustment item with scroll key on the touch
G [MANUAL] LIGHT Pencil 0-8 0
panel.
H [MANUAL] CPT Copy 0-8 0
2) Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key. TO CPT/TXT PRT document/
3) Press [OK] key. Text print
When the adjustment value is increased, reproducibility of the I [MANUAL] CPT Copy 0-8 0
background and the low density image is increased. When the TO CPT/TEXT document/
Text
adjustment value is decreased, reproducibility of the background
J [MANUAL] CPY Copy 0-8 0
and the low density image is decreased.
TO CPY/PHOTO document/
Printed
Setting Default
Item/Display Content Photo
range value
K AUTO0 Automatic 0-8 2
A COLOR COPY : Text print 1-9 3
mode
TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO (color copy)
judgment 0
B COLOR COPY : TEXT Text (color copy) 1-9 3
L AUTO1 Automatic 0-8 2
C COLOR COPY : Printed photo 1-9 5
mode
PRINTED PHOTO (color copy)
judgment 1
D COLOR COPY : Photograph 1-9 5
PHOTOGRAPH (color copy)
E COLOR COPY : Text/Photograph 1-9 3
TEXT/PHOTO (color copy)
F COLOR COPY : MAP Map (color copy) 1-9 5
G COLOR COPY : LIGHT Light document 1-9 6
(color density)
MX-5141N SIMULATION 6 – 87
Setting Default
Mode Item/Display Content
range value
COPY M AUTO2 Automatic 0-8 3
mode
judgment 2
N AUTO3 Automatic 0-8 3
mode
judgment 3
O AUTO4 Automatic 0-8 2
mode
judgment 4
P AUTO5 Automatic 0-8 2
mode
judgment 5
Q AUTO6 Automatic 0-8 2
mode
judgment 6
PREVIEW A [MANUAL] TEXT Text print 0-4 0
(Preview PRT
screen) B [MANUAL] TEXT Text 0-4 0
C [MANUAL] Printed 0-4 0
PRINTED PHOTO Photo
D [MANUAL] Photograph 0-4 1
PHOTO
E [MANUAL] TEXT Text 0-4 1
PHOTO photograph
F [MANUAL] MAP Map 0-4 0
G [MANUAL] LIGHT Pencil 0-4 0
H [MANUAL] CPT Copy 0-4 0
TO CPT/TXT PRT document/
Text print
I [MANUAL] CPT Copy 0-4 0
TO CPT/TEXT document/
Text
J [MANUAL] CPY Copy 0-4 0
TO CPY/PHOTO document/
Printed
Photo
K AUTO0 Automatic 0-4 2
mode
judgment 0
L AUTO1 Automatic 0-4 2
mode
judgment 1
M AUTO2 Automatic 0-4 3
mode
judgment 2
N AUTO3 Automatic 0-4 3
mode
judgment 3
O AUTO4 Automatic 0-4 2
mode
judgment 4
P AUTO5 Automatic 0-4 2
mode
judgment 5
Q AUTO6 Automatic 0-4 2
mode
judgment 6
MX-5141N SIMULATION 6 – 88
46-66
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the reproduction capability
of watermarks in the copy/printer mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
This is to adjust the reproduction capability of watermarks in the
copy/printer mode.
1) Select the adjustment mode.
2) Select an adjustment item according to the necessity.
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
4) Make a copy, and check the adjustment result.
Setting Default
Item/Display Content Note
range value
PATTERN A WOVEN DEN BK LOW Watermark density level (Black LOW) 0 - 255 15 The adjustment value is changed to
increase or decrease the density of the
B WOVEN DEN BK MIDDLE Watermark density level (Black MIDDLE) 0 - 255 19 watermark of background documents
(primary output).
C WOVEN DEN BK HIGH Watermark density level (Black HIGH) 0 - 255 23 To increase the watermark density,
increase the adjustment value.
D WOVEN DEN C LOW Watermark density level (Cyan LOW) 0 - 255 19 To decrease the watermark density,
decrease the adjustment value.
E WOVEN DEN C MIDDLE Watermark density level (Cyan MIDDLE) 0 - 255 23
NOTE: When the adjustment value is
F WOVEN DEN C HIGH Watermark density level (Cyan HIGH) 0 - 255 27 increased, the watermark area
which is originally not reproduced
G WOVEN DEN M LOW Watermark density level (Magenta LOW) 0 - 255 15 becomes difficult to disappear.
When the adjustment value is
H WOVEN DEN M MIDDLE Watermark density level (Magenta MIDDLE) 0 - 255 18 decreased, the watermark area
which is originally reproduced
I WOVEN DEN M HIGH Watermark density level (Magenta HIGH) 0 - 255 21 becomes easy to disappear.
J CONTRAST Contrast adjustment 0 - 255 2 This is used to adjust the variation in the
watermark density when the adjustment
value of the watermark print/contrast
adjustment in the system setting is changed
by 1.
When this value is increased, the variation
is also increased. When the value is
decreased, the variation is also decreased.
When the adjustment value is 0, the result
of the contrast adjustment is not reflected.
(* The adjustment value must be set to 1 or
greater.)
K HT TYPE (POSI) For half-tone index watermark type positive 42 - 43 42 To reproduce the containing characters of
watermark copy (secondary output) more
clearly, set to 43.
In that case, however, the containing
characters of the watermark document
(primary output) can be easily reproduced.
L HT TYPE (NEGA) For half-tone index watermark type negative 42 - 43 42 To reproduce the containing characters of
watermark copy (secondary output) more
clearly, set to 43.
In that case, however, the containing
characters of the watermark document
(primary output) can be easily reproduced.
MX-5141N SIMULATION 6 – 89
Setting Default
Item/Display Content Note
range value
COPY A TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO Text/Printed Photo OFF 0-1 0 1 Normally set to the default.
MODE mode select Enable/ ON 1 No need to change in the market.
Disable
B TEXT Text mode select OFF 0-1 0 1
Enable/Disable ON 1
C PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo mode OFF 0-1 0 1
select Enable/Disable ON 1
D PHOTOGRAPH Photograph mode OFF 0-1 0 1
select Enable/Disable ON 1
E TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph OFF 0-1 0 1
mode select Enable/ ON 1
Disable
F MAP Map mode select OFF 0-1 0 1
Enable/Disable ON 1
G LIGHT Light density OFF 0-1 0 1
document mode select ON 1
Enable/Disable
H TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO Copy document: Text/ OFF 0-1 0 1
(CPY TO CPY) Printed Photo mode ON 1
select Enable/Disable
I TEXT (CPY TO CPY) Copy document: Text OFF 0-1 0 1
mode select Enable/ ON 1
Disable
J PRINTED PHOTO Copy document: OFF 0-1 0 1
(CPY TO CPY) Printed Photo mode ON 1
select Enable/Disable
K AUTO Automatic mode OFF 0-1 0 1
select Enable/Disable ON 1
COPY L DEFAULT MODE Default exposure TEXT/ 0-5 0 0 Normally set to the default.
MODE mode PRINTED PHOTO No need to change in the market.
Used to specify the TEXT 1
exposure mode set PRINTED PHOTO 2
when the watermark is PHOTOGRAPH 3
ON.
TEXT/PHOTO 4
MAP 5
POSITION A LINE SPACE 1 Line space in the watermark print box 0 - 200 50
(24P - 36P)
B LINE SPACE 2 Line space in the watermark print box 0 - 200 60
(37P - 48P)
C LINE SPACE 3 Line space in the watermark print box 0 - 200 70
(49P - 64P)
D LINE SPACE 4 Line space in the watermark print box 0 - 200 80
(65P - 80P)
E BLANK H/B 1 Upper margin/Lower margin in the 0 - 200 25
watermark print box (24P - 36P)
F BLANK H/B 2 Upper margin/Lower margin in the 0 - 200 30
watermark print box (37P - 48P)
G BLANK H/B 3 Upper margin/Lower margin in the 0 - 200 35
watermark print box (49P - 64P)
H BLANK H/B 4 Upper margin/Lower margin in the 0 - 200 40
watermark print box (65P - 80P)
I BLANK L/R 1 Left margin/Right margin in the watermark 0 - 200 60
print box (24P - 36P)
J BLANK L/R 2 Left margin/Right margin in the watermark 0 - 200 90
print box (37P - 48P)
K BLANK L/R 3 Left margin/Right margin in the watermark 0 - 200 120
print box (49P - 64P)
L BLANK L/R 4 Left margin/Right margin in the watermark 0 - 200 150
print box (65P - 80P)
MX-5141N SIMULATION 6 – 90
2) Select an adjustment target item with the scroll key.
46-74
3) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Purpose Adjustment
4) Press [OK] key. The set value is saved.
Function (Purpose) Copy color balance adjustment (Auto
adjustment)/Printer color balance adjust- Setting Default
Mode Item/Display Content
ment (Auto adjustment) range value
TEXT A GLYPH Text handling 0-2 0
Section
SENSITIVITY selection
Operation/Procedure B BG SW FOR Line handling 0-1 0
This simulation is used to perform SIM46-24 and SIM67-24 contin- FINDLINES selection
uously. C HOR Line detection 0-2 0
To perform both the copy color balance adjustment (Automatic FINDLINES SW SW (H)
adjustment) and the printer color balance adjustment (Automatic D VERT Line detection 0-2 0
FINDLINES SW SW (V)
adjustment), use this simulation for efficient adjustment operations.
E FGCOLOR Text color 0-3 0
1) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the high density process control is INDEXING SEL number
performed. Then, the copy color balance adjustment pattern is adjustment SW
printed. F FGCOLOR Text color 0-4 2
2) Place the printed adjustment pattern on the document table, INDEXING ADJ adjustment
select [FACTORY] or [SERVICE] mode. COLOR A LUMINANCE Luminance 0-4 2
ADJUSTMENT adjustment
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the copy color balance adjustment
is performed and the adjustment result pattern is printed. B CHROMA Chroma 0-2 1
INTENT selection
4) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the printer color balance adjust- C NEUTRAL Neutral 0-2 0
ment pattern is printed. ADJUSTMENT adjustment
5) Place the printed adjustment pattern on the document table, D R-RATIO Gray scale 0 - 1000 299
select [FACTORY] or [SERVICE] mode. ADJUSTMENT adjustment (R)
6) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the printer color balance adjust- E G-RATIO Gray scale 0 - 1000 587
ment (automatic adjustment) is performed and the adjustment ADJUSTMENT adjustment (G)
result pattern is printed. BG LAYER A BG LAYER Speed priority 0-2 1
INTENT 1 setting
7) Press [OK] key, and the halftone correction target is registered. B BG LAYER Image quality 0-2 1
8) When [EXECUTE] key is displayed, press it. INTENT 2 priority setting
When "COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE" is displayed, the adjust-
ment is completed.
NOTE: The adjustment result becomes effective only when the
adjustment procedure for both copy and print mode have
completed successfully. For example, when the copy color
balance adjustment (automatic adjustment) is performed
and the simulation is canceled, the adjustment result is not
effective.
46-90
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to set the process operation of high-
compression PDF images.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target adjustment mode.
MX-5141N SIMULATION 6 – 91
46-91
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the reproduction capability
of black text.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set with the scroll key.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [OK] key.
The adjustment value is set.
When COLOR key or MONO key is pressed, the adjustment value
is set and a copy is made simultaneously.
Setting Default
Item Display Content Description
range value
A SEGMENT PARAM COMMON Area separation setting select 0: Other than image send mode black text 0-1 0
SPECIAL emphasis (simple, high compression)
1: Image send mode black text
emphasis (simple, high compression)
B BG: JPEG QUALITY LV [COL: COMPACT] JPEG recompression level adjustment The JPEG compression ratio of the 0-2 1
[Color: High compression mode] background layer is selected.
C BG: JPEG QUALITY LV [COL: ULTRA FINE] JPEG recompression level adjustment 0: Low 0-2 1
[Color: Ultra fine mode] 1: Middle
D BG: JPEG QUALITY LV [GRY: COMPACT] JPEG recompression level adjustment 2: High 0-2 1
[Gray: High compression mode]
E BG: JPEG QUALITY LV [GRY: ULTRA FINE] JPEG recompression level adjustment 0-2 1
[Gray: Ultra fine mode]
F FG: TARGET AREA TYPE0 Front ground extraction area select 0: type0 0-2 0
TYPE1 1: type1
TYPE2 2: type2
G FG: TEXT DENSITY [COL] Front ground black text density The black text density in the front ground 0 - 10 5
adjustment [Color] layer is changed.
H FG: TEXT DENSITY [GRY] Front ground black text density 0: Dark - 5: Default - 10: Light 0 - 10 5
adjustment [Gray]
I ULTRA FINE MODE OFF High compression/Ultra Fine mode 0: High compression mode 0-1 0
ON select 1: Ultra fine mode
NOTE: This must be set to the default unless any change is specially required.
When a great change is made to the adjustment value from the initial value, an image quality problem may occur.
MX-5141N SIMULATION 6 – 92
48-5
48
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to correct the scan image magnifica-
48-1
tion ration (in the sub scanning direction).
Purpose Adjustment
Section Scanner section
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the scan image magnifica-
Operation/Procedure
tion ratio (in the main scanning direction
and the sub scanning direction). 1) Select a target adjustment item with scroll key on the touch
panel.
Section
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Operation/Procedure
3) Press [OK] key.
1) Select a target adjustment item with scroll key on the touch
The set value is saved.
panel.
When the image magnification ratio in the sub scanning direction is
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
adjusted with SIM48-1, and a different magnification ratio is speci-
3) Press [OK] key. fied, and the image magnification ratio is not satisfactory, perform
The set value is saved. this adjustment.
When the adjustment value is increased, the image magnification When there is an error in the image magnification ratio in reduction,
ratio is increased. change the adjustment value in the high speed mode. When there
A change of "1" in the adjustment value of item A, C, or E corre- is an error in the image magnification ratio in enlargement, change
sponds to a change of about 0.02% in the copy magnification ratio. the adjustment value in the low speed mode.
A change of "1" in the adjustment value of item B, D, or F corre-
Setting Default
sponds to a change of about 0.1% in the copy magnification ratio. Item/Display Content
range value
[DSPF] A MR (HI) Scanner motor (High speed) 1 - 99 50
Setting Default B MR(MID) Scanner motor (Reference speed) 1 - 99 50
Item/Display Content C MR(LO) Scanner motor (Low speed) 1 - 99 50
range value
A CCD (MAIN) SCAN main scanning 1 - 99 50 D SPF(HI) Document feed (SPF) motor 1 - 99 50
magnification ratio adjustment (High speed)
(CCD) E SPF(MID) Document feed (SPF) motor 1 - 99 50
B CCD (SUB) SCAN sub scanning 1 - 99 50 (Reference speed)
magnification ratio adjustment
(CCD)
C SPF (MAIN) DSPF document front surface 1 - 99 50
magnification ratio adjustment 48-6
(Main scan) Purpose Adjustment
D SPF (SUB) DSPF document front surface 1 - 99 50
magnification ratio adjustment Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the rotation speed of each
(Sub scan) motor.
E SPFB (MAIN) DSPF document back surface 1 - 99 50 Section
magnification ratio adjustment
Operation/Procedure
(Main scan)
1) Select an adjustment target mode with [COLOR] [MONO]
[RSPF] [HEAVY] keys on the touch panel.
Setting Default 2) Select a target adjustment item with scroll key on the touch
Item/Display Content panel.
range value
A CCD (MAIN) SCAN main scanning 1 - 99 50 3) Enter the set value with 10-key.
magnification ratio adjustment 4) Press [OK] key.
(CCD)
B CCD (SUB) SCAN sub scanning 1 - 99 50
The set value is saved.
magnification ratio adjustment When the adjustment value is increased, the speed is increased,
(CCD) and vice versa. A change of 1 in the adjustment value corresponds
C SPF (MAIN) RSPF document front surface 1 - 99 50 to a change of about 0.1% in the speed.
magnification ratio adjustment
(Main scan) Setting Default
Item/Display Content Mode
D SPF (SUB) RSPF document front surface 1 - 99 50 range value
magnification ratio adjustment A RRM Registration Color COLOR 1 - 99 53
(Sub scan) motor Mono- MONO
E SPFB (MAIN) RSPF document back surface 1 - 99 50 correction chrome
magnification ratio adjustment value Heavy HEAVY 55
(Main scan) paper
F SPFB (SUB) RSPF document back surface 1 - 99 50 B BTM Belt motor Color COLOR 1 - 99 46
magnification ratio adjustment correction Mono- MONO
(Sub scan) value chrome
Heavy HEAVY
paper
C DM_K Drum K Color COLOR 1 - 99 44
motor Mono- MONO
correction chrome
value Heavy HEAVY
paper
MX-5141N SIMULATION 6 – 93
Setting Default Error display
Item/Display Content Mode
range value Item/Display Content in case of
D DM_CL Drum CL Color COLOR 1 - 99 44 abnormality
motor Heavy HEAVY ICU (SUB) ICU Sub section (ARM9) ICUS
correction paper LANGUAGE Language support data program LANG
value SLIST SLIST data for L-LCD SLIST
DVM_K Developing Mono- MONO 1 - 99 50 UNICONTENTS Display contents data UNICON
K motor chrome EOSA embedded OSA EOSA
correction
PCL (PROFILE) PCL Color profile PCLP
value
PCU (BOOT) PCU Boot section PCUB
E DVM_K Developing Color COLOR 1 - 99 50
PCU (MAIN) PCU Main section PCUM
K motor Heavy HEAVY
correction DESK (BOOT) Desk unit Boot section DESKB
paper
value DESK (MAIN) Desk unit Main section DESKM
F FSM Fusing motor Color COLOR** 1 - 99 40 A4LCC (BOOT) Side LCC (A4) Boot section LCC4B
correction Heavy HEAVY 42 A4LCC (MAIN) Side LCC (A4) Main section LCC4M
value paper FIN (BOOT) Inner finisher Boot section FINB
G DVM_CL Developing Color COLOR 1 - 99 50 FIN (MAIN) Inner finisher Main section FINM
CL motor Heavy HEAVY SADDLE (BOOT) Saddle Boot section SDLB
correction paper SADDLE (MAIN) Saddle Main section SDLM
value 1KFIN (BOOT) 1K finisher Boot section FIN1B
H PFM Paper transport motor COLOR* 1 - 99 50 1KFIN (MAIN) 1K finisher Main section FIN1M
correction value 4KFIN (BOOT) 4K finisher Boot section FIN4B
I POM Paper exit motor COLOR* 1 - 99 45 4KFIN (MAIN) 4K finisher Main section FIN4M
correction value
1KPUNCH (BOOT) 1K finisher punch unit Boot section 1PUNB
J CPFM Paper feed motor COLOR* 1 - 99 50
1KPUNCH (MAIN) 1K finisher punch unit Main section 1PUNM
correction value
4KPUNCH (BOOT) 4K finisher punch unit Boot section 4PUNB
K FUSER Fusing speed select HEAVY 1 - 99 50
4KPUNCH (MAIN) 4K finisher punch unit Main section 4PUNM
SETTING timing
SCU (BOOT) SCU Boot section SCUB
L RRM RPM acceleration start HEAVY 0 - 255 0
START timing SCU (MAIN) SCU Main section SCUM
M RRM RPM acceleration end HEAVY 0 - 255 210 DSPF (BOOT) DSPF Boot section DSPFB
END timing DSPF (MAIN) DSPF Main section DSPFM
FAX (BOOT) FAX1 Boot section FAXB
* Common items for color, monochrome, and heavy paper FAX (MAIN) FAX1 Main section FAXM
** Common items for color and monochrome ANIMATION Animation data ANIME
The greater the correction value is, the higher the speed is, and ACRE (BOOT) Enhanced compression kit Boot ACREB
vice versa. Change by ±1 corresponds to 0.1%. ACRE (MAIN) Enhanced compression kit Main ACREM
ACRE_DATA Enhanced compression kit Table ACRED
MX-5141N SIMULATION 6 – 94
Item/Display Content
DSPFB DSPF Boot section 50
DSPFM DSPF Main section
FAXB FAX1 Boot section
50-1
FAXM FAX1 Main section
ANIME Animation data Purpose Adjustment
ACREB Enhanced compression kit Boot Function (Purpose) Copy image position, image loss adjust-
ACREM Enhanced compression kit Main ment
ACRED Enhanced compression kit Table Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch
49-3 panel.
Purpose 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Function (Purpose) Used to update the operation manual in the Set the items other than RRCA, LEAD, and SIDE to the
HDD. default.
Section RRCA: Image lead edge reference position adjustment
Operation/Procedure LEAD: Lead edge image loss adjustment
1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit. SIDE: Side image loss adjustment
* When the USB is not inserted, "INSERT A STORANGE E- 3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
MANUAL STORED ON" is displayed. When [OK] key is
Setting Default
pressed, the display is shifted to the folder select menu 1. Item/Display Content
range value
2) Press the folder button of the operation manual data. (The dis- A Lead RRCA Document lead edge 0 - 99 50
play is shifted to the operation manual update menu.) edge reference position
The current version and the update version are displayed. adjust- (OC)
B ment RRCB- Regis- Standard 1 - 99 50
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. value CS12 tration Tray
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted, and [YES] [NO] keys becomes C RRCB- motor Desk 1 - 99 50
active from gray out. CS34 ON
4) When [YES] key is pressed, the selected operation manual is D RRCB-LCC timing LCC 1 - 99 50
updated. E RRCB-MFT adjust- Manual 1 - 99 50
ment paper feed
When update is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is dis-
played. When terminated abnormally, "ERROR" is displayed. F RRCB-ADU ADU 1 - 99 50
G Image LEAD Lead edge image 0 - 99 40
loss area loss area setting
H setting SIDE Side image loss area 0 - 99 20
49-5 value adjustment
Purpose I Void area DENA Lead edge void area 1 - 99 40
adjust- adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the watermark update. J ment DENB Rear edge void area 1 - 99 30
Section adjustment
Operation/Procedure K FRONT/ FRONT/REAR void 1 - 99 20
REAR area adjustment
1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit.
L Off-center OFFSET_ OC document off- 1 - 99 50
2) Select the button of the folder to perform the watermark adjust- OC center adjustment
update. ment
3) The current version and the update version are displayed. M Magnifica- SCAN_ SCAN sub scanning 1 - 99 50
tion ratio SPEED_ magnification ratio
4) Press [EXECUTE] key.
correction OC adjustment (CCD)
5) Press [YES] key. N Sub DENB-MFT Manual feed 1 - 99 50
The selected watermark is updated. scanning correction value
O direction DENB-CS1 Tray 1 correction 1 - 99 50
print area value
P correction DENB-CS2 Tray 2 correction 1 - 99 50
49-10 value value
Purpose Q DENB-CS3 Tray 3 correction 1 - 99 50
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the ACU firmware update. value
R DENB-CS4 Tray 4 correction 1 - 99 50
Section value
Operation/Procedure S DENB-LCC LCC correction value 1 - 99 50
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. T DENB-ADU ADU correction 1 - 99 55
value
2) Press [YES] key.
U DENB-HV Heavy paper 1 - 99 50
3) Press [OK] key when the update is finished and updating result correction value
is displayed. Then, restart the machine.
A. (RRC-A) Timing from starting document scanning to specifying
the image lead edge reference is adjusted. (01.mm/step)
* When the value is decreased, the timing is advanced. When
the value is increased, the timing is delayed.
B - F. (RRC-B) Timing of paper (registration roller ON) for the
image position on the transfer belt is adjusted. (0.1mm/step)
MX-5141N SIMULATION 6 – 95
* When the value is decreased, the timing is delayed. When the
value is increased, the timing is advanced.
G. (LEAD) The lead edge image loss amount is adjusted. (0.1mm/
step)
* When the value is increased, the image loss is increased.
H. (SIDE) The side image loss amount is adjusted.
* When the value is increased, the image loss is increased.
(0.1mm/step)
I. (DEN-A) The paper lead edge void amount is adjusted. (0.1mm/
step)
* When the value is increased, the void is increased.
J. (DEN-B) The paper rear edge void amount is adjusted. (0.1mm/
step)
* When the value is increased, the void is increased.
K. (FRONT/REAR) The void amount on the right and left edges of
paper is adjusted. (0.1mm/step)
50-5
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the print lead edge image
position. (PRINTER MODE)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target adjustment item (DEN-C) with scroll key on the
touch panel.
2) Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The set value is saved, and the adjustment check pattern is
printed.
4) Measure the distance from the paper lead edge the adjustment
pattern to the image lead edge, and check to confirm that it is
in the standard adjustment value range.
Standard reference value: 4.0 +/- 2.0mm
When the adjustment value is increased, the distance from the
paper lead edge to the image lead edge is increased. When the
adjustment value is decreased, the distanced is decreased.
When the set value is changed by 1, the distance is changed by
about 0.1mm.
Setting Default
Item/Display Content NOTE
range value
A DEN-C Used to adjust the print lead edge image 1 - 99 30 Adjustment value too align the print lead edge for the
position. printer. When the adjustment value of this item is
(PRINTER MODE) decreased by 1, the printer print start position in the paper
transport direction is shifted to the lead edge by 0.1mm.
B DEN-B Rear edge void area adjustment 1 - 99 30 Void amount generated at the paper rear edge. When the
adjustment value of item B (DEN-B) is decreased by 1, the
print area adjustment value in the sub scanning direction
for the paper transport direction is decreased by 0.1mm.
C FRONT/REAR FRONT/REAR void area adjustment 1 - 99 20 Adjustment of the void amount generated on the left and
right edges of paper. When the adjustment value is
increased, the void amount is increased.
D DENB-MFT Manual feed rear edge void area adjustment 1 - 99 50 Fine adjustment value of each paper feed source for the
correction value adjustment value of DEN-B
E DENB-CS1 Tray 1 rear edge void area adjustment 1 - 99 50
correction value
F DENB-CS2 Tray 2 rear edge void area adjustment 1 - 99 50
correction value
G DENB-CS3 Tray 3 rear edge void area adjustment 1 - 99 50
correction value
H DENB-CS4 Tray 4 rear edge void area adjustment 1 - 99 50
correction value
I DENB-LCC LCC rear edge void aria adjustment 1 - 99 50
correction value
J DENB-ADU ADU rear edge void aria adjustment 1 - 99 55
correction value
K DENB-HV Heavy paper correction value 1 - 99 50
L MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1 Adjustment pattern print conditions setting
MX-5141N SIMULATION 6 – 96
Setting Default
Item/Display Content NOTE
range value
M PAPER MFT Tray selection Manual paper feed 1-6 1 2 (CS1)
CS1 Tray 1 2
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
LCC LCC 6
N DUPLEX YES Duplex print selection Yes 0-1 0 1 (NO)
NO No 1
When the adjustment value is increased, the distance from the paper lead edge to the image lead edge is increased. When the adjustment
value is decreased, the distance from the paper lead edge to the image lead edge is decreased.
When the set value is changed by 1, the distance is changed by about 0.1mm.
[RSPF]
50-6
Setting Default
Purpose Adjustment Item/Display Content
range value
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy image position and A SIDE1 Front surface 1 - 99 50
the image loss. (DSPF/RSPF mode) document scan
position adjustment
Section DSPF/RSPF
(CCD)
Operation/Procedure B SIDE2 Back surface 1 - 99 50
1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch document scan
panel. position adjustment
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. (CCD)
C Image loss LEAD_ Front surface lead 0 - 99 20
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) amount EDGE edge image loss
[DSPF] setting (SIDE1) amount setting
D SIDE1 FRONT_ Front surface side 0 - 99 20
Setting Default REAR image loss amount
Item/Display Content
range value (SIDE1) setting
A SIDE1 Front surface 1 - 99 50 E TRAIL_ Front surface rear 0 - 99 40
document scan position EDGE edge image loss
adjustment (CCD) (SIDE1) amount setting
B SIDE2 Back surface document 1 - 99 50 F Image loss LEAD_ Back surface lead 0 - 99 20
scan position amount EDGE edge image loss
adjustment (CCD) setting (SIDE2) amount setting
C Image loss LEAD_ Front surface lead edge 0 - 99 20 G SIDE2 FRONT_ Back surface side 0 - 99 20
amount EDGE image loss amount REAR image loss amount
setting (SIDE1) setting (SIDE2) setting
D SIDE1 FRONT_ Front surface side 0 - 99 20 H TRAIL_ Back surface rear edge 0 - 99 40
REAR image loss amount EDGE image loss amount
(SIDE1) setting (SIDE2) setting
E TRAIL_ Front surface rear edge 0 - 99 40 I OFFSET_SPF1 RSPF front surface 1 - 99 50
EDGE image loss amount document off-center
(SIDE1) setting adjustment
F Image loss LEAD_ Back surface lead edge 0 - 99 40 J OFFSET_SPF2 RSPF back surface 1 - 99 50
amount EDGE image loss amount document off-center
setting (SIDE2) setting adjustment
G SIDE2 FRONT_ Back surface side 0 - 99 20 K SCAN_SPEED_SPF1 RSPF document front 1 - 99 50
REAR image loss amount surface magnification
(SIDE2) setting ratio (Sub scan)
H TRAIL_ Back surface rear edge 0 - 99 20 L SCAN_SPEED_SPF2 RSPF document back 1 - 99 50
EDGE image loss amount surface magnification
(SIDE2) setting ratio (Sub scan)
I OFFSET_SPF1 DSPF front surface 1 - 99 50
document off-center Item A, B: When the adjustment value is increased, the scan timing
adjustment is delayed.
J OFFSET_SPF2 DSPF back surface 1 - 99 50
Item C - H: When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss
document off-center
is increased.
adjustment
K SCAN_SPEED_SPF1 DSPF document front 1 - 99 50 Item E - H: When a shadow image appears on the rear edge,
surface magnification increase the adjustment value to delete the shadow.
ratio (Sub scan) All adjustment items: 1 step = 0.1mm change
Item A, B: When the adjustment value is increased, the scan timing
is delayed.
Item C - H: When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss
is increased.
Item E - H: When a shadow image appears on the rear edge,
increase the adjustment value to delete the shadow.
All adjustment items: 1 step = 0.1mm change
MX-5141N SIMULATION 6 – 97
50-10
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the black print image magni-
fication ratio and the off-center position.
(The adjustment is made separately for
each paper feed section.)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch
panel.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. (The set value is saved.)
Item A: When the set value is increased, the BK image magnification ratio in the main scanning direction is increased. When the set value is
decreased, the image magnification ratio is decreased.
Item B - H: When the adjustment value is increased, it is shifted to the front frame side. When the adjustment value is decreased, it is shifted to
the rear frame side.
All adjustment items: 1 step = 0.1mm change
50-12
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the scan image off-center
position adjustment. (The adjustment is
made separately for each scan mode.)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch Setting Default
Item/Display Content
panel. range value
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. A OC Document table image off- 1 - 99 50
center adjustment
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
B SPF (SIDE1) SPF front surface image off- 1 - 99 50
When the adjustment value is increased, the image position is center adjustment
shifted to the rear frame side. When the adjustment value is C SPF (SIDE2) SPF back surface image off- 1 - 99 50
decreased, it is shifted to the front frame side. center adjustment
1step = 0.1mm
MX-5141N SIMULATION 6 – 98
50-20
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Image registration adjustment (Main scan-
ning direction)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch
panel.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. (The set value is saved.)
50-22
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the image registration. (Main
scan direction, sub scan direction) (Auto
adjustment)/OPC drum phase adjustment
(Auto adjustment)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The adjustment is automatically performed, and the adjust-
ment data are displayed.
NOTE: The contents of the following list are mainly used by the
technical division, and are not necessary for the market.
MX-5141N SIMULATION 6 – 99
Default
Item/Display Content Display NOTE
value
MAIN F C Image registration adjustment value (Main scanning 1.0 - 399.0 100
direction) (Position of writing by cyan laser is F side)
M Image registration adjustment value (Main scanning 1.0 - 399.0 100
direction) (Position of writing by magenta laser is F side)
Y Image registration adjustment value (Main scanning 1.0 - 399.0 100
direction) (Position of writing by yellow laser is F side)
MAIN R C Image registration adjustment value (Main scanning 1.0 - 399.0 100
direction) (Position of writing by cyan laser is R side)
M Image registration adjustment value (Main scanning 1.0 - 399.0 100
direction) (Position of writing by magenta laser is R side)
Y Image registration adjustment value (Main scanning 1.0 - 399.0 100
direction) (Position of writing by yellow laser is R side)
SUB C Image registration adjustment value (Sub scanning 1.0 - 399.0 100
direction) (Cyan drum to black drum)
M Image registration adjustment value (Sub scanning 1.0 - 399.0 100
direction) (Magenta drum to cyan drum)
Y Image registration adjustment value (Sub scanning 1.0 - 399.0 100
direction) (Yellow drum to magenta drum)
SKEW C Calculated result of print skew amount (Cyan) L99.9 - R99.9 - If the value is plus, R is displayed to left side of
(+/- 0.1) numerical value. If the value is minus, L is
M Calculated result of print skew amount (magenta) L99.9 - R99.9 - displayed to left side of numerical value.
(+/- 0.1) When the value is -5.1 - +5.1, "(OK)" is place
Y Calculated result of print skew amount (yellow) L99.9 - R99.9 - at the back of the value. For the other cases,
(+/- 0.1) "(NG)" is displayed. *1
PHASE Phase Angle step 1-8 2 Same item as SIM44-31. (41cpm machine)
adjustment (1)45 degree C (2)90 degree C (3)135 degree C(4)180
value BK degree C (5)225 degree C (6)270 degree C (7)315
-> CL degree C
Phase 2 Same item as SIM44-31. (51cpm machine)
adjustment
value C
Phase 4
adjustment
value M
Phase 5
adjustment
value Y
Color/ Default
Item/Display Content Setting range (unit) NOTE
History value
MAIN F - REG_M_F Registration adjustment correction 1.0 - 399.0 (+/- 0.1) CMY/- 100
(VALUE) amount main scanning direction F
() REG_M_F (DIF) Registration value correction -399.0 - 399.0 (+/- CMY/- 0
amount from the previous one, main 0.1)
scanning F
MAIN R - REG_M_R Registration adjustment correction 1.0 - 399.0 (+/- 0.1) CMY/- 100
(VALUE) value, main scanning direction R
() REG_M_R (DIF) Registration value correction -399.0 - 399.0 (+/- CMY/- 0
amount from the previous one, main 0.1)
scanning R
SUB - REG_SUB Registration adjustment correction 1.0 - 399.0 (+/- 0.1) CMY/- 100
(VALUE) value, sub scanning direction
() REG_SUB (DIF) Registration value correction -399.0 - 399.0 (+/- CMY/- 0
amount from the previous one, sub 0.1)
scanning
SKEW CMY SKEW_CLC SKEW adjustment rotating direction L99.9 - R99.9 (+/- KCMY/- 0 If the value is plus, L is
and the number of clicks (CMY) 0.1) displayed to left side of
numerical value. If the value is
minus, R is displayed to left
side of numerical value.
When the value is -5.1 - +5.1,
"(OK)" is place at the back of
the value. For the other cases,
"(NG)" is displayed. *1
ALL_ SKEW adjustment rotating direction If the value is plus, L is
ROTATE and the number of clicks (K) displayed to left side of
numerical value. If the value is
minus, R is displayed to left
side of numerical value. *2
*1: The color image skew adjustment is performed according to this display value.
When "R" is displayed in front of the value, turn and click the skew adjustment screw (LSU) clockwise by the value.
When "L" is displayed in front of the value, turn and click the skew adjustment screw (LSU) counterclockwise by the value.
*2: The color image skew adjustment is performed according to this display value.
When "R" is displayed at the head of the value, turn the skew adjustment screw (LSU) clockwise by the number of the value.
When "L" is displayed at the head of the value, turn the skew adjustment screw (LSU) counterclockwise by the number of the value.
At that time, the values under the decimal point are rounded.
50-24
Purpose (This simulation is normally not used in the
market.)
Function (Purpose) Used to display the detail data of SIM 44-2,
50-20, 21 and 22.
Section
Operation/Procedure
NOTE: This simulation is mainly used by the technical division,
and is not necessary for the market.
[DSPF]
A-I: When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss is increased.
1step = 0.1mm
[RSPF]
Item/Display Content Setting range Default value
FAX send A Image loss LEAD_EDGE (OC) OC lead edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 30 (3mm)
B amount setting OC FRONT_REAR (OC) OC side image loss amount setting 0 - 100 20 (2mm)
C TRAIL_EDGE (OC) OC rear edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 20 (2mm)
D Image loss LEAD_EDGE (SPF_SIDE1) Front surface lead edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 20 (2mm)
E amount setting FRONT_REAR (SPF_SIDE1) Front surface side image loss amount setting 0 - 100 20 (2mm)
F SPF SIDE1 TRAIL_EDGE (SPF_SIDE1) Front surface rear edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 30 (3mm)
G Image loss LEAD_EDGE (SPF_SIDE2) Back surface lead edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 20 (2mm)
H amount setting FRONT_REAR (SPF_SIDE2) Back surface side image loss amount setting 0 - 100 20 (2mm)
I SPF SIDE2 TRAIL_EDGE (SPF_SIDE2) Back surface rear edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 30 (3mm)
When image A Image loss LEAD_EDGE (OC) OC lead edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
send mode B amount setting OC FRONT_REAR(OC) OC side image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
(Except for C TRAIL_EDGE(OC) OC rear edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
FAX and D Image loss LEAD_EDGE (SPF_SIDE1) Front surface lead edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
copy) amount setting
E FRONT_REAR (SPF_SIDE1) Front surface side image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
F SPF SIDE1 TRAIL_EDGE(SPF_SIDE1) Front surface rear edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
G Image loss LEAD_EDGE (SPF_SIDE2) Back surface lead edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
H amount setting FRONT_REAR (SPF_SIDE2) Back surface side image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
I SPF SIDE2 TRAIL_EDGE(SPF_SIDE2) Back surface rear edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
A-I: When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss is increased.
1step = 0.1mm
Setting Default
Mode Display/Item Content
range value
DSPF A NORMAL_PLAIN_HIGH DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 1 - 1 - 99 50
REGI1 (Normal/Plain paper/HIGH)
B NORMAL_PLAIN_LOW DSPF deflection amount adjustment value1 - 1 - 99 50
(Normal/Plain paper/LOW)
C NORMAL_THIN_HIGH DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 1 - 1 - 99 50
(Normal/Thin paper/HIGH)
D NORMAL_THIN_LOW DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 1 - 1 - 99 50
(Normal/Thin paper/LOW)
E RANDOM_PLAIN_HIGH DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 1 - 1 - 99 50
(Random/Plain paper/HIGH)
F RANDOM_PLAIN_LOW DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 1 - 1 - 99 50
(Random/Plain paper/LOW)
G RANDOM_THIN_HIGH DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 1 - 1 - 99 50
(Random/Thin paper/HIGH)
H RANDOM_THIN_LOW DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 1 - 1 - 99 50
(Random/Thin paper/LOW)
DSPF A NORMAL_PLAIN_HIGH DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 2 - 1 - 99 50
REGI2 (Normal/Plain paper/HIGH)
B NORMAL_PLAIN_LOW DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 2 - 1 - 99 50
(Normal/Plain paper/LOW)
C NORMAL_THIN_HIGH DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 2 - 1 - 99 50
(Normal/Thin paper/HIGH)
D NORMAL_THIN_LOW DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 2 - 1 - 99 50
(Normal/Thin paper/LOW)
E RANDOM_PLAIN_HIGH DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 2 - 1 - 99 50
(Random/Plain paper/HIGH)
F RANDOM_PLAIN_LOW DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 2 - 1 - 99 50
(Random/Plain paper/LOW)
G RANDOM_THIN_HIGH DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 2 - 1 - 99 50
(Random/Thin paper/HIGH)
H RANDOM_THIN_LOW DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 2 - 1 - 99 50
(Random/Thin paper/LOW)
ENGINE A TRAY1(S) Main unit cassette 1 (Upper stage)/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or less 1 - 99 20
(Plain paper/Small size)
B TRAY1(L) Main unit cassette 1 (Upper stage)/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 20
(Plain paper/Large size)
C TRAY1 HEAVY PAPER(S) Main unit cassette 1 (Upper stage)/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or less 1 - 99 15
(Heavy paper/Small size)
D TRAY1 HEAVY PAPER(L) Main unit cassette 1 (Upper stage)/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 25
(Heavy paper/Large size)
E TRAY2(S) Main unit cassette 2 (Lower stage)/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or less 1 - 99 20
(Plain paper/Small size)
F TRAY2(L) Main unit cassette 2 (Lower stage)/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 20
(Plain paper/Large size)
G TRAY HEAVY A PAPER(S) Main unit cassette 2 (Upper stage)/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or less 1 - 99 15
(Heavy paper/Small size)
H TRAY HEAVY A PAPER(L) Main unit cassette 2 (Upper stage)/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 25
(Heavy paper/Large size)
I MANUAL PLAIN PAPER(S) Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or less 1 - 99 20
(Plain paper/Small size)
J MANUAL PLAIN PAPER(L) Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 20
(Plain paper/Large size)
K MANUAL HEZVY A Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or less 1 - 99 20
PAPER(S) (Heavy paper/Small size)
L MANUAL HEAVY A Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 25
PAPER(L) (Heavy paper/Large size)
M MANUAL HEAVY B Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or less 1 - 99 25
PAPER(S) (Heavy paper B/Small size)
N MANUAL HEAVY B Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value The above mentioned 1 - 99 35
PAPER(L) (Heavy paper B/Large size) size or above
O MANUAL OHP Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value (OHP) - 1 - 99 15
P MANUAL ENV Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value (Envelope) - 1 - 99 15
Q ADU PLAIN PAPER(S) ADU/deflection adjustment value (Plain paper/Small size) LT size (216mm) or less 1 - 99 20
R ADU PLAIN PAPER(L) ADU/deflection adjustment value (Plain paper/Large size) LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 20
S ADU HEAVY PAPER(S) ADU/deflection adjustment value (Heavy paper/Small size) LT size (216mm) or less 1 - 99 20
T ADU HEAVY PAPER(L) ADU/deflection adjustment value (Heavy paper/Large size) LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 25
U DESK(S) DESK/deflection adjustment value (Plain paper/Small size) LT size (216mm) or less 1 - 99 20
V DESK(L) DESK/deflection adjustment value (Plain paper/Large size) LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 20
W DESK HEAVY PAPER(S) DESK/deflection adjustment value (Heavy paper/Small size) LT size (216mm) or less 1 - 99 15
X DESK HEAVY PAPER(L) DESK/deflection adjustment value (Heavy paper/Large size) LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 25
Y A4LCC A4LCC/deflection adjustment value - 1 - 99 20
[RSPF]
Setting Default
Mode Display/Ite Content
range value
SIDE1 A NORMAL_PLAIN_LOW RSPF front surface document deflection amount adjustment - 1 - 99 50
value (Normal/Plain paper/LOW)
B NORMAL_THIN _LOW RSPF front surface document deflection amount adjustment - 1 - 99 50
value (Normal/Thin paper/LOW)
C RANDOM_PLAIN _LOW RSPF front surface document deflection amount adjustment - 1 - 99 50
value (Random/Plain paper/LOW)
D RANDOM_THIN_LOW RSPF front surface document deflection amount adjustment - 1 - 99 50
value (Random/Thin paper/LOW)
SIDE2 A NORMAL_PLAIN_LOW_1 RSPF back surface document deflection amount adjustment - 1 - 99 50
value 1 (Normal/Plain paper/LOW)
ENGINE A TRAY1(S) Main unit cassette 1 (Upper stage)/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or less 1 - 99 20
(Plain paper/Small size)
B TRAY1(L) Main unit cassette 1 (Upper stage)/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 20
(Plain paper/Large size)
C TRAY1 HEAVY PAPER (S) Main unit cassette 1 (Upper stage)/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or less 1 - 99 15
(Heavy paper/Small size)
D TRAY1 HEAVY PAPER (L) Main unit cassette 1 (Upper stage)/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 15
(Heavy paper/Large size)
E TRAY2(S) Main unit cassette 2 (Lower stage)/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or less 1 - 99 20
(Plain paper/Small size)
F TRAY2(L) Main unit cassette 2 (Lower stage)/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 20
(Plain paper/Large size)
G TRAY2 HEAVY PAPER (S) Main unit cassette 2 (Upper stage)/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or less 1 - 99 15
(Heavy paper/Small size)
H TRAY2 HEAVY PAPER (L) Main unit cassette 2 (Upper stage)/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 15
(Heavy paper/Large size)
I MANUAL PLAIN PAPER (S) Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or less 1 - 99 20
(Plain paper/Small size)
J MANUAL PLAIN PAPER (L) Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 20
(Plain paper/Large size)
K MANUAL HEAVY PAPER (S) Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or less 1 - 99 15
(Heavy paper/Small size)
L MANUAL HEAVY PAPER (L) Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 15
(Heavy paper/Large size)
M MANUAL OHP Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value (OHP) - 1 - 99 15
N MANUAL ENV Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value (Envelope) - 1 - 99 15
O ADU PLAIN PAPER (S) ADU/deflection adjustment value (Plain paper/Small size) LT size (216mm) or less 1 - 99 20
P ADU PLAIN PAPER (L) ADU/deflection adjustment value (Plain paper/Large size) LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 20
Q ADU HEAVY PAPER (S) ADU/deflection adjustment value (Heavy paper/Small size) LT size (216mm) or less 1 - 99 15
R ADU HEAVY PAPER (L) ADU/deflection adjustment value (Heavy paper/Large size) LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 15
S DESK (S) DESK/deflection adjustment value (Plain paper/Small size) LT size (216mm) or less 1 - 99 20
T DESK (L) DESK/deflection adjustment value (Plain paper/Large size) LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 20
U DESK HEAVY PAPER (S) DESK/deflection adjustment value (Heavy paper/Small size) LT size (216mm) or less 1 - 99 15
V DESK HEAVY PAPER (L) DESK/deflection adjustment value (Heavy paper/Large size) LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 15
W A4LCC A4LCC/deflection adjustment value - 1 - 99 20
[RSPF]
Setting Default
Item/Display
range value
A AD_MAX Max. width position 0 - 1023 84
B AD_P1 Intermediate position (L) 0 - 1023 509
C AD_P2 Intermediate position (S) 0 - 1023 808
D AD_MIN Min. width position 0 - 1023 961
DSPF
Print U V W X Y Z 0
55-3 Input value 85 86 87 88 89 90 48
Purpose (Do not use this function unless specially
required.) Print 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Input value 49 50 51 52 53 54 55
Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the control-
ler operation. (SOFT SW) Print 8 9
Section Input value 56 57
Operation/Procedure
55-10
Purpose Adjustment/Setting
56
Function (Purpose) Used to set the special stamp text. (Taiwan
56-1
only)
Purpose Backup
Section
Function (Purpose) Used to transport data between HDD - MFP
Operation/Procedure
PWB SRAM/EEPROM. (Used to repair the
1) Select an item to be set (digit, color, type) with the scroll key. PWB.)
2) Enter the value corresponding to the setting item with 10-key.
Section
3) Press [OK] key.
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target content of data transfer.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key and press [YES] key.
Data transfer of the item selected in procedure 1) is executed.
When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is
displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed.
Default value
Setting Destination
Mode Item/Display Content 41cpm 51cpm
range linkage
machine machine
COPY A LASER POWER MIDDLE (K1) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/K1) 0 - 255 137 171 ✕
B LASER POWER MIDDLE (K2) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/K2) 0 - 255 137 171 ✕
C LASER POWER MIDDLE (C1) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/C1) 0 - 255 137 171 ✕
D LASER POWER MIDDLE (C2) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/C2) 0 - 255 137 171 ✕
E LASER POWER MIDDLE (M1) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/M1) 0 - 255 137 171 ✕
F LASER POWER MIDDLE (M2) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/M2) 0 - 255 137 171 ✕
G LASER POWER MIDDLE (Y1) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/Y1) 0 - 255 137 171 ✕
H LASER POWER MIDDLE (Y2) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/Y2) 0 - 255 137 171 ✕
I LASER POWER LOW (K1) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/K1) 0 - 255 145 145 ✕
J LASER POWER LOW (K2) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/K2) 0 - 255 145 145 ✕
K LASER POWER LOW (C1) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/C1) 0 - 255 145 145 ✕
L LASER POWER LOW (C2) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/C2) 0 - 255 145 145 ✕
M LASER POWER LOW (M1) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/M1) 0 - 255 145 145 ✕
N LASER POWER LOW (M2) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/M2) 0 - 255 145 145 ✕
O LASER POWER LOW (Y1) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/Y1) 0 - 255 145 145 ✕
P LASER POWER LOW (Y2) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/Y2) 0 - 255 145 145 ✕
Q LASER POWER MIDDLE (BW1) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/BW1) 0 - 255 137 171 ✕
R LASER POWER MIDDLE (BW2) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/BW2) 0 - 255 137 171 ✕
S LASER POWER LOW (BW1) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/BW1) 0 - 255 145 145 ✕
T LASER POWER LOW (BW2) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/BW2) 0 - 255 145 145 ✕
U LASER DUTY MIDDLE (K) Laser DUTY select middle speed (K) 0 - 255 0 0 O
V LASER DUTY MIDDLE (C) Laser DUTY select middle speed (C) 0 - 255 0 0 O
W LASER DUTY MIDDLE (M) Laser DUTY select middle speed (M) 0 - 255 0 0 O
X LASER DUTY MIDDLE (Y) Laser DUTY select middle speed (Y) 0 - 255 0 0 O
Y LASER DUTY LOW (K) Laser DUTY select low speed (K) 0 - 255 0 0 O
Z LASER DUTY LOW (C) Laser DUTY select low speed (C) 0 - 255 0 0 O
AA LASER DUTY LOW (M) Laser DUTY select low speed (M) 0 - 255 0 0 O
AB LASER DUTY LOW (Y) Laser DUTY select low speed (Y) 0 - 255 0 0 O
AC LASER DUTY MIDDLE (BW) Laser DUTY select middle speed (BW) 0 - 255 0 0 O
AD LASER DUTY LOW (BW) Laser DUTY select low speed (BW) 0 - 255 0 0 O
PR600/FAX A LASER POWER MIDDLE (K1) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/K1) 0 - 255 137 171 ✕
B LASER POWER MIDDLE (K2) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/K2) 0 - 255 137 171 ✕
C LASER POWER MIDDLE (C1) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/C1) 0 - 255 137 171 ✕
D LASER POWER MIDDLE (C2) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/C2) 0 - 255 137 171 ✕
62-3
Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Used to check read/write of the hard disk
(all areas).
61-12
Section
Purpose Adjustment Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Laser power manual correction 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Section LSU 2) Press [YES] key.
Operation/Procedure Read/write operations are performed.
Press an item button to be adjusted.
When [MEASURING INSTRUMENT] is pressed:
1) Press [VISUAL INSPECTION] key.
2) Select the adjustment density pattern and press [EXECUTE]
key.
3) The adjustment pattern is printed out. Then, press [4POINT
CORRECTION] key or [31POINT CORRECTION] key.
63-2
Purpose Adjustment 63-5
Function (Purpose) Used to perform shading. Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Section Function (Purpose) Used to perform the scanner (CCD) color
balance and gamma default setting.
Operation/Procedure
Section
- DSPF-installed model
1) Select [OC SHADING] key or [DSPF SHADING] key, and Operation/Procedure
press [EXECUTE] key. 1) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key
Used to perform shading. 2) The scanner (CCD) color balance and gamma are set to the
When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the default.
normal display.
- RSPF-installed model
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. 63-6
Used to perform shading. Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the Function (Purpose) Used to display the scan level and the den-
normal display. sity level of the copy color balance adjust-
ment patch.
Section
63-3 Operation/Procedure
Purpose Adjustment 1) Set the color balance adjustment pattern sheet printed with
SIM46-21 on the document table.
Function (Purpose) Used to perform scanner (CCD) color bal-
ance and gamma auto adjustment. 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Section Scanner The patch image of the adjustment pattern sheet is scanned.
Operation/Procedure Select a target color with [C] [M] [Y] [K] key.
1) Place the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1)
on the reference position of the left rear frame side of the doc-
ument table. For the DSPF mode, put the SIT chart backside
up on the DSPF tray.
2) Select [OC] key or [DSPF] key.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The scanner (CCD) color balance automatic adjustment is per-
formed.
63-8
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to set the default of the service target
of the copy mode auto color balance adjust-
ment.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
2) Press [YES] key.
The service target of the copy mode automatic color balance
adjustment is set to the default.
The service color balance target and the color balance target
for the user color balance adjustment are set to the same color
balance as the factory color balance target.
64-2
Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Test print. (Self print) (Monochrome mode)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Set the print conditions.
Select an item to be print condition with scroll keys.
Set the print conditions with 10-key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The test print (self print) is performed.
Setting Default
Item/Display Content Writing
range value
A COPIES Number of print 1 - 999 1 No
reflected.
NO 1 The halftone
process control
correction
value is not
reflected.
65-5
Purpose Operation check/test
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation panel key
input.
65 Section
Operation/Procedure
65-1
Press the keys sequentially according to the guidance displayed on
Purpose Adjustment the screen.
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the touch panel (LCD dis- If the key entry is effective, the guidance for pressing the next key
play section) detection coordinates. is displayed. When all the key entries are completed, "COMPLETE"
Section Operation panel section is displayed.
Operation/Procedure <Check target key>
Using a stylus or pointed but not shape device, touch the center of 10 Inch LCD model
the cross marks at the four corners of the screen. HOME
When the adjustment is completed normally, the screen shifts to
the simulation sub number entry menu.
In case of an error, the screen returns to the adjustment menu. 66
66-1
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to display the FAX-related soft SW (2
- 150) on the LCD to allow changing the
soft SW while checking with the LCD.
Section FAX
Operation/Procedure
1) Enter the [SW NO] with 10-key.
* When [C] key is pressed, the entered value of [SW NO] is
cleared.
2) Press [DATA] button.
The soft SW data entered in procedure 1) is displayed.
* When [SW NO] button is pressed, the display returns to the
initial screen.
3) Enter the number corresponding to the bit to be changed with
10-key.
* [1] -> [0]
[0] -> [1]
Function (Purpose) Used to set the handset sound volume. <TEL/LIU status change item description>
(This simulation can be executed even HS1 Polarity inversion signal
though the handset setting is set to NO. HS2 Polarity inversion signal
When, however, the handset is not RHS Handset hook SW
installed, the sound volume cannot be EXHS External telephone hook SW
checked.) (Japan model only)
Section FAX
Operation/Procedure
66-31
1) When the machine enters the simulation, the number of the set
sound volume is displayed. (In this example, MIDDLE is set as Purpose Setting
the default sound volume.) Function (Purpose) Used to set ON/OFF the port for output to
2) Use 10-key to set the handset sound volume. (0: MIN 1:MID- TEL/LIU.
DLE 2:MAX) Section FAX
3) Press [EXECUTE] button to deliver the selected on-hold tone. Operation/Procedure
* If, however, the handset is not installed, the sound volume 1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-31, the following
cannot be checked. Execution is possible. screen is displayed.
4) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and deliv- 2) Change the port setting.
ery of the on-hold tone is stopped. When a port is set to ON, the port display is highlighted.
3) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the changed setting is
reflected to the port which outputs to TEL/LIU.
Select item
Content
(Mode)
Heavy Paper Adjustment item to improve the color balance in the
heavy paper mode
1200dpi 1bit Adjustment item to improve the color balance in 1200dpi
mode
B/W Adjustment item to improve the density and gradation in
the monochrome mode
Glossy Adjustment item to improve the color balance in glossy
paper mode
Warning
࠙࣬ A consumable No
OP
Πρήσȟ࠙࣬
Trouble/Warning part has reached
its lifetime
Trouble
Πρήσ ZFT
YES
Replace or supply
Troubleshoot
ະၻࡔ֦ͬऔ the cause. કΩȜΜ۟¦༞ݯ
the consumable part.
ਘၑ
Repair
Reset
໘ܦ
Standby
ఞેܥఠ state
Operatable mode
Judg- Copy scan FAST
Scan-
Trouble content ment Trouble code (including Scan Scan List FAX FAX Notifi-
To Print
block interrup- (Push) (Pull) print Send print cation
HDD
tion) to host
FAX board - FAX board MFP F6 (00, 01, 04, 21, ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ - - -
trouble breakdown 30, 97, 98)
HDD trouble - SD card E7 (07) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
breakdown
- HDD breakdown E7 (03, A5) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
- HDD-ASIC E7 (04) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
breakdown
Scanner - SCU A0 (02) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ○ ○ ✕ ○ ○
communication communication E7 (80)
trouble error
Engine - PCU A0 (01) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ○
communication communication E7 (90)
trouble error
Option - ACU A0 (04) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ○
communication communication
trouble error
Backup battery - Backup battery U1 (01) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ○
voltage fall voltage fall
trouble
Operation - Controller fan L4 (30) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
disable trouble 1 trouble
Operation - External serial U7 (50, 51) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ○
disable trouble 2 I/F communication
error (RIC)
- Memory error U2 (00, 11, 40, 41, ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ 15
(included not 42)
installed the
expansion RAM)
- Connection trouble A0 (10, 15, 17, 20) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
(Model data E7 (60, 61)
discrepancy)
(MFPC detection)
- Serial number data U2 (30) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
error
- HDD registration U2 (50) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ○
data check sum
error
Operation - Memory check E7 (96) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ○
disable trouble 3 error when booting
- Image memory E7 (01, 49, 91, 92, ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ○
trouble, decode 93, 94)
error
- Image memory E7 (42, 46, 47, 48) ✕ 17 ✕ ✕ ✕ ○ ○ ○ ○
trouble, decode
error
(Image high
compression)
Operation - Personal counter PC (00) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ○
disable trouble 4 connection trouble
Power controller - Power controller L8 (20) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ○
trouble error
Special function - Watermark data U2 (60) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
trouble error P1 (00, 01, 02)
Operatable mode
Judg- Copy scan FAST
Scan-
Trouble content ment Trouble code (including Scan Scan List FAX FAX Notifi-
To Print
block interrup- (Push) (Pull) print Send print cation
HDD
tion) to host
Error history PCU F2 (45) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Error history MFP U2 (05) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
E7 (02)
(Power ON sequence)
H3, H4, H5, U1, U2, U6, F3 trouble check When the power is turned on,
Trouble check is preformed in each block, check is made in each block.
and the result is sent to the MFP. Communication of trouble status
[Trouble code] [Trouble status]
H3, H4, H5 Saved in the PCU
U1 Saved in the MFP
U2 Saved in each block
U6-09 Saved in the PCU
F3-12, 22 Saved in the PCU
The process has priority when the power is turned ON with the MFP.
When booting, two or more troubles in the list below may be detected. In this case, the trouble code of higher priority is displayed.
Trouble
code Trouble
Trouble content Mechanism Option Electricity FAX Supply
Main Sub detection
code code
A0 01 PCU PWB ROM error MFP ○
02 SCU PWB ROM error MFP ○
04 Scanner expansion PWB (ACU) (ACRE) ROM error MFP ○
10 Color profile error MFP ○
15 Incompatible DSK BOOT and program firmware MFP ○
17 Inconsistency between the UI data and the CPU firmware version MFP ○
20 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data version (MFP) MFP ○
21 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data version (PCU) PCU ○
22 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data version (SCU) SCU ○
C1 10 Main charger trouble (Monochrome) PCU ○
14 Main charger trouble (Color) PCU ○
C4 00 PTC trouble PCU ○
02 PTC heater open trouble PCU ○
03 PTC heater short trouble PCU ○
10 PTC no control PCU ○
20 Primary transfer output trouble PCU ○
E6 10 Shading error (Black correction) SCU ○
11 Shading error (White correction) SCU ○
14 CCD-ASIC error SCU ○
E7 01 MFP image data error MFP ○
02 HDD trouble when the mirroring kit is installed MFP ○
03 HDD trouble / Mirroring kit error MFP ○
04 HDD-ASIC error MFP ○
07 SD card error MFP ○
10 Shading error (Black correction) SCU ○
11 Shading error (White correction) SCU ○
14 CCD-ASIC error SCU ○
20 LSU laser detection error (K) PCU ○
21 LSU laser detection error (C) PCU ○
22 LSU laser detection error (M) PCU ○
23 LSU laser detection error (Y) PCU ○
24 LSU LD driver error (K) PCU ○
25 LSU LD driver error (C) PCU ○
26 LSU LD driver error (M) PCU ○
27 LSU LD driver error (Y) PCU ○
28 LSU - PCU connection error PCU ○
29 LSU ASIC frequency error PCU ○
42 Image data trouble (Scanner expansion PWB (ACRE) ASIC) MFP ○
46 Image data decode error (Scanner expansion PWB (ACRE) ASIC) MFP ○
47 Combination error between MFP PWB and ACRE firmware MFP ○
48 Scanner expansion PWB (ACRE) ASIC memory error MFP ○
49 Water Mark data error MFP ○
50 Combination error between PWB and firmware (PCU PWB detection) PCU ○
60 Combination error between PWB and firmware (MFPC PWB detection) MFP ○
61 Combination error between the MFPC PWB and the PCU PWB MFP ○
(MFPC PWB detection)
70 Scanner connection error SCU ○
80 MFP - SCU PWB communication error MFP ○
90 MFP - PCU PWB communication error MFP ○
91 FAX reception image data error MFP ○
92 Copy image data error MFP ○
93 Copy, image send, filing, print image data process error MFP ○
94 Image file data process error (when importing file data) MFP ○
96 MFPC PWB DIMM memory check error MFP ○
A0 LSU LD PWB EEPROM read/write error (K) PCU ○
A1 LSU LD PWB EEPROM read/write error (C) PCU ○
A2 LSU LD PWB EEPROM read/write error (M) PCU ○
A3 LSU LD PWB EEPROM read/write error (Y) PCU ○
A5 Installation error of HDD which was used in the mirroring kit MFP ○
A6 Compact flash memory trouble MFP ○
EE EC Automatic toner density adjustment error PCU ○
EL Automatic toner density adjustment error (Over toner) PCU ○
EU Automatic toner density adjustment error (Under toner) PCU ○
A0-01 PCU PWB ROM error A0-20 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data
version (MFP)
Detail MFP
Cause The firmware version-up is not completed properly by Detail MFP
interruption of the power during the version-up Cause Inconsistency between the MFP firmware version and
operation, etc. the EEPROM data version.
PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Check the combination of the firmware.
Check & Remedy Use SIM49-1 to perform the firmware version-up
procedure again.
Replace the PCU PWB.
A0-21 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data
version (PCU)
A0-02 SCU PWB ROM error
Detail PCU
Detail MFP Cause Inconsistency between the PCU firmware version and
Cause The firmware version-up is not completed properly by the EEPROM data version.
interruption of the power during the version-up Check & Remedy Check the combination of the firmware.
operation, etc.
SCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM49-1 to perform the firmware version-up A0-22 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data
procedure again. version (SCU)
Replace the SCU PWB.
Detail SCU
A0-04 Scanner expansion PWB (ACU) Cause Inconsistency between the SCU firmware version and
the EEPROM data version.
(ACRE) ROM error Check & Remedy Check the combination of the firmware.
Detail MFP
Cause Scanner expansion PWB (ACU) (ACRE) ROM data C1-10 Main charger trouble (Monochrome)
error.
An error occurs during firmware upgrading for some
reasons. Detail PCU
Check & Remedy Perform firmware upgrading again. Cause The main charger unit (BK) is not installed properly.
There is an abnormality in the main charger unit (BK).
The developer unit (KCMY) is not installed properly.
There is an abnormality in the developer unit
A0-10 Color profile error (KCMY).
Disconnection of the high voltage MC PWB
Detail MFP connector.
Cause The content of the color profile is abnormal. Breakage of the high voltage harness.
Combination error between the MFPC PWB firmware High voltage MC PWB trouble.
and the color profile PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Upgrade the firmware collectively. Check & Remedy Check the output of the main charger with SIM8-2.
Replace the MFPC PWB. Check the output of the developing bias with SIM8-1.
Check disconnection of the main charger./Replace.
Check disconnection of the developer unit./Replace.
A0-15 Incompatible DSK BOOT and pro- Check disconnection of the high voltage MC PWB
connector./Replace.
gram firmware Replace the high voltage MC PWB.
Replace the PCU PWB.
Detail MFP
Cause Installation of the normal firmware was performed
with a security kit enable. C1-14 Main charger trouble (Color)
Check & Remedy Stop installation of the normal firmware.
Detail PCU
Cause The main charger unit (CMY) is not installed properly.
A0-17 Inconsistency between the UI data There is an abnormality in the main charger unit
and the CPU firmware version (CMY).
Disconnection of the high voltage MC PWB
connector.
Detail MFP Breakage of the high voltage harness.
Cause Combination error between the UI contents data and High voltage MC PWB trouble.
the CPU UI firmware version. PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Install the firmware in the all-firmware version-up Check & Remedy Check the output of the main charger with SIM8-2.
mode. Check disconnection of the main charger./Replace.
Check disconnection of the high voltage MC PWB
connector./Replace.
Replace the high voltage MC PWB
Replace the PCU PWB.
Detail PCU
E7-27 LSU LD driver error (Y)
Cause Laser optical axis misalignment
Reduced laser power, lighting error, laser diode
trouble. Detail PCU
LSU harness, connector trouble Cause When lighting the LSU LD, initialization of the LD
LSU trouble driver is not performed normally.
Check & Remedy Use SIM61-1 to check the operation of the LSU. Harness/connector trouble between the LD PWB and
Check or replace the LSU control PWB. the LSU mother PWB.
Check connection of the LSU harness. LD PWB trouble.
Replace the LSU. LSU mother PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM61-1 to check the operation of the LSU.
Check the LSU, and replace if necessary.
E7-24 LSU LD driver error (K) Check the LSU mother PWB, and replace if
necessary.
Check connection of the harness/connector between
Detail PCU the LD PWB and the LSU mother PWB.
Cause When lighting the LSU LD, initialization of the LD
driver is not performed normally.
Harness/connector trouble between the LD PWB and E7-28 LSU - PCU connection error
the LSU mother PWB.
LD PWB trouble.
LSU mother PWB trouble. Detail PCU
Check & Remedy Use SIM61-1 to check the operation of the LSU. Cause Communication error between the CPU in the PCU
Check the LSU, and replace if necessary. PWB and the LSU control ASIC.
Check the LSU mother PWB, and replace if Improper connection of the communication connector
necessary. between the PCU PWB and the LSU control PWB
Check connection of the harness/connector between (interface PWB).
the LD PWB and the LSU mother PWB. Harness trouble between the PCU PWB and the LSU
control PWB (interface PWB)
PCU PWB trouble.
E7-25 LSU LD driver error (C) LSU control PWB trouble.
LSU trouble.
LSU mother PWB trouble.
Detail PCU Check & Remedy Check connection of the connector and the harness
Cause When lighting the LSU LD, initialization of the LD between the PCU PWB and the LSU control PWB
driver is not performed normally. (interface PWB).
Harness/connector trouble between the LD PWB and Replace the LSU mother PWB.
the LSU mother PWB. Replace the PCU PWB.
LD PWB trouble. Replace the LSU.
LSU mother PWB trouble. Replace the LSU control PWB.
Check & Remedy Use SIM61-1 to check the operation of the LSU.
Check the LSU, and replace if necessary.
Check the LSU mother PWB, and replace if E7-29 LSU ASIC frequency error
necessary.
Check connection of the harness/connector between
the LD PWB and the LSU mother PWB. Detail PCU
Cause Oscillation abnormality of the external oscillator and
the internal oscillating circuit used in the LSU ASIC.
LSU ASIC abnormality on the LSU ASIC PWB.
Check & Remedy Replace the LSU control PWB.
Detail MFP
E7-49 Water Mark data error Cause PCU PWB - MFPC PWB connection trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Detail MFP MFPC PWB trouble.
Cause Watermark data trouble. Check & Remedy Check connection of the PCU PWB and the MFPC
HDD trouble. PWB.
Check & Remedy Use SIM49-5 to upload the watermark data. Check the ground.
Replace the HDD. Replace the PCU PWB.
Replace the MFPC PWB.
Detail PCU
E7-93 Copy, image send, filing, print image Cause LD PWB EEPROM trouble.
data process error LSU mother PWB trouble.
Connector/harness trouble between the LD PWB and
the LSU mother PWB.
Detail MFP
Connector/harness trouble between the PCU PWB
Cause Image data process abnormality
and the LSU mother PWB.
HDD trouble
Check & Remedy Check the LSU, and replace if necessary.
Image compression data corruption
Check the LSU mother PWB, and replace if
MFPC PWB trouble
necessary.
DIMM memory trouble or contact error
Check the connector/harness between the LD PWB
Check & Remedy Use SIM60-01 to check the read/write operations of
and the LSU mother PWB, and replace if necessary.
the memory.
Check the connector/harness between the PCU PWB
Replace the HDD.
and the LSU mother PWB, and replace if necessary.
Replace the MFPC PWB.
Replace the LSU.
Replace or check installation of the DIMM memory.
Detail PCU
Cause LD PWB EEPROM trouble.
LSU mother PWB trouble.
Connector/harness trouble between the LD PWB and
the LSU mother PWB.
Connector/harness trouble between the PCU PWB
and the LSU mother PWB.
Check & Remedy Check the LSU, and replace if necessary.
Check the LSU mother PWB, and replace if
necessary.
Check the connector/harness between the LD PWB
and the LSU mother PWB, and replace if necessary.
Check the connector/harness between the PCU PWB
and the LSU mother PWB, and replace if necessary.
Replace the LSU.
Detail PCU
Cause LD PWB EEPROM trouble. F1-00 Finisher - PCU PWB communication
LSU mother PWB trouble.
Connector/harness trouble between the LD PWB and error
the LSU mother PWB.
Connector/harness trouble between the PCU PWB Detail PCU
and the LSU mother PWB. Cause Connection trouble of the connector and the harness
Check & Remedy Check the LSU, and replace if necessary. between the finisher and the PCU PWB.
Check the LSU mother PWB, and replace if Finisher control PWB trouble.
necessary. PCU PWB trouble.
Check the connector/harness between the LD PWB Check & Remedy Check the connector and the harness between the
and the LSU mother PWB, and replace if necessary. finisher and the PCU PWB.
Check the connector/harness between the PCU PWB Replace the finisher control PWB.
and the LSU mother PWB, and replace if necessary. Replace the PCU PWB.
Replace the LSU.
Detail PCU
EE-EC Automatic toner density adjustment Cause Stapler shift motor trouble.
error Finisher control PWB trouble.
Home position sensor trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the stapler shift
Detail PCU motor.
Cause Toner density sensor trouble. Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the home
Developing unit trouble. position sensor.
PCU PWB trouble. Replace the stapler shift motor.
Check & Remedy Replace the toner density sensor. Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Replace the developing unit. Replace the home position sensor.
Replace the PCU PWB. Replace the finisher control PWB.
Detail PCU
Cause Saddle motor trouble. F2-23 Discharge lamp trouble (C)
Finisher control PWB trouble.
Home position sensor trouble.
Harness and connector connection trouble. Detail PCU
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the saddle Cause Contact trouble between the discharge lamp PWB (C)
motor. and the PCU PWB.
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor. Discharge lamp PWB (C) trouble.
Turn OFF/ON the power. PCU PWB trouble.
Replace the control PWB. Check & Remedy Replace the discharge lamp PWB (C).
Replace the sensor. Check the harness and the connector.
Replace the PCU PWB.
Detail PCU
F2-43 Toner density sensor trouble (Y)
Cause Contact trouble between the discharge lamp PWB (Y)
and the PCU PWB. Detail PCU
Discharge lamp PWB (Y) trouble. Cause Toner density sensor output abnormality.
PCU PWB trouble. Sensor connector and harness connection trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the discharge lamp PWB (Y). Developing unit trouble.
Check the harness and the connector. PCU PWB trouble.
Replace the PCU PWB. Check & Remedy Replace the toner density sensor.
Check connection of the sensor connector and the
harness.
F2-39 Process thermistor trouble Replace the developing unit.
Replace the PCU PWB.
Detail PCU
Cause Process thermistor trouble. F2-45 Color image density sensor trouble
Process thermistor harness connection trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the process thermistor. Detail PCU
Check connection of the process thermistor harness Cause Color image density sensor sensitivity adjustment
and the connector. trouble.
Replace the PCU PWB. Color image density sensor trouble.
Sensor harness and connector connection trouble.
Image density sensor dirt.
F2-40 Toner density sensor trouble (K) Calibration plate dirt.
Transfer unit lift operation trouble
PCU PWB trouble.
Detail PCU Check & Remedy Replace the color image density sensor.
Cause Toner density sensor output abnormality. Check connection of the sensor harness and the
Sensor connector and harness connection trouble. connector.
Developing unit trouble. Clean the image density sensor.
PCU PWB trouble. Replace the calibration plate.
Check & Remedy Replace the toner density sensor. Repair the transfer unit lift mechanism.
Check connection of the sensor connector and the Replace the PCU PWB.
harness. Use SIM44-13 to perform the sensitivity adjustment of
Replace the developing unit. the process control sensor.
Replace the PCU PWB.
Detail PCU
Cause An improper toner cartridge is inserted. (The main
unit detects a toner cartridge of a different
specification.)
Toner cartridge trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the toner cartridge.
Replace the PCU PWB.
F2-93 High density process control high F6-01 FAX control PWB EEPROM read/write
voltage error (M) error
Section FAX
Detail PCU
Case 1 Cause FAX control PWB EEPROM trouble
Cause ?
Check Check that no trouble occurs after replacement of
Check & Remedy ?
and EEPROM. Execute the memory check of SIM66-3 to
Remedy insure that EEPROM can be accessed.
Case 2 Cause FAX control PWB EEPROM access circuit trouble
F2-94 High density process control high
Check Replace the FAX control PWB.
voltage error (Y) and
Remedy
Detail PCU
Cause ?
Check & Remedy ?
F6-04 FAX MODEM operation trouble
Section FAX
F3-12 Paper feed tray 1 lift operation trouble Case 1 Cause FAX MODEM chip operation trouble.
Check Replace the FAX control PWB.
Detail PCU and
remedy
Cause LUD1 is not turned ON within the specified time.
CLUD1 sensor trouble. Case 2 Cause The FAX MODEM chip cannot be accessed.
Paper feed tray 1 lift unit trouble. Check Replace the FAX control PWB.
PCU PWB trouble. and
Sensor harness and connector connection trouble Remedy
Check & Remedy Check connection of the harness and the connector
of LUD1.
Replace the lift-up unit.
Replace the PCU PWB.
F6-30 FAX 1-chip microprocessor access H2-02 Thermistor open trouble (TH_US)
error (FAX detection)
Detail PCU
Section FAX Cause Thermistor trouble
Case 1 Cause Program writing trouble to the 1-chip microprocessor, PCU PWB trouble
or no program data written. Thermistor connector and harness connection trouble
Check Use SIM66-42 to rewrite the 1-chip microprocessor Fusing section connector connection trouble
and program. Fusing unit not installed
Remedy Check & Remedy Use SIM44-14 to check the state of the thermistor.
Case 2 Cause FAX 1-chip microprocessor circuit trouble. Replace the thermistor.
Check Replace the FAX control PWB. Replace the PCU PWB.
and Check connection of the thermistor connector and the
Remedy harness.
Check the connector in the fusing section.
Section MFP
Case 1 Cause Incompatibility between the destination information H3-00 Fusing section high temperature
written into the FAX control PWB EEPROM and that
in the main machine (set with SIM26-6) trouble (TH_UM)
Check 1) Check the destination of the FAX control PWB.
and 2) Check the destination of the machine. (SIM26-6) Detail PCU
Remedy Cause The fusing temperature exceeds the specified level.
Thermistor trouble
PCU PWB trouble
H2-00 Thermistor open trouble Thermistor connector and harness connection trouble
(TH_UM_AD2) HL control PWB trouble
Check & Remedy Use SIM44-14 to check the state of the thermistor.
Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the
Detail PCU heater lamp.
Cause Thermistor trouble Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.
PCU PWB trouble Replace the thermistor.
Thermistor connector and harness connection trouble Replace the PCU PWB.
Fusing section connector connection trouble Check connection of the thermistor connector and the
Fusing unit not installed harness.
Check & Remedy Use SIM44-14 to check the state of the thermistor. Replace the HL control PWB.
Replace the thermistor.
Replace the PCU PWB.
Check connection of the thermistor connector and the
harness.
Check the connector in the fusing section.
Detail PCU
Cause Thermistor trouble. L4-03 Fusing motor trouble
Heater lamp trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Thermostat trouble. Trouble content The motor lock signal is detected during rotation of
Connector, harness connection trouble. the fusing motor.
HL control PWB trouble. Detail PCU
Power unit trouble. Cause Fusing motor trouble
Check & Remedy Replace the thermistor. Fusing motor harness and connector connection
Replace the heater lamp. trouble
Replace the PCU PWB. PCU PWB trouble
Replace the thermostat. Check & Remedy Use SIM6-1 to check the operation of the fusing
Check connection of the connector and the harness. motor.
Replace the HL control PWB. Replace the Fusing motor.
Replace the power unit. Check connection of the fusing motor harness and
Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the the connection.
heater lamp. Replace the PCU PWB.
Detail MFP
L4-06 Transfer unit lift trouble
Cause Fan motor trouble.
MFP PWB trouble.Harness and connector
Detail PCU connection trouble.
Cause Transfer unit position sensor trouble PCU PWB trouble
Dirt on the transfer unit position sensor. Check & Remedy Use SIM6-2 to check the operation of the fan motor.
PCU PWB trouble Replace the fan motor.
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness. Replace the MFP PWB.
Transfer unit lift mechanism trouble Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Primary transfer belt unit is not installed. Replace the PCU PWB.
Check & Remedy Use SIM6-3 to check the separating operation of the
transfer unit.
Install the primary transfer belt unit. L4-31 Paper exit cooling fan trouble
Replace the transfer unit position sensor.
Clean the transfer unit position sensor.
Replace the PCU PWB. Detail PCU
Check connection of the connector and the harness. Cause Paper exit cooling fan trouble.
Repair the transfer unit lift mechanism. PCU PWB trouble
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the connectors and the harness.
L4-07 Transfer belt motor trouble Use SIM6-2 to check the rotating operation of the fan.
Replace the paper exit cooling fan.
Replace the PCU PWB.
Detail PCU
Cause The motor lock signal is detected during rotation of
the transfer belt motor. L4-32 Power source cooling fan trouble
Transfer belt motor trouble
Transfer belt motor harness and connector
connection trouble Detail PCU
PCU PWB trouble Cause Power cooling fan trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM25-1 to check the operation of the transfer PCU PWB trouble.
belt motor. Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
Check the transfer belt motor, and replace if Check & Remedy Use SIM6-2 to check that the fan is actually rotating.
necessary. Replace the power cooling fan.
Check connection of the harness and connectors of Replace the PCU PWB.
the transfer belt motor, and replace if necessary. Check connection of the connectors and the harness.
Check the PCU PWB, and replace if necessary.
L4-45 Toner cooling fan trouble L8-01 Full wave signal detection error
(Toner cooling fan 1, 2)
Detail PCU
Detail PCU Cause PCU PWB trouble.
Power unit trouble.
Cause When the toner cooling fan is operated, the fan
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
operation signal is not detected within the specified
time. Check & Remedy Replace the PCU PWB.
Toner cooling fan trouble. Replace the power unit.
PCU PWB trouble. Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Connection trouble of the connector and the
harness.
Check & Remedy After turning ON the power, check to confirm that the L8-02 Full wave signal error
fan is rotating.
Replace the toner cooling fan. Detail PCU
Replace the PCU PWB.
Cause An abnormality in the full wave signal frequency is
Check connection of the connector and the harness.
detected.
(The frequency is detected as 65Hz or above, or
45Hz or less.)
L4-50 Process fan trouble PCU PWB trouble.
Power unit trouble.
Detail PCU Connection trouble of the connector and the
Cause Process fan trouble. harness.
PCU PWB trouble. Power frequency, waveform abnormality.
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness. Check & Remedy Replace the PCU PWB.
Check & Remedy Check that the fan is rotating after turning ON the Replace the power unit.
power. Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Replace the process fan. Check the power waveform.
Replace the PCU PWB.
Check connection of the connector and the harness.
L8-20 Communication error of MFPC PWB/
LSU mother board
L4-56 Rear cooling fan trouble
Detail MFP
Detail PCU Cause LSU mother board PWB - MFPC PWB connection
Cause The fan operation signal is not detected within the trouble.
specified time in the rear cooling fan operation. MFPC PWB trouble.
Rear cooling fan trouble. LSU mother board trouble.
PCU PWB trouble. Check & Remedy Check connection between the LSU mother board
Connection trouble of the connector and the PWB and the MFPC PWB.
harness. Check the ground of the main unit.
Check & Remedy Check that the fan is rotating after turning ON the Replace the MFPC PWB.
power. Replace the LSU mother board.
Replace the rear cooling fan.
Replace the PCU PWB.
Check connection of the connector and the harness.
U2-41 HDD system storage data area error U2-80 SCU PWB EEPROM read/write error
Detail SCU
Detail MFP
Cause SCU PWB EEPROM trouble
Cause A file error occurs in the HDD system saved data
SCU PWB trouble
area, disabling backup of the saved file of the
SCU PWB EEPROM socket connection trouble
machine adjustment values in the SD card.
HDD trouble Check & Remedy Replace the SCU PWB EEPROM.
MFPC PWB trouble Replace the SCU PWB.
Check connection of the SCU PWB EEPROM socket.
Check & Remedy Check the HDD, and replace if necessary.
Check the SIM adjustment value of the following
Check the MFPC PWB, and replace if necessary.
items, and adjust again if they are improper.
When replacing the HDD and the MFPC PWB, refer
? Scanner-related adjustments
to the chapter of "Necessary works and procedures
? Touch panel-related adjustments
of HDD and MFPC PWB replacement."
Use SIM16 to cancel the trouble.
U6-22 LCC 24V power trouble U9-01 Multi touch panel error
The lower digit of the added code indicates the kind and the content of the abnormality or the result of the automatic memory check executed
when the abnormality is detected.
: Added code indicating that the memory and its peripheral must be focused for check in case of an error.
O: Added code indicating that doubtful sections are in a wider range such as the memory, PWB's, HDD, etc.
- : Added code without generating
O O O O
LED No D25/D24/D23/D22
3 / 2 / 1 / 0
1. Outline
A. Cases where update is required C. Update procedures and kinds of firmware
ROM update is required in the following cases: There are following methods of update of the firmware.
1) When there is a necessity to upgrade the performance. 1) Update method using SIM 49-1
2) When installing a new spare part ROM for repair to the 2) Update method using FTP
machine. 3) Update method using the Web page
3) When installing a new spare parts PWB unit (with ROM) for 4) Update method using the CN update function (There are three
repair to the machine. methods.)
4) When there is a trouble in the ROM program and it must be Normally, one of 1) - 3) is used to update the firmware.
repaired.
When any one of 1) - 3) is interrupted by an error such as
B. Notes for update power-off during updating, etc., and when retries of these
methods are failed, the method 4) is employed.
(1) Relationship between each ROM and update Firmware types
Before execution of ROM update, check combinations with ROM’s The firmware type can be displayed by SIM22-5.
installed in the other PWB’s including options. Some combinations
Use SIM22-5 to check the firmware type.
of each ROM’s versions may cause malfunctions of the machine.
2. Update procedure
A. Update method using SIM 49-1
For the update, connect the media or USB memory to the USB port that exists in the main body, and select the firmware data in the media or
USB memory by simulation screen in the main unit.
Media
Firmware.sfu Adapter
USB Host
Firmware.sfu +
*1:
- Store the firmware data (xxx .sfu) to the media or USB memory beforehand.
- The media used for the update must have an enough capacity for storing the firmware data.
- The USB memory equipped with the security (secure) function cannot be used.
),50:$5(83'$7(>PHGLDXVELFXVIX@
,&80 0$,1 ˖&855(1783'$7('72 .(<
,&80 68% ˖&855(1783'$7('72
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( (;,7 .(<
%$&. &/($5
,&80 26 ˖&855(1783'$7('72
),50:$5(83'$7(>PHGLDXVE@
.(< ,&80 &1 ˖&855(1783'$7('72
',5!)2/'(5 ),/(
˖&855(1783'$7('72 .(<
.(<
.(<
,&8 0$,1
.(<
.(<
.(<
,&8 %2270 ˖&855(1783'$7('72
.(<
.(<
.(<
,&8 68% ˖&855(1783'$7('72
.(<
.(<
.(<
/$1*8$*( ˖&855(1783'$7('72
.(< .(<
.(<
6/,67 ˖&855(1783'$7('72
.(<
.(<
.(<
˖&855(1783'$7('72
(26$
.(<
0212
&2/25
$// $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87( &/26(
.(< .(<
.(<
.(<
0212 &2/25
The progress is displayed on right side of "FIRMWARE
UPDATE" title by 20 steps.
* The number of key changes according to the number of the
sfu file in the media or USB memory inserted. ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
* If the media or USB memory was not inserted when entry to ),50:$5(83'$7(
6 ( .(<
screen. Insert the media or USB memory and push the [OK] .(<
.(<
.(<
key to open the file. If the media have not been inserted and
.(<
.(<
.(<
[OK] key is pushed, the next screen does not appear and the
screen waits the entry. Conversely, if the media or USB .(<
.(<
.(<
memory is pulled out on the file list screen, the error is .(< .(<
.(<
/$1*8$*( ˖&855(1783'$7('72
.(<
.(<
.(<
.(< .(<
.(<
6/,67 ˖&855(1783'$7('72
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( Press [OK] key. (The machine is rebooted.)
),50:$5(83'$7(>PHGLDXVELFXVIX@
,&80 0$,1 ˖&855(1783'$7('72 .(< Go to SIM22-05 and confirm the firmware has upgraded suc-
,&80 68% ˖&855(1783'$7('72
(;,7 .(<
%$&. &/($5 cessfully.
,&80 26 ˖&855(1783'$7('72
,&80 &1 ˖&855(1783'$7('72 7) If the update is not normal completion, following screen is dis-
.(<
.(<
.(<
,&80 %227 ˖&855(1783'$7('72
played.
,&80 %,26 ˖&855(1783'$7('72
˖&855(1783'$7('72 .(<
.(<
.(<
,&8 0$,1
Machine 1 Machine 3
10.36.112.83 10.36.112.84
Firmware.sfu
Machine 2 Machine 4
FTP Client
10.36.101.52 10.36.101.53
C. Firmware update using the Web page 4) When the firmware update is finished, "Firmware Update com-
An Web browser (service technician’s Web page) is used to update pleted. Please reboot the MFP." appears. Pressing the
[Reboot] key, the machine will restart to complete the update.
the firmware.
The browser will shift to the following screen.
1) Start the Web browser on a PC and enter the specified URL. A
special firmware upgrade page appears.
2) Click the "Update of Firmware" key in the Web page. Click the
[Browse] key and select the firmware for the update.
MX-XXXX
3) After selecting the file, click the [Submit] key to send the firm-
ware to the machine. Update processing begins. While pro-
cessing takes place, "Firmware Update, now processing..."
appears.
B. Counter reset
When a part or consumable part is replaced with new one in the
maintenance, execute SIM24 to reset the following counters.
1) Maintenance counter
2) Each consumable part counter
3) Each unit counter
4) Trouble counter, JAM counter
D. Confirmation, adjustment
After completion of part replacement and cleaning, etc, execute the following procedures.
Items necessary to execute
MX-5141N MAINTENANCE 9 – 1
2. Display of maintenance execution timing
The message of maintenance execution timing is displayed when each counter reaches the set value. The relations between the messages
and the counters are shown below.
A. Maintenance counter
Display condition
Print JOB
Display content SIM26-38-A
Counter name Counter value Enable/Disable
set value
Maintenance required. Code: TA 0 (Print continue) Maintenance counter When the SIM21-1 set value is reached. Enable
1 (Print stop) (Total) When 90% of the SIM21-1 set value is reached.
Maintenance required. Code: TA 1 (Print stop) When the SIM21-1 set value is reached. Disable
Maintenance required. Code: CA 0 (Print continue) Maintenance counter When the SIM21-1 set value is reached. Enable
1 (Print stop) (Color) When 90% of the SIM21-1 set value is reached.
Maintenance required. Code: CA 1 (Print stop) When the SIM21-1 set value is reached. Disable
Maintenance required. Code: AA 0 (Print continue) Both of total and color When the SIM21-1 set value is reached. Enable
1 (Print stop) When 90% of the SIM21-1 set value is reached.
Maintenance required. Code: AA 1 (Print stop) When the SIM21-1 set value is reached. Disable
* After execution of maintenance, be sure to execute SIM24-4 to clear the maintenance counter (Total) and the maintenance counter (Color).
* After execution of the maintenance, execute SIM24-4 to clear the primary transfer unit print counter, the accumulated number of rotations
counter, and the use day counter.
* After execution of the maintenance, execute SIM24-4 to clear the secondary transfer print counter, the accumulated number of rotations
counter, and the use day counter.
D. Fusing unit
Display condition Print JOB
Display content
SIM26-38-A set value Counter name Counter value Enable/Disable
Maintenance required.: FK1 0 (Print continue) Fusing belt print counter When 300K is reached. Enable
1 (Print stop)
Maintenance required.: FK2 0 (Print continue) Pressure roller print counter Enable
1 (Print stop)
Maintenance required.: FK3 0 (Print continue) Fusing web print counter Enable
1 (Print stop)
* After execution of the maintenance, execute SIM24-4 to clear the fusing roller counter, the fusing belt counter, the fusing web print counter,
the accumulated rotation number counter, and the use day counter.
E. OPC drum
Display condition
Print JOB
Display content SIM26-38-A
Counter name Counter value Enable/Disable
set value
Maintenance required.: DK 0 (Print continue) OPC drum print counter (K) or 840K is reached Enable
1 (Print stop) OPC drum accumulated rotation number counter (K) or 200K is reached
Maintenance required.: D (C/M/Y) 0 (Print continue) OPC drum print counter (C/M/Y) or 840K is reached
1 (Print stop) OPC drum accumulated rotation number counter (C/M/Y) or 160K is reached
* After execution of the maintenance, execute SIM24-4 to clear the OPC drum print counter, the accumulated number of rotations counter, and
the use day counter.
MX-5141N MAINTENANCE 9 – 2
F. Developer
Display condition
Print JOB
Display content SIM26-38-A
Counter name Counter value Enable/Disable
set value
Maintenance required.: VK 0 (Print continue) Developer print counter (K) or 840K is reached Enable
1 (Print stop) DV unit accumulated number of rotations (K) or 200K is reached
Maintenance required.: V (C/M/Y) 0 (Print continue) Developer print counter (C/M/Y) or 840K is reached
1 (Print stop) DV unit accumulated number of rotations (C/M/Y) or 160K is reached
* After execution of the maintenance, execute SIM24-4 to clear the developer print counter, the accumulated number of rotations counter, and
the use day counter.
* When the waste toner box is replaced with an empty one, the message disappears.
H. Toner
Display condition
Print JOB
Display content SIM26-38-A
Counter name Counter value Enable/Disable
set value
(K/C/M/Y) Prepare a toner No relation Toner motor rotation time Specified time of rotations Enable
(Near near end)
(K/C/M/Y) Toner supply is low No relation Toner supply amount is decreasing. ATC sensor output variation Enable
(Near end)
Replace the toner cartridge. (K) 0 (Print continue) The pixel count from near end Specified pixel count (Disable for a JOB which
(End) 1 (Print stop) reaches the specified value. requires K toner)
Replace the toner cartridge. 0 (Print continue) The pixel count from near end Specified pixel count Enable for monochrome,
(C/M/Y) (End) 1 (Print stop) reaches the specified value. Disable for color
3. Maintenance list
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) : Clean : Replace : Adjust ✩: Lubricate
Color items
Section Unit name Part name When 840 K 840 K 840 K 840 K 840 K Remark
name calling rotation rotation rotation rotation rotation
Developing Developing Unit Developer × ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
section (monochrome) DV blade / inner blade × × × × × ×
DV side seal F/R × × × × × × Maximum printed number 200K
Toner filter × × × × × ×
Bias pin, Connector × × × × × ×
Developing Unit Developer × ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
(color) DV blade / Inner blade × × × × × ×
DV side seal F/R × × × × × × Maximum printed number 160K
Toner filter × × × × × ×
Bias pin, Connector × × × × × ×
OPC drum OPC drum unit Drum × ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
section (monochrome) Cleaning blade × ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
MC unit × ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
Side seal F/R × × × × × × Maximum printed number 200K
Toner reception blade × × × × × ×
MC cleaner roller × ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
Waste toner box × × × × × ×
OPC drum unit Drum × ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
(color) Cleaning blade × ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
MC unit × ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
Side seal F/R × × × × × × Maximum printed number 160K
Toner reception blade × × × × × ×
MC cleaner roller × ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
Waste toner box × × × × × ×
MX-5141N MAINTENANCE 9 – 3
Section Unit Part name When 150 300 450 600 750 900 1050 1200 1350 1500 Remark
name name calling K K K K K K K K K K
RSPF RSPF Paper feed Replace according to SPF paper feed counter
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
section unit roller value at 100K or after 1 year use.
Pickup roller ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ When replacing the paper feed roller, apply
Separation grease to the paper feed shaft.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ GP-501MR
roller
Transport
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
rollers
Scanning
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
plate
Replace according to SPF paper feed counter
Torque limiter × × × × × × × × × × ×
value at 400K or 2 years use.
Discharge
× × × × × × × × × × ×
brush
OC mat ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Belts × × × × × × × × × × ×
DSPF DSPF Paper feed
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
section unit roller Replace according to SPF paper feed
Pickup roller ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ counter value at 100K or after 1 year
Separation use.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
roller
Transport
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
rollers
Discharge
× × × × × × × × × × ×
brush
Replace according to SPF paper feed counter
Torque limiter × × × × × × × × × × ×
value at 800K
No.1
scanning ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
plate
No.2
scanning
section, ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
scanning
glass
No.2
scanning
section, white ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
reference
glass
Mirror ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Lens/CCD ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Scanner
lamp/ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Blow air to clean the LED section
Reflector
OC mat ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
When checking, apply grease (UKOG-
Gears × × × × × × × × × × ×
0299FCZZ) to the necessary positions
Belts × × × × × × × × × × ×
Scanner Scanne Mirror/Lens/
section r unit Reflector/ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
CCD
Table glass/
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
SPF glass
Scanner lamp ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Blow air to clean the LED section
Rails ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
Drive belt /
× × × × × × × × × × ×
drive wire
Sensors × × × × × × × × × × ×
MX-5141N MAINTENANCE 9 – 4
Section Unit Part name When 150 300 450 600 750 900 1050 1200 1350 1500 Remark
name name calling K K K K K K K K K K
Transfer Primary Primary
- × ▲ × ▲ × ▲ × ▲ × ▲
section transfer transfer belt
unit Primary
Replace at every 300K or 2 years use.
transfer
- × ▲ × ▲ × ▲ × ▲ × ▲
cleaning
blade
Primary
- × × × × × × × × × ×
transfer roller
Primary Replace as needed
transfer belt - × × × × × × × × × ×
drive gear
Primary
transfer belt - × ○ × ○ × ○ × ○ × ○
drive roller
Primary
transfer belt - × ○ × ○ × ○ × ○ × ○
follower roller
Primary
transfer belt - × ○ × ○ × ○ × ○ × ○
tension roller
Belt CL brush - × ○ × ○ × ○ × ○ × ○
PTC backup
- × ○ × ○ × ○ × ○ × ○
roller
Transfer
separation - × × × × × × × × × ×
pawl
Transfer
cleaner seal - × × × × × × × × × × Replace as needed
F/R
Primary
transfer toner - × × × × × × × × × ×
reception seal
Second Secondary Replace at every 300K or 2 years use.
- × ▲ × ▲ × ▲ × ▲ × ▲
ary transfer belt Never use alcohol or solvents for cleaning.
transfer Secondary
unit - × × × × × × × × × ×
transfer roller
Secondary Replace as needed
transfer idle - × × × × × × × × × ×
gear
Secondary
transfer belt - × ○ × ○ × ○ × ○ × ○
drive roller
Secondary
transfer belt - × ○ × ○ × ○ × ○ × ○
follower roller
Secondary
transfer idle - × ○ × ○ × ○ × ○ × ○
shaft
Secondary
transfer - × × × × × × × × × × Replace as needed
backup blade
LSU Dust-proof
LSU ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Use the LSU cleaning rod.
section glass
Cleaning
Other × ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
base
Paper Manual Paper pickup
× ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
feed paper roller
section feed / Paper feed Replace according to each paper feed
Tray × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
roller counter value at 100K or 1 year use.
paper Separation
feed × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
roller
unit Torque limiter × × × × × × × × × × ×
Transport ✕
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
rollers
Sensors ✕ For the reflection-type sensor, the other side
× × × × × × × × × ×
must be also cleaned.
MX-5141N MAINTENANCE 9 – 5
Section Unit Part name When 150 300 450 600 750 900 1050 1200 1350 1500 Remark
name name calling K K K K K K K K K K
Transport, Transpo PS follower ✕ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Reverse, rt, roller
Paper exit Reverse
Transport ✕ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
section , Paper
exit unit rollers
Discharge ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
brush
Sensors ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ For the reflection-type sensor, the other side
must be also cleaned.
Paper dust ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
removing unit
Shifter PG ✕ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Transport ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
paper guides
Gears Apply to the specified position when checking
- × × × × × × × × × ×
(Grease) FLOIL G-313S
Drive Drive Shaft earth
section unit sections Apply to the specified position when checking
- × × × × × × × × × ×
(Conduction FLOIL GE-676
grease)
Belts - × × × × × × × × × ×
Sensors - × × × × × × × × × ×
Fusing Fusing Fusing belt ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
section unit Fusing roller ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Apply grease to the shaft section when
Pressure ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
replacing (JFE552)
roller
Separation ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
plate
Lower ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ Clean as needed
separation
pawl
Meandering- ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
prevention
collar
Heating roller ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Fusing roller ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
bearing
Heating roller ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
bearing
Pressure ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
roller bearing
Heat- ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
insulation
Replace as needed
bush
Pressure ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
roller gear
Main ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
thermistor
Sub ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
thermistor
Lower ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
thermistor
Sensors ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Fusing paper ✕ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
exit roller
Gears ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩
Web roller ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ Apply grease to the specified position.
Web guide ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ Replace together with the fusing belt.
shaft
Web pressure ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
roller
Web pressure ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
roller bearing
Paper guides ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Sensors ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Other section Ozone filter × ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Left cabinet
× ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
filter
MX-5141N MAINTENANCE 9 – 6
4. Details
A. RSPF section
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) O: Clean : Replace : Adjust ✩: Lubricate
No. Part name When 150 300 450 600 750 900 1050 1200 1350 1500 Remark
calling K K K K K K K K K K
1 Paper feed roller ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Replace according to SPF paper feed counter value at
2 Pickup roller ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
100K or after 1 year use.
3 Separation roller ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
4 Transport rollers ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
5 Scanning plate ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Replace according to SPF paper feed counter value at
Torque limiter × × × × × × × × × × ×
6 400K or 2 years use.
7 Discharge brush × × × × × × × × × × ×
8 OC mat ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
9 Belts × × × × × × × × × × ×
9 9
6
2
6
1
3
4
5
4
4
7
MX-5141N MAINTENANCE 9 – 7
(1) Pickup roller, paper feed roller replacement 2) Disengage the pawl, and remove the holder. Remove the sep-
1) Open the paper feed unit. aration roller.
Maintenance: Replace at every 100K of each paper feed coun-
ter.
MX-5141N MAINTENANCE 9 – 8
2 ‘13/Nov
B. DSPF section
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) O: Clean : Replace : Adjust ✩: Lubricate
No Part name When 150 300 450 600 750 900 1050 1200 1350 1500 Remark
. calling K K K K K K K K K K
1 Paper feed roller ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 2
Replace according to SPF paper feed counter
2 Pickup roller ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
value at 100K or 1 year use.
3 Separation roller ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
4 Transport rollers ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
5 Discharge brush × × × × × × × × × × ×
Replace according to SPF paper feed counter
6 Torque limiter × × × × × × × × × × ×
value at 800K
7 No.1 scanning plate ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
No.2 scanning
8 section, scanning ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
glass
No.2 scanning
9 section, white ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
reference glass
10 Mirror ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
11 Lens/CCD ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Scanner lamp/
12 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Blow air to clean the LED section
Reflector
13 OC mat ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
When checking, apply grease (UKOG-
14 Gears × × × × × × × × × × ×
0299FCZZ) to the necessary positions
15 Belts × × × × × × × × × × ×
1
6
4 2
3
4
7
4 13
4
4
5
10
14
11 12
12 15
8
10 14
15
9
MX-5141N MAINTENANCE 9 – 9
1) Open the upper door. Remove the screw. Remove the paper 5) Remove the screw, and remove the paper feed PG lower
feed cover. cover.
7) Open the DSPF unit, and clean the No.1 scanning plate.
Maintenance: Clean at every 150K.
2
8) Open the lower door.
MX-5141N MAINTENANCE 9 – 10
9) Remove the cleaner. 13) Remove the pawl, and remove the front cabinet.
2 3
14) Remove the screw. Remove the pawl. Remove the rear cabi-
10) Use the cleaner to clean the scanning glass (surface).
net.
Maintenance: Clean at every 150K.
2
15) Open the DSPF unit, and remove the OC mat from the left
11) Use the cleaner to clean the white reference glass. edge.
Maintenance: Clean at every 150K. Maintenance: Clean at every 150K.
12) Close the DSPF unit. Open the upper door, and remove the * When assembling, place the OC mat on the document table
screw. to fit with the reference and close the DSPF unit.
MX-5141N MAINTENANCE 9 – 11
16) Remove the connector from the DSPF CL inverter PWB. 20) Remove the screw, and remove the lamp mounting plate.
17) Remove the screw, and remove the intersecting point plate.
Remove the lower door.
18) Remove the screw, and remove the intersecting point plate.
Remove the white reference plate.
22) Remove the screw, and remove the reflector and the DSPF
copy lamp.
Maintenance: Clean at every 150K.
19) Remove the screw, and remove the scanning section cover.
Remove the screw, and remove the lamp unit.
2
3
MX-5141N MAINTENANCE 9 – 12
27) Remove the pawl, and remove the lens cover.
23) Remove the screw, and remove the transport PG upper.
1 b
2
a
29) Remove the screw, and remove the mirror base cover.
25) Remove the step screw, and remove the screw. Remove the
optical fixing plate. Remove the optical unit.
2
3
MX-5141N MAINTENANCE 9 – 13
C.Scanner section
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) O: Clean : Replace : Adjust ✩: Lubricate
No. Part name When 150 300 450 600 750 900 1050 1200 1350 1500 Remark
calling K K K K K K K K K K
1 Mirror/Lens/Reflector/CCD ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
2 Table glass/SPF glass ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
3 Scanner lamp ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Blow air to clean the LED section
4 Rails ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆ ☆
5 Drive belt /drive wire × × × × × × × × × × ×
6 Sensors × × × × × × × × × × ×
MX-5141N MAINTENANCE 9 – 14
D. Developing section
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) O: Clean : Replace : Adjust ✩: Lubricate
Color items
No. Part name When 840 K 840 K 840 K 840 K 840 K Remark
calling rotation rotation rotation rotation rotation
1 Developer × ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
2 DV blade / Inner blade × × × × × ×
3 DV side seal F/R × × × × × × Maximum printed number 160K
4 Toner filter × × × × × ×
5 Bias pin, Connector × × × × × ×
Monochrome items
No. Part name When 840 K 840 K 840 K 840 K 840 K Remark
calling rotation rotation rotation rotation rotation
1 Developer × ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
2 DV blade / inner blade × × × × × ×
3 DV side seal F/R × × × × × × Maximum printed number 200K
4 Toner filter × × × × × ×
5 Bias pin, Connector × × × × × ×
MX-5141N MAINTENANCE 9 – 15
(Note for servicing the DV roller)
1. Prevent roller contamination 2) Remove the waste toner box.
[Note]
- Be careful not to attach fingerprints or oily dirt on the DV roller
surface.
- When rotating the DV roller manually, hold the drive gear section 1
to rotate it.
A
B
[Countermeasures]
If a fingerprint is attached to the DV roller surface erroneously, per-
form the following countermeasures.
1) Remove developer material from the developer unit and the
developer mag roller.
2) Remove oily dirt on the DV roller with alcohol.
3) When alcohol dries completely, supply developer and perform 4) Open the DV lock lever, and release the fixing screw.
SIM 25-02. (1position for each color)
[Check method]
Check to confirm that the DV roller is free from fingerprints or oily
dirt and that cleaning is completely executed or not by the following
method.
1
- Make a print of a half tone image on all the surface of A4 (11" x
8.5") paper, and check the printed paper for any abnormality in
the image.
1) Remove the front cabinet.
2
MX-5141N MAINTENANCE 9 – 16
6) Remove the screws.
NOTE:
Before cleaning with a vacuum, ground the magnet roller
rear side shaft as shown in the figure below and clean the
unit with a vacuum.
Magnet roller
rear side cored bar
"
NOTE:
Note for cleaning the developing unit If the developing unit * When attaching, use alcohol to remove oil from the attached
is cleaned with a cleaner or an air blower with much devel- surface, and fit with the reference.
oper in the developing unit, static electricity may be accu-
mulated in the unit. 0㨪0.3mm
* Metal part is brought into contact with the magnet roller 0㨪0.3mm
surface when transporting developer or removing foreign
material from the magnet roller, developer may adhere to
the magnet roller surface. Be careful to avoid this when
handling the magnet roller.
* Remove developer in the development unit as well as
developer attached to the magnet roller as far as possi-
ble.
MX-5141N MAINTENANCE 9 – 17
11) Remove the DV side seal F/R.
Maintenance: Check at every 840K rotation (monochrome). 12) Insert the new developer.
Maintenance: Replace at every 840K rotation (monochrome).
0㨪0.3mm
0 㨪 0.5mm
NOTE:
When replacing developer, use extreme care not to drop
developer on the drive section (marked with ).
0 㨪 0.3mm 0 㨪 0.3mm NOTE:
After supplying developer, do not tilt the development unit.
MX-5141N MAINTENANCE 9 – 18
E.Photoconductor section
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) O: Clean : Replace : Adjust ✩: Lubricate
Color items
No. Part name When 840 K 840 K 840 K 840 K 840 K Remark
calling rotation rotation rotation rotation rotation
1 Drum × ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
2 Cleaning blade × ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
3 MC unit × ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
4 Side seal F/R × × × × × × Maximum printed number 160K
5 Toner reception blade × × × × × ×
6 MC cleaner roller × ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
7 Waste toner box × × × × × ×
Monochrome items
No. Part name When 840 K 840 K 840 K 840 K 840 K Remark
calling rotation rotation rotation rotation rotation
1 Drum × ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
2 Cleaning blade × ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
3 MC unit × ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
4 Side seal F/R × × × × × × Maximum printed number 200K
5 Toner reception blade × × × × × ×
6 MC cleaner roller × ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
7 Waste toner box × × × × × ×
MX-5141N MAINTENANCE 9 – 19
(Note for servicing the OPC drums) 1) Open the front cover.
1. Prevention of oily dirt attachment
[Note]
- Be careful not to attach fingerprints or oily dirt on the OPC drum
surface. (Keep the unit away from oils and dust.)
- When replacing the OPC drum, cover the OPC drum with the
protection sheet and hold the protection sheet.
If it is required to hold the OPC drum directly, use enough care
not to touch the cleaning blade area, 5mm inside from both
edges of the OPC drum. (If a fingerprint or oily dirt is attached to
the cleaning blade area of the OPC drum, the cleaning blade
may flip.)
5mm
2) Remove the waste toner box.
Maintenance: Check when calling or every 150K.
OPC DRUM
5mm
CLEANING BLADE 2
[Countermeasures]
If a fingerprint is attached to the OPC drum surface erroneously,
perform the following countermeasures. 3) Remove the MC cleaner rod.
1) Use dry cloth to clean and remove the dirt.
2) Apply stearic acid powder to prevent blade flip.
[Check method]
Check to confirm that the OPC drum is free from fingerprints or oily
dirt and that the cleaning blade is completely cleaned by the follow-
ing method.
- Make a print of a half tone image on all the surface of A4 (11" x
8.5") paper, and check the printed paper for any abnormality in
the image.
2. Prior exposure prevention
[Note] PET
- Avoid servicing in a place where there is strong light.
- Do not expose the unit to light for a long time.
- Cover the OPC drum with light-blocking material. (When using
paper, use about 10 sheets of paper to block light.)
[Countermeasures]
If the OPC drum is erroneously exposed to light too much (prior
exposure), perform the following countermeasures.
1) Print half tone images on the whole surface of A4 (11" x 8.5")
paper, and check to confirm that there is no irregular density
area in the previously exposed section.
2) Damages due to prior exposure may be recovered by keeping
the OPC drum for several hours. If, however, image are not
recovered, replace the OPC drum.
MX-5141N MAINTENANCE 9 – 20
4) Insert the MC cleaner rod into the insertion port where the 7) Open the DV lock lever, and release the fixing screw.
cleaning guide label is attached, and clean the MC unit. (1position for each color)
Maintenance: Clean at every call.
T
PE
PET
* Slide the rod back and forth 3 times to cleaning the MC unit.
If there is no improvement, clean again.
If a satisfactory result is not obtained by cleaning again,
replace the MC cleaner rollers with spare ones.
5) Remove the MC cleaner roller from the MC cleaner rod.
Maintenance: Replace at every 840K rotation (monochrome).
9) Hold the lock lever, and pull out each color drum unit slowly,
and support the lower section of the unit with hand to remove.
A 2
B
MX-5141N MAINTENANCE 9 – 21
11) Slide the OPC drum to the front side, and lift the drum rear 12) Remove the C-ring, carefully lift the hook, and push the drum
side, and remove the OPC drum from the hole in the front sec- shaft. Pull the drum shaft which extends to the opposite side
tion. until it is caught, and rotate and remove the OPC drum.
Maintenance: Replace at every 840K rotation (monochrome). * When installing the drum shaft to a new drum, leave the
drum protection paper wrapped on the drum.
14) Release the pawl, and remove the cover. Remove the MC unit.
Maintenance: Replace at every 840K rotation (monochrome).
NOTE:
Attach the cover so that it does not float on the opposite
side of the pawl.
1 3
MX-5141N MAINTENANCE 9 – 22
15) Remove the toner receiving seal. 17) Remove the screw, and remove the DC holding plate and the
Maintenance: Check at every 840K rotation (monochrome). DCH lens.
Reference 18) Remove the screws, and remove the cleaner blade.
line
Maintenance: Replace at every 840K rotation (monochrome).
NOTE:
When attaching the cleaner blade, do not pinch side seals
F and R with the cleaner blade.
* When attaching, use alcohol to remove oil from the attached OK R side F side
surface, and fit as indicated below. Press securely after
attachment.
NG R side F side
0 - 0.3mm 0 - 0.3mm
NOTE:
Check to conform that the cleaner blade is installed before
attaching side seals F and R.
If the sequence is reversed, the blade may extend over
side seals F and R.
MX-5141N MAINTENANCE 9 – 23
F. Transfer section
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) O: Clean : Replace : Adjust ✩: Lubricate
No. Part name When 150 300 450 600 750 900 1050 1200 1350 1500 Remark
calling K K K K K K K K K K
1 Intermediate transfer belt – – – – – – Replace at 300K.
Primary transfer cleaner blade – Replace at 300K.
2 × ▲ × ▲ × ▲ × ▲ × ▲ Replace together with
the primary transfer belt.
3 Primary transfer roller – × × × × × × × × × × Replace as needed.
4 Primary transfer belt drive gear – × × × × × × × × × × Replace as needed.
5 Primary transfer belt drive roller – × ○ × ○ × ○ × ○ × ○
6 Primary transfer belt follower roller – × ○ × ○ × ○ × ○ × ○
7 Primary transfer belt tension roller – × ○ × ○ × ○ × ○ × ○
8 Belt CL brush – × ○ × ○ × ○ × ○ × ○
9 PTC opposed roller – × ○ × ○ × ○ × ○ × ○
10 Registration backup shaft – – ○ – ○ – ○ – ○ – ○
11 Transfer separation pawl – × × × × × × × × × × Replace as needed.
12 Registration backup roller – – ○ – ○ – ○ – ○ – ○
Secondary transfer belt – Replace at 300K.
13 × ▲ × ▲ × ▲ × ▲ × ▲ Do not use alcohol or
solvent for cleaning.
14 Secondary transfer roller – × × × × × × × × × × Replace as needed.
15 Secondary transfer idle gear – × × × × × × × × × × Replace as needed.
16 Secondary transfer belt drive roller – × ○ × ○ × ○ × ○ × ○
17 Secondary transfer belt follower roller – × ○ × ○ × ○ × ○ × ○
18 Secondary transfer idle shaft – – ○ – ○ – ○ – ○ – ○
19 Secondary transfer backup blade – × × × × × × × × × ×
20 PTC unit – ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
21 Pro-reg sensor – ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
22 Transfer cleaner seal F/R – – ✕ – ✕ – ✕ – ✕ – ✕
23 Primary transfer toner reception seal – × × × × × × × × × ×
MX-5141N MAINTENANCE 9 – 24
MX-5141N MAINTENANCE 9 – 25
Note for servicing the transfer unit
1. Prevention of oily dirt attachment
[Note]
- Be careful not to attach fingerprints or oily dirt on the transfer belt
surface. (Keep the transfer unit away from oil and dust.)
- When replacing the transfer belt, hold the edge section (within
10mm from the edge) of the transfer belt.
[Countermeasures]
If oily dirt is erroneously attached to the transfer belt surface, per-
form the following countermeasures.
1) Use alcohol to remove oily dirt from the transfer belt.
10mm 2) Wipe alcohol trail completely away from the transfer belt sur-
10mm face. (If alcohol residue remains on the transfer belt, its image
may be printed on copy paper.)
- When rotating the transfer belt manually, use a screwdriver to 3) Apply kynar powder (UKOG-0123FCZZ) to the cleaning blade
turn the drive gear section as shown below. to prevent reverse rotation of the cleaning blade.
[Check method]
Check to confirm that the transfer belt is free from fingerprints or
oily dirt and that alcohol residue are completely removed or not by
the following method.
- Make three continuous multi prints of half tone images on all the
surface of A3 (11" x 17") paper, and check the printed paper for
any alcohol residue images.
NOTE:
Rotate clockwise.
- When installing the transfer unit, hold the handle to insert the unit
into the machine. When placing the transfer unit on the guide rail
of the machine and inserting the unit to the machine, the expo-
sure surface on both sides of the transfer belt may be touched
erroneously. Use enough care not to touch the exposure surface.
Also when the right door is opened, the exposure surface may be
touched. Use enough care in this case, too. 2) Remove the waste toner box.
MX-5141N MAINTENANCE 9 – 26
3) Open the right door. 6) Hold the specified position, and remove the primary transfer
unit.
NOTE:
4) Loosen the blue screw. After maintenance, when the transfer belt tension of the pri-
mary transfer unit is released manually, turn on the power
again after completion of the work. (Power OFF-ON)
This procedure initializes the transfer roller to return it to
the home position.
A
B
8) Remove the screw, and tilt the cleaner unit and remove it.
MX-5141N MAINTENANCE 9 – 27
9) Remove the screws, and remove the primary transfer cleaner 11) Remove the screws, and remove the primary transfer belt
blade. drive gear.
Maintenance: Replace at every 300K. Maintenance: Check at every 300K.
10) Remove the transfer cleaner seals F and R, and remove the
primary transfer toner reception seal.
Maintenance: Check at every 300K.
Attachment
reference
(Frame bump)
0.3mm
0.3mm 0.3mm
Attachment Attachment
reference reference
(Frame edge) 0.3mm 0mm 0mm 0.3mm (Frame edge)
0mm 0mm
Attachment reference Attachment reference
(Blade edge) (Blade edge)
MX-5141N MAINTENANCE 9 – 28
14) Remove the screw from the paper guide, and remove the sep- 17) Clean the PTC opposed roller and the registration backup
aration pawl fixing plate. roller.
Remove the transfer separation pawl, and remove the spring. Maintenance: Clean at every 300K.
Maintenance: Check at every 300K.
15) Fold the transfer frame and lift the rear side of the unit 90
degrees. Remove the intermediate transfer belt.
18) Clean the primary transfer belt follower roller (A) and the pri-
Maintenance: Replace at every 300K. mary transfer belt tension roller (B).
NOTE: Use alcohol for cleaning.
Maintenance: Clean at every 300K.
16) Clean the primary transfer belt drive roller, the belt CL brush
and the registration backup shaft. 19) Disengage the engagement on the front side, and remove the
Maintenance: Clean at every 300K. primary transfer roller.
Maintenance: Check at every 300K.
MX-5141N MAINTENANCE 9 – 29
20) Install intermediate transfer belt 22) Remove the PTC unit.
Form the intermediate transfer belt into triangle. Slide the inter- Maintenance: Replace at every 300K.
mediate transfer belt over the transfer frame. * After replacing the PTC unit, use SIM24-4 to reset the PTC
counter.
Lot No.
NOTE:
When installing, be careful not to bring the intermediate 23) Release the pawl, and remove the secondary transfer unit.
transfer belt into contact with the transfer unit frame and
the gears. Use care not to touch the intermediate transfer 3
belt surface with bare hands.
Put so that the dot mark or the lot number on the belt sur-
face is on the rear side.
NOTE:
When placing the primary transfer unit on a flat surface,
use a flat table and be careful not to scratch the belt and
not to attach a foreign material.
b) Attach the primary transfer cleaner unit.
c) Manually rotate the transfer belt drive gear to remove
25) Remove the secondary belt transfer frame.
starting powder from the primary transfer belt clearly.
d) After inserting into the machine, make three sheets of
background copy on A3 paper.
MX-5141N MAINTENANCE 9 – 30
2 ‘13/Nov
30) Push up the shutter, and clean the pro-reg sensor.
26) Remove parts as outlined below. Maintenance: Check at every 150K.
Maintenance: Clean at every 300K. NOTE : Execute SIM44-2 after cleaning sensor. 2
28) Clean the secondary transfer belt drive roller and the second-
ary transfer idle shaft.
Maintenance: Clean at every 300K.
29) Remove the bearing on the front side, and remove the second-
ary transfer roller.
Maintenance: Check at every 150K.
MX-5141N MAINTENANCE 9 – 31
G. LSU section
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) O: Clean : Replace : Adjust ✩: Lubricate
No. Part name When 150 300 450 600 750 900 1050 1200 1350 1500 Remark
calling K K K K K K K K K K
1 Dust-proof glass ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Use the LSU cleaning rod.
2 Cleaning base × ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
MX-5141N MAINTENANCE 9 – 32
1) Open the front cover.
4) Insert the LSU cleaning rod into the insertion port to which the
cleaning guide label is attached so that the cleaning base (A)
is under the cleaning rod (B). Move the cleaning rod back and
forth 2 or 3 times to clean the dust proof glass.
Maintenance: Clean at every 150K.
A
2
B
PET
PET
MX-5141N MAINTENANCE 9 – 33
H. Paper feed section
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) O: Clean : Replace : Adjust ✩: Lubricate
No. Part name When 150 300 450 600 750 900 1050 1200 1350 1500 Remark
calling K K K K K K K K K K
1 Paper pickup roller × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Replace according to each paper feed
2 Paper feed roller × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
counter value at 100K or 1 year use.
3 Separation roller × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
4 Torque limiter × × × × × × × × × × ×
5 Transport rollers × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Sensors For the reflection-type sensor, the other side
6 × × × × × × × × × × ×
must be also cleaned.
MX-5141N MAINTENANCE 9 – 34
1) Remove the pickup cover.
5) Remove the paper pickup roller (a) and the paper feed roller
(b).
Maintenance: Clean at every 150K.
2) Remove the paper pickup roller (A) and the paper feed roller
(B).
Maintenance: Clean at every 150K. a
MX-5141N MAINTENANCE 9 – 35
I. Transport, Reverse, Paper exit section
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) O: Clean : Replace : Adjust ✩: Lubricate
No. Part name When 150 300 450 600 750 900 1050 1200 1350 1500 Remark
calling K K K K K K K K K K
1 PS follower roller ✕ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
2 Transport rollers ✕ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ *1
3 Discharge brush ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Sensors ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ For the reflection-type sensor, the
4
other side must be also cleaned.
5 Paper dust removing unit ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
6 Shifter PG ✕ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ *1
- Transport paper guides ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
*1: The paper exit roller 1 and the shifter PG rib should be cleaned with alcohol at every 100K.
MX-5141N MAINTENANCE 9 – 36
(1) Transport section
1) Open the right door. 2) Clean the paper exit roller 2 (Drive).
Maintenance: Clean at every 150K.
2) Clean the resist roller (Idle) (A), resist roller (Drive) (B) and the
transport roller 8 (Drive) (C).
Maintenance: Clean at every 150K.
B C
MX-5141N MAINTENANCE 9 – 37
5) Open the right door.
MX-5141N MAINTENANCE 9 – 38
J. Drive section
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) O: Clean : Replace : Adjust ✩: Lubricate
No. Part name When 150 300 450 600 750 900 1050 1200 1350 1500 Remark
calling K K K K K K K K K K
Apply to the specified position when
1 Gears (Grease) - × × × × × × × × × ×
checking FLOIL G-313S
Shaft earth sections Apply to the specified position when
2 - × × × × × × × × × ×
(Conduction grease) checking FLOIL GE-676
3 Belts - × × × × × × × × × ×
4 Sensors - × × × × × × × × × ×
4 3 4
1
(FLOIL G313S)
2
(FLOIL GE-676)
41cpm machine only
1
3 51cpm machine only
(HANARL FL955R)
MX-5141N MAINTENANCE 9 – 39
K. Fusing section
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) O: Clean : Replace : Adjust ✩: Lubricate
No. Part name When 150 300 450 600 750 900 1050 1200 1350 1500 Remark
calling K K K K K K K K K K
1 Fusing belt ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
2 Fusing roller ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ Apply grease to the shaft section
3 Pressure roller ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ when replacing (JFE552)
4 Separation plate ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Clean as needed
5 Lower separation pawl ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Meandering-prevention ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
6
collar
7 Heating roller ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
8 Fusing roller bearing ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
9 Heating roller bearing ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
10 Pressure roller bearing ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
11 Heat-insulation bush ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ Replace as needed
12 Pressure roller gear ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
13 Main thermistor ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
14 Sub thermistor ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
15 Lower thermistor ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
16 Sensors ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
17 Fusing paper exit roller ✕ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
18 Gears ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩
Web roller ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ Apply grease to the specified
19
position.
20 Web guide shaft ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ Replace together with the fusing belt.
21 Web pressure roller ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
22 Web pressure roller bearing ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
- Paper guides ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
MX-5141N MAINTENANCE 9 – 40
(1) Fusing paper exit roller cleaning
1) Pull out the right door unit. NOTE:
Before executing the operation, turn off the power switch
on the operation panel to release the pressure of fusing.
- Pressure release state (The convex portion of the pres-
sure release gear can be seen.)
NOTE:
If the knob is turned in direction B with the fusing unit disas-
1 sembled from the machine, the web sheet may sag and
twist. around the roller. Therefore, never turn it in direction
B.
3 Direction A: Paper transport direction
Direction B: Opposite to paper transport
1
2
2
A (OK)
B (NG)
MX-5141N MAINTENANCE 9 – 41
3) Remove the screw, and remove the fusing cover.
(3) Lower separation pawl and separation plate
removal
1) Remove the screw, and remove the fusing transport unit.
A
B
A
2) Open the fusing rear lower PG unit, remove the screw, and
remove the fusing cover.
A B
MX-5141N MAINTENANCE 9 – 42
(4) Web guide shaft, Web pressure roller bearing,
6) Remove the screw, and remove the paper guide. Web pressure roller, and Web roller removal
1) Remove the screw, and remove the drive plate, and remove
the gear.
7) Remove the spring, and slide it to the front side, and remove
the separation plate. 3) Remove the screw, and remove the Web unit.
NOTE:
Be careful not to damage or scratch the separation plate
surface.
4) Remove the screw, and remove the angle, and remove the
Web guide shaft.
8) Remove the holder, from the separation plate. Maintenance: Replace at every 300K or at the end.
Maintenance: Replace at every 150K.
MX-5141N MAINTENANCE 9 – 43
5) Remove the spring and the web pressure roller bearing, and
remove the web pressure roller. Route diagram
Maintenance: Replace at every 300K.
NOTE: 2) Remove the screw, disconnect the connector, and remove the
After assembling the web unit, rotate the drive gear until mounting plate. Remove the lower thermistor from the mount-
the end position of the start mark on the web sheet comes ing plate.
to the pressure roller.
NOTE:
Attach the web sheet to the fusing unit without slack in the
web sheet.
NOTE:
If the web roller is not replaced together with the fusing
belt, the fusing belt may be dirtied with toner.
MX-5141N MAINTENANCE 9 – 44
3) Remove the pressure roller.
(6) Pressure roller gear, Pressure roller gear bearing,
Maintenance: Replace at every 300K.
Pressure roller removal
1) Disconnect the connector of the lower heater lamp. Remove NOTE:
the screw, and remove the holder, and remove the lower When attaching the pressure roller, attach it with the pro-
heater lamp. tection sheet on it. After completion of assembly, remove
the protection sheet.
NOTE:
When replacing the pressure roller, apply grease (JFE552)
to section A. In addition, wipe the pressure roller surface
with alcohol.
NOTE:
For removal of the pressure roller, remove the lower therm-
istor then remove the roller.
A A
2) Remove the C-ring, the pressure roller gear, and the pressure
roller gear bearing.
MX-5141N MAINTENANCE 9 – 45
2 ‘13/Nov
3) Remove the screw, and remove the E-ring, the gear, the fusing
(8) Fusing roller bearing, heat-insulating bush, roller bearing, and the support plate.
heating roller bearing, meandering suppress
collar, fusing roller, heating roller, fusing belt 2
removal
1) Disconnect the connector.
4) Remove the screw, and remove the fulcrum plate, and remove
the fusing belt unit.
2 2
A
A
NOTE:
When installing the upper heater lamp, be careful of the
direction of the convex section of the upper heater lamp.
MX-5141N MAINTENANCE 9 – 46
6) Remove the heating roller from the frame. Remove the mean-
dering suppress collar from the heating roller. Remove the
heating roller and the fusing roller from the fusing belt.
Maintenance: Replace at every 300K.
(Replace the fusing belt together with the web roller.)
NOTE:
When attaching the fusing belt, attach it with the protection
sheet on it. After attaching the fusing roller bearing, remove
the protection sheet.
NOTE:
After attaching the fusing belt, wipe the belt surface with
alcohol.
NOTE:
If the fusing belt is not replaced together with the web roller,
the fusing belt may be dirtied with toner.
1 2
4
2
3
MX-5141N MAINTENANCE 9 – 47
L. Other (Filter) section
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) O: Clean : Replace : Adjust ✩: Lubricate
No. Part name When 150 300 450 600 750 900 1050 1200 1350 1500 Remark
calling K K K K K K K K K K
1 Ozone filter × × ▲ × ▲ × ▲ × ▲ × ▲
2 Left cabinet filter × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1) Remove the ozone filter cover, and remove the ozone filter.
Maintenance: Replace filter at every 300K.
MX-5141N MAINTENANCE 9 – 48
2 ‘13/Nov
1. Disassembly of Units
(1) Front cabinet
A. Cabinet
1) Remove the front cabinet band. Remove the front cabinet
hinge. Remove the front cabinet.
Parts
a Front cabinet
b Rear cabinet
c Left cabinet rear lower
d Left cabinet
e Upper cabinet right
f Upper cabinet left
g Upper cabinet rear cover (3) Left cabinet rear lower/Left cabinet
h Upper cabinet rear
1) Remove the tray 1 and 2.
i Front cabinet upper
j Right cabinet front
2
k Right connection cabinet
l Right cabinet rear cover
m Right cabinet rear
n Paper exit cover
o Paper exit tray cabinet
p Left cabinet rear
q Frame cover
A
A 4
1 3
!
#
"
2) Remove the screw, and remove the upper cabinet right (A) and
the upper cabinet left (B).
"
2 2
C 4
3
1
3
(9) Frame cover
1) Remove the waste toner box, and open the drum positioning
unit.
3) Remove the screw, and remove the right cabinet front (A). 2) Remove the front cabinet.
Remove the screw, and remove the right connection cabinet 3) Remove the front cabinet upper.
(B). Remove the ozone filter cover (C). Remove the screw, and 4) Remove the screw, and remove the frame cover.
remove the right cabinet rear cover (D). Remove the desk con-
nection lid (E). Remove the screw, and remove the right cabi-
net rear (F).
B 2
1
6 D
A
4
3
C
F
5
E
5) Turn over the operation panel unit.
Fit the flat cable edges with sections A of the Mylar, and
remove slack in sections B of the flat cables.
2 3
3) Loosen the screw, and lower the angle adjustment plate.
Fit the flat cable edges with sections A of the Mylar, and
remove slack in sections B of the flat cables.
"
"
!
C. DSPF unit
1) Remove the upper cabinet rear cover lid. Remove the screw,
and remove the upper cabinet rear cover.
2) Remove the screw, and remove the earth line. Disconnect the
connector, and remove the snap band. Remove the screw, and
remove the locking band and the interface harness cover.
1
5) Slide the DSPF unit to the rear side, and fit the step screw with
the key hole of the hinge, and lift it up to remove.
4 2
2
3
D. RSPF unit
d
c
b
a
e
Parts
a Reverse clutch
b PS clutch
c Paper feed motor
d Transport motor
e Pressure release solenoid
f RSPF driver PWB
4) Remove the harness from the wire saddle, and disconnect the
connector. Remove the screw, and remove the grounding wire.
Remove the screw, and remove the holder. Remove the docu-
ment tray.
4) Remove the belt from the paper feed motor. Remove the
screw, and remove the shield plate and the paper feed motor.
NOTE:
Do not use the attached harness. Use the original harness.
If the motor harness needs replacement, order the harness
shown in the parts guide.
(2) PS clutch
1) Remove the transport unit.
2) Remove the E-ring, and remove the PS clutch.
NOTE:
When installing, attach the rotation-stopper of the clutch to
the frame.
c
e
Parts
a LED PWB
b LED driver PWB
c CCD unit
d Scanner motor
e Document detection light receiving PWB
f Document detection light emitting PWB
1) Remove the upper cabinet rear cover and the upper cabinet
rear.
2) Remove the table glass and the SPF glass.
3) Remove the screw, and remove the pressure release solenoid. 3) Remove the upper cabinet right and the upper cabinet left..
NOTE: 4) Disconnect the connector, and remove the snap band.
When installing, insert the solenoid pin into the long hole of
the frame.
3
c a 1
3
4
Parts
5
a Temperature humidity sensor
b Manual paper feed tray paper width detector
c Manual paper feed gate solenoid
d Paper pickup solenoid
4) Remove the ADU cabinet R.
1) Open the right door.
2) Remove the screw, and remove the connector cover. Remove 5) Remove the MF harness cover, and disconnect the connector.
the screw and remove the ADU inner cover.
1
2
I. Duplex unit
5) Remove the tray paper feed unit 1, 2.
(2)-b
(1)-d
(1)-a
(1)-c
(2)-a
(1)-b
(1)
Unit Parts
(1) Paper exit a Paper exit cooling fan motor
unit b Shifter motor
c Fusing web cleaning motor
d Fusing drive motor
e Paper exit drive motor
f ADU motor upper
6) Hold the lock lever and pull out each drum unit slowly.
Hold the lower section of the unit and remove it with both
hands.
3) Loosen the blue screw. Check to confirm that the lock is
released, and open the drum positioning unit.
A
B
(CAUTION)
When the transfer belt tension of the primary transfer unit is
manually released, turn the power OFF/ON after completion of
the operation. This procedure initializes the transfer roller to
return it to the home position.
4) Open the DV lock lever, and release the fixing screw.
(1position for each color)
1
2) Remove the waste toner box.
2
1
A
B
Parts
a LSU
1) Turn off the power of the machine, and disconnect the power
plug from the power outlet.
2) Remove the left cabinet rear lower and the left cabinet.
[Refer to "Left cabinet lower, left cabinet" in "External view."]
3) Open the front cabinet, and remove the waste toner box.
(For U.S.A. 51cpm machine only)
Remove the power switch cover.
6) Remove the fan sheet.
3 3
B
8) Shift the front side of the LSU shaft from (A) to (B), and remove
the LSU shaft.
2 A A
B
3 A
1
B
I
9) Disconnect the connector, and remove the LSU.
C
H
G
K
F J
D
E
Parts
a Toner motor
b Developing drive motor (K)
c Developing drive motor (CL)
d Registration motor
e Transfer belt motor
f BK drum motor
g C drum motor (51cpm machine)
h CL drum motor (41cpm machine) /
M drum motor (51cpm machine)
i Y drum motor (51cpm machine)
j Primary transfer separation clutch
k Primary transfer separation reverse rotation clutch
KM
C VR
BK
2 1
5) Remove the E-ring, and remove the gear. Disconnect the con-
nector, and remove the E-ring, and remove the primary trans-
fer separation clutch.
(9) Y drum motor (51cpm machine)
* When installing, engage the projected section for stopping
1) Remove the rear cabinet. the clutch rotation with the frame projection.
2) Open the control box.
3) Remove the flywheel.
4) Disconnect the connector and remove the screw, and remove (11) Primary transfer separation reverse rotation clutch
the Y drum motor. 1) Remove the rear cabinet.
2) Open the control box.
3) Remove the flywheel.
4) Remove the E-ring, and remove the gear.
2 1
b a
e
g c
(1) Transport motor
d
1) Remove the rear cabinet.
2) Open the control box.
f 3) Disconnect the connector and remove the screw, and remove
the transport motor.
d
Parts
a Transport motor
b Horizontal transport motor
c Paper feed motor
d Paper tray lift-up motor
e Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 1)
f Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 2)
g Tray vertical transport clutch
9) Remove the gear, and remove the tray vertical transport clutch
unit.
6) Remove the paper feed clutch unit.
* When installing, be careful of wiring process.
* When installing, be careful of wiring process.
10) Remove the E-ring, and remove the tray vertical transport
clutch.
1
a
1
2
c
d NOTE: Before executing the operation, turn off the power switch
on the operation panel to release the pressure of fusing.
- Pressure release state (The convex portion of the pres-
Parts
sure release gear can be seen.)
a Upper heater lamp
b Upper thermostat
c Lower thermostat OK
d Lower heater lamp
NG
M
D
A (OK) I Q
P
N
A
C
B (NG) B
Parts
a DC power PWB
b Driver main PWB
c High voltage MC PWB
T. Toner cartridges d High voltage 1TC PWB
1) Open the front cover. e AC power PWB
f Scanner control PWB
g HL PWB
h High voltage 2TC PWB
i WH PWB
j Driver sub PWB
k Mother PWB
l PCU PWB
m SD card memory
n CF card
o Compact Flash memory
p Scanner expansion PWB
q MFP cnt PWB
3$ CARD
#& CARD
$)--
* Note for removing procedure of the memory PWB
DIMM: 1GB Remove the PWB inside the tilt of the memory PWB first.
(Removing the IC outside the tilt will result in poor efficiency
of work.)
3) Remove the SD card.
4) Push Stopper (A) with your finger to release the lock holding a) Tilt the memory PWB and fit with the connector port. Put
the memory PWB. the memory PWB up to the line (A) in the figure.
* When inserting, be sure to hold the both ends and be
sure not to touch the IC on the PWB.
About 15
A
A A
[ Normal ]
A A
B B
V. Power unit
b
2
b
c e
f
Parts
a Scanner control PWB
b HL PWB
c Secondary transfer PWB
d Driver main PWB
e Driver sub PWB
f Hight voltage 1TC PWB
g Hight voltage MC PWB
KM
C VR
X. Filter section
No. Name
(7) Hight voltage MC PWB 1 Ozone filter
No. Name
a USB I/F PWB
b LVDS PWB
c KEY PWB
d LCD
e Touch panel
2
3
3) Remove the holder, and remove the LCD.
NOTE: Use enough care not to put finger prints on the LCD sur-
face.
2 B. DSPF unit 5) Remove the screw, and remove the rotation tray shaft.
Remove the paper feed rotation tray.
(1) Paper feed tray unit of DSPF unit
2
a
2 5) Remove the screw, and remove the paper feed unit. (2) Transport section
a
b
c
2
6) Disconnect the connector. Remove the screw, and remove the
paper feed PG upper supporting plate.
1
1
3
2
1
b
2
a
a
b
c
Parts
a DSPF paper feed motor
b DSPF paper exit motor
c DSPF lift-up motor
Parts
a DSPF transport motor
2 a. DSPF cooling fan motor 3) Disconnect the connector, and remove the screw. Remove the
1) Remove the rear cabinet. DSPF control PWB.
2) Disconnect the connector, and remove the DSPF cooling fan
motor.
a
e
Parts
a Reverse clutch
b PS clutch
c Paper feed motor
d Transport motor
e Pressure release solenoid
f RSPF driver PWB
4) Open the RSPF unit until it is upright. Remove the screw, and
slide the RSPF unit to the rear side. Fit the step screw with the
key hole of the hinge and remove the RSPF unit. 4) Remove the harness from the wire saddle, and disconnect the
connector. Remove the screw, and remove the grounding wire.
Remove the screw, and remove the holder. Remove the docu-
ment tray.
D. Scanner unit
(1) LED PWB/LED driver PWB 1
2
1) Remove the glass holder (B), the table glass (C), and the SPF
glass (A).
1 2
2
4
3
1
3) Disengage the pawl, lift the MF tray upper and MF tray 2, and
disconnect the connector.
1
2
1
3) Disconnect the connector, and disengage the pawl, and
remove the manual paper feed gate solenoid.
(2)-b
(1)-d
(1)-a
(1)-c
(2)-a
(1)-b
(1)
7) Remove the MF upper guide supporting plate.
Unit Parts
(1) Right door a RD I/F PWB
unit b Manual paper feed clutch
c Right paper exit gate
d ADU gate solenoid
(2) Others a ADU motor lower
b ADU motor upper
8) Remove the paper pickup solenoid.
(1) Right door unit
1) Open the right door.
1 B
* When installing, place the paper exit roller SP pin in the gear
slit.
Engage the bar ring of the shifter motor unit with the gear. e. Paper exit drive motor
4) Remove the screws, and remove the shifter motor.
f. ADU motor upper
1) Remove the paper exit unit.
2) Disconnect the connector, and remove the screws, and
remove the paper exit drive motor (A), and the ADU motor
upper (B).
B A
3) Remove the screw and the spring, and remove the waste toner
box instillation lever.
Disconnect the connector and disengage the pawl. Remove
the waste toner full detection switch.
I. Drum unit
b
a
Parts
a Waste toner drive motor J. Transfer section
b Waste toner full detection switch
Parts
a Process control shutter solenoid
4) Remove the screw and remove the duct harness cover. Dis-
(1) Process control shutter solenoid connect the connector.
1) Remove the pro-reg sensor unit.
2) Remove the screw. Disconnect the connector, and remove the
process control shutter solenoid.
* When installing, engage the process control shutter solenoid
with the groove section of the shutter mounting plate (A).
5) Remove the screw, and remove the ozone air inlet duct A.
K. LSU section
6) Remove the screw, and remove the ozone air inlet duct B.
Parts
a LSU shutter solenoid 1
1
* When installing, insert the projected section (A) of the sole-
noid arm into the hole in the lever link arm.
9) Remove the screw and the spring, and remove the LSU shut-
ter solenoid.
* When installing, engage the solenoid pin (A) with the shutter
lever arm.
L. Fusing unit
(1) Upper heater lamp, Upper thermostat
1) Remove the fusing unit.
2) Remove the screw, and remove the fusing transport unit. 5) Remove the fusing rear lower PG unit.
NOTE:
When installing the fusing rear lower PG unit, be careful of
the direction and the installing position of the U-shape
hooks of IN (A) and OUT (B) of the rear lower return spring.
A
B
A
A B
9) Remove the screw, and remove the E-ring, the gear, the fusing
roller bearing, and the support plate.
2
7) Remove the screw, and remove the drive plate, and remove
the gear.
10) Remove the screw, and remove the fulcrum plate, and remove
the fusing belt unit.
11) Remove the screw, and remove the terminal. Remove the
upper thermostat.
* Install so that the caulked section of the terminal faces
upward.
Parts
a Fusing pressure release motor
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 [GB]
0 [L-1] 0.3GB [S-1] 7GB [I-1] 100GB
Outer
track
10
90
[S-2]
120 [I-4] 1GB [L-2] 1GB
0.2G
[S-5] B
130 [S-3] 4GB [S-4] 2GB
0.5G
[S-6] 2GB [S-7] 2GB
B
140 [S-8] 16GB
170
270
C. CF card partition
CF card size = 8GB (Actual size 7.8GB)
0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 ;-"=
0 [L-201] 7080MB
;'"=
E. SD card partition
SD card size = 4GB (Actual size 3.6GB)
0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 ;-"=
0 [L-101] 500MB [I-101] 500MB
;'"=
*1: The e-Manual cannot be backed up, but can be reinstalled by using Sim49-3 and USB memory.
*2: Watermark data cannot be backed up, but can be reinstalled by using Sim49-5 and USB memory.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21
7(67 12 &/26(
(0$18$/83'$7(>XVEEG@
',5!)2/'(5 ),/(
),/( ',5!)2/'(5
',5!0$18$/
1) When there are some FAX/Internet Fax data received, use 4) Use SIM66-10 to clear the image send memory. (This is in
SIM66-62 to backup the image data to the USB memory in the order to obtain consistency between the HDD data and the
PDF file type, and give the PDF file to the user. (The data can- image related memory.)
not be restored to the machine.) IMPORTANT:
2) Replace the SD card with a new one. When replacing the SD card, be sure to use only the specified SD
3) Upgrade the firmware to the latest version. card supplied as a service part.
CF card backup
Mirroring kit/Rebuilding
Display screen
1) When one HDD goes into trouble, the UI icon which indicates HDD trouble of the mirroring kit is displayed.
2) Use SIM62-20 to check the HDD status, and refer to the table below to confirm the relation between the HDD status and the remedy.
SIM62-20 status and causes of troubles (When the icon of HDD trouble is displayed)
HDD2
OK NONE REBUILDING ERROR TROUBLE
HDD1 OK - A - A A
NONE A - - - -
REBUILDING - - - - -
ERROR A - - - -
TROUBLE A - - - -
4) Refer to the details of the remedy and perform the necessary procedures.
HDD2
OK NONE REBUILDING ERROR TROUBLE
HDD1 OK B B or C B B B
NONE B or C C C C C
REBUILDING B C F F F
ERROR B C F F F
TROUBLE B C F F D or E
3) Refer to the details of the remedy and perform the necessary procedures.
Causes and remedies when cases B, C, D, and E are not applicable
Step 1 Back up the data in the HDD before replacement. (By HDD replacement procedures
servicing) Procedure Procedure
Use SIM56-2, the device cloning, or the storage backup Condition When two new HDD's (blank)(*1) (service part) are used for
function to save the data. (Back up the data to the PC or a the both.
USB memory.)
Step 2 Replace the both HDD's (as well as the RAID PWB if
(Data which can be backed up: Address book data, image
necessary). (*2)
send registration data, user authentication data)
Step 3 Set DIPSW2 of the mirroring
Step 2 Back up the data in the HDD before replacement. (By the
kit to ON, and turn on the
user or by servicing)
main power of the machine.
Back up the data to the PC by Web page.
Forcible rebuilding is
(Data which can be backed up: Document filing data, JOB
executed.
log data)
Check to confirm that the
Step 3 When there is some received data of FAX and Internet FAX, E7-03 error (HDD trouble)
use SIM66-62 to back up the image data from the SD card does not occur and that the UI
to a USB memory. (The backed up image data are in the icon which indicates
PDF file type and cannot be returned to the machine.) Give installation of the mirroring kit is displayed. Use SIM62-20 to
the backed up data to the use. confirm that the HDD status is displayed as HDD1/
HDD2=OK/OK.
HDD replacement procedures
Step 4 Turn OFF the main power of
Procedure Procedure the machine, and set DIPSW2
Condition When a new HDD (blank)(*1) (service part) is used. to OFF. Then, turn ON the
Step 4 If HDD1 is in trouble, replace the HDD of the mirroring kit. If main power of the machine
HDD2 is in trouble, replace the HDD of the machine. (*2) again.
Step 5 Boot the machine. Step 5 Use SIM66-10 to clear the FAX image memory. The memory
Rebuilding is automatically executed. is cleared in order to ensure consistency between the HDD
Check to confirm that E7-03 error (HDD trouble) does not data and the image memory and to prevent against
occur, and that the UI icon which indicates rebuilding of the malfunctions. (Not only the FAX model, but also the scanner
mirroring kit is displayed. Use SIM 62-20 to confirm that the and the Internet FAX models require memory clearing.)
status of the replaced HDD is displayed as REBUILDING. Step 6 Use SIM49-3 to install the e-Operation Manual data to the
Step 6 It takes about one hour to complete rebuilding. HDD.
Step 7 Check to confirm that the UI icon which indicated installation Step 7 The trouble code "U2-60" is displayed.
of the mirroring unit is displayed. Use SIM62-20 to confirm Use SIM49-5 to install the watermark data to the HDD.
that the HDD status is displayed as HDD1/HDD2=OK/OK. Use SIM16 to cancel the U2-60 error.
NOTE:
When a HDD is once used in a mirroring kit, the mirroring information is written into the HDD. This causes a trouble by erroneous using.
The details of inhibited items, results of erroneous procedures, and precautions for avoiding those errors are described below.
Data
User data overwriting
Rebuild start during
rebuilding
HDD1 HDD2
HDD
Mirroring kit side Machine side
Machine side
User data
Mirroring No mirroring
information A information Mirroring Mirroring
information A information A
HDD1 HDD2 HDD1 HDD2
Mirroring kit side Machine side Mirroring kit side Machine side
HDD1 HDD2
Mirroring kit side Machine side
Countermeasures
Use a new mirroring kit for installation.
If there is no choice but to use a mirroring kit which has been once used, be sure to erase the mirroring information in the HDD before installa-
tion. (For details, refer to "5-C. Deleting the HDD mirroring information.")
Removing the HDD in trouble The RAID controller cannot recognize both HDD's.
??????
Remove.
User data
User data User data
Trouble
Mirroring Mirroring Mirroring Mirroring
information A information A information X information A
HDD1 HDD2
HDD1 HDD2
Mirroring kit side Machine side
Mirroring kit side Machine side
Countermeasures
Use a new mirroring kit for installation.
If there is no choice but to use a mirroring kit which has been once used, be sure to erase the mirroring information in the HDD before installa-
tion. (For details, refer to "5-C. Deleting the HDD mirroring information.")
Mirroring kit
RAID PWB
MFP control RAID
PWB controller
Mirroring Mirroring
information A information A
HDD1 HDD2
Mirroring kit side MFP main unit side
MFP control
PWB
User data
E7-A5 error occurs.
Mirroring The machine cannot be operated.
information A
HDD
MFP main unit side
Countermeasures
Use a new mirroring kit for installation.
If there is no choice but to use a mirroring kit which has been once used, be sure to erase the mirroring information in the HDD before installa-
tion. (For details, refer to "5-C. Deleting the HDD mirroring information.")
When a HDD is used without any other HDD, the mirroring information must be erased before executing SIM62-1 to format.
This procedure allows the HDD being treated as a new HDD.
When removing the HDD after installation of the mirroring kit, remove both HDD's simultaneously. If only one HDD is removed and then
installed again, the data of both HDD's may not match, causing a trouble.
[Simultaneous removal of both HDD's] Disconnect the HDD SATA connector of the MFP PWB, and both HDD's are brought into disconnected
state from the machine.
? USB cable
? Windows PC
(Support OS: Windows XP, Windows VISTA, Windows 7 (32/
64bit)
(2) Procedures
1) Assemble the HDD (the mirroring information of which is to be
deleted) to the USB HDD case unit (SATA support), and con-
nect the USB cable.
Phenomenon 3
Though the target HDD is connected, it is not displayed.
1. General
The following functions are available on the Hidden Web Page exclusively used for the serviceman.
*1: This may be useful for troubleshooting when a trouble occurs. When submission of the log data file is requested in order to troubleshoot,
use the log file save mode to export the log data file to the client PC.
MX-XXXX
(2) Import
1) Import from a file: Click "Refer" button to select the back-up
file. (File name: *****.bin)
2) Click "Execute" button to execute import.
If the password is set when exporting, the password must be
entered.
3) Reboot the machine.
MX-XXXX
MX-XXXX
MX-XXXX MX-XXXX
H. Job Log
(1) Save Job Log
MX-XXXX
I. Update of Firmware
MX-XXXX
1) Click "Save" button, and specify the save position of the Job
Log to save it.
ent PC.
MX-XXXX
MX-XXXX
MX-XXXX
When saving the Syslog, click "Save" button and specify the save
position and save it.
When deleting, click "Delete" button.
Check to confirm that the confirmation message is displayed, and
press OK key.
(4) View Syslog
MX-XXXX
MX-XXXX
MX-XXXX
MX-XXXX
#. #.
#. #. #. .# .#
[13]
6 6 '.$ '.$ 6 .# .# .#
6 N,#$ $)30 N,#$ $)30 6 6
6
6 6
MX-5141N
,#$ MODULE
6(2 . "0 6( 48?/54 48?/54
'.$ '.$
$ '.$ $ '.$
,#$?#,+?0 ,#$?#,+?0
48?/54 48?/54
#. #. ,#$?#,+?- ,#$?#,+?-
48?/54 48?/54
3#!.$!4!? '.$ '.$
3#!.$!4!?. $ '.$ $ '.$
3#!.$!4!? ,#$?!?0 ,#$?!?0 48?/54 48?/54
3#!.$!4!?0
$'.$ ,#$?!?- ,#$?!?- 48?/54 48?/54
'.$
3#!.$!4!? '.$ '.$ $ '.$ $ '.$
3#!.$!4!?.
3#!.$!4!? ,#$?!?0 ,#$?!?0 4#,+ 4#,+
3#!.$!4!?0
$'.$ '.$ ,#$?!?- ,#$?!?- 4#,+ 4#,+
3#!.$!4!?V '.$ '.$ $ '.$ $ '.$
3#!.$!4!?.
3#!.$!4!? 3#!.$!4!?0 ,#$?!?0 ,#$?!?0 $ '.$ $ '.$
$'.$ '.$ ,#$?!?- ,#$?!?- $ '.$ $ '.$
3#!.#,+/54? 3#!.#,+/54?. '.$ '.$ $ '.$ $ '.$
3#!.#,+/54? 3#!.#,+/54?0 ##&4 ##&4 $ '.$ $ '.$
'.$ 8,?8?3$! 8,?8?3$! $ '.$ $ '.$
$'.$
9(?9?3#, 9(?9?3#, $ '.$ $ '.$
3#!.$!4!? 3#!.$!4!?0
9,?9?).4 9,?9?).4 ##&4?OUT ##&4?OUT
3#!.$!4!? 3#!.$!4!?.
8(?8?#3 8(?8?#3 $)30?OUT $)30?OUT
$'.$ '.$
'.$ '.$ 6?,#$ 6?,#$
6 .# .# 6
6 6 6?,#$ 6?,#$
"" 0($33 " 0($2 63 0($2 63 "" 0($33 " 6?,#$ 6?,#$
6 6
6 6 .# .#
6 6 % .# .#
.# .#
'.$ '.$
.# .#
'.$ '.$
.# .#
6 6
.# .#
6 6
1. Operation panel section
.# .#
6 6 .# .#
6 6 .# .#
'.$ '.$ .# .#
'.$ '.$
6#/.4 '.$ '.$
07237
3#?4%-0'.$ '.$
'.$ '.$ #.
#. #. &8- 3 36 &83 3 3( 8,8
$'.$ '.$ 9(9
$'.$ 3( '.$ 3( 8(8
,#$?$!4! 0+ ,#$?!?0 0+ 9,9
,#$?$!4! 7( ,#$?!?. 7(
$'.$ 3( '.$ 3(
,#$?#,+ 0+ ,#$?#,+?0 0+
,6$3
07"
,#$?#,+ 7( ,#$?#,+?. 7(
$'.$ 3( '.$ 3(
A. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram
,#$?$!4! 0+ ,#$?!?0 0+
,#$?$!4! 7( ,#$?!?. 7(
$'.$ 3( '.$ 3(
,#$?$!4! 0+ ,#$?!?0 0+
,#$?$!4! 7( ,#$?!?. 7( 0(2 "0 0( + 3
OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS
'.$
Service Manual
'.$
'(2 6 3
'.$
3#?!#+
0#5?2%1
3-0 6 "#3-2 6 "
㹋/4(%2 07"
#. 4/ 0
#.
#. 4/ 0
6 6
'.$ '.$
/#37 /#37
#.
#.
#.
6 %(2 6(0,'.,
0#5 07"
#.
3):%?,%$
N75?,%$
3):%?,%$ 6
N0/7?,%$
"" 0( 3- 4" 3):%?,%$
N).&/?&!8?,%$
3):%?,%$
N75?+%9 0(2
$'.$ '.$
6(0,'.,
$'.$
N072?37 $&" $%0 2#$&" $%3 2#
"" 0( + 3 0(2 N07237
'.$ 32! 4
'.$ .# #.
N75?+%9 6/
N).&/?,%$ N).&/?,%$
0/7?,%$ .# & '.$
75?,%$ "" 0!3+
Signal name Name Function/Operation
OCSW Paper size detection trigger sensor Generates the document size detection trigger signal.
PWRSW Operation panel power switch Turns ON/OFF the power on the secondary side.
B. Operational descriptions
The operation panel unit is composed of the LCD unit, the LVDS PWB, the USB I/F PWB, and the KEY PWB. It displays the machine operation.
It is provided with the USB I/F which is used for the firmware update, USB print, and Scan to USB.
In addition, the USB I/F line is provided inside the operation panel to connect with the keyboard and the IC card reader.
A document size is detected by the document size detection PWB (light emitting) and the document size detection PWB (light receiving).
The detection timing of document size is determined according to the document size detection trigger sensor signal.
PHNR-03-H+BU03P-TR-P-H
DRIVER PWB
2 /D_SPFC 1
SPRDMD
1 24V_TR 2
PHNR-03-H CN8 CN 2
5V 1 1 5V
CN7
SPPD1
5V 3 SGND 2 2 SGND
18 SGND
D_SPPD1 2 16 /D_SPFC
D_SPFFAN 3 3 D_SPFFAN
SGND 1 15 24V_TR SGND 4 4 SGND
PHR-3 13 5V D_SPPD1 5 5 D_SPPD1
3 14 D_SPPD1 D_RANDOM 6 6 D_RANDOM
5V
2 17 SGND D_SOCV 7 7 D_SOCV
D_RANDOM
1 11 5V D_SPOD 8 8 D_SPOD
SGND
12 D_RANDOM D_SPUM_INA 9 9 D_SPU M_INA
PHR-3
4 SGND
D_SPUM_IN/A 10 10 D_SPU M_IN/A
5V(sensor) 3 9 5V(sensor)
2 D_SPUM_INB 11 11 D_SPU M_INB
STUD
SGND 3 SGND
D_STUD 1 10 D_STUD D_SPUM_IN/B 12 12 D_SPU M_IN/B
175487-3 7 5V(sensor) D_SLUMA 13 13 D_SLUMA
A. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram
SCOV
STLD
SGND 2 5 5V(sensor) D_SLUM/B 16 16 D_SLUM/B
SPWS
D_SPED1 1 1 SGND D_SPOM_ENA 17 17 D_SPO M_ENA
175487-3 6 D_SOCV
D_SPOM_ STEP 18 18 D_SPOM_ STEP
B18B-PHDSS-B
SPED2
D_SPO M_ MODE 19 19 D_SPO M_ MODE
5V(sensor) 3 D_SPOM_DIR 20 20 D_SPO M_ DIR
SGND 2 24V 21 21 24V
D_SOCV 1
PGND 22 22 PGND
175487-3 24V 23 23 24V
SPED1
SPFC
PGND 24 24 PGND
24V 25 25 24V
CN6
PGND 26 26 PGND
SPLS1
1 D_SPUM/B
2 D_SPUM/A
B26B-PHDSS-B B 26B-PHDSS-B
3 D_SPUMB
4 D_SPUMA C N3 CN 3
5 24V_SPUM D_SPUM_VREF 1 1 D_SPUM_VREF
SPUM
6 24V_SPUM D_SPFM_VREF 2 2 D_SPFM_VREF
B6B-PH-K-S D_SPOM_VREF1 3 3 D_SPOM_VREF1
SPLS2
CN4 D_SELA 5 5 D_SELA
1 D_SLUM/B D_SELB 6 6 D_SELB
2 D_SLUM/A D_SELC 7 7 D_SELC
3 D_SLUMB D_SELOUT 8 8 D_SELOUT
4 D_SLUMA VAREF 9 9 VAREF
5 24V_TR
SLUM
D_SPWS 10 10 D_SPWS
B5B-PH-K-S
AGND 11 11 AGND
D_SPFC 12 12 D_SPFC
D_SRRC 13 13 D_SRRC
D_SRRBC 14 14 D_SRRBC
D_SPFM_M1 15 15 D_SPFM_M1
D_SPLS1 1
CN1 D_SPFM_M2 16 16 D_SPFM_M2
SGND 2
2 D_SPLS1 D_SPFM_CLK 17 17 D_SPFM_CLK
5V(sensor) 3
175487-3 1 SGND D_SPFM_DIREC 18 18 D_SPFM_DIREC
3 5V(sensor) D_STRRC 19 19 D_STRRC
D_SPLS2 1 8 D_SPLS2 D_STRRBC 20 20 D_STRRBC
SGND 2 9 SGND D_STMPS 21 21 D_STMPS
5V(sensor) 3 7 5V(sensor)
/D_STRC 22 22 /D_STRC
175487-3 4 VAREF
5V 23 23 5V
PHNR-03-H+BU03P-TR-P-H 5 D_SPWS
6 AGND SGND 24 24 SGND
VAREF 1 VAREF 3
D_SPWS 2 D_SPWS 2 B9B-PH-K-S B 24B-PHDSS-B B 24B-PHDSS-B
AGND 3 AGND 1
PHNR-03-H
Signal name Name Function/Operation
SCOV DSPF upper door open/close sensor Detects open/close of the upper door.
SLUM DSPF lift-up motor Lifts up or moves down the document feed tray.
SPED1 DSPF document upper limit sensor Detects the upper limit of the DSPF document.
SPED2 DSPF document empty sensor Detects document empty in the document feed tray.
SPFC DSPF document feed clutch Controls ON/OFF of the rollers in the document feed section.
SPLS1 DSPF document length detection short sensor Detects the document length of the document feed tray upper.
SPLS2 DSPF document length detection long sensor Detects the document length of the document feed tray upper.
SPPD1 DSPF document pass sensor 1 Detects pass of the document.
SPRDMD DSPF document random sensor Detects the document size in random document feed.
SPUM DSPF document feed motor Drives the rollers and transport rollers in the document feed section.
SPWS DSPF document width sensor Detects the document width of the document feed tray upper.
STLD DSPF document feed tray lower limit sensor Detects the lower limit of the document feed tray.
STUD DSPF document feed tray upper limit sensor Detects the upper limit of the document feed tray.
3 D_SPOM_VREF1
4 D_SPOM_VREF2
2 D_SPFM_VREF
18 D_SPFM_DIREC
18 D_SPOM_ STEP
19 D_SPO M_ MODE
17 D_SPFM_CLK
17 D_SPO M_ENA
20 D_SPO M_ DIR
10 D_SPU M_IN/A
12 D_SPU M_IN/B
B 26B-PHDSS-B
B 24B-PHDSS-B
9 D_SPU M_INA
11 D_SPU M_INB
15 D_SPFM_M1
16 D_SPFM_M2
6 D_RANDOM
20 D_STRRBC
8 D_SELOUT
3 D_SPFFAN
14 D_SULM/A
16 D_SLUM/B
14 D_SRRBC
13 D_SLUMA
15 D_SLUMB
19 D_STRRC
21 D_STMPS
5 D_SPPD1
22 /D_STRC
10 D_SPWS
7 D_SOCV
8 D_SPOD
13 D_SRRC
12 D_SPFC
7 D_SELC
5 D_SELA
6 D_SELB
CN 3
9 VAREF
CN 2
2 SGND
4 SGND
11 AGND
24 SGND
22 PGND
24 PGND
26 PGND
CN 1
21 24V
23 24V
25 24V
1 5V
23 5V
D_SOCD 13
GND 16
5V䋨䍜䍻䍙䍎䋩 7
D_ROCD 18
GND 17
5V䋨䍜䍻䍙䍎䋩 8
GND 1 1 SGND
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
D_SPOM_ STEP 18
D_SPO M_ MODE 19
D_SPOM_DIR 20
21
22
23
24
25
26
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
D_SPFM_CLK 17
D_SPFM_DIREC 18
19
20
21
22
23
24
B26B-PHDSS-B
B 24B-PHDSS-B
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
D_SPUM_VREF 1
D_SPFM_VREF 2
D_SPOM_VREF1 3
D_SPOM_VREF2 4
5
6
7
8
9
D_SPPD2 9 2 D_SPPD2
5V 3 3 5V
CN 8
D_SPOM_ENA
D_SPUM_IN/A
D_SPUM_IN/B
D_SPFM_M1
D_SPFM_M2
D_SPUM_INA
D_SPUM_INB
C N3
D_RANDOM
GND 2
D_STRRBC
D_SELOUT
B3B-PH-K-S
D_SPFFAN
D_SULM/A
D_SLUM/B
D_SRRBC
D_SLUMA
D_SLUMB
D_STRRC
D_STMPS
D_SPPD1
/D_STRC
D_SPWS
D_SPPD3 11
D_SOCV
D_SPOD
D_SRRC
D_SPFC
D_SELC
D_SELA
D_SELB
VAREF
PGND
PGND
SGND
SGND
AGND
SGND
5V 4
PGND
24V
24V
24V
GND 14
5V
5V
D_SPPD4 10
5V 5
26 NC(FAN_PWM)
GND 15
5 /D_STRRBC
28 FAN_LOCK
5 24V_SPUM
6 24V_SPUM
D_SPPD5 12
1 D_SPUM/B
2 D_SPUM/A
24 24V_SPF 㪤
23 24V_SPF 㪤
9 /D_SRRBC
7 /D_STRRC
13 D_SPFM/A
B28B-PHDSS-B
11 D_SPFM/B
3 D_SPUMB
4 D_SPUMA
17 D_SPFMA
19 D_SPFM 㪙
2 D_STSET
20 /D_SRRC
3 /D_STMP
18 /D_STRC
DRIVER PWB 5V 6
14 24V_TR
27 24V_TR
12 24V_TR
10 24V_TR
8 24V_TR
6 24V_TR
4 24V_TR
B6B-PH-K-S
25 PGND
1 SGND
㪙㪈㪏㪙㪄㪧㪟㪛㪪㪪㪄㪙
22 NC
21 NC
16 NC
15 NC
CN7
CN9
PHNR-02-H+BU02P-TR-P-H
1
2
1
2 /D_STRRC
2 /D_STRC
STRC
1 24V_TR
2 24V_TR
SMP-0㪉 㪭㪄㪥㪚
PHNR-02-H
SMR-02V-N
STRRC
SPUM
1
SPPD2
SGND 1
D_STSET 2
/D_STMP 3
24V_TR 4
/D_STRRBC 5
24V_TR 6
SPPD5
/D_STRRC 7
Transports document from the transport roller 2 to the document exit roller.
24V_TR 8 SMP-0 6 V-N C
D_SPF M/A 13 1 D_SPF M/B 1
Function/Operation
/D_SRRC 20
Function/ Operation
24V_TR 12
SRRC
24V_TR 27
PHNR-02-H
D_SOCV 7 7 D_SOCV
DSPF CNT PWB
D_SPOD 8 8 D_SPOD
D_ SPU M_INA 9 9 D_SPU M_INA
D_ SPU M_IN/A 10 10 D_SPU M_IN/A
D_ SPU M_INB 11 11 D_SPU M_INB
D_ SPU M_IN/B 12 12 D_SPU M_IN/B
D_SLUMA 13 13 D_SLUMA
D_SULM/A 14 14 D_SULM/A
D_SLUMB 15 15 D_SLUMB
D_SLUM/B 16 16 D_SLUM/B
D_ SPO M_ENA 17 17 D_SPO M_ENA
D_ SPO M_STEP 18 18 D_SPO M_ STEP
D_SPOM_MODE 19 19 D_SPO M_ MODE
D_ SPO M_ DIR 20 20 D_SPO M_ DIR
24V 21 21 24V
PGND 22 22 PGND
24V 23 23 24V
PGND 24 24 P GND
24V 25 25 24V
PGND 26 26 PGND
CN 1
Name
D_SPUM_VREF 1 1 D_SPUM_VREF
D_ROCD 18
D_SPFM_VREF 2 2 D_SPFM_VREF
Name
D_SPOM_VREF1 3 3 D_SPOM_VREF1
5V(sensor) 8
(3) Lower transport section
D_SPOM_VREF2 4 4 D_SPOM_VREF2
GND 1 1 SGND
Platen roller
5V 5 3 5V
D_SRRC 13 13 D_SRRC
GND 15 B3B-PH-K-S
D_SRRBC 14 14 D_SRRBC
D_SPPD5 12
D_SPFM_M1 15 15 D_SPFM_M1 PHNR-03-H
5V 6
D_SPFM_M2 16 16 D_SPFM_M2
B18B-PHDSS-B 1 SGND 3 1 SGND
D_SPFM_CLK 17 17 D_SPFM_CLK
2 D_SPPD5 2 2 D_SPPD5
D_SPFM_DIREC 18 18 D_SPFM_DIREC 3 5V 1 3 5V
Signal name
D_STRRC 19 19 D_STRRC
PHNR-03-H+BU03P-TR-P-H B3B-PH-K-S
D_STRRBC 20 20 D_STRRBC
D_STMPS 21 21 D_STMPS
SPPD3
SPPD4
SPPD5
/D_STRC 22 22 /D_STRC
No.
SRRC
SPFM
1
2
3
4
5V 23 23 5V
SGND 24 24 SGND
B 24B-PHDSS-B B 24 B-PHDSS-B
(4) Optical section
LED PWB
CN5
LED_POWER
IDRV6
IDRV5
IDRV4
IDRV3
IDRV2
IDRV1
B7B-PH-K-S
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
B7B-PH-K-S
7 LED_POWER
6 IDRV6
5 IDRV5
4 IDRV4
3 IDRV3
2 IDRV2
1 IDRV1
CN9
DSPF CNT PWB
DSPFCNT PWB
CN8 CN 2
5V 1 1 5V
SGND 2 2 SGND
D_SPFFAN 3 3 D_SPFFAN
SGND 4 4 SGND
D_SPPD1 5 5 D_SPPD1
D_RANDOM 6 6 D_RANDOM
D_SOCV 7 7 D_SOCV
D_SPOD 8 8 D_SPOD
D_SPU M_INA 9 9 D_SPU M_INA
D_SPU M_IN/A 10 10 D_SPU M_IN/A
D_SPU M_INB 11 11 D_SPU M_INB
D_SPU M_IN/B 12 12 D_SPU M_IN/B
D_SLUMA 13 13 D_SLUMA
D_SULM/A 14 14 D_SULM/A
D_SLUMB 15 15 D_SLUMB
D_SLUM/B 16 16 D_SLUM/B
D_SPO M_ENA 17 17 D_SPO M_ENA
D_SPO M_ STEP 18 18 D_SPO M_STEP
B. Operational descriptions
(1) Document size detection
Size detection on the document tray
The document size is detected by the DSPF document width sensor (SPWS), and the document length is detected by the DSPF document
length sensors (SPLS1, SPLS2). The document size is judged from the document width and the document length as shown in the table below.
When, however, documents of different sizes are mixed and set on the document tray, the largest size is detected.
Document length sensor
Document length sensor Document size
Document size SPLS1 SPLS2
SPLS1 SPLS2
Inch series 8.5" x 5.5" OFF OFF
AB series A5 OFF OFF
11" x 8.5" OFF OFF
B5 OFF OFF
A4 OFF OFF
11" x 8.5" OFF OFF
11" x 8.5"R ON OFF
A4 OFF OFF
8.5" x 13" ON ON
B5R ON OFF
8.5" x 14" ON ON
A4R ON OFF
A3 ON ON
8.5" x 13" ON ON
11" x 17" ON ON
B4 ON ON
8.5" x 13.4" ON ON
A3 ON ON
11" x 17" ON ON
8.5" x 14" ON ON
8.5" x 13.4" ON ON
8.5" x 13.5" ON ON
SPLS1
SPLS2
Copy key ON
SPUM
DSPF document feed motor
ON simultaneously with print start of each motor
OFF at 500ms after SPOD OFF of the last paper
SPFM
DSPF transport motor
SPFC
DSPF document feed clutch
1 0
STRRC
DSPF No.1 registration roller
clutch
1
SRRC
ON at 12.3mm - 10ms (29ms) after SPPD3 ON (SIM adjustment)
DSPF No.2 registration roller
OFF at 10.4mm (28ms) after SPPD3 OFF
clutch
1
SPRDMD
DSPF document random sensor
SPPD1
DSPF document pass sensor 1
SPPD2
DSPF document pass sensor 2
SPPD3
DSPF document pass sensor 3
SPPD4
DSPF document pass sensor 4
SPPD5
DSPF document pass sensor 5
SPOD
DSPF document exit sensor
CN F
SPMA/ 1 6 SPMA/
+24VPD_SPM 2 5 +24VPD _SPM
SPMA 3 4 SPMA
SPMB 4 3 SPMB
+24VPD_SPM 5 2 +24VPD _SPM
SPMB/ 6 1 SPMB/
N.C. 7 (NC)
B7B-PH-K-S
CN E PHR-11
SPED 3
GND 4
+5V_SPED 5 PALR-08VF / PAP-08V-S
+5VPD 6 4 +5VPD 4 1 +5VPD
SPPD1 7 5 SPPD1 5 2 SPPD1
GND 8 6 GND 6 3 GND
+24VPD 9
GND 10 (NC)
+24VPD_SW 11 SMR-12V-N / SMP-12V-NC
B11B-PH-K-S 1 +5VPD 1 1 +5VPD
2 SPPD2 2 2 SPPD2
CN G PHR 3 GND 3 3 GND
+5VPD 1 -13
SCN-CNT SPPD2 2
GND 3
PWB
CN15 PHDR-14VS-2 RSPF
B13B-PH-K-S
SPM
GND 1
GND 2 DRIVER
+24V
+24V
+24V
3
4
5
PWB SPPD2
(NC)
+24V 6 (NC)
+12V 7 (NC)
+5V 8
+5VO 9
+5V_SPF 10 CN A
+3.3V
+3.3V
GND
11
12
13
(NC)
1
2
GND
GND 2 SCOV
(NC) 5 +24VPD
GND 14 6 +24VPD
B14B-PHDSS-B 7 +5V
8 AVCC
CN16 34 GND
CN_SPPD1 1 3 SPPD1
CN_SPPD2 2 4 SPPD2
CN_SPFM_C 3 9 SPFMCK
CN_SPFMM1 4 10 SPFMM1
CN_SPFMM2 5 11 SPFMM2
CN_SPFMO1 6 12 SPFMO1
CN_SPFMO2 7 13 SPFMO2
SPPD1 SPED 1
CN_SPRM_A 8 14 SPMA
CN_SPRM_XA 9 15 SPMA/
CN_SPRM_B 10 16 SPMB
CN_SPRM_XB 11 17 SPMB/
CN_SPMO1 12 18 SPMO1
CN_SPRS 13 19 SPRS
CN_STMPS 14 20 STMPS
CN_SRRC 15 21 SRRC
CN_SRVC 16 22 SRVC
CN_SPWS 17 23 SPWS
CN_SEL_A 18 24 SELA
CN_SEL_B 19 25 SELB
CN_SEL_C 20 26 SELC
CN_SEL_OUT
CN_SPPDA
21
22
27
28
SSELO
SPPDA
3
CN_SPFMRV 23 29 SPFMRV
PALR-08VF / PAP-08V-S
CN_SPPD3 24 30 SPPD3
CN_SPPD4 25 31 SPPD4 1 SPED 1 1 SPED
+5VPD 26 32 +5VPD 2 GND 2 2 GND
GND 27 33 GND 3 +5V SPED 3 3 +5V SPED
CN_SPED 28 PHDR-34VS-1 B34B-PHDSS-B 7 +24VPD 7
B28B-PHDSS-B 8 +24VPD SW 8 1 +24VPD
CN I
1 +5VO 2 +24VPD_SW
2 +5V_SPF
3 SPED
PHDR-28VS-1 PHR-3 B3B-PH-K-S
SPWS
SPLS1
CN D PHR-12
SPLS1
GND
+5VPD_SPLS1
1
2
3
1
2
3
SPLS1
GND
+5VPD_SPLS1
SPLS2
SPLS2 4
GND 5
+5VPD_SPLS2 6
AVCC 7
SPWS 8 1 SPLS2
GND 9 2 GND
B12B-PH-K-S 3 +5VPD_SPLS2
SMP-03V-NC / SMP-03V-NC
1 AVCC 1
2 SPWS 2
3 GND 3
SPFM
SRRC
SPPD3
SRVC
SPPD4 SPRS
2
3
SOCD
STMPS
5
4
+5VPD SOCD
SPPD3
+5VPD
SOCD
GND
GND
1
2
3
1
2
3
SMR-12V-N / SMP-12V-NC
3 STMPS/ 3
1
2
4
5
6
7
8
9
4 +24VPD STMPS 4
SMP-02V-NC / SMR-02V-N
1
2
SPPD4
+5VPD
GND
+24VPD SRRC
+5VPD SOCD
+24VPD SPRS
SPPD3
+5VPD
SRRC/
SOCD
GND
GND
SMP-02V-BC / SMR-02V-B
SPRS/
1
2
+24VPD SRVC
1
2
3
SRVC/
1
2
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
1
2
PHR-7-R
PHR-11
PHR-13
PHR-6
B6B-PH-K-S
CN F
CN B
CN D
B04B-PH-K-S
CN G
B7B-PH-K-R
CN E
B13B-PH-K-S
1
2
1
2
3
4
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
B11B-PH-K-S
+5VPD_SOCD
+24VPD SRRC
+24VPD_STMPS
+24VPD SRVC
+24VPD SPRS
B3B-PH-K-S
B34B-PHDSS-B
SPFMCK
SPFMM1
SPFMM2
SPFMRV
SPFMO1
SPFMO2
+5V_SPF
STMPU
+24VPD
+24VPD
STMPS/
SPFMA/
SPFMB/
SPFMA
SPFMB
+24VPD
+24VPD
SPPD3
SPMO1
SPPD4
STMPS
SPPDA
+5VPD
SSELO
+5VPD
SPPD1
SPPD2
SPPD3
SPPD4
SOCD
+5VPD
SPMA/
SPMB/
SPWS
SRRC/
SPMA
SPMB
SRRC
AVCC
SRVC
SRVC/
SPRS/
SPRS
SELC
SELA
SELB
GND
GND
GND
GND
SPED
GND
GND
GND
GND
+5VO
+5V
CN A
34
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
1
2
3
1
2
5
6
7
8
3
4
9
CN I
PHDR-34VS-1
PHDR-14VS-2
PHR-3
PHDR-28VS-1
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
CN15
B14B-PHDSS-B
CN16
B28B-PHDSS-B
10
11
12
13
14
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
SCN-CNT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
CN_SPFMM1
CN_SPFMO1
CN_SPRM_XA
CN_SPRM_XB
CN_SPFMM2
CN_SPFM_C
CN_SPRM_B
CN_SPFMRV
CN_SEL_OUT
CN_SPFMO2
CN_SPRM_A
CN_SPMO1
CN_STMPS
CN_SPPDA
CN_SPPD1
CN_SPPD2
CN_SPPD3
CN_SPPD4
CN_SEL_C
CN_SEL_A
CN_SEL_B
CN_SPWS
CN_SRRC
CN_SRVC
CN_SPRS
CN_SPED
+5V_SPF
+5VPD
PWB
+3.3V
+3.3V
+5VO
+24V
+24V
+24V
+24V
+12V
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
+5V
2. Duplex scanning
1) Document set (Document empty sensor ON)
13) After turning ON the PS clutch, the reverse follower roller pres-
sure is released.
15) After passing the scanning section, the reverse follower roller
is pressed.
MHPS
CL
LED_POWE
6
IDRV1
IDRV2
IDRV3
IDRV4
IDRV5
IDRV6
9
PHR-7 B7B-PH-K-S
3 MIM
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
7
B7B-PH-K-S PHR-7
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
LED_POWE
2
IDRV1
IDRV2
IDRV3
IDRV4
IDRV5
IDRV6
8
RMOTS0920FCPZ
VHPLG217L5A-1
+5VPD
MHPS
GND
LED DRIVER
MIM_XA
MIM_XB
MIM_A
MIM_B
PWB
EHR-3
3
2
1
B4B-PH-SM4-TB
24VPD
24VPD
LAMP
GND
GND
1
2
3
4
5597-05APB
2
1
2
3
4
5
CN8
B3B-PH-K-S PHR-3
CN7
B4B-PH-K-S
CN17
5597-05CPB7F
CN2
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
MIM_XA
MIM_XB
+24VPD
+24VPD
MIM_A
CN_TCLK_N
MIM_B
CN_TCLK_P
CL_ON
CN_AFE_SDO
nRES_CCDAD
+5VPD
AFE_SCLK
MHPS
AFE_SDIO
CN_TC_N
CN_TD_N
CN_TB_N
CN_TC_P
CN_TD_P
CN_TE_N
GND
GND
CN_TB_P
CN_TE_P
GND
CN_TA_N
CN_TA_P
AFE_CS
TG_CS
A3.3V
A3.3V
A3.3V
A3.3V
A3.3V
A3.3V
A10V
A10V
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
A5V
A5V
A5V
CN8
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
CN2
FX16S-41S-0.5SV
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
CN_AFE_SDO
nRES_CCDAD
CN_TCLK_N
CN_TCLK_P
AFE_SCLK
AFE_SDIO
CN_TC_N
CN_TD_N
CN_TB_N
CN_TC_P
CN_TD_P
CN_TE_N
CN_TB_P
CN_TE_P
CN_TA_N
CN_TA_P
AFE_CS
TG_CS
A3.3V
A3.3V
A3.3V
A3.3V
A3.3V
A3.3V
A10V
A10V
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
A5V
A5V
A5V
CCD PWB
Timing
Generator
5. Zooming operation
Zooming in the sub scanning direction is performed by changing
the scanning speed in the sub scanning direction.
Zooming in the main scanning direction is not performed optically,
but performed with the image process technology (by the software).
CN1
INT24V1 1
2 INT24V1
INT24V1 2
5 INT24V1
DRIVER HPFM_B 3
6 HPFM_B
HPFM_B/ 4
3 HPFM_B/
MAIN PWB HPFM_A/ 5
1 HPFM_A/
HPFM_A 6
4 HPFM_A
B06B-PAEK-1(BLUE)
PCU PWB
CN7 CN4 PAP-07V-S
PHNR-2-H + BU02P-TR-P-H
1 24V3 2
2 /MPUC 1
PHNR-8-H + BU08P-TR-P-Ha P SM2P R
CN3(2/2)
8
7
24V3
/MPFS
1
2
1
2
24V3
/MPFS
1
2
HPFM
HPDET 7 6 HPDET 3 1 MPED
2 D-GND
D-GND 8 5 D-GND 4 3 5VLED7
5VLED7 9 4 5VLED7 5
PHNR-5-H + BU05P-TR-P-H
2 /MPGS 7 4 /MPGS 2
3 24V3 6 5 24V3 1
1 5VLED6 5
2 D-GND 4
MPFD 10 1 MPFD 8 3 MPFD 3
R
2
1
MPUC
SM2P
3
2
1
/MPGS
24V3
1
3
5
2
4
6
5VLED7
5VLED7
5VLED7
5VLED7
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
MPFD
P
2
1
DF11-6DP-SP2
1 4 CPFM
5 MPFS
RIGHT MPFD
DOOR I/F 3
PWB 2 TH_D/HUD_M
MPED
MTOP1
MPGS MPWD MTOP2
MPLD
DF11-8DP-SP1
B. Operational descriptions
The pickup roller moves up and down to press the paper surface,
separating the paper on the top of the paper bundle and sending it
to the paper feed roller section.
The paper feed roller feeds paper to the transport section to pre-
vent against double feed with the separation roller. The manual
paper feed clutch controls ON/OFF of the pickup roller and the
paper feed roller. Paper is sent to the registration roller by the man-
ual transport roller.
TZS/CZHR-17V-CZHR-17V-Y / BU17P
PCU PWB
5VNPD 2 B-1 5VNPD B-17
CLUD2 4 B-2 CLUD2 B-16
D-GND 6 B-3 D-GND B-15
CN4
2 D-GND
3 CSS21
GND
GND
GND
24V3
24V3
24V3
/CPFC
INT24V2
4 CSS22
/CLUM2
/CLUM1
/CPUC2
/CPUC1
/CPFM_D
CPFM_LD
B-4 5VNPD B-14
/CPFM_CK
5VNPD 8
/CPFM_GAIN
B-5 CPED2 B-13 5 CSS23
CPED2 10
B-6 D-GND B-12 6 CSS24
D-GND 12
9
6
5
4
3
2
1
B28B-PHDSS-B
18
20
22
24
26
28
11
12
10
S6P-PH-K-S
5VN 14 B-7 5VN B-11
B-8 CPFD2 B-10
A. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram
CPFD2 16
D-GND 18 B-9 D-GND B-9
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
10
5VNPD 20 B-10 5VNPD B-8
PHDR-28VS-1
GND
GND
24V3
24V3
24V3
/CPFC
/CLUM2
/CLUM1
/CPUC2
/CPUC1
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
10
SMP-10V-NC/SMR-10V-N
11
B-13 D-GND B-5
11
D-GND 26
CSS21 28 B-14 CSS21 B-4
CSS22 30 B-15 CSS22 B-3
6
CSS23 32 B-16 CSS23 B-2
CPED2
CPED1
CSS24 34 B-17 CSS24 B-1
3
B34B-PHDSS-B
7
5
12
10
CN10
8
5VN 30
(NC)
CLUD2
CLUD1
PAP-07V-S
DSW_C 24
D-GND 28
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
resere_in 26 (NC)
B30B-PHDSS-B
NC
GND
B07P-PASK
INT24V2
/CPFM_D
CPFM_LD
/CPFM_CK
/CPFM_GAIN
CSS23
CSS21
CSS13
CSS11
2
1
4
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
24V3
/CPUC2
24V3
CSS2
P-GND
24V3
P-GND
CPFD1
/CPFC
/CLUM1
/CLUM2
/CPUC1
CSS1
SMP-02V-NC/SMR-02V-N
CPFD2
PHR-2 B2P-PH-K-S
PHR-2 B2P-PH-K-S
2
1
2
1
CSS22
CSS24
CSS12
CSS14
DSW_C
SMP-02V-NC/SMR-02V-N
SMP-02V-NC/SMR-02V-N
CSPD1
CSPD2
CPUC2
PHNR-9-H+
BU09P-TR-P-H 1 5VN
9 5VN 1 2 CPFD2
8 CPFD2 2 3 D-GND
7 D-GND 3
3 5VNPD 7 1 5VNPD
CPFM CPUC1
2 CLUD2 8 2 CLUD2
1 D-GND 9 3 D-GND
6 5VNPD 4
5 CPED2 5 1 5VNPD
4 D-GND 6 2 CPED2
3 D-GND
CPFC
1 5VNPD
CN1 2 CSPD2
INT24V1 1 3 D-GND
2 INT24V1
INT24V1 2
CLUM1
5 INT24V1
CLUM2
HPFM_B 3
6 HPFM_B
HPFM_B/ 4
3 HPFM_B/
HPFM_A/ 5
HPFM
1 HPFM_A/
HPFM_A 6
&IGURE SHOWING STATE TRANSITION OF THE REMAINING PAPER DETECTION SENSOR DURING TRAY ELEVATION AND
CHANGES IN STATUS ACCORDING TO THE NUMBER OF REMAINING SHEETS
#30$
&IELD REMAINING PAPER DETECTION
3ENSOR LOGIC ,OW
&IELD
3ENSOR LOGIC (I
&IELD
3ENSOR LOGIC ,OW
3
PCU PWB
BU06P-TR-P-H+PHNR-06-H CN5
5VNPD 1 4 5VNPD 3 11 5VNPD
PPD1 PPD1 2 5 PPD1 2 13 PPD1
GND 3 6 GND 1 15 GND
179228-3 3 5VNPD 4 12 5VNPD
2 PPD2 5 14 PPD2
1 GND 6 16 GND
B32B-PHDSS
5VNPD 1
PPD2 2
GND 3
179228-3
Transport paper from each paper feed section to the registration roller with two or more transport rollers. The paper transport clutch controls
ON/OFF of each transport roller. The registration roller controls the relative positions of the transported paper and transfer images.
The registration roller controls the relative positions of the transported paper and transfer images. The registration roller is driven by the trans-
port motor. The relative positions of the paper and the transfer images are determined by the ON timing of the transport motor.
DF11-4DP-SP1 DF11-8DP-SP2
4
1
2
3
4
2
8
6
1
3
7
5
/POFM_CNT
/POFM_CNT
/POFM_CNT
/POFM_CNT
POFM_V
POFM_V
POFM_V
POFM_V
P-GND
P-GND
P-GND
P-GND
PHNR-4-H,BU04P-TR-P-H P DF1B-26p S CN17
1 POFM_V 4 6 POFM_V 6 8 POFM_V
2 /POFM_CNT 3 7 /POFM_CNT 7 7 /POFM_CNT
3 P-GND 2 11 P-GND 11 5 P-GND
4 POFM_LD1 1 8 POFM_LD1 8 10 POFM_LD1
PHNR-4-H,BU04P-TR-P-H 9 POFM_LD2 9 9 POFM_LD2
1 POFM_V 4
2 /POFM_CNT 3
3 P-GND 2
4 POFM_LD2 1
R SM6P P
5 24V2 5 1 24V2 1 2 24V2
1 /OSM_XB 1 2 /OSM_XB 2 4 /OSM_XB
2 /OSM_XA 2 3 /OSM_XA 3 1 /OSM_XA
3 /OSM_B 3 4 /OSM_B 4 6 /OSM_B
4 /OSM_A 4 5 /OSM_A 5 3 /OSM_A
5VNPD 3
TFD2 2 13 TFD2 13 12 TFD2
D-GND 1
5VNPD 1
POD2 2 14 POD2 14 11 POD2
5VNPD 1
HOPS 2 15 HOPS 15 14 HOPS
D-GND 3
5VNPD 1
POD1 2 16 POD1 16 13 POD1
D-GND 3 17 D-GND 17 16 D-GND
12 5VNPD 12 15 5VNPD
B16B-PHDSS-B
OSM
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
PCU PWB
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
POFM_2 5VNPD
DF11-6DP-SP1 DF11-6DP-SP1
1 POM_A/ 1
SMR-12V-N / SMP-12V-NC
7 7
SMR-06V-N / SMP-06V-NC
7 7
CN2
5
POM_A/ POM_A/ POM_A/
INT24V1 2 8 INT24V1 8 8 INT24V1 8 1 INT24V1
POFM_1 POD1
B. Operational descriptions
- Paper transported from the fusing section is sent from the transport roller 13 (which is driven by the paper exit drive motor) to the paper exit
roller 1, and discharged to the inner tray.
- When paper is discharged to the right tray, paper is sent to the paper exit roller 1. The paper exit drive motor rotates reversely. Paper is
passed through the right paper exit gate, and discharged to the right tray.
CN5
INT24V1 7
INT24V1 8
DRIVER ADML_B 9
ADML_B/ 10
MAIN PWB ADML_A/ 11
ADML_A 12
B12B-PASK-1
2
5
6
3
1
4
S DF1B-26p P
ADML_B/
ADML_A/
CN3/CN4
ADML_B
ADML_A
INT24V1
INT24V1
ADMH_A 6 21 ADMH_A 21 1 ADMH_A
DRIVER ADMH_A/ 5 22 ADMH_A/ 22 2 ADMH_A/
ADMH_B/ 4 23 ADMH_B/ 23 6 ADMH_B/
SUB ADMH_B 3 24 ADMH_B 24 3 ADMH_B
PWB INT24V1 2 25 INT24V1 25 2 INT24V1
INT24V1 1 26 INT24V1 26 5 INT24V1
B06B-PASK
3 ADUGS
DSW_ADU 7 3 DSW_ADU 2 1 DSW_ADU
D-GND 8 2 D-GND 3 2 D-GND PRTPD
5VLED2 9 4 5VLED2 1 3 5VLED2
PHNR-4-H + BU04P-TR-P-H
RIGHT
DOOR I/F PCU PWB 1
P QR/P4 32PIN S CN7
PWB 9 24V3 9 26 24V3 2
25 /ADUGS 25 25 /ADUGS
CN1 FG 32 F-GND 32 FG
5VN 1 1 5VN 1 15 5VN
GND 2 17 GND 17 17 GND
SIN3 3 2 SIN3 2 4 SIN3
SELIN1 4 18 SELIN1 18 3 SELIN1
SELIN2 5 3 SELIN2 3 5 SELIN2
SELIN3 6 19 SELIN3 19 7 SELIN3
APPD1 7 4 APPD1 4 6 APPD1
5VO_PRTPD
APPD3 9
POD3 10 21 POD3 21 12 POD3
MPFD 11 6 MPFD 6 10 MPFD
5VNPD 16 10 5VNPD 10 16 5VNPD
1
2
3
B. Operational descriptions
- Paper transported from the fusing section is sent from the transport roller 13 (which is driven by the paper exit drive motor) to the paper exit
roller 1.
-At that time, paper is passed under the ADU reverse gate guide.
- When the specified time passes from detection of the paper lead edge by POD1, the paper exit drive motor rotates normally, and rotates
reversely after the specified time.
- By the reverse rotation of the paper exit drive motor, paper is sent to the reverse section. At that time, paper passes on the upper side of the
Ado gate which lowers by its own weight.
- The transport rollers 10 and 11 are driven by the ADU motor lower to transport paper to the duplex paper feed position.
- Paper is stopped at the duplex paper feed position, and then transported to the machine again.
BD PWB CN1
R
1
2
D-GND 4 1 D-GND
1
2
3
nBD 3 2 nBD
SM-3Pin
D-GND 2 3 D-GND
5VN 1 4 5VN
R
1
2
B4B-PH-K-S
SM-2Pin
5 D-GND
1
2
3
6 TH
LSU TH1 7 NC
P
1
2
LSUSS
D-GND 4 S7B-PH-K-S
6
TH 3
NC 2
NC 1
B7B-PH-K-S
CN20
B4B-PH-K-S CN9
10
1
2
3
4
7
6
(NC) 1 GND
CN500 CN3 2 INT5V
PCU PWB
/LSUSS_B
CCFM_LD
INT24V1
AK_CS_K#
CCFM_V
PCU PWB
SCL_KC 78 78 SCL _KC AK_CS_C 13 5
WP_KC 77 77 WP_KC AK_CS_EEP_C 14 6 AK_CS_EEP_C#
6
AK_CS_Y 17 9
WP_MY 73 73 WP_MY AK_CS_EEP_Y 18 10 AK_CS_EEP_Y#
DGND 72 72 DGND AK_TXD 4 11 AK_TXD_K#
LDCHK2 71 71 LDCHK2 Vref(PCU) 8 Vef
12
LDCHK1 70 70 LDCHK1
AK_RXD 2 13 AK_RXD_K
5
nINIT_K 64 64 nINIT_K
DGND 63 63 DGND
NC 62 62 NC
NC 61 61 NC
NC 60 60 NC
4
DGND 59 59 DGND
DT_C2- 58 58 DT_C2-
DT_C2+ 57 57 DT_C2+
2 3
DT_C1- 56 56 DT_C1- CN14
DT_C1+ 55 55 DT_C1+ +3.3V 1 6 +3.3V
AK_RXD 54 54 AK_RXD DGND 3 5 D-GND
AK_TXD 53 53 AK_TXD +5V 5 4 +5V
9
AK_SCLK 52 52 AK_SCLK D-GND 7 3 D-GND
AK_CS_EEP_Y 51 51 AK_CS_EEP_Y +24V 9 2 +24V
PGM
AK_CS_Y 50 50 AK_CS_Y P-GND 11 1 P-GND
AK_CS_EEP_M 49 49 AK_CS_EEP_M B6B-PH-K-S(LF)(SN)
S18B-PHDSS-B
AK_CS_M 48 48 AK_CS_M
AK_CS_EEP_C 47 47 AK_CS_EEP_C
CN4 CN13
AK_CS_C 46 46 AK_CS_C
LD PWB
19 (NC)
LSU PWB
MSET_Y 45 45 MSET_Y
+5V_LD 1 (NC)
nLDERR_Y 44 44 nLDERR_Y D-GND 2 20 D-GND
nINIT_Y 43 43 nINIT_Y nSCK_LSU 4 18 nSCK_LSU
DGND 42 42 DGND D-GND 3 17 D-GND
DGND 41 41 DGND nTRANS_DAT 5 15 nTRANS_DAT
DGND 40 40 DGND D-GND 6 16 D-GND
LSU_FAN
+3.3V 39 39 +3.3V nRSV_DAT 8 14 nRSV_DAT
1
DGND 38 38 DGND LSUASIC_RST 7 13 LSUASIC_RST
+5V_LDD 37 37 +5V_LDD nTRANS_RST 9 11 nTRANS_RST
+5V_LDD 36 36 +5V_LDD JOBEND_INT 10 12 JOBEND_INT
+5V_LD 35 35 +5V_LD TH_LSU 11 9 TH_LSU
A. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram
MOTHER PWB
VSYNC_C_P 15
DT_K2+ 30 30 DT_K2+ VSYNC_C_N 16 6 VSYNC_C_N
DT_K2- 29 29 DT_K2- VSYNC_M_N 17 3 VSYNC_M_N
P4_K 28 28 P4_K 4 VSYNC_M_P
VSYNC_M_P 18
P3_K 27 27 P3_K 1 VSYNC_Y_P
VSYNC_Y_P 19
nINIT_C 26 26 nINIT_C
VSYNC_Y_N 20 2 VSYNC_Y_N
nLDERR_C 25 25 nLDERR_C
S20B-PHDSS-B B20B-PHDSS-B
MSET_C 24 24 MSET_C
P4_C 23 23 P4_C
P3_C 22 22 P3_C
nINIT_M 21 21 nINIT_M
nLDERR_M 20 20 nLDERR_M CN5 CN15
MSET_M 19 19 MSET_M CH0_N 1 RD RD 23 CH0_N
P4_M 18 18 P4_M CH0_P 2 WH WH 24 CH0_P
P3_M 17 17 P3_M D-GND 3 SH SH 22 D-GND
P4_Y 16 16 P4_Y D-GND 4 SH SH 21 D-GND
P3_Y 15 15 P3_Y CH1_N 5 WH WH 19 CH1_N
#P2 14 14 #P2 CH1_P 6 RD RD 20 CH1_P
#P1 13 13 #P1 CH2_N 7 WH WH 17 CH2_N
#P0 12 12 #P0 CH2_P 8 RD RD 18 CH2_P
DT_Y1+ 11 11 DT_Y1+ D-GND 9 SH SH 16 D-GND
DT_Y1- 10 10 DT_Y1- D-GND 10 SH SH 15 D-GND
DT_Y2+ 9 9 DT_Y2+ CLK_N 11 WH WH 13 CLK_N
DT_Y2- 8 8 DT_Y2- CLK_P 12 RD RD 14 CLK_P
SDCLK 7 7 SDCLK CH3_N 13 WH WH 11 CH3_N
GAIN_FIX 6 6 GAIN_FIX CH3_P 14 RD RD 12 CH3_P
DT_M1+ 5 5 DT_M1+
D-GND 15 SH SH 10 D-GND
DT_M1- 4 4 DT_M1-
D-GND 16 SH SH 9 D-GND
DT_M2+ 3 3 DT_M2+
CH4_N 17 WH WH 7 CH4_N
DT_M2- 2 2 DT_M2-
CH4_P 18 RD RD 8 CH4_P
DGND 1 1 DGND
ECLK_LSU_N 19 WH WH 5 ECLK_LSU_N
KX24-80R-6STH1
ECLK_LSU_P 20 RD RD 6 ECLK_LSU_P
10. LSU section
B. Operational descriptions
(1) Outline
Image data sent from the image process circuit through the PCU
are converted into laser beams which are radiated to the surface of
the OPC drum.
In this model, 2-laser system is employed where 2-laser diodes for
each color are radiated. The LSU unit is composed of the optical
element from laser to the polygon mirror, the primary system
including the mirror which assures light path, and the main scan-
ning system.
(2) Composition
(Primary system)
Rear
Scanning LD2
direction LD1
Scanning
direction
LD2
LD1
BK C M Y
Front
Front
MC
MC-CL
CN1 CN4
GB-Y INT24V2 8 27 INT24V2
GB
P-GND 7 25 GND
GB-M
/HV_DATA 6 23 /HV_DATA#
MC
/HV_CLK 5 21 /HV_CLK#
GB-C
/HV_LD 4 19 /HV_LD1#
MC PWB
GB-K HV_REM 3 17 HV_REM#
MC_CL_ERR 2 15 MC_CL_ERR
GB
(1) 41cpm machine
MC
PHNR-10-H/BU10P-TR-P-H/PHNR-10-H CN11
GND 1 9 GND 2 3 GND
NC 2
GB
11. OPC Drum section
MC
PHNR-10-H/BU10P-TR-P-H/PHNR-10-H
GND 1 9 GND 2 23 GND
NC 2
GB
DL_C# 3 10 DL_C# 1 21 DL_C#
PHNR-10-H/BU10P-TR-P-H/PHNR-10-H
GND 1 9 GND 2 4 GND
NC 2
DL_M# 3 10 DL_M# 1 2 DL_M#
PCU PWB
PHNR-10-H/BU10P-TR-P-H/PHNR-10-H
GND 1 9 GND 2 24 GND
A. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram
NC 2
2
DL_Y# 3 10 DL_Y# 1 22 DL_Y#
B40B-PADSS-1
DL_Y
CN13
DL_M
DHPD_K 1 17 DHPD_K
GND 2 18 GND
5VNPD_DHPD_K 3 19 5VNPD_DHPD_K
DL_C
DHPD_M 1 23 DHPD_M
DL_BK
DHPD_CL
DM_CL
R P CN2
5 INT24V1 5 1 INT24V1
6 INT24V1 6 2 INT24V1
3 DMBK_B 3 3 DMBK_B
4 DMBK_B/ 4 4 DMBK_B/
1 DMBK_A/ 1 5 DMBK_A/
2 DMBK_A 2 6 DMBK_A
7 INT24V1
8 INT24V1
INT24V1 2 9 DMCL_B
DM_K
DHPD_K
INT24V1 5 10 DMCL_B/
DMCL_B 3 11 DMCL_A/
DMCL_B/ 1 12 DMCL_A
DRIVER SUB PWB
DMCL_A/ 6 B12B-PASK-1
DMCL_A 4
Signal name Name Function/Operation
DHPD_CL CL phase detection Detects the CL phase.
DHPD_K BK phase detection Detects the BK phase.
DM_K BK drum motor Drives the BK drum.
DM_M CL drum motor Drives the CL drum.
DL Discharge lamp (Y,M,C,BK) Light is radiated to the discharge lamp to discharge the OPC drum surface.
MC Main charger (Y,M,C,K) The OPC drum surface is charged negatively.
GB Grid (Y,M,C,K) The OPC drum surface potential is controlled.
MC
MC-CL
CN1 CN4
GB-Y INT24V2 8 27 INT24V2
GB
P-GND 7 25 GND
GB-M
/HV_DATA 6 23 /HV_DATA#
/HV_CLK 5 21 /HV_CLK#
1
GB-C
MC
/HV_LD 4 19 /HV_LD1#
MC PWB
GB-K HV_REM 3 17 HV_REM#
MC_CL_ERR 2 15 MC_CL_ERR
MC-K MC_BK_ERR 1 16 MC_BK_ERR
GB
B8B-PASK B28B-PHDSS-B
(2) 51cpm machine
PHNR-10-H/BU10P-TR-P-H/PHNR-10-H
1
CN11
MC
GND 1 9 GND 2 3 GND
NC 2
DL_BK# 3 10 DL_BK# 1 1 DL_BK#
GB
PHNR-10-H/BU10P-TR-P-H/PHNR-10-H
2
GND 1 9 GND 2 23 GND
MC
NC 2
DL_C# 3 10 DL_C# 1 21 DL_C#
GB
PHNR-10-H/BU10P-TR-P-H/PHNR-10-H
GND 1 9 GND 2 4 GND
NC 2
DL_M# 3 10 DL_M# 1 2 DL_M#
PCU PWB
PHNR-10-H/BU10P-TR-P-H/PHNR-10-H
GND 1 9 GND 2 24 GND
NC 2
DL_Y# 3 10 DL_Y# 1 22 DL_Y#
B40B-PADSS-1
2
CN13
DHPD_K 1 17 DHPD_K
GND 2 18 GND
DL_Y
5VNPD_DHPD_K 3 19 5VNPD_DHPD_K
DHPD_C 1 20 DHPD_C
GND 2 21 GND
5VNPD_DHPD_C 3 22 5VNPD_DHPD_C
DHPD_M 1 23 DHPD_M
GND 2 24 GND
5VNPD_DHPD_M 3 25 5VNPD_DHPD_M
DL_M
DHPD_Y 1 26 DHPD_Y
GND 2 27 GND CN1
5VNPD_DHPD_Y 3 28 5VNPD_DHPD_Y INT24V1 2 1 INT24V1
B30B-PHDSS-B INT24V1 5 2 INT24V1
DMM_B 3 3 DMM_B
DMM_B/
DL_C
1 4 DMM_B/
DHPD_Y
DMM_A/ 6 5 DMM_A/
DMM_A 4 6 DMM_A
7 INT24V1
DM_Y
INT24V1 5 9 DMY_B
DMY_B 3 10 DMY_B/
DL_BK
DHPD_M
DMY_B/ DMY_A/
DM_M
1 11
DMY_A/ 6 12 DMY_A
DMY_A 4 13 N,C
B13B-PASK-1
R SM-6Pin P CN2
5 INT24V1 5 1 INT24V1
DHPD_C
6 INT24V1 6 2 INT24V1
3 DMBK_B 3 3 DMBK_B
4 DMBK_B/ 4 4 DMBK_B/
DRIVER SUB PWB
1 DMBK_A/ 1 5 DMBK_A/
DM_C
2 DMBK_A 2 6 DMBK_A
7 INT24V1
DHPD_K
INT24V1 2 8 INT24V1
DM_K
INT24V1 5 9 DMC_B
DMC_B 3 10 DMC_B/
DMC_B/ 1 11 DMC_A/
DMC_A/ 6 12 DMC_A
DMC_A 4 B12B-PASK-1
Signal name Name Function/Operation
DM_C C drum motor Drives the C drum.
DM_K BK drum motor Drives the BK drum.
DM_M M drum motor Drives the M drum.
DM_Y Y drum motor Drives the Y drum.
DHPD_C C phase detection Detects the C phase.
DHPD_K BK phase detection Detects the BK phase.
DHPD_M M phase detection Detects the M phase.
DHPD_Y Y phase detection Detects the Y phase.
DL Discharge lamp (Y,M,C,BK) Light is radiated to the discharge lamp to discharge the OPC drum surface.
MC Main charger (Y,M,C,K) The OPC drum surface is charged negatively.
GB Grid (Y,M,C,K) The OPC drum surface potential is controlled.
Aluminum
layer
CGL
CTL
OPC drum
Main corona unit 4) The whole surface of the OPC drum is discharged.
The main charger grid is provided with the screen grid. The Aluminum Aluminum
OPC drum is charged at a voltage virtually same as the volt- layer layer
age applied to the screen grid. CGL CGL
2) Laser lights are radiated to the OPC drum surface by the laser CTL CTL
(writing) unit to form latent electrostatic images.
Aluminum
OPC drum layer
CGL
CTL Lens
OPC drum By radiating the discharge lamp light to the discharge lens,
light is radiated through the lens to the OPC drum surface.
When the discharge lamp light is radiated to the OPC drum
Laser beams CGL, positive and negative charges are generated.
Positive charges generated on the CGL are attracted by the
When laser lights are radiated to the OPC drum CGL, negative negative charges on the OPC drum surface. On the other
and positive charges are generated. hand, negative charges are attracted by the positive charges in
the aluminum layer of the OPC drum.
Positive charges generated on the CGL are attracted by the
negative charges on the OPC drum surface. On the other Therefore, positive and negative charges are balanced out on
hand, negative charges are attracted by the positive charges in the OPC drum surface and in the aluminum layer, reducing
the aluminum layer of the OPC drum. positive and negative charged to decrease the surface voltage
of the OPC drum.
Therefore, positive charges and negative charges are bal-
anced out on the OPC drum and in the aluminum layer, reduc-
ing positive and negative charges to decrease the OPC drum
surface voltage.
Electric charges remain at a position where laser lights are not
radiated.
As a result, latent electrostatic images are formed on the OPC
drum surface.
CRUM (Y, M, C, K)
Name
Name
CN15
1
5VN 1 1 5VN 1 2 5VN
/CRM_K_DT 9 2 /CRM_K_DT 2 4 /CRM_K_DT
/CRM_K_CK 11 3 /CRM_K_CK 3 3 /CRM_K_CK
D-GND 5 4 D-GND 4 1 D-GND
TSR-04V-K
5VN 3 5 5VN 5 2 5VN
A. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram
PCU PWB
TNM_Y_B 13 3 TMY_B TMK_A 3
CRUM(C)
Function/Operation
Function/Operation
P-GND 29 19 P-GND TMC_/A
CRUM(K)
4
P-GND 12 2 P-GND TMC_B 5
TNM_M_A 14 10 TMM_A TMC_/B 6
TNM_M_/A 16 8 TMM_/A CN2
TNM_C
PWB
TMY_/A 4
TMY_B 5
TM-DRV
TMY_/B 6
B. Operational descriptions
When the toner cartridge is inserted into the machine, the lock
pawl is released and the supply shutter is opened.
).46 ).46
'.$ '.$
$6-?#,?#+ $6-?#,?#+
ೞ
$6-?#,?$ $6-?#,?$
$6-?#,?,$ $6-?#,?,$
"2!+% .OT USED
#7##7
).46 ).46
).46 ).46
'.$ '.$
'.$
$6-?#,?#+ $6-?#,?#+
ೞ
$6-?#,?$ $6-?#,?$
$6-?#,
$6-?#,?,$ $6-?#,?,$
"2!+% .OT USED "" 0($33 "
#7##7
"3?+
-# 07"
$ '.$ '.$
(6?$!4! (6?$!4!
"3 -
(6?#,+ (6?#,+
"3?#
(6?,$ (6?,$
"3 # (6?2%- (6?2%-
-#?#,?%22 -#?#,?%22
"3 + -#?"+?%22 -#?"+?%22
"" 0!3+ .# RESERVE?IN
"3?-
"" 0($33 "
4#3?+ 0(.2 ( "50 42 0 ( #.
6 6. 6. 6.
"3?9
4#3?+ 4#3?+ 4#3?+ 4#3?+
0#5 07"
$ '.$ $ '.$ $ '.$ $ '.$
4#3?+
43'?"+ 43'?"+ 43'?"+ 43'?"+
A. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram
4#3?# 0(.2 ( "50 42 0 (
6 6. 6. 6.
4#3?#
4#3?# 4#3?# 4#3?# 4#3?#
$ '.$ $ '.$ $ '.$ $ '.$
43'?# 43'?# 43'?# 43'?#
$ '.$ $ '.$ $ '.$
$6490?# $6490?# $6490?#
4.#25?# 4.#25?# 4.#25?#
6. 6. 6.
4#3?-
# 120 0 0
4#3?- 0(.2 ( "50 42 0 (
6 6. 6. 6.
4#3?- 4#3?- 4#3?- 4#3?-
13. Developing section
4#3?9
$ '.$ $ '.$ $ '.$ $ '.$
43'?- 43'?- 43'?- 43'?-
$ '.$ $ '.$ $ '.$
$6490?- $6490?- $6490?-
4.#25?- 4.#25?- 4.#25?-
6. 6. 6.
# 120 0 0
4#3?9 0(.2 ( "50 42 0 (
6 6. 6. 6.
4#3?9 4#3?9 4#3?9 4#3?9
$ '.$ $ '.$ $ '.$ $ '.$
43'?9 43'?9 43'?9 43'?9
$ '.$ $ '.$ $ '.$
$6490?9 $6490?9 $6490?9
4.#25?9 4.#25?9 4.#25?9
6. 6. 6.
# 120 0 0 "" 0!$33
!$33
Signal name Name Function/Operation
DVM_CL Developing drive motor (Color) Color developing unit/Color drum drive
DVM_K Developing drive motor (Black) Black developing unit/Black drum drive
BS Developing bias (Y,M,C,K) Developer bias
TCS Toner density sensor (Y,M,C,K) Controls the toner density in the developing unit.
B. Operational descriptions
This converts the electrostatic latent images on the OPC drum gen-
erated by the laser (writing) unit into visible images with toner.
Toner and carrier in the developing unit are stirred and transported
by the mixing roller.
By mixing and transporting, toner and carrier are negatively
charged due to mechanical friction.
The developing bias voltage (AC component and negative DC
component) is applied to the developing roller.
Negatively charged toner is attracted to the exposed section on the
OPC drum where the negative potential falls due to the developing
bias.
If the OPC drum is not exposed, the negative potential is higher
than the developing bias voltage, and toner is not attracted.
SMR-02V-N / SMP-02V-NC
1TC_K 1TUD_K 1
2
24V3
/1TURC_R
1
2
29
30
24V3
/1TURC_R
B30B-PHDSS-B
3
BTM CN1/CN3
INT24V1 2 1 INT24V1
14 INT24V1 5 2 INT24V1
2 15 BTM_B
BTM_B/
4
6
3
4
BTM_B
BTM_B/
BTM_A/ 3 5 BTM_A/
7 BTM_A 1 6 BTM_A
8 PTC B6B-PASK-1
B7B-PASK-1
CN15
3 2TC 2nd TC PWB CN1
1
3
GND
GND
9 PTC
B2P-VH
INT24V2
P-GND
1
2
2
4
INT24V2
GND
/TC_DATA 3 6 /TC_DATA#
/TC_CLK 4 8 /TC_CLK#
/TC_LD 5 10 /TC_LD#
4 /HV_REM 6 5 /HV_REM#
2-TC PTC_ERR 7 7 PTC_ERR
13 PS-187 /PTC_CLK 8
B8B-PASK
9 /PTC_CLK
B10B-PHDSS-B
11
PCU PWB
1TNFD
10
DF1B-24DEP-2.5RC/
PCU PWB
CN6 P SM2P R
24V3 18 15 24V3 15 1 24V3 1
/PCSS 17 14 /PCSS 14 2 /PCSS 2
REGS_R_LED# 8 13 REGS_R_LED# 13
REGS_R 6 12 REGS_R 12
GND 4 11 GND 11
5VNPD 2 10 5VNPD 10 3 REGS_R_LED#
4 REGS_R PCSS
PCS_CL 9 8 PCS_CL 8 2 GND
1 5VNPD
5 PCS_R
REGS_F_LED# 7 4 REGS_F_LED# 4
REGS_F 5 3 REGS_F 3
GND 3 2 GND 2 5 PCS_F REGS_R
1 1 3 REGS_F_LED#
5VNPD 1 5VNPD
4 REGS_F
B32B-PHDSS-B P SM18P R
2 GND
1 5VNPD
REGS_F
All pressing
PTC Constant
current
Toner images on the OPC drum are transferred to the pri- All separating
mary transfer belt by applying the positive high voltage to
the primary transfer roller.
Negative charge is generated by the PTC unit, and this
weakens positive charges on the transfer belt, reducing the
attractive force between the primary transfer belt and toner.
By this operation, the transfer efficiency in the secondary
transfer is improved.
Next, the positive high voltage is applied to the secondary
transfer belt, and toner images on the primary transfer belt Pressing only black
are transferred to paper. In the monochrome mode and the
color mode, the black (K) transfer voltage is selected.
b. Cleaning operation
In the cleaning operation, the polarity of the applying volt-
age of the secondary transfer belt is made negative, and
unnecessary toner is transferred to the primary transfer
belt, and it is cleaned by the primary transfer belt cleaning
blade, and transported to the waste toner section. It also performs all pressing, all separating, or pressing only black
with the roller separation sensors (1TUD_CL, 1TUD_BK) and the
separation detection arm.
1TUD_CL 1TUD_BK
All pressing ON OFF
All separating OFF ON
Pressing only black OFF OFF
The primary transfer drive and the secondary transfer drive are
commonly used with the black developing motor.
Constant
voltage
3 D-GND 3
PRM
24V3_PRM 20 1 24V3_PRM 1 3 24V3 A-9 TH_UM_IN A-2 18 TH_UM_IN 18 8 TH_UM_IN
24V3_PRM 22 12 24V3_PRM 12 4 24V3 A-8 GND A-3 16 GND 16 6 GND
/PRM_B 26 5 /PRM_B 5 5 /PRM_B A-7 TH_US_IN A-4 14 TH_US_IN 14 4 TH_US_IN
/PRM_A 24 3 /PRM_A 3 6 /PRM_A A-6 GND A-5 12 GND 12 7 GND
RTH(US) (NC) A-5 (NC) A-6 (NC) 10 TH_LM_IN 10 9 TH_LM_IN
2
Contact (NC) A-4 (NC) A-7 (NC) 8 GND 8 2 GND
SMR-02V-B SMP-02V-BC RCZR-10PIN
PHDR-26VS-1
5VN 34 11 5VN 11 1 5VN 1 TH_LM_IN 1 B-6 TH_LM_IN B-4
PCU PWB
TH_US_IN
HLPCD 33 13 HLPCD 13 2 HLPCD 2 D-GND 2 B-5 GND B-5
GND 32 15 GND 15 3 D-GND RCZR-09V-PS RCZR-9PIN RCZR-09V-PS
B34B-PHDSS-B PHDR-34VS-1
1 N-HL(LM) 1 1 N-HL(LM) 1
SLR-01VF SLP-01V 3 N-HL(US) 3 3 N-HL(US) 3
15. Fusing section
2 N-HL(UW) 2 2 N-HL(UW) 2
CN-16
1 N-HL(UM) 1 4 N-HL(UM) 4
5 L-HL(UM/UW) 5
GND
YLP-03V / YLR-03VF
6 L-HL(US/LM ) 6 /HL_PR
INT24V1
HLPCD
HLOUT_US
HLOUT_LM
HLOUT_UM
HLOUT_UW
TH_UM_IN
B34B-PHDSS-B
8
6
4
HL_LM
GND 21 4 L-HL(UM/UW) 4
3 L-HL(US/LM) 3
9
B26B-PHDSS-B PHDR-26VS-1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
(NC) 8
TS UM
PHDR-34VS-1 PAP-08V-S CN-5
PCU PWB
7
9
WEBM
B08B-PASK-1
N.C
D-GND
/HL_PR
INT24V1
HL_OUT_US
HL_OUT_LM
HL_OUT_UM
HL_OUT_UW
VLR-03V
CN3
2 L-HL(US)
3 L-HL(UM)
1 L-HL(UW)
3 N-HL(LM)
TS US
(NC)2 N.C
3
1
2
A. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram
VLP-03V
1 N-HL(UW)
VHR-3N B2P3-VH-B
CN2
9
1 N-HL(US)
(NC) 2 N.C
TS LM
3 N-HL(UM)
VLP-03V-BK B03P-VL-K
3
10
CN4
1
3 L-HL(UM/UW)
6
9
HL PWB
(NC) 2 N.C
1 L-HL(US/LM)
VLP-03V-R B03P-VL-RD
4
HL_UM/US/UW
5
1
8
TH_LM_IN
7
N-HL(LM) 1
SLR-01VF / SLP-01V
3
2
15VN
GND
WEBD
3
2
1
WEBEND
3
2
1
SMP-03V-NC / SMR-03V-N
VHPLG248NL1-1
FUFM
FUM
1 5VN
P-GND
FUFM_/V
FUFM_LD
2 WEBD
CN16 SMP-06V-NC / SMR-06V-N 3 GND
INT24V1 2 1 INT24V1 1 1 INT24V1
3
2
1
GND 5 2 2 2 P-GND
SMP-03V-NC / SMR-03V-N
P-GND
/FUM_CK 27 3 /FUM_CK 3 (NC) 3 NC
/FUM_D 29 4 /FUM_D 4 4 /FUM_CK
FUM_LD 31 5 FUM_LD 5 5 /FUM_D
6 NC 6 (NC) 6 FUM_LD
B34B-PHDSS-B PHDR-34VS-1 B6B-PH-K-R(RED) PHR-6-R(RED)
Signal name Name Function/Operation
FUFM Fusing cooling fan Cools the fusing section and the paper exit section.
FUM Fusing motor Drives the fusing section.
HL_LM Heater lamp (HL_LM) Heats the fusing roller (B).
HL_UM/US/UW Heater lamp (HL_UM/US/UW) Heats the fusing roller (F1), and fusing belt.
HLPCD Fusing pressure detector Detects the fusing pressure state.
PRM Fusing pressure control motor Controls ON/OFF of the fusing roller pressure.
TH_LM_IN Fusing temperature sensor Detects the surface temperature of the fusing roller (B).
TH_UM_IN Fusing temperature sensor (Main) Detects the surface temperature at the center of the fusing belt.
TH_US_IN Fusing temperature sensor (Sub) Detects the suffered temperature at the edge section of the fusing belt.
TS LM Thermostat LM Shuts down the heater lamp (HL_LM) circuit when the fusing section is overheated.
TS UM Thermostat UM Shuts down the heater lamp (HL_UM) circuit when the fusing section is overheated. (Center section)
TS US Thermostat US Shuts down the heater lamp (HL_US) circuit when the fusing section is overheated. (Edge section)
WEBEND Web end detector Detects web end of the fusing unit.
B. Operational descriptions
(1) Outline of operations (2) Fusing operation
This machine employs the fusing system by the belt. Color toner (Y, M, C, and K) on paper is heated and pressed by the
The features of the belt-type fusing system are as follows: fusing belt, fusing roller (F2), and fusing roller (B) to be fused on
paper.
1) Short warm-up time
Toner in the four layers on the paper is fused by heating from up
2) Low power consumption
and down and both sides.
3) Wide nip providing high fusing capability
The fusing belt, fusing roller (F2) which is provided with the cushion
(2) Heater lamp driving layer, and fusing roller (B) realize the following operations.
The surface temperature of the heat roller and the fusing belt 1) The nip amount is increased and the heat capacity to paper is
detected by the fusing temperature sensor is sent to the PCU. If the increased.
temperature is lower than the specified temperature, the heater 2) By pressing with the flexible roller, toner of many layers can be
lamp lighting signal is sent from the PCU to the heater lamp drive fused without being deformed.
circuit in the HL PWB. 3) An even pressure is applied to rough surface of toner (due to
When the power triac in the heater lamp drive circuit is turned ON, the multi-layer composition).
the AC power is supplied to the heater lamp to light the lamp and
heat the fusing belt.
A thermostat is provided as a safety device against an abnormally
high temperature in the heat roller and the fusing belt.
Fusing roller (F2)
When the thermostat is opened, the AC power supply to the heater Fusing roller (B)
lamp is cut off.
Fusing belt
The heater lamp is arranged to fusing roller (F1) and fusing roller
(B).
In heater lamp (HL_UM/US/UW), three lamps are integrated into
one.
Heater lamp operations
Fusing belt
HLPCD
When turning OFF the main power switch of the machine, be sure
to turn OFF the power switch of the operation panel and check to
confirm that the LCD display goes off before turning OFF the main
power switch.
If the main power switch is turned OFF with the LCD lighted, the
power is cut off before completion of the pressure release opera-
tion. If this state is kept for a long time, the fusing roller may be
deformed.
02/&- 03&-
0/&-
0/&-
&5&-
02/&-
The machine is provided with the following filter to remove ozone generated in the process section.
Filter process fan motor 1 produces an air flow to generate a difference in the air pressure between inside outside of the developing unit, pre-
venting toner from splashing from the open port of the developing unit.
The toner filter prevents toner from leaking from the slit caused by this difference in air pressure.
*1: The number in ( ) is the count-up number when the large-size count-up setting is changed to the single count-up with SIM26-5 (Mainte-
nance count (B/W, COL)).
*3: The number in ( ) is the count-up number when the large-size count-up setting is changed to the single count-up with SIM26-5 (Developer
count (B/W, COL)).
*4: The number in ( ) is the count-up number when the large-size count-up setting is changed to the single count-up with SIM26-5 (Total count
(B/W, COL)).
F. RSPF/Scanner counter
A. RSPF
237,21
7& 37&B+9
67036 63/6 633' 6&29
'(5,9(5< 81,7 '6:B) :710 71)' )8)0 5&)0 3&6)0 3&6)0 633' 63/6 633' 63('
6356
32' 32)0B) 630 63:6 633' 62&'
721(5B. 81,7 721(5B& 81,7 721(5B0 81,7 721(5B< 81,7 63)0
32' 32)0B5 659& 655& 633'
78'B. 78'B&/ '9&580B. '9&580B& '9&580B0 '9&580B<
7)' 260
1. Block diagram
)86(5 81,7
785& 2563'
7+B80 +/B80 ᯛᶵࡢࡳ '+3'B0 ᯛᶵࡢࡳ 0,0 23(5$7,21 81,7
785&B5 '+3'B& '+3'B&/ '+3'B<
7+B86 +/B86 ࡣᯛᶵ 728&+
'+3'B. /9'6 3$1(/
7+B/0 +/B/0 3:%
/&'
7+B(; +/B8: '/B. '/B& '/B0 '/B<
7+B80 :(%(1' 23( 3:%
'9B. 81,7 '9B& 81,7 '9B0 81,7 '9B< 81,7
027+(5
%:' 7&6B. 7&6B& 7&6B0 7&6B< 86% &1 3:%
3:%
'97<3B. '97<3B& '97<3B0 '97<3B< 237,21 6,&$ྥࡅᶆ‽
5(*,67 6(1625 81,7
5(*6B) 86% .(< %2$5'
3&8 &219 3:%
237,21
36 81,7 3:% ᪥ᮏྥࡅ)*㺱㺡㺼㺷ᶆ‽
5(*6B5
33' '6:B5 7& 0& 2=)0 36)0 237,21 )$;
3&66
+'' 5DLG
33' /68 81,7
237,21
&66 &66 36)0 /' 3:%
5,*+7 '225 81,7 0)3& $&5( /'B.
3&, 3:%
Synchronous Motor
I/O ASIC Load control Output
Spread (Solenoid)
Spectrum LSU CLK 2nd TC HV
Not mount
DA converter
Analog Sensor
DC Power FW Analog SW
Supply
CPU DC Motor Control
MFPC
H8S/2373
Mother URAT
I2Cbus
CLK CRUM
LSU FAN Motor
Data (D0-D15)
Address (A0-A20)
LSU (LD)
CPLD
Sensor Input
I2Cbus
Coin Vender
I2Cbus EEPROM
(64kbit)
FLASH
(16Mbit)
SRAM
(1Mbit)
2
2 ‘13/Nov
㻡㼜㼕㼚 㻿㻭㼀㻭
㻯㻺 㻯㻺
㻡㼂㻻⣔ 㻡㼂㻸⣔
㻿㻼㻰 㻳㻴㻙㻡㼜㼕㼚
㻿㼘㼕㼐㼑 㻿㻰 㻿㻯㻝㻥㻢 㻿㻯㻠㻝㻤 㻯㻺
㻿㼃 㻠㻳㻮 㼒㼛㼞㻌㻻㼚㻌㻮㼛㼍㼞㼐
㼁㻭㻾㼀㻔㻝㼏㼔㻕
㻝㻚㻞㻣㼂 㻝㻚㻞㻣㼂
㻸㼂㻰㻿㻌㻔㻸㻯㻰㻕
㻸㼂㻰㻿㻌㻔㻿㼏㼍㼚㻕
㻰㻰㻾㻟㻌㻻㼚㻌㻮㼛㼍㼞㼐
㻿㻰 㻿㻯㻝㻥㻢 㻿㻯㻝㻤㻡㻴
D. MFP control PWB
㻝㻳㻮㻌
㻿㼛㼏㼗㼑㼠 䠄㻞㻳㼎㼇㼤㻝㻢㼉㻌㼤㻌㻠㼜㼏㼟䠅 㻝㻚㻤㼂 㻰㻰㻾㻟㻌㻝㻚㻡㼂 㼁㻿㻮㻌㻴㼁㻮
㻿㻯㻝㻥㻢 㻿㻯㻝㻤㻡㻽 㻠㼜㼛㼞㼠
㻰㻰㻾㻟㻙㻤㻜㻜 㻟㻚㻟㼂 㻟㻚㻟㼂 㻯㼘㼛㼏㼗㻳㼑㼚
㻿㻸㻟㻤㻜㻜㻜
㻢㻹㻮㻛㻿㼑㼏
㻰㻰㻾㻞㻛㻟
㻿㻼㻵㻛㻿㻰 㻿㻭㼀㻭㻌㻵㻲
㻿㻰㻴㻯㻌㻯㼘㼍㼟㼟㻢
㻵㻲
㻯㻺㻌㼁㼜㼐㼍㼠㼑
㼁㻿㻮㻌㻞㻚㻜㻌㻴㼛㼟㼠
㼁㻿㻮㻞㻚㻜㻌㻵㻲 㻠㻤㻜㻹㼎㼜㼟
㻳㻼㻵㻻
㻴㼛㼟㼠
㻝㻳㼎㼜㼟
㻸㻭㻺㻌㻶㻭㻯㻷 .ON INTERRUPTION AREA 㻲㻼㻰㻸㻵㻺㻷
㻾㻶㻠 㻡 㻸㻯㻰㻯㻌㻵㻲 㼀㼞㼍㼚㼟㼙㼕㼠㼠㼑㼞
/. WHEN ,!. STANDBY
㻲㻼㻰㻸㻵㻺㻷
㻱㼠㼔㼑㼞㻼㻴㼅 㻳㻹㻵㻵 㻿㻯㻺㻌㻵㻲
㻱㼠㼔㼑㼞㻹㻭㻯 㻾㼑㼏㼑㼕㼢㼑㼞
㻝㻜㻛㻝㻜㻜㻛㻝㻳 㻸㼂㻰㻿㻌㻔㻿㼏㼍㼚㻕
㻝㻜㻛㻝㻜㻜㻛㻝㻳
㻔㻾㼀㻸㻤㻞㻝㻝㻱㻳㻕
㻲㻼㻰㻸㻵㻺㻷
㼁㻿㻮㻌㻰㼑㼢㼕㼏㼑 㼁㻿㻮㻞㻚㻜㻌㻵㻲 㼀㼞㼍㼚㼟㼙㼕㼠㼠㼑㼞
㻸㼂㻰㻿㻌㻔㻸㻿㼁㻕
㼀㼅㻼㻱㻙㻮㻌㻯㻺 㼁㻿㻮㻌㻞㻚㻜㻌㻰㼑㼢㼕㼏㼑 㻰㼑㼢㼕㼏㼑 㻾㼑㼡㼟 㻸㻿㼁㻌㻵㻲 㻸㻿㼁㻌㻼㼃㻮
㻠㻤㻜㻹㼎㼜㼟 㻸㼂㻰㻿
㼁㻭㻾㼀㻔㻝㼏㼔㻕 㻭 㻿㻵㻯 㻾㼑㼏㼑㼕㼢㼑㼞
㼁㻭㻾㼀 㻸㼂㻰㻿㻌㻔㻸㻿㼁㻌㻯㻸㻷㻒㻿㼅㻺㻯㻕
㻔㻝㼏㼔㻕
㻵㻺㼀
㻵㻺㼀 㻔㻝㻛㻠㼏㼔㻕
㻔㼚㻲㻭㼄㻝㻞㼋㻼㻵㻯㼋㻵㻺㼀㻕 㻼㻻㻲
㻵㻺㼀
㻔㻝㻛㻟㼏㼔㻕 㻵㻞㻯㻔㻝㻛㻟㼏㼔㻕 㻸㼂㻰㻿㻌㻔㻸㻯㻰㻕
㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘㼘㼑㼞 㻵㻞㻯㻌㻥㻡㻷㻴㼦
㻵㻺㼀㻔㼃㼍㼗㼑㼁㼜㻕
㻵㻺㼀
㻔㻞㻛㻟㼏㼔㻕 㻵㻞㻯㻔㻞㻛㻟㼏㼔㻕
㻾㼀㻯
㻮㼛㼍㼞㼐㻌㼠㼛㻌㻮㼛㼍㼞㼐㻌㻯㼛㼚㼚㼑㼏㼠㼛㼞
㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘㼘㼑㼞
㻼㻵㻯 㻼㻯㼁㻌㻼㼃㻮
㻵㻞㻯 㼁㻭㻾㼀㻔㻝㼏㼔㻕
㻵㻺㼀㻔㻿㼘㼑㼑㼜㻕 㻟㻢㻜㻷㻴㼦 㼚㻲㻭㼄㻝㻞㼋㻼㻵㻯㼋㻵㻺㼀
㻵㻺㼀 㻹㼕㼏㼛㼚㻚
㻔㻟㻛㻟㼏㼔㻕 㻵㻞㻯㻔㻟㻛㻟㼏㼔㻕 㻱㻱㻼㻾㻻㻹
㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘㼘㼑㼞 㻵㻞㻯 㻞㻡㻢㼗㼎
㻟㻢㻜㻷㻴㼦 㻲㻭㼄㻔㻝㼟㼠㻕
㼁㻭㻾㼀㻔㻞㼏㼔㻕
㻱㼠㼔㼑㼞㻹㻭㻯 㼁㻭㻾㼀 㻼㻯㻵㼑㻌㻵㻲 㻼㻯㻵㼑㻌㻵㻲 㻸㼛㼏㼍㼘㻌㻮㼡㼟 㻯㻼㻸㻰
㻝㻜㻛㻝㻜㻜㻛㻝㻳 㻔㻝㻝㼏㼔㻕 㻔㻠㼘㼍㼚㼑㻕 㻔㻝㼘㼍㼚㼑㻕 㻵㻲 㻸㼛㼏㼍㼘㻌㻮㼡㼟 㻱㻼㻹㻞㻠㻜
㼁㻭㻾㼀㻔㻝㼏㼔㻕
㻰㻿㼁㻮㻌㻯㻺
㻔㻾㻵㻯㻌㻒㻌㻼㻯㻵㻌㻒㻌
㼂㼑㼚㼐㼑㼞㻕
㼁㻭㻾㼀
㻾㻿㻞㻟㻞㻯
㻸㼑㼢㼑㼘
㻯㼛㼚㼢㼑㼞㼠㼑㼞 㼁㻭㻾㼀㻔㻝㼏㼔㻕 㻲㻸㻭㻿㻴㻌㻰㻵㻹㻹
㻼㻯㻵㼑㻌㼤㻠㻌㼓㼑㼚㻝 㻲㻸㻭㻿㻴㻌㻰㻵㻹㻹
㻿㼑㼞㼕㼍㼘㻌㻯㻺㻝 㻞㻚㻡㻳㼎㼜㼟 㻟㻞㻹㻮
㻿㻻㻯㻷㻱㼀
㻔㼂㼑㼚㼐㼑㼞㻌㻒㻌 㼁㻭㻾㼀 㻔㻰㻿㻷㻌㻻㼜㼠㻚㻕
㻼㻯㻵㻕 㼁㻭㻾㼀㻔㻝㼏㼔㻕
㼁㻭㻾㼀
㻿㼑㼞㼕㼍㼘㻌㻯㻺㻞
㻔㻰㼑㼎㼡㼓㻕 㼁㻭㻾㼀㻔㻝㼏㼔㻕 㻼㻯㻵㼑㻌㼤㻝㻌㼓㼑㼚㻝㻌㻞㻚㻡㻳㼎㼜㼟 㻭㻯㻾㻱㻌㻻㼜㼠 㻭㻯㻾㻱㻌㻼㼃㻮
㻯㻺 㻔㻻㼜㼠㻚㻕㻌㼂㼕㼞㼓㼛㻞㻌㻾㻿㻼㻲
㻹㼛㼠㼔㼑㼞㻌㻼㼃㻮
㻲㻭㼄㻔㻞㼚㼐㻕 㻲㻭㼄㻔㻞㼚㼐㻕㻌 㻔㻿㼠㼐㻚㻕㻌㼂㼕㼞㼓㼛㻞㻌㻰㻿㻼㻲
㻔㻻㼜㼠㻚㻕 㻯㻺 㼁㻭㻾㼀㻔㻞㼏㼔㻕
㼁㻿㻮㻌㻞㻚㻜㻌㻴㼛㼟㼠
㼁㻿㻮㻌㻴㼛㼟㼠 㻠㻤㻜㻹㼎㼜㼟 㼜㼛㼞㼠㻌㻤
㼀㼅㻼㻱㻙㻭㻌㻯㻺
㻔㻾㼑㼍㼞㻕 㼜㼛㼞㼠㻌㻝
㼁㻿㻮㻌㻴㼛㼟㼠 㼜㼛㼞㼠㻌㻜㻛㻞
㻴㼑㼍㼐㼑㼞㻌
㻔㻰㼑㼎㼡㼓㻕 㻸㼍㼚㼑㻌㻝㻙㻠
㻼㻯㻵㼑㻌㻵㻲
㼁㻿㻮㻌㼤㻝㻜 㻿㻼㻵
㼂㻳㻭㻌㻯㻺 㻔㻠㼘㼍㼚㼑㻕
㼂㻳㻭
㻔㻰㼑㼎㼡㼓㻕 㻿㻭㼀㻭
㻰㻹㻵 㻰㻹㻵 㻿㻭㼀㻭 㻯㻺㻌㼤㻌㻞
㻔㻰㼑㼎㼡㼓㻕
㼂㻙㼎㼥㻙㼛㼚㼑
㻵㼚㼠㼑㼘 㻼㻯㻵㼑㻌㻵㻲 㻸㼍㼚㼑㻌㻡 㻼㻯㻵㼑㻌㼤㻝
㻔㻰㼑㼎㼡㼓㻕
㻵㼚㼠㼑㼘 㻔㻝㼘㼍㼚㼑㻕 㻯㻺
㻼㼕㼚㼑㼢㼕㼑㼣
㻵㻯㻴㻤 㻯㻲
㻸㼂㻰㻿
㻰㻡㻞㻡 㻼㻭㼀㻭
㻯㻲 㻌㻯㻺
㻯㻲
㻡㼂㻸㼋㻞⣔
㻤㻳㻮
㻰㻰㻾㻞㻛㻟 㻼㻯㻵㼑㻌㻵㻲 㻔㻭㼀㻻㻹㻌㻼㼞㼛㼓㼞㼍㼙㻕 㼂㻾㻰㻝㻝 㻿㻯㻠㻝㻤
㻵㻲 㻿㻹㼎㼡㼟 㻸㻼㻯
㻔㻝㼘㼍㼚㼑㻕 㻵㻿㻸㻢㻟㻝㻠 㻵㻯㻴㻌㻝㻚㻜㻡㼂
3.3V
DSPFcntPWB
1.8V Page Memory
CCD-R PWB 256MBYTE(256Mbitx8)
(DSPF side) Tr RGB Rx FPD Link
10V Tr 35bit
Tr AFE
Tr SCN LVDS IC Tx
3line color CCD
Tr 19.661MHz
CLK ASIC 28bit Image data
Tr AFE_CS 10V/5V/3V DRIVER
CS3
Serial 2 systems 12→10V CTRL_A10V 1.5V
12→5V CTRL_A5V
5→3.3V 3.3V
CTRL_A3.3V
CPU
DRIVER H8S/2373
motor (74VHCT
Various sensors CS2 CS0orCS1
244)
F-ROM
SRAM
(On-board)
DRIVER PWB LED DRIVER CS4
F-ROM
(For saving Shading DATA)
LED
24VPD
12V
5V #OMMUNITARIAN
3.3V etc.
3.3V 5VO
Power
1.8V DSPF Model supply
SCNcntPWB
CCD----F
CCD FPWB
F PWB
PWB
(本体側
(本体側)
本体側
( )) Tr Page Memory 4O #0U
10V Tr 256MBYTE(256Mbitx8)
Tr AFE RGB
3line color CCD
Tr CPUCLK
Tr line buf
(8Mx16bit)
Tr AFE_CS 19.661MHz CLK
DRIVER line buf
(8Mx16bit)
clk LVDS IC Rx
Rx FPD Link 28bit
35bit RSPF Model
32bit bus MotherPWB
CS3
IPD/DOCC ASIC
12→10V CTRL_A10V
12→5V CTRL_A5V CS4
RSPF UN 5→3.3V CTRL_A3.3V
1.2V
CPUCLK
Mirror 3.3V
MOTOR 24V Motor MOTOR
DRIVER DRIVER
24VPD
5VN LED
151他ICs LED E2PROM
DRIVER 24VPD FlashROM
PWB (On-board)
CS0orCS6
MHPsensor
5VPWM
OCSW
CS2
SRAM
CPU
5VO RSPF Power H8S/2373 UART ETC
SPED
5VPWM
CS5
Mother PWB
SEL_A/B/#
HC151 Sensors
5VN
MTP IC
LVDS PWB ORS LED
24V
Touch panel
CPLD
DCDC 24V
LEDVCC s ,#$ KIND DETECTION
LED
backlight PNL_SEL0
LCD : 10.1icn
DCDC
3.3V 3.3V 5V
Tx Auditor(TBD
28bit
CCFT_CPU PNL_SEL0
/CCFT
nLCD_DISP
CPLD ( ON/OFF )
Rx
Image data 28bit
5V
Document size
light reception 5V
HOME KEY
5VO
nWU_KEY
nPWRSW
WU_LED
POW_LED 5VO
5VO
Buzzer
nHOME_KEY 24VPD FET 24V 24V Power
supply
HOME LED
LED drive
nHOME_LED circuit 12V CPU 12V
12V
WU_KEY (Reset key)
3.3V
PWRSW (Soft SW) 3.3V
WU_LED (Reset key LED)
POW_LED (Main power LED)
5V
PCU_REQ
USB CV PWB
Keyboard
ENAB ENAB_in
㻟㻚㻟㼂 㻟㻚㻟㼂
㻷㻾㻯㻝㻜㻞
㻽㻮㻝
㻯㻯㻲㼀㼋㼛㼡㼠 㻯㻯㻲㼀㼋㼛㼡㼠 㻛㻯㻯㻲㼀㼋㼕㼚 㻛㻯㻯㻲㼀
㻰㻵㻿㻼㼋㼛㼡㼠
㻼㻿㼀㻤㻠㻞㻣㼁㻾
㻵㻯㻮㻝
㻰㻵㻿㻼㼋㼛㼡㼠 㻟㻚㻟㼂
㻟㻚㻟㼂 㻮㻭㻝㻣㻮㻹㻝㻤㻲㻼
㻵㻯㻡
㻝㻤㼂㼋㻸㻯㻰 㻝㻤㼂㼋㻸㻯㻰 㻞㻠㼂
㻾㻼㻝㻟㻝㻿㻟㻟㻝㻰㻙㻱㻞㻙㻲
㻵㻯㻠
㼚㻸㻯㻰㼋㻰㻵㻿㻼
㻡㻞㻞㻣㻝㻙㻜㻠㻢㻥 㻟㻚㻟㼂 㻡㼂
㻯㻺㻞
㼀㼛㼡㼏㼔㻌㻼㼍㼚㼑㼘 /YL(Y1) /YL(Y1)
XH(X1) XH(X1)
/XL(X2) /XL(X2)
YH(Y2) YH(Y2)
㻴㻹㻙㻷㻱㼅㻌㻼㼃㻮 㻮㻹㻜㻡㻮㻙㻳㻴㻿㻙㼀㻮㼀
㻯㻺㻝 㻯㻺 㻯㻺
㻴㼛㼙㼑㻌㼗㼑㼥 㼃㼕㼞㼑㻌㼔㼍㼞㼚㼑㼟㼟
㻴㼛㼙㼑㻌㻸㻱㻰
㻼㼛㼣㼑㼞㻙
㼟㼍㼢㼕㼚㼓㻌㻿㼃
㻼㼛㼣㼑㼞㻙
㼟㼍㼢㼕㼚㼓
㻸㻱㻰
㼁㻿㻮㻌㻯㼛㼚㼚㼑㼏㼠㼛㼞
㻯㻺 㻯㻺
㻿㻴㻵㻱㻸㻰㻝 㻯㻺㻝 㼃㼕㼞㼑㻌㼔㼍㼞㼚㼑㼟㼟
㻳㻺㻰
㻰㻝㻗
㻰㻝㻙
㼂㻮㼁㻿㻝
㼚㻵㻺㻲㻻㼋㻸㻱㻰 㻯㻺㻟
㻯㻺 㻯㻺
㻷㼑㼥㼎㼛㼍㼞㼐 㻞㻠㼜㼕㼚 㼁㻿㻮㻌㻯㻻㻺㼂㻌㻼㼃㻮 㻯㻺
㻳㻺㻰 㼃㼕㼞㼑㻌㼔㼍㼞㼚㼑㼟㼟
㻯㻺㻝 㻰㻝㻗
㻜㻜㻌㻢㻞㻜㻜㻌㻡㻞㻠㻌㻟㻟㻜㻌㻜㻜㻜㻗 㻰㻝㻙
㼂㻮㼁㻿
G. LSUcnt PWB
TH
SCLK/TXD/RXD 3
MicroWire BUS
CS K/C/M/Y
Chip select (LDD) 4
CS EEP-ROM K/C/M/Y
Chip select (EEP-ROM) 4
CLK_C_EN
ID[0:1]
Reset CLK_M_EN
Reset Input Reset IC ASIC CLK_A_EN
CHIP-2
Motor Control PGM_CK
PGM_START
IRQ1 3
JOBEND_INT Polygon (PGM_BRAKE)
PCU O.C.
Polygon
ASIC PCU I/F Motor
PGM_LOCK
CHIP-2 Control Motor
Register
SCK etc...
RSV_DAT
3 TRANS_RST FAN_PWM
FAN O.C. O.C. LSU
ASIC Control FANSTABLE FAN
Synchronous Serial CHIP-2
communication SCL
SDA
TRANS_DAT
WP I2C BUS 3
COM_FIFO
ASIC
CHIP-2 GAIN FIX
LSU_ASIC MSET_K/C/M/Y 4
CHIP-2
LD Control
OSC SYSCLK
S/S
(System CK) Serial P4_K(ENB)
ASIC P3_K(WAIT)
D/A I/F
CHIP-2 P4_C(ENB)
P3_C(WAIT) 4
ECLK ECLK
P2(SH)
LVDS/Driver
HSYNC HSYNC
ASIC BD
FPD-LINK/Receiver
CHIP-2
ASIC
CHIP-2
35 : 5 8 DT_K1+- 2
Channel A : K1
DT_K2+- 2
Channel B : K2
LD
35 : 5 8 DT_C1+- 2
Channel C : C1
DT_C2+- 2
Channel D : C2
VIDEO IF_ACT
ID[0:0]
MFP Reset
Motor Control
Polygon
IRQ2 Motor
PCU I/F
Control
Synchronous Serial SD CLK
Register FAN
communication SCK etc... Control
RSV_DAT
TRANS_RST
SCL
SDA
TRANS_DAT WP I2C BUS 3
COM_FIFO
System CK
LSU_ASIC
CHIP-1
VSYNC_K/C LD Control
Horizontal Scan/
ECLK Serial P4_M(ENB)
Vertical Scan
Timing Control D/A I/F P3_M(WAIT)
HSYNC
P4_Y(ENB)
P3_Y(WAIT) 4
LD Control
(APC/ENB)
BD
4 INT ST K/C/M/Y
FPD-LINK/Receiver
35 : 5 8 DT_M1+- 2
Channel A : M1
DT_M2+- 2
Channel B : M2
35 : 5 8 DT_Y1+- 2
Channel C : Y1
DT_Y2+- 2
Channel D : Y2
PROGRAM
ASPCLK FLASH ROM
ABITCLK 16bit
MJ1 ARXD
16Mb
H. FAX section
+5VA +5V
+5VA
Filter
FAX_RXD(D)+
FAX_RXD(D)-
CI
CI- FAX_TXD(D)+
Detection FAX_TXD(D)-
Polarity FAX_CTS(D)-
HS1-
inversion
FAX ASIC FAX_RTS(D)-
Detection HS2-
(Not mount) FAX_RXD(CS)+
MB87F4930 FAX_RXD(CS)-
CION FAX_TXD(CS)+
FAX_TXD(CS)-
150VON FAX_CTS(CS)-
S relay
+5V2 FAX_RTS(CS)-
EXHS- CNCT_FAX-
JTAG JTAG
MRON
Connector
14pin
SON1 (Not mount)
CPU
CID-
Download Log SH7706 Voltage
UART 1.9V Regulator 3.3V
Connector
+24V (Not mount) R1173S001B
PIC +12 PICPGM_EN
+12V +24
CI Fi ter microcomputer Spred
UART Crystal
CI Fi ter PIC16F690 Spectrum Resonator
+5V2
CY25811SXCT 14.7456MHz
SON2
WUP_FAX-
voltage TELID
Operation in 1W/7W level
energy-save mode voltage TELID2
level
&52( %PV HQT &52( OQFGN 5%0 %PV /QVJGT /(2%
4Z& 7#46$A6:&
4$A6Z&A5%0
4Z& 6Z& 5EJOKV +PX
1%
6Z&A&52( 6Z& 7#46$A4:&
5EJKOKV +PX 1% %27 4$A4Z&A5%0
6Z& 4Z& *5 1% 5EJOKV +PX
%27 4Z&A&52( #=? %2.& 7#46$A465A0
1% 5EJKOKV +PX 4$A465A5%0
*5 +1 '2/6%0 1%
&=? 5EJOKV +PX
7#46$A%65A0
5EJKOKV +PX 1% 465A&52( 4$A%65A5%0
+1 5EJOKV +PX
%65A&52( 1%
1% 5EJKOKV +PX
6Z& 7#46$A4:&
2%7A4Z& 4$A4:&A2%7
1% 5EJOKV +PX
4Z& 7#46$A6:&
2%7A6Z& 4$A6:&A2%7
5EJOKV +PX
1%
+1 RQTV 7#46$A%65A0
I. Serial communication
2%7A&54 4$A%65A2%7
1% 5EJOKV +PX
+1 RQTV 7#46$A465A0
2%7A&64 4$A465A2%7
5EJOKV +PX
1%
7#46%A6:&
.57 4%A6Z&A2+%
5EJOKV +PX
1%
6Z& /QVJGT 4Z& 7#46%A4:&
64#05A 4%A4Z&A2+%
5EJOKV +PX 5EJOKV +PX 1% 5EJOKV +PX
2+% 2146%
4Z& 6Z& .57 #5+%
458A 4%A%.4A2+%
g -%/; 5EJOKV +PX
1%
5EJOKV +PX 5EJOKV +PX 2146%
5%. 5%- 4%A4'3A2+%
5%- 1% 5EJOKV +PX
5EJOKV +PX 5EJOKV +PX 7#46$A6:&
6Z&A(#: & 4$A6:&A(#:&
6Z&A(#: & 7#46$A4:&
4Z&A(#: & 4$A4:&A(#:&
4Z&A(#: &
.8&5 7#46$A6:&
6Z&A(#: %5 4$A6:&A(#:%5
6Z&A(#: %5
%27 7#46$A4:&
4Z&A(#: %5 4$A4:&A(#:%5 /2(%
6Z& 4Z& 4Z&A(#: %5
&=?
7#46$A465
+1 4$A465A(#:%5
&64A.%% %27 1% 5EJOKV +PX
#=?
1% 1% *5 7#46$A%65
4$A%65A(#:%5
+1 5EJOKV +PX 5EJOKV +PX
+1 #5+% &54A.%%
1% 1% 4$A)2+A%65A2%+ 2146$
4$A)21A465A2%+ 2146$
.<#)0 +1 1RVKQPCN
64%A.%% .%% 4$A6:&A2%+ 7#46$A6:&
1% 1% 1RVKQPCN 2%+ 57$ 4$A4:&A2%+ 7#46$A4:&
4$A&64A2%+ 7#46$A6:&
4$A&54A2%+ 7#46$A4:&
'&32:(56833/< 6$1.(1+/
)
9ROWDJH
&RQYHUVLRQ
7$+9 9
$&3:% 9
9
' 9 '
5& 9
9
) 91
9
a
a
$9
1)
(1) 41cpm machine (120V)
0$,132:(56:
$&,1 ) 12702817
2. Power line diagram
/
$9 $
)
7$+9
95
1
):
*HQHUDWLQJ
15 &LUFXLW )
9ROWDJH
) 7$+9 &RQYHUVLRQ
9R
7$+9 9/
:+/ :+1
& &
A. AC power line diagram (41cpm machine)
:$50+($7(56(7 2SWLRQDO
:+6: +/3:%
/
:+3:% /
2SWLRQDO
5<
: 㻿㻯㻺㻌㼡㼚㼕㼠 ,179
:+1 6&1
% +($7(5 %
:+/ 5< 2SWLRQDO
1&
:+B&17
12 7' 7' 7' 7' +/B35
7 * 7 * 7 * 7 *
9
7 665 7 665 7 665 7 665
㻯㻿
+/287B86 +/287B80 +/287B8: +/287B/0
:
㻰㻱㻿㻷
: :
㻻㻼㼀㻵㻻㻺
'(6. '(6.
+($7(5 +($7(5
㼐㼞㼍㼣㼑㼞
2SWLRQDO 2SWLRQDO
+/B/0
9: 7+(50267$7 76B/0
9DF$0D[Υ
$ $
+/B86
: 㻸㻿㼁
/68
+($7(5 9DF$0D[Υ 7+(50267$7 76B80
2SWLRQDO
7+(50267$7 76B86
)86,1*81,7
'&32:(56833/< 6$1.(1++
5HDFWRU )
9ROWDJH
P+ &RQYHUVLRQ
7$+9 9
$&3:% $ 9
9
' 9 '
5& 9
9
) 91
9
a
a
7$+9
1)
(2) 41cpm machine (230V)
0$,132:(56:
$&,1 ) 12702817
/
7$+9 $
)
7$+9
95
)
1
7$+9 ):
*HQHUDWLQJ
15 &LUFXLW )
9ROWDJH
) ) 7$+9 &RQYHUVLRQ
9R
7$+9 7$+9 9/
:+/ :+1
& &
:$50+($7(56(7 2SWLRQDO
:+6: +/3:%
/
:+3:% /
2SWLRQDO
5<
㻿㻯㻺㻌㼡㼚㼕㼠 ,179
:
:+1 6&1
% +($7(5 %
:+/ 5< 2SWLRQDO
1&
:+B&17
12 7' 7' 7' 7' +/B35
7 * 7 * 7 * 7 *
9
㻰㻱㻿㻷
: :
㻻㻼㼀㻵㻻㻺
'(6. '(6.
+($7(5 +($7(5
㼐㼞㼍㼣㼑㼞
2SWLRQDO 2SWLRQDO
+/B/0
9: 7+(50267$7 76B/0
9DF$0D[Υ
$ $
+/B86
: 㻸㻿㼁
/68
+($7(5 9DF$0D[Υ 7+(50267$7 76B80
2SWLRQDO
7+(50267$7 76B86
)86,1*81,7
'&32:(56833/< 6$1.(1+/
)
9ROWDJH
&RQYHUVLRQ
7$+9 9
$&3:% 9
9
' 9 '
5& 9
9
) 91
9
a
a
$9
1)
(1) 51cpm machine (120V)
0$,132:(56:
$&,1 ) 12702817
/
$9 $
)
7$+9
95
1
):
*HQHUDWLQJ
15 &LUFXLW )
9ROWDJH
) 7$+9 &RQYHUVLRQ
9R
7$+9 9/
:+/ :+1
& &
B. AC power line diagram (51cpm machine)
:$50+($7(56(7 2SWLRQDO
:+6: +/3:%
/
:+3:% /
2SWLRQDO
5<
: 㻿㻯㻺㻌㼡㼚㼕㼠 ,179
:+1 6&1
% +($7(5 %
:+/ 5< 2SWLRQDO
1&
:+B&17
12 7' 7' 7' 7' +/B35
7 * 7 * 7 * 7 *
9
㻰㻱㻿㻷
: :
㻻㻼㼀㻵㻻㻺
'(6. '(6.
+($7(5 +($7(5
㼐㼞㼍㼣㼑㼞
2SWLRQDO 2SWLRQDO
+/B/0
9: 7+(50267$7 76B/0
9DF$0D[Υ
$ $
+/B86
: 㻸㻿㼁
/68
+($7(5 9DF$0D[Υ 7+(50267$7 76B80
2SWLRQDO
7+(50267$7 76B86
)86,1*81,7
'&32:(56833/< 6$1.(1++
)
9ROWDJH
&RQYHUVLRQ
7$+9 9
$&3:% 9
9
' 9 '
5& 9
9
) 91
9
a
a
7$+9
1)
(2) 51cpm machine (230V)
0$,132:(56:
$&,1 ) 12702817
/
7$+9 $
)
7$+9
95
)
1
7$+9 ):
*HQHUDWLQJ
15 &LUFXLW )
9ROWDJH
) ) 7$+9 &RQYHUVLRQ
9R
7$+9 7$+9 9/
:+/ :+1
& &
:$50+($7(56(7 2SWLRQDO
:+6: +/3:%
/
:+3:% /
2SWLRQDO
5<
㻿㻯㻺㻌㼡㼚㼕㼠 ,179
:
:+1 6&1
% +($7(5 %
:+/ 5< 2SWLRQDO
1&
:+B&17
12 7' 7' 7' 7' +/B35
㻰㻱㻿㻷
: :
㻻㻼㼀㻵㻻㻺
'(6. '(6.
+($7(5 +($7(5
㼐㼞㼍㼣㼑㼞
2SWLRQDO 2SWLRQDO
+/B/0
9: 7+(50267$7 76B/0
9DF$0D[Υ
$ $
+/B86
: 㻸㻿㼁
/68
+($7(5 9DF$0D[Υ 7+(50267$7 76B80
2SWLRQDO
7+(50267$7 76B86
)86,1*81,7
A B C D E
㻰㻯㻌㻼㻻㼃㻱㻾㻌㻸㻵㻺㻱㻌㻰㻵㻭㻳㻾㻭㻹㻌
FUM INT24V1
GND
INT24V1
24V3 24V3 24V3
RDSW
DSW_R GND HLPCD TNM_M TNM_K 1TURC CPFC CPUC1 CPUC2 PRM PCSS L
4 5VN 5VN 4
INT24V1 INT24V1 41cpm
TNM_Y TNM_C 1TURC_R DMCL
GND WEBD
5VN DRIVER SUB
3.3V 3.3V GND PWB ADUMH DMBK BTM
51cpm
5VN 5VN GND GND
6.3A/250V FUSE 12V 12V 5VNPD
24V1 24V3 DMC DMM DMY
INT24V1 INT24V1
6.3A/250V FUSE 24V2 OSM ADUGS MPFS HL_PR
C. DC power line diagram
㐜ᘏᅇ㊰
INT5V 5VN 5VN HL_LM
24V3 5VN GND 5VNPD
FET
㐜ᘏᅇ㊰
GND GND GND RD I/F PWB HL_US
24V2 FET GND GND
INT24V2 INT24V2 INT24V2 HL_UW
/INT_CNT 5VN
INT24V1in GND
GND GND INT24V2
GND DVM_CL DVM_K
GND
GND
INT24V1in INT24V2
3 /INT_CNT 5VN CRUM 2ndTC PWB 3
INT24V2 GND (C/M/Y/K) GND
24V2
6.3A/250V FUSE
24V2 24V2 GND GND
MC PWB 1stTC PWB
㐜ᘏᅇ㊰
INT24V2 INT24V2
AC PWB
WH PWB
INT5V
5VO PW KEY
24V3 24V3 GND PWB
3.3V FAX 3.3V INT24V2
5VO MAIN 5VO TEL GND CPFM
5VL PWB 5VL LIU
GND GND PWB
5VN HOME KEY
INT24V2 GND PWB
5VL HDD LSUSS_BK
GND
5VN ORS PD
24V3
3.3V
GND
5VO
5VL
GND
5VL
GND
INT5V
GND
GND PWB
INT5V
3.3V 3.3V
24V_LVDS
5VO
5VN
GND
5VN
GND
GND
24V3 24V3
6.3A/250V FUSE 12V 12V
24V5 24V5 5VSPF 5VSPF
GND GND 5VO 5VO RSPF/DSPF
5VN 5VN FINISHER SCAN CNT 5VPD 5VPD
PWB 3.3V 3.3V
6.3A/250V FUSE GND GND
24V4 24V4
1
GND GND 1
5VN 5VN LCC
PSU
24V4
GND
5VN DESK 5VO
FAX INFO
LED
option
JAPAN ONLY
A B C D E
$&&25' )*1' $&3:% 9+51 9+51 027+(53:%
&1 %39/ &1 &1 &1
96HULHV! /B,1 06:1RXW 06:1RXW '*1' '*1'
1& 1& 1& 1& 36 5(' '&3:% '*1' '*1'
1B,1 06:/RXW 06:/RXW 9/ 9/
㼛㼞 %39/. 9/ 9/
&1 %39/ &1 36 5(' 92 92
/B,1 /B,1 /B,1 06:/LQ 06:/LQ %39+% 9
96HULHV! )* )* 1& 1& 1& 1& 36 06: 91
1B,1 1B,1 1B,1 06:1LQ 06:1LQ 9
㻵㼚㼘㼑㼠㻌㼏㼛㼚㼚㼑㼏㼠㼛㼞 )*1' %39/5 36 &1 9
65$7 9 3*1'
&1 %39+5 9 %39+
1B:+ '*1'
1& 1& %39+% 9+51
/B:+ &1 &1
'&&17 Q5< Q5<B&17
1& 1& Q2))B&17
'&&17 Q2)) 1& '*1'
+/3:% %%3$6. 3$396 %%3$6.
&1 &1 %39/( &1 3$396
/B+/ /B+/ 91
1& 1& 1& 1& 91
1 +/
1B+/ 1 +/
1B+/ 91 Ѝ 72/&&
72 /&& 3%
%39/ :+ 91 Ѝ 72,16(5725 3'
'*1'
&1 '*1' Ѝ 72/&& 3%
3. Actual wiring chart
6/59)6/39
9 9 )5203'
'6:5 36 9+51 &1
'6:B5 '6:B5
36 '6:B5
'6:B)
(/39(/59 ,179
'6:B5 '6:B5 ᯛᶵ3' *1'
36 '6:B) ᯛᶵ3& 91
'6:)
'6:B) %39+%
6367 &1
,179
$&3:% 3$ *1'
&1 913'
,179 ,179
+/3&'
91 91 91
+/3&' +/3&' +/3&'
'*1' *1' *1'
*3$
6/396/59)
:710B :710B :710B
710 :710B :710B :710B
71)'
71)' 71)' 71)'
'*1' *1' *1'
1& *1'
3$3963$/59 6059160391&
7RQHU 3&6)0B9 3&6)0B9 3&6)0B9 3&6)0B9
3&6)0B/' 3&6)0B9 3&6)0B9 3&6)0B9
FRROLQJIDQ *1' 3&6)0B/' 3&6)0B/' 3&6)0B/'
3&6)0B/' 3&6)0B/' 3&6)0B/'
*1' *1' *1'
3$3963$/59 1& 1& 1&
7RQHU 3&6)0B9 1& 1& 1& 1& 5&)0B9
&
3&6)0
3&6)0B/'
/' 1& 1& 1& 1& 5&)0B/'
5&)0 /'
1&
FRROLQJIDQ
OL I *1' 1& 1& 1& 1& *1'
1& 1& 1& 3+'596 %%3+'66%
1& 1& 1&
')'6& 1& 1& 1&
*1'
*1'
*1'
*1'
')'363
B. Fusing section (P2)
)XVLQJVHFWLRQ
6059%6039%&
7+B80&6B,1
57+ 80 7+B80B,1 3&83:%
1RQFRQWDFW *1' 5&=5936 5&=5936 ')%'(35&')%'(65& 3+'596 &1
$ 7+B80&6B,1 $ 7+B80&6B,1 7+B80&6B,1
$ 7+B80B,1 $ 7+B80B,1 7+B80B,1 &1
6059%6039%& $ *1' $ *1' *1' ,179
57+ 86 7+B86B,1 $ 7+B86B,1 $ 7+B86B,1 7+B86B,1 *1'
&RQWDFW *1' $ *1' $ *1' *1' +/287B8:
1& $ 1& $ 1& 7+B/0B,1 7+B/0B,1 +/287B/0
1& $ 1& $ 1& *1' *1' +/287B86
$ 91 $ 91 91 +/287B80
$ :(%' $ :(%' :(%' +/B35
6059160391& $ *1' $ *1' *1' %%3+'66% 3+'596
91 91 5&=53,1
:(%' :(%'
:(%' *1' *1'
9+3/*1/
㻝㻣㻥㻞㻞㻤㻙㻟 1& 1& 1& 1& 7+B80B,1
1& 1& 1& 1& *1'
1& % 1& % 1& 1& 1& 1& 1& 7+B(;B,1
1& % 1& % 1& 1& 1& 1& 1& *1'
6059%6039%& 1& % 1& % 1& 1& 1& 1& 1& +/3&6
㼀㼛㻌㻼㻝㻜㻙㻡㻱
3&83:%
6HSDUDWLRQHOHFWURGH81B. 3+'596
78'B. 60391&60591 &1
78'B. 78'B. 78'B.
*1' *1' *1'
913'B78'B. 913'B78'B. 913'B78'B.
*36 37&B+($7 37&B+($7
%%3+'66%
+HDWHUHOHFWURGH
65$7
C. High voltage section (P3)
&1
37&81 *1'
37&HOHFWURGH
37& 37& &1 3$396 *1'
36 :+ %39+ QG7&3:% ,179 㻝 ,179
3*1' 㻞 *1'
7&B'$7$ 㻟 7&B'$7$
7&B&/. 㻠 7&B&/.
7&B/' 㻡 7&B/'
+9B5(0 +9B5(0
7& 7& 37&B(55 㻣 37&B(55
36 %/8( 36 37&B&/. 㻤 37&B&/.
%%3$6. %%3+'66%
3+'596
&1 %%3+.6
710B0B;% 710B0B;%
710B0B;$ 710B0B;$
9B710B0 9B710B0
9B710B0 9B710B0 710B0
710B0B% 710B0B%
'+3'B. 710B0B$ 710B0B$
'+3'B. '+3'B. 3+5 %%3+.6
*1' *1' 710B<B;% 710B<B;%
913'B'+3'B. 913'B'+3'B. 710B<B;$ 710B<B;$
5(*,675$7,216(1625 5(6,6(1625)
E. DV/DL/⁄Registration sensor/Process control sensor section (P5)
352&(66&21752/6(1625 913'
*1'
5(*6B)
5(*6B)B/('
6059%6039%& &1
913' 913'
*1' *1'
352&21 5(*6 )
5(*6B) 5(*6 )
5(*6B)
5(*6B)B/(' 5(*6B)B/('
6(162581 5(6,6(16255 1& 1& 1&
3&6B5 1& 1& 1& 1&
913' 1& 1& 1&
*1' 3&6B&/ 3&6B&/
5(*6B5 1& 1& 1&
5(*6B5B/(' 913' 913'
20521 *1' *1'
5(*6B5 5(*6B5
6059160391& 5(*6B5B/(' 5(*6B5B/('
3&66 3&66 3&66
3&66 9 9 9
1& 1& 1&
1& 1& 1& 1& UHVHUYHBLQ
1& 1& 1& 1& *1'
1& UHVHUYH)0B/'
1& *1'
1& UHVHUYH)0B9
33' 36๓㺜㺻㺙㺎 3+15+%83753+3+15+
913' 913' 913'
33' 33' 33'
*1' *1' *1'
*3$ 913' 913'
33' 33'
3681,7 *1' *1'
33' 36㺜㺻㺙㺎 %%3+'66%
913' 3+'596
33'
*1'
*3$
3&83:%
/'3:% /683:% &1
㸦1&㸧 *1'
&1 &1 ,179
'*1' '*1' $.B&6B. $.B&6B.
6'$B.& 6'$B.&
6&/B.& 6&/B.& $.B&6B((3B. $.B&6B((3B.
:3B.& :3B.& $.B&6B& $.B&6B&
'*1' '*1' $.B&6B((3B& $.B&6B((3B&
6'$B0< 6'$B0<
6&/B0< 6&/B0< $.B&6B0 $.B&6B0
:3B0< :3B0< $.B&6B((3B0 $.B&6B((3B0
'*1' '*1' $.B&6B< $.B&6B<
/'&+. /'&+.
/'&+. /'&+.
$.B&6B((3B< $.B&6B((3B<
F. LSU section (P6)
㻮㼛㼍㼞㼐㻌㼠㼛㻌㻮㼛㼍㼞㼐
&/.B1 &/.B1
&/.B3 &/.B3
&+B1 &+B1
&+B3 &+B3
'*1' '*1'
'*1' '*1'
3+5 3+5 &+B1 &+B1
%'3:% &1 &+B3 &+B3
'*1' '*1' (&/.B/68B1 (&/.B/68B1
Q%' Q%' (&/.B/68B3 (&/.B/68B3
&1
)$1B9
/68B)$1 )$1BQ5($'<
3*1'
6%3+.6
3+5
3DSHUIHHGXQLWVHFWLRQ 3&83:%
&/8' 3+15+%83753+3+15+ &=+596%837=6&=+596 3+'596 &1
913' 913' $ 913' $ 913'
&/8' &/8' $ &/8' $ &/8'
*1' *1' $ *1' $ *1'
*3$ &3('
913' 913' $ 913' $ 913'
&3(' &3(' $ &3(' $ &3('
*1' *1' $ *1' $ *1'
&63$3(5)(('81,7 &3)' *3$
91 91 $ 91 $ 91
&3)' &3)' $ &3)' $ &3)'
*1' *1' $ *1' $ *1'
*3$/ '6:B& ࠉ
91 91 $ 91 $
'6:B& '6:B& $ '6:B& $
*1' *1' $ *1' $
*3$
&63'
913' $ 913' $ 913'
&63' $ &63' $ &63'
'*1' $ *1' $ *1'
&66 *3$
1& 1&
'*1' $ *1' $ *1'
&66 $ &66 $ &66
&66 $ &66 $ &66
&66 $ &66 $ &66
&66 $ &66 $ &66
633+.6
&1
91
'6:B&
*1'
1& UHVHUYHBLQ
3+'596 %%3+'66%
%33$6.
6059160391& 6059160391&
&3)& &3)& &3)&
&3)& 9 9 9
&38& &38&
9 9
6059160391& &38& &38&
&38& 9 9
&38& 9 *1' *1'
&/80 &/80
&/80
*1'
&/80 $'80/ &1
%33+.6 3+5 ,179 ,179
,179 ,179 '5,9(5
&/80 $'80/B% $'80/B%
*1' $'80/B% $'80/B% 0$,13:%
&/80 $'80/B$ $'80/B$
%33+.6 3+5 $'80/B$ $'80/B$
%33+.6 3+5 3$396 %%3$6.
5IUDPH
+3)0 &1
,179 ,179
,179 ,179
+3)0B% +3)0B%
+3)0B% +3)0B%
+3)0B$ +3)0B$
+3)0B$ +3)0B$
%33+.6 3+5 3$39( %/8( %%3$(. %/8(
3)0 &1
,179 ,179
,179 ,179
3)0B% 3)0B%
3)0B% 3)0B%
3)0B$ 3)0B$
3)0B$ 3)0B$
%33+.6 3+5
3DSHUIHHGGULYH
550
,179 ,179
,179 ,179
550 %
550B% 550
550B%%
550B% 550B%
550B$ 550B$
550B$ 550B$
%33+.5 5(' 3+55 5(' 1& 1&
3URFHVVGULYH 3$396 %%3$6.
-DSDQRQO\
038&
9 038&
$33' &1 60391&60591
$33' $33'
'*1' '*1'
9/(' 9/('
*36
&1
1& *1' 1& 60391&60591
03/' 3+15+%83753+3+15+ 3+15+%83753+3+15+ 1& 9/(' 1& 9
03/' 1& 1& 03/' 03/' 1& *1' 1& 03)6 03)6
'*1' 1& 1& 03/' 1& 1& 03/' 1& *1' 1&
9/(' 1& 1& 9/(' 9/(' 1& *1' 1&
*36 03/' 1& *1' 1& 3+15+%83753+3+15+
'*1' 91 91 1& *1' 1& 9
03:' 9/(' 03:' 03:' 1& 1& 03)6 03('
91 91 03(' 03(' 03('
03:' 03:' '*1'
'*1' '*1' '*1' '*1' 9/('
'*1'
'*1'
'*1'
'*1'
'*1'
'*1'
')'363
'5,9(568%3:%
$'8+0 ')%'(35&')%'(65& 3$396 &1㸭&1
$'0+B$ $'0+B$ $'0+B$
$'0+B$ $'0+B$ $'0+B$
$'0+B% $'0+B% $'0+B%
$'0+B% $'0+B% $'0+B%
,179 ,179 ,179
,179 ,179 ,179
%%3+.6 3+5 %%3$6.
6059160391& &1
32)0B9 32)0B9 32)0B9
32)0B&17 32)0B&17 32)0B&17
32)0 3*1' 3*1' *1'
32)0B/' 32)0B/' 32)0B/'
6059160391& 32)0B/' 32)0B/'
32)0B9 6059160391&
9
I. Paper exit unit section (P9)
㸦1&
㸦1&
㸦1&
㸦1&
㸦1&
㸦1&
㸦1&
/*1/ 1& 1& 1& &1
1& 1& 1& :(%B0
:(%B0
B
3*1'
3*1'
3*1'
3*1'
3*1'
3*1'
913'
913'
913'
913'
913'
913'
'*1'
'*1'
'*1'
'*1'
'*1'
'*1'
32)0B9
32)0B9
32)0B9
32)0B9
32)0B&17
32)0B&17
32)0B&17
32)0B&17
')'363 66-& 66-&
6/396/59
:(%B0RXW
:(%0 :(%B0RXW
60391&60591
)8)0B9 )8)0B9
)8)0 )8)0B/' )8)0B/'
3*1' *1'
3+'596 %%3+'66%
&1
1& %70B%㸧 1& FSPPDFKLQH
1& %70B;%㸧 1& '5,9(568%3:% &30
1& '0B.B%㸧 1& &1 %70
1& '0B.B;%㸧 1& ,179 ,179
*1' &1 ,179 ,179
'0B&/B&17 '0&/B&17 %70B% %70B%
'0B&/B&. '0&/B&. %70B% %70B%
'0B&B(1 '0&B(1 %70B$ %70B$
'0B0B(1 '00B(1 %70B$ %70B$
'0B<B(1 '0<B(1 1& 1& 㼄㻴㻼㻙㻢 %%;+
B B
'0B.B&17 B
'0%NB&17 %%3$6. 3$396
'0B.B&. '0%NB&. &1 '0%.
'0B.B(1 '0%NB(1 ,179 ,179
*1' '*1' ,179 ,179
%70B&17 %70B&17 '0%.B% '0%.B%
%70B&. %70B&. '0%.B% '0%.B%
%70B(1 %70B(1 '0%.B$ '0%.B$
$'80B&17 $'808B&17 '0%.B$ '0%.B$
$'80B;$ $'808B$ 㻼㻴㻾㻙㻢 %%;+
$'80B$ $'808B$
$'80B;% $'808B% '0&
$'80B% $'808B% ,179 ,179
'0B.B527 '0%NB527 ,179 ,179
'0B&/B527 '0&/B527 '0&B% '0&B%
%70B527 %70B527 '0&B% '0&B%
*1' '*1' '0&B$ '0&B$
UHVHUYH)0B/' 1& 1& 1& '0&B$ '0&B$
%%3$6. 3$396 3+5 %%3+.6
'5,9(50$,13:%
&1 &1 &1
$'80B&17 $'80/&17
㹼
65$7
)*
'&3:%
&1 )520WR3
9
9+51 %39+%
&1 )520WR3
3*1'
9+51 %39+%
&1 )520WR3
91
9+51 %39+%
9 9
3*1' 3*1'
91 91
'*1' '*1' 3+'596 &1
'*1' '*1' *1'
'(6.&21752/3:% 7;'B'6. 7;'B'6. 7;'B'6.
5;'B'6. 5;'B'6. 5;'B'6.
'75B'6. '75B'6. '75B'6.
'65B'6. '65B'6. '65B'6.
5(6B'6. 5(6B'6. 5(6B'6.
75&B'6. 75&B'6. 75&B'6.
1&
%%3+'66%
(/39(/59
:+B/ '(6. :+B/ '(6.
:+ :+B1 '(6. :+B1 '(6.
)*1'
)*
'(6.237,21 65$7
)*
(/39(/59
&1$ 1& 1&
1& 1& 1&
7;'B/&& 7;'B/&& 7;'B/&&
/&'8QLW
/9'63:%
027+(53:% 6&1&173:%
/&'PRGXOH
&1 &1 &1 &1 &1 1& 1&
9 9 *1' *1' 9 1& 1& 1&
9 9 Q/&'B',63 Q/&'B',63 9 9
'*1' *1' &1B/&'6(/ &1B/&'6(/ 9 9
91 9 &1B/&'6(/ &1B/&'6(/ 9 9
91 9 *1' *1' &/.(',' &/.(','
'*1' *1' /&'B$B3 /&'B$B3 '$7$(',' '$7$(','
%%9+ 9+51 9+51 %39+ /&'B$B1 /&'B$B1 7;B287 7;B287
*1' *1' 7;B287 7;B287
/&'B&/.B3 /&'B&/.B3 '*1' '*1'
/&'B&/.B1 /&'B&/.B1 7;B287 7;B287
&1 &1 *1' *1' 7;B287 7;B287
6&$1'$7$B 6&$1'$7$B1 /&'B$B3 /&'B$B3 '*1' '*1'
6&$1'$7$B 6&$1'$7$B3 /&'B$B1 /&'B$B1 7;B287 7;B287
'*1' *1' *1' *1' 7;B287 7;B287
6&$1'$7$
6&$1'$7$B 6&$1'$7$ 1
6&$1'$7$B1 /&' $ 3
/&'B$B3 /&' $ 3
/&'B$B3 ' *1'
'*1' ' *1'
'*1'
6&$1'$7$B 6&$1'$7$B3 /&'B$B1 /&'B$B1 7&/. 7&/.
'*1' *1' *1' *1' 7&/. 7&/.
6&$1'$7$BY 6&$1'$7$B1 /&'B$B3 /&'B$B3 '*1' '*1'
6&$1'$7$B 6&$1'$7$B3 /&'B$B1 /&'B$B1 '*1' '*1'
'*1' *1' *1' *1' '*1' '*1'
6&$1&/.287B 6&$1&/.287B1 &1BQ&&)7 &1BQ&&)7 '*1' '*1'
6&$1&/.287B 6&$1&/.287B3 Q+/ ; Q+/ ; '*1' '*1'
'*1' *1' <+ < <+ < '*1' '*1'
6&$1'$7$B 6&$1'$7$B3 ;+ ; ;+ ; '*1' '*1'
6&$1'$7$B 6&$1'$7$B1 Q</ < Q</ < &&)7BRXW &&)7BRXW
'*1' *1' *1' *1' ',63BRXW ',63BRXW
9 1& 1& 9 9B/9'6 9B/9'6 9B/&' 9B/&'
L. Operation panel section (P12)
-DSDQRQO\
3$396 &1
92 86%&211(&725
Q,1)2B/('
3&83:%! 6059%6039%& 㸦1& )*1' 3:%
&1 3&8B5(4 %%3$6. )*1'
&1 6&B$&.
&1 *1' 65$7 65$7
&17R3'
&17R3( &=+596%837=6&=+596
:8B/('
32:B/('
Q,1)2B/('
Q:8B.(<
*1'
Q3:56: 86%&13:% 1
&1 86%$
9%86 9%86 9%86
' 䡾䡮䡹䢀 ' '
'
' '
' '
' 㼃㼕㼞㼑㼘㼑㼟㼟 㻸㻭㻺 㻰㼛㼚㼓㼘㼑
㼃㼕㼞㼑㼘㼑㼟㼟㻌㻸㻭㻺㻌㻰㼛㼚㼓㼘㼑
'*1' '*1' '*1'
6KLHOG 6KLHOG 6KLHOG
%%3$6.
2 ‘13/Nov
6&1&173:% &&'3:%
&1 &1
*1' *1'
*1' *1'
*1' *1'
*1' *1'
*1' *1'
*1' *1'
563)PRGHO &1 *1' *1'
*1' *1' *1'
*1' *1' *1'
9 *1' *1'
9 &1B$)(B6'2 &1B$)(B6'2
1& 9 $)(B6'72 $)(B6'72
1& 9 $)(B6&/. $)(B6&/.
1& 9 $)(B&6 $)(B&6
9 Q5(6B&&'$' Q5(6B&&'$'
92 *1' *1'
9B63) $9 $9
563)'5,9(53:% 9 $9 $9
1& 9 $9 $9
1& *1' $9 $9
*1' $9 $9
&1 3+'596 %%3+'66% $9 $9
*1' *1' *1'
*1' $9 $9
93' $9 $9
M. Scanner section (P13)
2
3+'596 3+'596 %%3+'66%
&1
92
9% 3:0 &1
63(' Q$B31& 1&
%%3+.6 3+5 Q$B&23< 1&
Q$B&$ 1&
Q$B5($'< 1&
65$7 65$7 Q$B$8' 1&
9 1& $8',725
*1' 1&
9 1& 237,21
'63)PRGHO &1B&2/ 1&
Q$B7& 1&
9 1&
'63)FQW3:% Q31&D
*1'
&1 &1 %%3+.6 3+5
*1' *1'
*1' *1'
93' 9
93' 9
2
93' 9
93' 9
9 9
9 9
92 9 2 &1
9B63) 9B63) 0,0B$ 0,0B$
9 9 0,0B% 0,0B%
&1 &1
&1BQ&76B6&1 &1BQ576B'63) &1 (+5
&1BQ576B6&1 &1BQ&76B'63) 0+36 0+36
&1B5;'B6&1 &1B7;'B'63) *1' *1' 0+36
&1B7;'B6&1 &1B5;'B'63) 93' 93'
*1' *1' %%3+.6 3+5 9+3/*/$
&1BQ'63)B,17 &1BQ'63)B,17
*1' *1'
&1BQ5(6B'63) &1B5(6B'63)
*1' &1BQ'63)83
1& 1& 1& 1&
63(' &1B63('
Q/9'6B67%<B6&1 Q/9'6B67%< /(''5,9(53:% /('3:%
1& 1& 1& 1& &1 &1
&1BQ32)B'63) &1BQ32)B'63) 93' 93' ,'59 ,'59
*1' *1' 93' 93' ,'59 ,'59
*1' *1' &/B21 /$03 ,'59 ,'59
'6'$7$B3 '6'$7$B3 *1' *1' ,'59 ,'59
'6'$7$B1 '6'$7$B1 *1' *1' ,'59 ,'59
*1' *1' &3%) $3% ,'59 ,'59
'6&/.287B3 '6&/.287B3 /('B32:(5 /('B32:(5
'6&/.287B1 '6&/.287B1 %%3+.6 3+5 3+5 %%3+.6
*1' *1'
'6'$7$B3 '6'$7$B3
'6'$7$B1 '6'$7$B1
*1' *1' 9
'6'$7$B3 '6'$7$B3 *1' 2&6:
'6'$7$B1 '6'$7$B1 &1 2&6:
*1' *1' 9 (+5 9+3/*1/
'6'$7$B3 '6'$7$B3 *1'
'6'$7$B1 '6'$7$B1 2&6:
%%3+'66% 3+'596 3+'596 %%3+'66% 9 9
6,=(B/(' 6,=(B/(' 256/('3:%
6,=(B/(' 6,=(B/('
%%3+607% *1'
65$7 65$7 9+3/*1/
3+5
65$7
&=+596%837=6&=+596 &=+596
6KLHOG 6KLHOG
'*1' '*1'
027+(53:% ' '
' '
,&&DUG5HDGHU
0)33:% $&5(3:% 9%86 9%86
&1 &1 &1 1& 1&
1& *1' *1' 1& ,&&DUG5HDGHU 6KLHOG
1& 1& 1& 1& '*1'
1& 1& 1& 1& ' .(<%2$5'3:%
1& 1& 1& 1& ' 65$7 3$/593$396 3$3963$/59
1& 1& 1& 1& 9%86 )*1' )*1' )*1'
1& 1& 1& 1& .H\ERDUG 6KLHOG 6KLHOG 6KLHOG 6KLHOG 6KLHOG
1& 1& 1& 1& '*1' '*1' '*1' '*1' '*1'
1& 1& 1& 1& ' ' ' ' '
1& 1& 1& 1& ' ' ' ' '
1& 1& 1& 1& 9%86 9%86 9%86 9%86 9%86
1& 1& 1& 1& )URQW86% 6KLHOG
5(86B3&,(B7;1 5(86B3&,(B5;23 5(86B3&,(B5;23 5(86B3&,(B7;1 '*1' 1RUWK$PHULFD67$1'$5'
5(86B3&,(B7;3 5(86B3&,(B5;23 5(86B3&,(B5;23 5(86B3&,(B7;3 ' ([FHSW1RUWK$PHULFD237,21
1& 1& 1& 1& '
5%B7;'B'(%8* 1& 1& 5%B7;'B'(%8* 9%86
㼁㻿㻮㻌㻯㻻㻺㻺㻱㻯㼀㻻㻾㻌㻼㼃㻮
5%B5;'B'(%8* 1& 1& 5%B5;'B'(%8* %0%*+67%7 86%$
1& 1& 1& 1& *+596 6KLHOG 6KLHOG 6KLHOG
$&5( 5() &/.3
$&5(B5()B&/.3 1& 1& $&5(B5()B&/.3
$&5( 5() &/.3 '*1' '*1' '*1'
㼞㼐㻌㼠㼛㻌㻮㼛㼍㼞㼐
$&5(B5()B&/.1 1& 1& $&5(B5()B&/.1 ' ' '
䡾䡮䡹䢀 㼁㻿㻮
1& 1& 1& 1& ' ' '
5&B*3,B$&5(237B,16(57B1 5B3/'B*32B567B$&5( 5B3/'B*32B567B$&5( 5&B*3,B$&5(237B,16(57B1
㻮㼛㼍㼞㼐㻌㼠
9%86 9%86 9%86
1& 5B3/'B*32B567B$&5(3&,( 5B3/'B*32B567B$&5(3&,( 1& 3$396 %%3$6.
59B21 1& 1& 59B21
1& 1& 1& 1&
*1' 91 9B,1 *1' &1 3$396 6059160391&
*1' 91 9B,1 *1' 9 9
*1' 91 9B,1 *1' 3:0B)$1 3:0B)$1
*1' 91 9B,1 *1' 3*1' 3*1' &38)$1
*1' 91 9B,1 *1' /2&.B)$1 /2&.B)$1
*1' 91 9B,1 *1' 9 1&
6< %< %%3$6. 4536& 4533&
9 㻴㻰㻰㻌㻔㻿㼠㼍㼚㼐㼍㼞㼐㻕 +''$
3:0B)$1
3*1' 6$7$6,*1$/ 32:(5
N. FAX/USB/HDD/KEYBOARD (P14)
㻮㼛㼍㼞㼐㻌㼠㼛㻌㻮㼛㼍㼞㼐
6,B5(6 6,B5(6 96 9B$ 86%B)5B',6 &+B3 &+B3 86%B)5B',6 6$7$B5;3 5;3 6$7$B7;1 9+'
63. 63. )$;B576 &6 Q)$;&6B&76 3:0 &+B1 &+B1 3:0 *1' *1' *1' 9+'
0'0B$7;' $7;' 9 9 15(4B3,&B,17 &+B3 &+B3 15(4B3,&B,17 6$73%% 1& 95 6$7$B5;1 '*1'
0'0B$5;' $5;' 9B) 9B) )$;'B7;' &/.B1 &/.B1 )$;'B7;' &1 1& 95 6$7$B5;3 '*1'
0'0B$%,7&/. $%,7&/. 9B) 9B) )$;'B5;' &/.B3 &/.B3 )$;'B5;' $B6&/. 1& 95 *1' '*1'
㻮㼛㼍㼞㼐㻌㼠㼛㻌㻮㼛㼍㼞㼐
㻮㼛㼍㼞
'* %63&/. %63&/. )$;&6B&76 (&/.B/68B3 (&/.B/68B3 )$;&6B&76 &1 9 %0%3$667)7
5+6 %5;' %7;' 5(6B)$; +6<1&B/68B3 +6<1&B/68B3 5(6B)$; *1' *1'
0'6 %7;' %5;' 1&1&7B)$; +6<1&B/68B1 +6<1&B/68B1 1&1&7B)$; *1' *1' +''$
+'087( +'087( 1:8B)$;B/$1 96<1&B.B1 96<1&B.B1 1:8B)$;B/$1 9B) *1'
5+6 5+6 9(&2B0)3BRXW 96<1&B.B3 96<1&B.B3 9(&2B0)3BRXW 9B) 1& 9 &1 6$7$6,*1$/ 32:(5
7;367+( 7;567+( 173B,17 96<1&B&B3 96<1&B&B3 173B,17 Q&1&7B)$; 1& 9 *1' *1'
9B)$; 96<1&B&B1 96<1&B&B1 9B)$; )$;'B7;'B1 1& 9 7;3 6$7$B7;3
9B)$; 96<1&B0B1 96<1&B0B1 9B)$; )$;'B7;'B3 6$73.6%)* 7;1 6$7$B7;1
9B)$; 96<1&B0B3 96<1&B0B3 9B)$; 9B RII *1' *1'
1& 96<1&B<B3 96<1&B<B3 1& Q5(6B)$; 5;1 6$7$B5;1
9B)$; 96<1&B<B1 96<1&B<B1 9B)$; )$;&6B7;'B3 5;3 6$7$B5;3
&1 :2/$1B21 73B6&/ 73B6&/ :2/$1B21 )$;&6B7;'B1 *1' *1'
63 /&'6(/ 73B6'$ 73B6'$ /&'6(/ *1' 95 9
63($.(5 63 /&'6(/ 9/ 9/ /&'6(/ )$;'B5;'B1 &1 95 9
6%3$6. /) 61 '*1' 9/ 9/ '*1' )$;'B5;'B3 $B6&/. 95 9
'*1' 9/ 9/ '*1' Q)$;B:83 %B/' *1' '*1'
'*1' 9/ 9/ '*1' )$;&6B5;'B3 &B'2 *1' '*1'
'*1' 9/ 9/ '*1' )$;&6B5;'B1 <B', *1' '*1'
'*1' 9/ 9/ '*1' 9B RII *1' 9 9+'
㻮㼛㼍㼞㼐㻌㼠㼛㻌㻮㼛㼍㼞㼐
3+5
563)'5,9(53:%
&1 3+5 3+5 6380
6380$RXW 6380$RXW
93'B6380 93'B6380
6380$RXW 6380$RXW
6380%RXW 6380%RXW
93'B6380 93'B6380
6380%RXW 6380%RXW
1& 1& %%3+.6
%%3+.6
P. RSPF (P16)
&1 3+5 3$/59)3$396 63('
63(' 63(' 63('
*1' *1' *1'
9%B63(' 9%B63(' 963('
9 93'
633' '6:B93'
*1' %/$&.
9 3$/59)3$396 633'
633' 9 9
*1' 633' 633'
93' *1' *1'
*1' 1& 9
'6:B93' 633'
%%3+.6 *1' %/$&.
633'
9
633'
*1'
369
36 6&29
93'
'6:B93'
6367
65$7 65$7
&1 3+'596
9 1& 65$7 65$7
9
1&
1 & 1&
633'
*1' 1&
*1' %/$&.
*1' 633'
67038 9
67036 633'
93'B67036 *1'
%%3+'66%
*1'
67038
67036
93'67036 67036
&1 3+5 63/6
9B63/6 9B63/6
63/6 63/6
*1' *1'
*1'
63/6
9B63/6
$9&& 63/6
63:6 *1'
*1' 63/6
%%3+.6 9B63/6
60391&60591 63:6
$9&& %/ $9&&
63:6 %5 63:6
*1' *< *1'
4. Signal list
Connector level Connector PWB
Signal name Name [Type] Function/Operation Pin No. NOTE
"L" "H" No. name
1TC_ERR 1TC output trouble 1TC output trouble – Trouble CN4 13 PCU
signal
1TNFD Waste toner full Detects waste toner full. – – CN16 7 PCU
detection signal
1TUD_CL Primary transfer Detects the primary Transmission Shield CN20 22 PCU
separation detection CL transfer separation CL.
signal
1TUD_K Primary transfer Detects the primary Transmission Shield CN20 20 PCU
separation detection BK transfer separation BK.
signal
/1TURC Primary transfer Controls the primary Separation/ Stop CN13 16 PCU
separation clutch control transfer separation. Contact
signal
/1TURC_R Primary transfer Primary transfer Reverse Stop CN13 30 PCU
separation reverse separation reverse
clutch control signal control
2TUD Secondary transfer Detects the secondary – – CN20 30 PCU (Not used)
position detection signal transfer position.
/ADUGS ADU gate solenoid Controls the ADU gate Duplex Single CN7 25 PCU
control signal solenoid.
(ADUM1_A) ADU motor 1 control Controls ON/OFF of the – – CN19 18 PCU
signal ADU motor 1.
(ADUM1_B) ADU motor 1 control Controls ON/OFF of the – – CN19 22 PCU
signal ADU motor 1.
/ADUM1_CNT ADU motor 1 set current ADU motor 1 set current Current: Current: CN19 14 PCU
select control signal select control Large Small
(ADUM1_XA) ADU motor 1 control Controls ON/OFF of the – – CN19 16 PCU
signal ADU motor 1.
(ADUM1_XB) ADU motor 1 control Controls ON/OFF of the – – CN19 20 PCU
signal ADU motor 1.
(ADUM2_A) ADU motor 2 control Controls ON/OFF of the – – CN10 5 PCU
signal ADU motor 2.
(ADUM2_B) ADU motor 2 control Controls ON/OFF of the – – CN10 7 PCU
signal ADU motor 2.
/ADUM2_CNT ADU motor 2 set current ADU motor 2 set current Current: Current: CN10 1 PCU
select control signal select control Large Small
(ADUM2_XA) ADU motor 2 control Controls ON/OFF of the – – CN10 3 PCU
signal ADU motor 2.
(ADUM2_XB) ADU motor 2 control Controls ON/OFF of the – – CN10 9 PCU
signal ADU motor 2.
AK_CS_C# Driver CS C signal Driver chip select C – – CN9 5 PCU
signal
AK_CS_EEP_C# EEP CS C signal EEP chip select C signal – – CN9 6 PCU
AK_CS_EEP_K# EEP CS K signal EEP chip select K signal – – CN9 4 PCU
AK_CS_EEP_M# EEP CS M signal EEP chip select M signal – – CN9 8 PCU
AK_CS_EEP_Y# EEP CS Y signal EEP chip select Y signal – – CN9 10 PCU
AK_CS_K# Driver CS K signal Driver chip select K – – CN9 3 PCU
signal
AK_CS_M# Driver CS M signal Driver chip select M – – CN9 7 PCU
signal
AK_CS_Y# Driver CS Y signal Driver chip select Y – – CN9 9 PCU
signal
AK_RXD_K Serial I/F data (Receive) Serial I/F data (Receive) – – CN9 13 PCU
AK_SCK_K# Serial clock signal Basic clock – – CN9 14 PCU
AK_TXD_K# Serial I/F data (Send) Serial I/F data (Send) – – CN9 11 PCU
APPD1 ADU transport detection Detects paper pass in Pass – CN7 6 PCU
1 the ADU upper stream
section (Paper entry).
APPD2 ADU transport detection Detects paper pass in Pass – CN7 8 PCU
2 the ADU lower stream
section (Paper delivery).
APPD3 Accordion detection Accordion detection Paper – CN7 14 PCU (Not used)
presence
(BTM_A) Belt motor control signal Controls ON/OFF of the – – CN19 8 PCU 41cpm machine
belt motor. only
(BTM_B) Belt motor control signal Controls ON/OFF of the – – CN19 10 PCU 41cpm machine
belt motor. only
/BTM_CK Belt motor clock signal Controls the belt motor – – CN19 6 PCU 51cpm machine
speed. only
/BTM_CNT Belt motor set current Controls the belt motor Current: Current: CN19 4 PCU
select control signal set current select. Large Small
Example:
a
Sn-Zn-Bi z
5mm Sn-In-Ag-Bi i
Sn-Cu-Ni n
Sn-Ag-Sb s
Bi-Sn-Ag-P p
Bi-Sn-Ag
4RADEMARK ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
v -ICROSOFT¤ 7INDOWS¤ 7INDOWS¤ 7INDOWS¤ -E 7INDOWS .4¤
7INDOWS¤ 7INDOWS¤ 80 7INDOWS¤ 6ISTA 7INDOWS¤
7INDOWS¤ 3ERVER 7INDOWS¤ 3ERVER AND )NTERNET %XPLORER¤
ARE REGISTERED TRADEMARKS OR TRADEMARKS OF -ICROSOFT #ORPORATION IN THE 53!
AND OTHER COUNTRIES
v 0OST3CRIPT IS A REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF !DOBE 3YSTEMS )NCORPORATED
v -ACINTOSH -AC /3 !PPLE4ALK %THER4ALK ,ASER 7RITER AND 3AFARI ARE REGISTERED
TRADEMARKS OR TRADEMARKS OF !PPLE #OMPUTER )NC
v )"- 0#!4 AND 0OWER 0# ARE TRADEMARKS OF )NTERNATIONAL "USINESS -ACHINES
#ORPORATION
v !CROBAT¤ 2EADER #OPYRIGHT¤ !DOBE 3YSTEMS )NCORPORATED !LL RIGHTS
RESERVED !DOBE THE !DOBE LOGO !CROBAT AND THE !CROBAT LOGO ARE TRADEMARKS OF
!DOBE 3YSTEMS )NCORPORATED
v 0#, IS A REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF THE (EWLETT 0ACKARD #OMPANY
v 3HARPDESK IS A TRADEMARK OF 3HARP #ORPORATION
v !LL OTHER TRADEMARKS AND COPYRIGHTS ARE THE PROPERTY OF THEIR RESPECTIVE OWNERS
SHARP CORPORATION
Business Solutions CS Promotion
Center II
Yamatokoriyama, Nara 639-1186, Japan
First Edition 2013 May
Latest Edition 2014 June